owner’s manual ateca seat ateca seat · 2018-07-13 · introduction thank you for your trust...

Owner’s manualSEAT Ateca

575012720BG

Ingl

és 5

7501

2720

BG (

07.18

)

SEA

T A

teca

Ing

lés

(07.

18)

SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to understand, that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason no right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook.All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error or omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print.Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form.SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the “Copyright” Act.All rights on changes are reserved.

❀ This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose.

© SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.07.18

Vehicle identification data

Model:

Vehicle Registration:

Vehicle identification number:

Date of vehicle registration or vehicle delivery:

SEAT Official Service:

Service advisor:

Telephone:

Confirmation of receipt of documentation and vehicle keys

The following items were delivered with the vehicle: YES NO

On-board documentation

First key

Second key

Correct working order of all keys was checked

Location: Date:

Signature of owner:

IntroductionThank you for your trust choosing a SEAT ve-hicle.

With your new SEAT, you will be able to enjoya vehicle with state-of-the-art technologyand top quality features.

We recommend reading this Instruction Man-ual carefully to learn more about your vehicleso you can enjoy all its benefits in your dailydriving.

Information about handling is complementedwith instructions regarding the operation andmaintenance of the vehicle in order to ensureits safety and maintain its value. Moreover, wewant to give you valuable advice and tips todrive your vehicle efficiently and respectingthe environment.

We wish you safe and enjoyable motoring.

SEAT, S.A.

WARNINGRead and always observe safety infor-mation concerning the passenger'sfront airbag ››› page 82, Important in-formation regarding the front passeng-er's airbag.

About this manualThis manual describes the features of the ve-hicle at the time of drafting this text. Some ofthe features described below will be intro-duced in the future or will only be available incertain markets.

Some of the features described here arenot included in all the types or variationsof the model and they can be varied ormodified based on technical or marketingrequirements without it being consideredmisleading advertising.

Some details on the drawings may vary fromits vehicle and must be interpreted as astandard representation.

The direction indicators (left, right, forwards,backwards) in this manual refer to the traveldirection of the vehicle unless otherwise sta-ted.

The audiovisual material is only meant tohelp the users better understand some fea-tures of the car. It is not a replacement for theinstruction manual. Access the instructionmanual to see the complete information andwarnings.

The features marked with an asteriskare included by default only in certainversions of the model, supplied as op-tional only for certain versions or only of-fered in certain countries.

Trademarks are marked with ®. The ab-sence of this symbol does not guaranteethat the term is not a trademark.It indicates that the section continues onthe next page.Important warnings on the page.

More in-depth content on the page.

General information on page indicated.

Emergency information on the page.

You can access the information in this manualusing:

● Thematic table of contents that follows themanual’s general chapter structure.● Visual table of contents that uses graphicsto indicate the pages containing “essential”information, which is detailed in the corre-sponding chapters.● Alphabetical index with many terms andsynonyms to help you find information.

WARNINGTexts after this symbol contain informa-tion about safety and warn you aboutpossible accident or injury risks.

®

CAUTIONTexts after this symbol indicate possibledamage to the vehicle.

For the sake of the environmentTexts after this symbol contain informa-tion about the protection of the environ-ment.

NoteTexts after this symbol contain addition-al information.

Printed Instruction ManualThe printed instruction manual contains rele-vant information about the use of the vehicleand the Infotainment System.

The digital version of the manuals containsmore in-depth information.

Digital Version of the Infotainment SystemManual

Fig. 1 SEAT website

The digital version is available on SEAT's offi-cial website.

To view the digital version of the manual:

● scan the QR code ››› Fig. 1● OR enter the following address in the navi-gator website:

http://www.seat.com/owners/your-seat/manuals-offline.html

choose your vehicle and then “Infotainment”.

Related videos

Fig. 2 SEAT website

The operation of some of the vehicle's fea-tures can be shown as an instruction video:

● scan the QR code ››› Fig. 2● OR enter the following address in the navi-gator website:

http://www.seat.com/owners/your-seat/manuals-offline.html

choose your vehicle and then “Multimedia”.

NoteVideo instructions are only available incertain languages.

Frequently Asked Ques-tions

Before driving

How do you adjust the seat? ››› page 20

How do you adjust the steering wheel?››› page 22

How do you adjust the exterior mirrors?››› page 22

How do you turn on the exterior lights?››› page 33

How does the automatic gearbox selector leverwork? ››› page 42

How do you refuel? ››› page 48

How do you activate the windscreen wipers andwindscreen washer system? ››› page 35

Emergency situations

A warning lamp lights up or flashes. What doesthis mean? ››› page 40

How do you open the bonnet? ››› page 19

How do you perform a jump start? ››› page 60

Where is the vehicle tool kit located?››› page 55

How do you repair a tyre with the anti-puncturekit? ››› page 54

How do you change a wheel? ››› page 55

How do you change a fuse? ››› page 52

How do you change a light? ››› page 53

How do you tow a vehicle? ››› page 59

Useful tips

How do you set the time? ››› page 118

When should the vehicle inspection should beperformed? ››› page 121

What functions do the buttons/thumbwheels onthe steering wheel perform? ››› page 125

How do you remove the luggage compartmentcover? ››› page 174

How do you drive in an economical and environ-mentally-friendly way? ››› page 264

How do you check and top up the engine oil?››› page 48

How do you check and top up the engine cool-ant? ››› page 49

How do you top up the windscreen washer fluid?››› page 50

How do you check and top up the brake fluid?››› page 50

How do you check and adjust tyre pressure val-ues? ››› page 359

Vehicle washing tips ››› page 371

Functions of interest

Easy Connect, Car menu ››› page 36

How does the START-STOP system work?››› page 270

What parking assistants are available?››› page 314

How does the rear assist work? ››› page 327

How does the adaptive cruise control work?››› page 284

How can the SEAT driving mode be adjusted?››› page 304

How does the lane departure warning systemwork? ››› page 293

How does tyre pressure monitoring work?››› page 362

How do you open the vehicle without a key(Keyless Access)? ››› page 133

Interior lighting and ambient light ››› page 157

Table of Contents

Table of ContentsThe essentials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8Exterior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8Exterior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9Driver-side general instrument panel(left-hand drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10Driver-side general instrument panel(right-hand drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11Passenger-side general instrument pan-el (left-hand drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12Passenger-side general instrument pan-el (right-hand drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13Centre console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14Interior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15How it works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16Unlocking and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16Before driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22Child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26Starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32Lights and visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33Easy Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36Warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41Gearbox lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43Fluid level control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53Action in the event of a puncture . . . . . . . . . . . 54Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Emergency towing of the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 59How to jump start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60Changing the wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64Safety first! . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64Advice about driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64Correct position of the vehicle occu-pants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65Pedal area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70Why wear a seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70How to properly adjust your seat belt . . . . . . 73Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75Airbag safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77Deactivating airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79Transporting children safely . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81Safety for children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81Child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86Self-help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86Vehicle tool kit, anti-puncture kit* . . . . . . . . . . . 86Tyre repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86Manual unlocking/locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88Changing the windscreen wiper blades . . . . 88Tow-starting and towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89Fuses and bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93Changing a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97Change the front bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98Change the rear bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100Side turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105Controls and displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105General instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104Instruments and warning/controllamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106Dashboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106Using the instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122Control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124Multifunction steering wheel* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125Opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129Anti-theft alarm system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139Rear lid (luggage compartment) . . . . . . . . . . . 141Controls for the windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144Sunroof* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146Lights and visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158Windscreen wiper and window wiper sys-tems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160Seats and head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162Adjusting the seats and headrests . . . . . . . . . . 162Seat functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163Transport and practical equipment . . . . . . 166Storage compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166Storing objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170Roof carrier* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178Heating, ventilation and cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . 178Auxiliary heater (additional heater)* . . . . . . . . 184

5

Table of Contents

Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188Safety instructions related to the Infotain-ment system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188Overview of the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190General instructions for use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197Data transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197Full Link* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197SEAT Media Control* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204WLAN access point* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205Operating modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219Navigation in Offroad mode* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229Vehicle Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232Multimedia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239USB/AUX-INPort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239Connectivity Box* / Wireless Charger* . . . . . 239

Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241Start and driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241Starting and stopping the engine . . . . . . . . . . . 241Braking and parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246Braking and stability systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253Automatic gearbox/DSG automatic gear-box* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254Gear-change recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . 261Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262Run-in and economical driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263Power management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

Engine management and emission controlsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266Driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268Driver assistance systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270Start-Stop system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270Hill Descent Control (HDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272Auto Hold Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273Cruise control system (CCS)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275Speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276Emergency braking assistance system(Front Assist)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280Adaptive cruise control (ACC)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284Lane Assist system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293Traffic Jam Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296Emergency Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297Blind spot detector (BSD) with parking as-sistance (RCTA)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299SEAT Drive Profile* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304Park Assist* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307Parking aid parking and manoeuvring(ParkPilot) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314Parking System Plus* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316Rear parking aid* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320Top View Camera* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322Rear Assist (Rear View Camera)* . . . . . . . . . . . 327Towing bracket device* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330Trailer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330

Practical tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341Care and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341Accessories and modifications to the vehi-cle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341Checking and refilling levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342Filling the tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344

AdBlue® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350Cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354Windscreen washer reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358Wheels and tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358Tyre monitoring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362Temporary spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365Winter service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366

Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368SEAT Maintenance Programme . . . . . . . . . . 368Service intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368Additional service offers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371Vehicle maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371Maintenance and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371Remove the vehicle from traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376

Information for the user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377Description and operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377Information about the EU Directive2014/53/EU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378Simplified EU compliance declaration . . . . . . 378Table of correspondences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378Addresses of the manufacturers . . . . . . . . . . . . 379Frequency bands, station power . . . . . . . . . . . 379

Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381Technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381Important . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381Vehicle identification data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381

6

Table of Contents

Information on fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . 381Trailer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382Engine data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391

7

The essentials

Exterior view

››› page 17››› page 48››› page 16››› page 48

1

2

3

4

››› page 59››› page 19››› page 54

5

6

7

8

The essentials

Exterior view


1

2

3

4


5

6

7

8

››› page 31››› page 55››› page 54

9

10

11

9

The essentials

Driver-side general instrument panel (left-hand drive)

1 ››› page 342 ››› page 413 ››› page 164 ››› page 33

5 ››› page 226 ››› page 197 ››› page 19

8 ››› page 409 ››› page 3510 ››› page 112

11 ››› page 3212 ››› page 2213 ››› page 52

10

The essentials

Driver-side general instrument panel (right-hand drive)

1 ››› page 352 ››› page 1123 ››› page 16

4 ››› page 335 ››› page 226 ››› page 19

7 ››› page 408 ››› page 349 ››› page 41

10 ››› page 2211 ››› page 32

11

The essentials

Passenger-side general instrument panel (left-hand drive)

››› page 22››› page 168

1

2

12

The essentials

Passenger-side general instrument panel (right-hand drive)


1

2

3

413

The essentials

Centre console

››› page 42››› page 243

1

2

››› page 36, ››› page 188››› page 34

3

4

››› page 435

The layout in right-hand drive vehicles is symmetrical.14

The essentials

Interior view


1

2

3

4


5

6

7

815

The essentials

How it works

Unlocking and locking

Related video

Fig. 3 Opening and clos-ing

Doors

Fig. 4 Remote control key: keys.

Fig. 5 Driver door: central locking switch.

Locking and unlocking the vehicle usingthe key● Locking: press the button ››› Fig. 4.● Locking the vehicle without activating theanti-theft system: Press the button for a sec-ond time ››› Fig. 4 within 2 seconds.● Unlocking: press the button ››› Fig. 4.● Unlock the trunk lid: hold down the ››› Fig. 4 button for at least 1 second.

Locking and unlocking with the centrallocking switch● Locking: press the button ››› Fig. 5. Noneof the doors can be opened from the outside.The doors can be opened from the inside bypulling the inside door handle.● Unlocking: press the button ››› Fig. 5.

››› in Description on page 129

››› page 129

››› page 16, ››› page 17

Unlocking or locking of driver door

Fig. 6 Driver door lever: hidden lock cylinder.

If the central locking system should fail to op-erate, the driver door can still be locked andunlocked by turning the key in the lock.

As a general rule, when the driver door islocked manually all other doors are locked.When it is unlocked manually, only the driverdoor opens. Please observe the instructionsrelating to the anti-theft alarm system››› page 129.

16

The essentials

● Unfold the vehicle key blade››› page 130.● Insert the key shaft into the lower opening inthe cover on the driver door handle ››› Fig. 6(arrow) then remove the cover upwards.● Insert the key blade into the lock cylinder tounlock or lock the vehicle.

Special characteristics● The anti-theft alarm will remain activewhen vehicles are unlocked. However, thealarm will not be triggered ››› page 129.● After the driver door is opened, you have 15seconds to switch on the ignition. Once thistime has elapsed, the alarm is triggered.● Switch the ignition on. The electronic immo-bilizer recognises a valid vehicle key and de-activates the anti-theft alarm system.

NoteThe anti-theft alarm is not activated whenthe vehicle is locked manually using thekey shaft ››› page 129.

Emergency locking of doors with-out door cylinder

Fig. 7 Locking the door manually.

If the central locking system should fail towork at any time, doors with no lock cylinderwill have to be locked separately.

A mechanical locking device (only visiblewhen the door is open) is provided on thefront passenger door.

● Pull the cap out of the opening.● Insert the key in the inside slot and turn it tothe right as far as it will go (if the door is onthe right side) or to the left (if the door is onthe left side).

Once the door has been closed it can no lon-ger be opened from the outside. Pull the inte-rior door handle once to unlock and open thedoor.

Rear lid

Fig. 8 Rear lid: handle

Fig. 9 Rear lid: button to close rear lid.

The rear lid opening system operates electri-cally*. It is activated by exerting slight pres-sure on the handle ››› Fig. 8.

To lock/unlock, press the button or button ››› Fig. 4 on the remote control key.

A warning appears on the instrument paneldisplay if the rear lid is open or not properly »

17

The essentials

closed.* An audible warning is also given if itis opened while the vehicle is moving fasterthan 6 km/h (4 mph)*.

Opening and closing● Open the rear lid: exert slight pressure onthe handle. The rear lid opens automatically.● Closing the rear lid: hold one of the handleson the inner trim and close it by sliding down,or press the button on the rear lid* ››› Fig. 9.

››› in Rear lid automatic locking onpage 143

››› page 141

››› page 18

Manual release mechanism for therear lid

Fig. 10 Luggage compartment: access tomanual release.

Fig. 11 Luggage compartment: manual re-lease.

The rear lid can be unlocked manually frominside in the event of an emergency.

● Remove the cover using the key blade as alever ››› Fig. 10.

● To unlock the rear lid, push the lever in thedirection of the arrow using the key blade››› Fig. 11.

Related video

Fig. 12 Bonnet

18

The essentials

Bonnet

Fig. 13 Release lever in the driver's footwellarea.

Fig. 14 Cam under the bonnet

Opening the bonnetThe bonnet is released from inside the vehi-cle.

Before opening the bonnet, make sure thatthe windscreen wiper arms are in placeagainst the windscreen.

● Open the door and pull the lever under thedashboard ››› Fig. 13 1 .● To lift the bonnet: press the release catchunder the bonnet upwards ››› Fig. 14 2 . Thearrester hook under the bonnet is released.● The bonnet can be opened. Release thebonnet stay and secure it in the fixture de-signed for this in the bonnet.

Closing the bonnet● Slightly lift the bonnet.● Release the bonnet stay and replace it in itssupport.● At a height of approximately 30 cm let it fallso it locks.

If the bonnet does not close, do not pressdownwards. Open it again and let it fall asmentioned above.

››› in Opening and closing thebonnet on page 348

››› page 348

Controls for the windows*

Fig. 15 Detail of the driver door: controls forthe windows.

● Opening the window: press the button .● Closing the window: pull the button .

Buttons on the driver doorWindow on the front left doorWindow on the front right doorWindow on the rear left doorWindow on the rear right doorSafety switch for deactivating the electricwindow buttons in the rear doors. »

1

2

3

4

5

19

The essentials

››› in Opening and closing theelectric windows on page 144

››› page 144

Panoramic roof*

Fig. 16 On the interior roof lining: sunroof but-ton.

● Open: press button C backwards.● Close: press button D forwards.● Raise: press the rear part of button B .● Lower: press the front part of button A .

››› in Introduction on page 146

››› page 146

Before driving

Related video

Fig. 17 Vehicle interior

Manually adjusting the front seats

Fig. 18 Front seats: manual seat adjustment.

Forwards/backwards: pull the lever andmove the seat.Raising/lowering: pull/push the lever.Tilting the backrest: turn the hand wheel.

1

2

3

Lumbar support: move the lever until therequired position is achieved.

››› in Manual adjustment of theseats on page 162

Electric adjustment of the driver'sseat*

Fig. 19 Driver's seat: electric seat adjustment.

Adjust the lumbar support: press the but-ton according to the desired position.Seat up/down: Press the button up/down.To adjust the front of the seat cushion,press the front of the button up/down. Toadjust the rear of the seat cushion, pressthe rear of the button up/down.Seat forwards/backwards: press the but-ton forwards/backwards.Backrest further upright/further reclined:press the button forwards/backwards.

4

A

B

C

20

The essentials

››› in Electric driver's seat adjust-ment* on page 162

Adjusting the head restraints

Fig. 20 Front seat: adjusting the head re-straint.

● Grab the sides of the head restraints withboth hands and push upwards to the desiredposition. To lower it, repeat the same action,pressing the 1 button on the side.

››› in Correct adjustment of fronthead restraints on page 68

››› page 68, ››› page 162

Adjustment of the seat belt

Fig. 21 Positioning and removing the seat beltbuckle.

Fig. 22 Correct seat belt and head restraintpositions, viewed from front and the side.

To adjust the seat belt around your shoulders,adjust the height of the seats.

The shoulder part of the seat belt should bewell centred over it, never over the neck. Theseat belt lies flat and fits comfortably on theupper part of the body.

The lap part of the seat belt lies across thepelvis, never across the stomach. The seatbelt lies flat and fits comfortably on the pel-vis.

››› page 71

››› page 73

21

The essentials

Seat belt tensioners

During a collision, the seat belts on the frontseats and side rear seats1) tighten automati-cally.

The tensioner can be triggered only once.

››› in Maintenance and disposal ofbelt tensioners on page 75

››› page 74

Adjusting the exterior mirrors

Fig. 23 Detail of the driver door: control for theexterior mirror.

Adjusting the exterior mirrors: Turn the knob tothe corresponding position:

Turning the knob to the desired position,adjust the mirrors on the driver side (L,left) and the passenger side (R, right) tothe direction desired.Depending on the equipment fitted onthe vehicle, the mirrors may be heatedaccording to the outside temperature.Folding in mirrors.

››› in Adjusting the exterior rear-view mirrors on page 161

››› page 161

Adjusting the steering wheel

Fig. 24 Lever in the lower left side of the steer-ing column.

L/R

● Adjusting the position of the steering wheel:pull the ››› Fig. 24 1 lever down, move thesteering wheel to the desired position and liftthe lever back up until it locks.

››› in Adjusting the steering wheelposition on page 66

Airbags

Related video


1) Depending on version/market.22

The essentials

Front airbags

Fig. 26 Driver airbag located in steeringwheel.

Fig. 27 Front passenger airbag located indash panel.

The front airbag for the driver is located in thesteering wheel ››› Fig. 26 and the airbag forthe front passenger is located in the dashpanel ››› Fig. 27. Airbags are identified by theword “AIRBAG”.

When the driver and front passenger airbagsare deployed, the covers remain attached tothe steering wheel and dashboard, respec-tively ››› Fig. 26 ››› Fig. 27.

In conjunction with the seat belts, the frontairbag system gives the front occupants ad-ditional protection for the head and chest in

the event of a severe frontal collision ››› inFront airbags on page 77.

Their special design allows the controlled es-cape of the propellant gas when an occu-pant puts pressure on the bag. Thus, thehead and chest are protected by the airbag.After the collision, the airbag deflates suffi-ciently to allow visibility.

››› page 77

23

The essentials

Deactivating the front passengerfront airbag

Fig. 28 Front passenger front airbag switch.

Fig. 29 Dashboard: control lamp for deactiva-ted front passenger airbag in centre console.

To deactivate the front passenger frontairbag:● Switch the ignition off.● Open the door on the front passenger side.

● Insert the key into the slot of the switch fordeactivating the front passenger airbag››› Fig. 28. About 3/4 of the key should enter;this is as far as it will go.● Turn the key gently to change its position to. If you have difficulty, ensure that you haveinserted the key as far as it will go.● Close the front passenger door.● Check, with the ignition switched on, thatthe control lamp remains lit where itsays in the centre of thedash panel ››› Fig. 29.

››› in Activation and deactivationof front passenger airbag* onpage 80

››› page 79

Knee airbag*

Fig. 30 On the driver side: location of airbagfor knees.

Fig. 31 On the driver side: action radius of air-bag for knees.

The knee airbag is located on the driver sidebelow the dash panel ››› Fig. 30. Airbags areidentified by the word “AIRBAG”.

The area framed in red (deployment area)››› Fig. 31 is covered by the knee airbag when

24

The essentials

it is deployed. Objects should never beplaced or mounted in this area.

››› page 78

Side airbags*

Fig. 32 Side airbag in driver's seat.

Fig. 33 Illustration of completely inflated sideairbags on the left side of the vehicle.

The side airbags are located in the driver'sseat and front passenger seat backrests››› Fig. 32. The locations are identified by thetext “AIRBAG” in the upper region of thebackrests.

In conjunction with the seat belts, the side air-bag system provides additional protection forthe upper body in the event of a severe sidecollision ››› in Side airbags* on page 78.

In a side collision, the side airbags reduce therisk of injury to passengers to the areas of thebody facing the impact. In addition to theirnormal protection, the seat belts also holdthe passengers in the event of a side collision;this is how these airbags provide maximumprotection.

››› page 78

Head-protection airbags*

Fig. 34 Location of head-protection airbags.

The head-protection airbags are located onboth sides in the interior above the doors››› Fig. 34 and are identified with the text“AIRBAG”.

In conjunction with the seat belts, the head-protection airbag system gives the vehicleoccupants additional protection for the headand upper body in the event of a severe sidecollision ››› in Curtain airbags* onpage 79.

››› in Curtain airbags* onpage 79

25

The essentials

Child seats

Related video


Important information regardingthe front passenger's airbag

Fig. 36 Airbag adhesives - version 1: on thepassenger-side sun blind and on the rearframe of the front passenger's door .

Fig. 37 Airbag adhesives - version 2: on thepassenger-side sun blind and on the rearframe of the front passenger's door .

A sticker with important information about thepassenger airbag is located on the passeng-er's sun visor and/or on the passenger sidedoor frame.

››› in Important information re-garding the front passenger's airbagon page 82

››› page 81

26

The essentials

Securing child seats

Fig. 38 On rear seats: possible assemblies of chil-dren seats.

Figure ››› Fig. 38 A shows the basic child re-straint system mounting using lower retainingrings and the upper retaining strap. Figure››› Fig. 38 B shows the child restraint systemmounting using the vehicle seat belt.

The seat belt may be used to secure univer-sal type child seats to the vehicle seatsmarked with a U in the table below.

● In the passenger seat without height regu-lation: the passenger seat must be in its rear-most position1).

● In the passenger seat with height regula-tion: the passenger seat must be in its rear-most and highest position1).

To correctly use a child seat in the back, thefront backrest must be adjusted so that thereis no contact with the child seat in the back inthe case that it goes opposite to the directionof the car. In the case of front facing restraintsystems, the front backrest must be adjustedso that there is no contact with the child'sfeet.

To adjust the passenger seat to accommo-date a child's seat and get the seat belt in a

perfect position, adjust the passenger back-rest as far forward as possible1).

If a semi-universal type chair is to be instal-led, in which the method of attachment to thecar is through the seat belt and supportbracket, it should never be installed in thecentral rear seat as the ground clearance islower than in other places and the supportbracket will not allow the seat to remain suffi-ciently stable.

The systems include the child restraintsystem mounting with an upper retaining »

1) Compliance with current national legislationand the manufacturer's instructions is requiredwhen using or installing child seats.

27

The essentials

strap (Top Tether) and lower anchoringpoints on the seat.

Weight group

Seating position

Front passenger seata) Rear side seat Rear central seatb)

airbag on airbag off

Group 0 to 10 kg X Uc) U U

Group 0+ to 13 kg X Uc) U U

Group I 9 to 18 kg X Uc) U U

Group II 15 to 25 kg X UFc) UF UF

Group III 22 to 36 kg X UFc) UF UF

X: It is not compatible to install chairs in this configuration.U: Suitable for universal restraint systems for use in this weight group.UF: Acceptable for front-facing universal-category child restraint systems approved for this mass group.

a) Compliance with current national legislation and the manufacturer's instructions is required when using or installing child seats.b) For semi-universal chairs where the securing system is the car safety belt and the support bracket, do not use them in the centre rear seat.c) Seats without height adjustment should be placed in their rearmost position. Seats with height adjustment should be placed in their rearmost and highest position.

››› in Safety instructions onpage 83

Securing child seats with “ISOFIX” and Top Tether*

Child seats can be secured quickly, easilyand safely on the rear outer seats with the“ISOFIX” and Top Tether* system.

Two “ISOFIX” retaining rings are fitted on bothoutermost rear seats. In some vehicles, therings are secured to the seat frame and, inothers, they are secured to the rear floor. The

“ISOFIX” rings are located between the rearseat backrest and the seat cushioning››› Fig. 39. The Top Tether* rings are locatedon the rear part of the backrests of the rear

28

The essentials

seats (behind the seat backrest or in theboot) ››› Fig. 40.

To understand the compatibility of the "ISO-FIX" systems in the vehicle, consult the tablebelow.

The body weight permitted and informationregarding sizes A to F is indicated on the labelon child seats with “universal” or “semi-uni-versal” certification.

Weight group Size class Electricalequipment

Vehicle Isofix positions

Front passenger seatRear side seat Rear central seat


Baby carrierF ISO/L1 X X X X

G ISO/L2 X X X X

Group 0 to 10 kg E ISO/R1 X X IL X

Group 0+ to 13 kg

E ISO/R1 X X IL X

D ISO/R2 X X IL X

C ISO/R3 X X IL X

Group I 9 to 18 kg

D ISO/R2 X X IL X

C ISO/R3 X X IL X

B ISO/F2 X X IUF/IL X

B1 ISO/F2X X X IUF/IL X

A ISO/F3 X X IUF/IL X

Group II 15 to 25 kg --- --- --- ---

Group III 22 to 36 kg --- --- --- --- »

29

The essentials

Weight group Size class Electricalequipment

Vehicle Isofix positions



IUF: Suitable for forward-facing ISOFIX universal child restraint systems approved for use in this mass group.IL: Suitable for certain ISOFIX child restraint systems (CRSs) listed in the attached list. This relates to ISOFIX CRSs that can be for the specific vehicle, restricted or semi-universal categories.: ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems for this weight group or size class.


Securing child seats with the “ISOFIX/i-Size” ISOFIX System

Fig. 39 ISOFIX/iSize securing rings.

You are obliged to follow the seat manufac-turer's instructions.

● Press the child seat onto the “ISOFIX” re-taining rings ››› Fig. 39 until the child seat isheard to engage securely. If the child seat isequipped with Top Tether* anchor points, se-cure it to the correspondent ring ››› Fig. 40.Observe the manufacturer's instructions.● Pull on both sides of the child seat to ensurethat it is properly anchored.

Child seats with the “ISOFIX” and Top Tether*attachment system are available from Tech-nical Services.

30

The essentials

Vehicle i-Size positions



Child restraint system approved under ECE R129 X X i-U X

i-U Valid position for front-facing and rear-facing child restraint systems approved under ECE R129.X: Invalid position for child restraint systems approved under ECE R129.

Securing child seats with the TopTether* retaining straps

Fig. 40 Position of the Top Tether rings on theback of the rear seat.

Child seats with the Top Tether system comewith a strap for securing the seat to the vehi-cle anchor point, located at the back of therear seat backrest and provide greater re-straint.

The objective of this strap is to reduce for-ward movements of the child seat in a crash,to reduce the risk of injuries to the head fromhitting the inside of the vehicle.

Using the Top Tether in rear-facing moun-ted seatsCurrently, there are very few rear-facing childsafety seats that have Top Tether. Pleasecarefully read and follow the seat manufac-turer instructions to learn the proper way toinstall the Top Tether strap.

31

The essentials

Securing the Top Tether* to the an-chorage point

Fig. 41 Retainer strap: adjustment and assem-bly according to the Top Tether belt.

Securing the retainer strap● Follow the manufacturer's instructions todeploy the child seat Top Tether retainerstrap.● Place the belt under the head restraint ofthe back seat ››› Fig. 41 (depending on the in-

structions of the chair itself, lift or remove thehead restraint if necessary).● Slide the strap and secure it properly withthe anchorage of the backrest ››› Fig. 40.● Firmly tighten the strap following the manu-facturer's instructions.

Releasing the retaining strap● Loosen the strap following the manufactur-er's instructions.● Push the lock and release it from the an-choring support.


Starting the vehicle

Ignition lock

Fig. 42 Ignition key positions.

Turn on the ignition: place the key in the igni-tion and start the engine.

Locking and unlocking the steering wheel● Lock the steering wheel: remove the keyfrom the ignition and turn the wheel until itlocks. Depending on the country, in vehicleswith automatic transmission, in order to re-move the key, move the gear shift to the P po-sition. If necessary, press the gear shift block-ing key and release it.● Unlock the steering wheel: put the key intothe ignition and turn it at the same time as thesteering wheel in the direction indicated bythe arrow. If it is not possible to turn the steer-ing wheel, it may be because it is locked.

32

The essentials

Turning on/switching off the ignition, glowplugs reheating● Turn on the ignition: turn the key to the 2position.● Turn off the ignition: turn the key to the 1position.● Diesel vehicles : the glow plugs reheatwhen the ignition is switched on.

Starting the engine● Manual transmission: press the clutch ped-al all the way down and move the gearboxlever into neutral.● Automatic transmission: press the brakepedal and move the selector lever to the Pposition or into N.● Turn the key to the 3 position. The key au-tomatically returns to the 2 position. Do notpress the accelerator.

Start-Stop system*When you stop and release the clutch pedal,the Start-Stop system* turns off the engine.The ignition remains switched on.

››› in Switching the ignition on andstarting the engine with the key onpage 242

››› page 241

Lights and visibility

Related video

Fig. 43 Lights and visibil-ity

Light switch

Fig. 44 Instrument console: light panel.

● Turn the switch to the required position››› Fig. 44.

Sym-bol

Ignition switch-ed off

Ignition isswitched on

Fog lights, dippedbeam and sidelights off.

Daylight runninglights switched on.

The “Cominghome”, “Leavinghome” and Wel-come lights may beswitched on.

Automatic controlof dipped beamand daytime run-ning light.

Side light on. Daylight runninglights switched on.

Dipped beam head-light off

Dipped beamswitched on.

Fog lights: move the switch to the first po-sition, from positions , or .

Rear fog light: move the switch complete-ly from positions , or .

● Turn on fog lights: push the switch or turn itto the position.

››› in Side light and dipped beamheadlight on page 150

››› page 149

33

The essentials

Turn signal and main beam lever

Fig. 45 Turn signal and main beam lever.

More the lever to the required position:

Right turn light: right-hand parking light(ignition switched off).Left turn light: left-hand parking light (ig-nition switched off).Main beam on: control lamp lit up onthe instrument panel.Light flash: on with the lever pushed. Con-trol lamp lit up.

Lever all the way down to switch it off.

››› in Turn signal and main beamlever on page 151

››› page 150

1

2

3

4

Hazard warning lights

Fig. 46 Dashboard: switch for hazard warninglights.

Switched on, for example:

● When approaching a traffic jam● In an emergency● The vehicle has broken down● When towing or being towed

››› in Hazard warning lights onpage 155

››› page 154

Interior lights

Fig. 47 Detail of headliner: front interior light-ing.

Knob Function

Switches interior lights off.

Switches interior lights on.

Central po-sition

or

a)

Door contact switch-on.The interior lights come on automati-cally when the vehicle is unlocked, adoor is opened or the key is removedfrom the ignition.The light goes off a few seconds af-ter all the doors are closed, the vehi-cle is locked or the ignition is switch-ed on.

Turning the reading light on and off

a) Depending on version.

34

The essentials

Ambient light*: light guide on door panel.Lighting can be selected from 8 possible col-ours via the menu and the SETTINGSfunction button.

››› page 157

Windscreen wipers and windowwiper blade

Fig. 48 Operating the windscreen wiper andrear wiper.


0 Windscreen wipers off.


1

Windscreen wipers interval wipe.Using the control ››› Fig. 48 A adjustthe interval (vehicles without rain sen-sor), or the sensitivity of the rain sensor.

2 Slow wipe.

3 Continuous wipe.

4 Short wipe. Brief press, short clean.Hold the lever down for more time to in-crease the wipe frequency.

5

Automatic wipe. The windscreen wash-er function is activated by pushing thelever forwards, and simultaneously thewindscreen wipers start.

6 Interval wipe for rear window. The wip-er will wipe the window approximatelyevery six seconds.

7 The rear window wash function is acti-vated by pressing the lever, and therear wiper starts simultaneously.

››› page 158

››› page 62

35

The essentials

Easy Connect

Vehicle menu settings

Fig. 49 Easy Connect: Main menu. Fig. 50 Easy Connect: Vehicle Menu.

The actual number of menus available andthe name of the various options will dependon the vehicle’s electronics and equipment.

● Switch the ignition on.● If the Infotainment System is off, switch it on.● Press the Infotainment button andthen the Vehicle function button ››› Fig. 49.

● OR: Press the infotainment button toopen the Vehicle menu ››› Fig. 50.● Press the SETTINGS function button to openthe Vehicle settings menu.● To select a function in the menu, press thedesired button.

When the function button check box is activa-ted , the function is active.

Pressing the menu button will always takeyou to the last menu used.

Any changes made using the settings menusare automatically saved on closing thosemenus.

Menu Submenu Possible setting Description

ESC system –Activation and deactivation of the traction control system (ASR) and the elec-tronic stability control (ESC) system, selecting the Sport / Off-road* mode of theelectronic stability control (ESC Sport)

››› page 250

36

The essentials


TyresTyre pressure monitoring Tyre pressure storing (Calibration) ››› page 362

Winter tyres Activation and deactivation of the speed warning, adjusting the speed warningvalue ››› page 366

Lights

Light assistDynamic Light Assist, Light Assist, motorway function, turning-on time, headlamprange adjustment, automatic lights when raining, one-touch signalling, travelmode.

››› page 149

Vehicle interior lighting Brightness of instrument panel and controls ››› page 157

Coming Home/Leaving Homefunction Switch-on time of the “Coming home” and “Leaving home” functions ››› page 153

››› page 154

Driver assis-tance

ACC (adaptive cruise control) Activation and deactivation: default distance level, driving profiles. ››› page 284

Front Assist (emergency brak-ing assistance system)

Activation and deactivation: Front Assist, advance warning, distance warning dis-play ››› page 280

Lane Assist (system warningyou if you leave the lane) Activation and deactivation of lane departure warning, adaptive lane guidance ››› page 293

Detection of traffic signs Display on the instrument panel, activation and deactivation of the speed warn-ing ››› page 115

Trailer Trailer recognition (display of traffic signs for vehicles with trailer), use to calcu-late the route, maximum speed for trailer ››› page 330

Fatigue detection Activation and deactivation ››› page 114 »

37

The essentials


Parking and ma-noeuvring

ParkPilot Automatic activation, front volume, front sound treble, rear volume, rear soundtreble, adjust Infotainment volume

››› page 316,››› page 320

Auto Hold Switching on and off when starting off ››› page 273

Electric parking brake Switching on and off automatically ››› page 248

Braking while manoeuvringfunction Switching on and off ››› page 320

Displaying the parking space Switching on and off

Ambient lighting – Switching on and off, selecting brightness, colour, area or total ››› page 157

Mirrors andwindscreen wip-ers

Mirrors Synchronised regulation, fold in after parking, rear-view mirror heating, dim in thedark

››› page 22,››› page 161

Windscreen wipers Activate and deactivate automatic windscreen wipers in case of rain, wipe whenreversing ››› page 35

Opening andclosing

Electric windows control Convenience opening, automatic closure in case of rain, automatic closure withcentral locking ››› page 145

Central lockingUnlocking doors, automatic lock/unlock when driving, “Easy Open” audible con-firmation, “Easy Entry” convenient entry function, automatic opening of the rearlid, interior monitoring

››› page 129

Instrument panel –Current consumption, average consumption, convenience consumers, ECO Ad-vice, travelling time, distance travelled, average speed, digital speed display,speed warning, oil temperature, coolant temperature, reset data “when settingoff”, reset data for “total calculation”, traffic signal detection

››› page 112

Date and time – Time source, time, select time zone, time format, date, date format –

Units – Distance, speed, temperature, volume, fuel consumption, GNC consumption,electric consumption, pressure –

Service – Chassis number, date of next SEAT service inspection, date of next oil changeservice ››› page 121

38

The essentials


Factory settingsAll Restore all settings –

Individual Lights, driver assistance, parking and manoeuvring, background lighting, rearview mirrors and windscreen wipers, opening and closing, instrument panel –

WARNINGAny distraction may lead to an accident,with the risk of injury. Operating the EasyConnect system while driving could dis-tract you from traffic.

39

The essentials

Warning lamps

Control and warning lamps

Fig. 51 Related video

Red warning lamps

Notification central lamp: additional infor-mation on the instrument panel display

Parking brake on ››› page 247.

Fault in the brake system ››› page 247.

Fault in the steering system ››› page 262.

Driver or passenger has not fastened seatbelt ››› page 70.

Press the foot brake ››› page 285.

Yellow warning lamps

Notification central lamp: additional infor-mation on the instrument panel display

Front brake pads worn ››› page 247.

Fault in ESC or disconnection caused bythe system; OR ESC or ASR in operation››› page 250.

ASR manually deactivated; OR ESC inSport mode ››› page 250.

Fault in the ABS ››› page 250.

Rear fog light switched on ››› page 149.

Fault in the emission control system››› page 267.

Pre-heating of the diesel engine; OR faultin the management of the diesel engine››› page 267.

Fault in the petrol engine management››› page 267.

Particulate filter blocked ››› page 267.

Fault in the steering system ››› page 262.

Tyre monitor system ››› page 363.

Fuel tank almost empty ››› page 119.

Fault in airbag system and seat belt ten-sioners ››› page 80.

Front passenger front airbag is disa-bled ››› page 80.

The front passenger front airbag is activa-ted ››› page 80.

Lane assist warning (Lane Assist)››› page 293.

Fault in the lighting of the vehicle››› page 149.

Low engine oil level ››› page 351.

Fault in the gearbox ››› page 261.

Windscreen cleaning fluid too low››› page 158.

Other warning lamps

Turn lights or emergency lights on››› page 149.

Trailer turn signals ››› page 149.

Auto Hold activated ››› page 273.

Press the foot brake ››› page 254.

Speed regulator ››› page 275; OR speedlimiter ››› page 276; OR Adaptive CruiseControl (ACC) ››› page 285.

Lane assist warning (Lane Assist)››› page 293.

Main beam on or flasher on ››› page 149.

Door(s), rear lid or bonnet open or notproperly closed ››› page 110.

Engine cooling fluid ››› page 120.

Engine oil pressure ››› page 351.

Fault in the battery ››› page 356.

Main beam assist (Light Assist)››› page 149.

Hill descent control (HDC) ››› page 272.40

The essentials

Electronic immobiliser active ››› page 137.

Service interval display ››› page 121.

Mobile telephone is connected via Blue-tooth® ››› page 232.

Mobile telephone battery charge status››› page 232.

Risk of freezing ››› page 110.

Start-Stop system activated ››› page 270.

Start-Stop system unavailable››› page 270.

Low consumption driving status››› page 111.

››› in Control and warning lampson page 124

››› page 124

Cruise control

Related video

Fig. 52 Dash panel

Operating the cruise control sys-tem (CCS)*

Fig. 53 Left of the steering column: CCSswitch and controls.

Fig. 54 On the left of the steering column: thirdlever to operate the CCS.

Operation of the turn signal lever● Switching on the CCS: Move switch››› Fig. 53 1 to . The system is on. If nospeed has been programmed, the system willnot control it.● Activate the CCS: Press button ››› Fig. 53

2 in the area. The current speed ismemorised and controlled.● Temporarily switching off the CCS: Moveswitch ››› Fig. 53 1 to or push thebrake. The cruise control system is switchedoff temporarily.● Reactivating the CCS: Press button››› Fig. 53 2 in . The memorised speed issaved and controlled again.● Increasing stored speed during CCS regu-lation: press button 2 in . The vehicleaccelerates until the new stored speed. »

41

The essentials

● Reducing stored speed during CCS regula-tion: press button 2 in to lower thespeed by 1 km/h (1 mph). Speed is reduceduntil reaching the new stored speed.● Switching off the CCS: Move switch››› Fig. 53 1 to . The system is disconnec-ted and the memorised speed is deleted.

Operation using the third lever● Switching on the CCS: move the third leverto ››› Fig. 54. The system switches on but itdoes not control the speed as no speed hasbeen programmed.● Activating the CCS: press the button ››› Fig. 54. It memorises and maintains thecurrent speed.● Temporarily switching off the CCS: movethe lever to ››› Fig. 54 and release it orpress the brake pedal. The cruise control sys-tem is switched off temporarily.● Reactivating the CCS: move the lever to ››› Fig. 54 and release it. The memo-rised speed is saved and controlled again.● Disconnect the CCS: turn the key to posi-tion ››› Fig. 54. The system is disconnectedand the memorised speed is deleted.

››› in Cruise control operation onpage 276

››› page 275

Gearbox lever

Manual gearbox

Fig. 55 Gear shift pattern of a 5 or 6-speedmanual gearbox.

The position of the gears is indicated on thegearbox lever ››› Fig. 55.

● Press the clutch pedal and keep your footright down.● Move the gearbox lever to the required po-sition.● Release the clutch.

Selecting reverse gear● Press the clutch pedal and keep your footright down.● With the gearbox lever in neutral, push itdownwards, move it to the left as far as it will

go and then forwards to select reverse››› Fig. 55 R .● Release the clutch.

››› in Changing gear on page 253

››› page 253

Automatic transmission*

Fig. 56 Automatic transmission: selector leverpositions.

Parking lockReverse gearNeutral (idling)Drive (forward)Tiptronic mode: pull the lever forwards(+) to go up a gear or backwards (–) togo down a gear.

PRND/S+/–

42

The essentials

››› in Selector lever positions onpage 255

››› page 254

››› page 43

Manual release of the selector lev-er

Fig. 57 Selector lever: manual release fromposition P.

Should the power supply be interrupted,there is a manual unlocking device located

under the console of the selector lever, on theright. Releasing the selector lever requires acertain degree of practical skill.

● Unlock: use the flat part of a screwdriverblade.

Removing the cover from the selector lev-er● Apply the handbrake ››› to ensure thatthe car does not move.● Carefully pull the corners of the selectorlever boot and twist it upwards above the lev-er handle.

Releasing the selector lever● Using a screwdriver, press and hold the yel-low unlocking tab sideways ››› Fig. 57.● Press the interlock button on the selectorlever and move the selector lever to posi-tion N.● After carrying out the manual release, at-tach the selector lever boot on the gearboxconsole again.

If the power supply should ever fail (e.g. dis-charged battery) and the vehicle has to be

pushed or towed, the selector lever must firstbe moved to position N, after operating themanual release mechanism.

WARNINGThe selector lever may be moved out of po-sition P only when the handbrake is firmlyapplied. If this does not work, secure thevehicle with the brake pedal. On a slopethe vehicle could otherwise start to moveinadvertently after shifting the selector lev-er out of position P - accident risk!

Air conditioning

Related video

Fig. 58 Air conditioning

43

The essentials

How does Climatronic* work?

Fig. 59 In the centre console: Climatronic controlpanel.

To switch a specific function on, press the ap-propriate button. Press the button again toswitch off the function.

The LED on each control lights up to indicatethat the respective function of a control hasbeen switched on.

Temperature 1 The left and right sides can be adjusted separately: turn the control to adjust the temperature

Fan 2 The power of the fan is automatically adjusted. The fan is also adjusted manually by turning the control.

Air distribution 3 The airflow adjusts automatically for comfort. You can also switch it on manually using the buttons 3 .

4 Indications on the temperature display screen selected for the right and left sides.

Defrost function

The air drawn in from outside the vehicle is directed at the windscreen and air recirculation is automatically switched off. To defrost thewindscreen more quickly, the air is dehumidified at temperatures over approximately +3°C (+38°F) and the fan runs at maximum output.

The air is directed at the chest of driver and passengers by the dash panel air vents.

Air distribution towards the footwell.

44

The essentials

Upward air distribution.

Heated rear window: this only works when the engine is running and switches off automatically after a maximum of 10 minutes.

Air recirculation

Seat heating buttons

Press the button to switch on or off the cooling system.

Press the button to make maximum cooling capacity available. The recirculation of air and the cooling system turn on automatically andair distribution adjusts automatically to the position .

When the warning light for button lights up , the settings on the driver side also apply to the passenger side, press the button or thetemperature control on the passenger side

Automatic adjustment of temperature, fan, and air distribution. Press key: the lamp in button will lit up.

Press the key: the air conditioning operation menu will be displayed on the Easy Connect system screen.

Switching off Turn the blower control to the position or press the button.


››› page 178

45

The essentials

How does the manual air conditioning* and the heating and fresh air system work?

Fig. 60 In the centre console: controls for the manual air conditioning; heating and fresh air system controls.

To switch a specific function on, press the ap-propriate button. Press the button again toswitch off the function.

The LED on each control lights up to indicatethat the respective function of a control hasbeen switched on.

Temperature 1Turn the control to adjust the temperatureHeating and ventilation system: The temperature cannot be lower than that of the exterior air temperature, as this system cannot coolor dehumidify the air

Fan 2Level 0: blower and manual air conditioning/heating and fresh air system offLevel 6: maximum fan level.

46

The essentials

Air distribution 3

: Defrost function. The airflow is directed at the windscreen.Manual air conditioning: Air recirculation is automatically switched off or is not switched on. Increase the fan power to clear the wind-screen of condensation as soon as possible. To dehumidify the air, the cooling system will automatically switch on.

: The air is directed at the chest of driver and passengers by the dash panel air vents.

: Distribution of air towards the chest and the footwell area.

: Air distribution towards the footwell.

: Air distribution towards the windscreen and the footwell.

Heated rear window: this only works when the engine is running and switches off automatically after a maximum of 10 minutes.

Air recirculation

Manual air conditioning: Press the button to switch on or off the cooling system.

Manual air conditioning: Maximum cooling power. The recirculation of air and the cooling system turn on automatically and air distribu-tion adjusts automatically to the position .

Manual air conditioning: Seat heating buttons


››› page 178

47

The essentials

Fluid level control

Filling capacities

Tank level

Petrol and die-sel engines

Front-wheel drive vehicles:50 l, of which approx.7 l reserve

Four-wheel drive vehicles:55 l, of which approx. 8.5 l re-

serve

Capacity of the windscreen washer fluid con-tainer

Versions with-out headlightwasher system

approx. 3 litres

Versions withheadlightwasher system

approx. 5 litres

Fuel

Fig. 61 Fuel tank flap with tank cap attached.

The flap that covers the tank cap is unlockedand locked automatically using the centrallocking.

Opening the fuel tank cap● Open the fuel tank flap by pressing on theleft side.● Unscrew the cap by turning it to the left.● Place it in the space on the hinge of theopen flap ››› Fig. 61.

Closing the fuel tank cap● Unscrew the cap by turning it to the right asfar as it will go.● Close the lid.

››› in Refuelling on page 342

››› page 342

Oil

Fig. 62 Engine oil dipstick.

Fig. 63 In the engine compartment: Engine oilfiller cap.

48

The essentials

The level is measured using the dipstick loca-ted in the engine compartment››› page 350.

The oil indicator must be between zones Aand C . It can never go above zone A .

● Zone A : do not add oil.● Zone B : you can add oil but keep the levelin that zone.● Zone C : add oil until zone B .

Topping up engine oil● Unscrew cap from oil filler opening.● Add oil slowly.● At the same time, check the level to ensureyou do not add too much.● When the oil level reaches at least zone B ,unscrew the engine oil filler cap carefully.

Engine oil additivesNo type of additive should be mixed with theengine oil. The deterioration caused by theseadditives is not covered by the warranty.

Engine oil specifications

Diesel engines

Engine type Type ofService

Specifica-tion

With particulatefilter (DPF)a)

Set Serviceand FlexibleService Inter-vals

VW 507 00

Without particu-late filter (DPF)

Set ServiceIntervals

VW 505 01b)

VW 506 01b)

a) Only use recommended oils, otherwise you maydamage the engine.b) If the quality of the fuel available in the countrydoes not fulfil the EN 590 (for diesel) standard.

If the engine oil level is too lowYou can get information about the correct en-gine oil for your vehicle in your specialisedshop. If you have to change your engine oil,use this oil.

If the recommended engine oil is not availa-ble, in the event of an emergency you canchange the oil once with a maximum of 0.5 Lof the next oil until the next oil change:

Gasoline engines: standard VW 504 00,VW 502 00, VW 508 00, ACEA C3 orAPI SN.Diesel engines: standard VW 507 00,VW 509 00, ACEA C3 or API CK-4.

–

–

Have the oil changed by a specialised work-shop.

Recommended by SEAT

SEAT recommends the use of SEAT GenuineOil to guarantee the high performance ofLongLife Service engines.

››› in Changing engine oil onpage 353

››› page 350

Coolant

Fig. 64 Engine compartment: coolant expan-sion tank cap. »

49

The essentials

The coolant tank is located in the enginecompartment ››› page 350.

When the engine is cold, replace the coolantwhen the level is below .

Coolant specificationsThe engine cooling system is supplied fromthe factory with a specially treated mixture ofwater and at least 40 % of the additive G13(TL-VW 774 J), purple. This mixture gives thenecessary frost protection down to -25°C(-13°F) and protects the light alloy parts ofthe engine cooling system against corrosion.It also prevents scaling and considerably rai-ses the boiling point of the coolant.

To protect the cooling system, the percent-age of additive must always be at least 40 %,even in warm climates where anti-freeze pro-tection is not required.

If for weather reasons further protection isnecessary, the proportion of additive may beincreased, but only up to 60 %; otherwise an-tifreeze protection will diminish and this willworsen cooling.

When the coolant is topped up, use a mixtureof distilled water and at least 40 % of theG13 or G12 plus-plus (TL-VW 774 G) additive(both are purple) to obtain an optimum anti-corrosion protection ››› in Topping upcoolant on page 354. The mixture of G13with G12 plus (TL-VW 774 F), G12 (red) or G11(green-blue) engine coolants will significantly

reduce anti-corrosion protection and shouldtherefore be avoided ››› in Topping upcoolant on page 354.

››› in Topping up coolant onpage 354

››› page 353

Brake fluid

Fig. 65 Engine compartment: brake fluid res-ervoir cap.

The brake fluid reservoir is located in the en-gine compartment ››› page 350.

The level should be between the and marks. If it is below , please visit a TechnicalService.

››› in Top up brake fluid onpage 354

››› page 354

Windscreen washer

Fig. 66 In the engine compartment: cap of thewindscreen washer tank.

The windscreen washer reservoir is located inthe engine compartment ››› page 350.

To top up, mix water with a product recom-mended by SEAT.

In cold temperatures, add anti-freeze.

››› in Checking and topping up thewindscreen washer reservoir onpage 355

››› page 35550

The essentials

Battery

The battery is located in the engine compart-ment ››› page 350. It does not requiremaintenance. It is checked as part of the In-spection Service.

››› in Important safety warningsfor handling a vehicle battery onpage 356

››› page 355

51

The essentials

Emergencies

Fuses

Fuse location

Fig. 67 Left guide: fuse box cover on thedriver-side dash panel. Right guide: fuse boxbehind the glove compartment.

Fig. 68 In the engine compartment: lid of thefuse box.

Underneath the instrument panel (left-hand drive)The fuse box is located behind the storagecompartment ››› Fig. 67 .

Behind the glove compartment (right-hand drive)The fuse box is located behind the glovecompartment ››› Fig. 67 . To be able to ac-cess the fuse box ››› page 94.

In the engine compartmentPress the locking tabs to release the fuse boxcover ››› Fig. 68.

Identifying fuses situated below the dashpanel by colours

Colour Amp rating

Black 1

Colour Amp rating

Purple 3

Light brown 5

Brown 7.5

Red 10

Blue 15

Yellow 20

White or transparent 25

Green 30

Orange 40


››› page 93

52

The essentials

Replacing a blown fuse

Fig. 69 Image of a blown fuse.

Preparation● Switch off the ignition, lights and all electri-cal equipment.● Open the corresponding fuse box››› page 94.

Identifying a blown fuseA fuse is blown if its metal strip is ruptured››› Fig. 69.

● Point a lamp at the fuse to see if it hasblown.

To replace a fuse● Remove the fuse.● Replace the blown fuse by one with anidentical amperage rating (same colour andmarkings) and identical size.

● Replace the cover again or close the fusebox lid.

Bulbs

Bulbs (12 V)

Note: Depending on the level of equipmentfitted in the vehicle, LEDs may be used forpart or all of the interior and/or exterior light-ing. LEDs have an estimated life that exceedsthat of the vehicle. If an LED light fails, go toan authorised workshop for its replacement.

Light source used for each function

Halogen headlights. Type

Daytime running light/sidelight

LED (it cannot bereplaced)

Dipped beam headlights H7 LL

Main beam headlights H7 LL

Turn signal PY21W

Full-LED main headlights

No bulbs may be replaced. All functions are withLEDs

Front fog light Type

Fog/cornering lights* H8

Rear lights Type

Brake light/tail light P21W LL

Side lights P21W LL

Turn signal PY21W LL

Retro fog light P21W LL

Reverse lights W16W

LED rear lights Type

Turn signal PY21W LL

Reverse lights W16W

The remaining functions work with LEDs

››› page 97

53

The essentials

Action in the event of a punc-ture

Related video

Fig. 70 Wheels

What to do first

● Park the vehicle on a horizontal surface andin a safe place as far away from traffic aspossible.● Apply the handbrake.● Switch on the hazard warning lights.● Manual transmission: select the 1st gear.● Automatic transmission: Move the selectorlever to position P.● If you are towing a trailer, unhitch it fromyour vehicle.● Have the vehicle tool kit ››› page 86and the spare wheel* ready››› page 365.

● Observe the applicable legislation for eachcountry (reflective vest, warning triangles,etc.).● All occupants should leave the vehicle andwait in a safe place (for instance behind theroadside crash barrier).

WARNING● Always observe the above steps and pro-tect yourself and other road users.● If you change the wheel on a slope, blockthe wheel on the opposite side of the carwith a stone or similar to prevent the vehi-cle from moving.

Repairing a tyre with the anti-punc-ture kit

Fig. 71 Standard display: contents of the anti-puncture kit.

The anti-puncture kit is located under thefloor panel in the luggage compartment.

Sealing the tyre● Unscrew the tyre valve cap and insert. Usethe ››› Fig. 71 1 tool to remove the insert.Place it on a clean surface.● Shake the tyre sealant bottle vigorously››› Fig. 71 10 .● Screw the inflator tube ››› Fig. 71 3 into thesealant bottle. The bottle's seal will break au-tomatically.

54

The essentials

● Remove the lid from the filling tube››› Fig. 71 3 and screw the open end of thetube into the tyre valve.● With the tyre sealant bottle upside down, fillthe tyre with the contents of the sealant bot-tle.● Remove the bottle from the valve.● Place the insert back into the tyre valve us-ing the tool ››› Fig. 71 1 .

Inflating the tyre● Screw the compressor tyre inflator tube››› Fig. 71 5 into the tyre valve.● Check that the air bleed screw is closed››› Fig. 71 7 .● Start the engine and leave it running.● Insert the connector ››› Fig. 71 9 into thevehicle's 12-volt socket ››› page 169.● Turn the air compressor on with theON/OFF switch ››› Fig. 71 8 .● Keep the air compressor running until it rea-ches 2.0 to 2.5 bar (29-36 psi/200-250 kPa).A maximum of 8 minutes.● Disconnect the air compressor.● If it does not reach the pressure indicated,unscrew the tyre inflator tube from the valve.● Move the vehicle 10m so that the sealant isdistributed throughout the tyre.● Screw the compressor tyre inflator into thevalve.

● Repeat the inflation process.● If the indicated pressure still cannot bereached, the tyre is too badly damaged. Stopand request assistance from an authorisedtechnician.● Disconnect the air compressor. Unscrewthe tyre inflator tube from the tyre valve.● When the tyre pressure is between 2.5 and2.0 bars, continue driving without exceeding80 km/h (50 mph).● Check the pressure again after 10 minutes››› page 88.

››› in TMS (Tyre Mobility System)*on page 86

››› page 86

Changing a wheel

Related video

Fig. 72 Wheels

Vehicle tool kit

Fig. 73 Underneath the floor panel of the lug-gage compartment: on-board tools.

Adapter for the anti-theft wheel bolts*Towline anchorageBox spanner for wheel bolts*Crank handle for jackJack*Hook for extracting the central wheeltrims*Clip for removing the wheel bolt caps.

››› in What to do first on page 54

››› page 86

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

55

The essentials

Central wheel trim*

Fig. 74 Correct positioning of the centralwheel trim for steel rims.

The central trims must be removed for accessto the wheel bolts.

Removing● Attach the wire hook (vehicle tools) to oneof the chambers of the central wheel trim.● Insert the box spanner through the hook,supporting it on the tyre and remove thewheel trim.

Fitting● Fit the central wheel trim onto the rim. Thebottom of the “S” of the SEAT badge shouldalign with the inflation valve ››› Fig. 74 1 .● Press the central trim firmly until it locks inwith an audible click.

NoteThere is also a valve mark on the back ofthe central wheel trim that indicates thecorrect alignment.

Wheel bolt caps*

Fig. 75 Wheel: wheel bolts with caps.

Removal● Fit the plastic clip (vehicle tools››› Fig. 73 7 ) over the cap until it clicks intoplace ››› Fig. 75.● Remove the cap with the plastic clip.

Anti-theft wheel bolts

Fig. 76 Anti-theft wheel bolt with cap andadapter.

● Remove the wheel cover* or the cap*.● Insert the special adapter (vehicle tools)onto the anti-theft wheel bolt and push it onas far as it will go.● Insert the wheel brace (vehicle tools) ontothe adapter as far as it will go.● Remove the wheel bolt ››› page 57.

NoteMake a note of the code number of the an-ti-theft wheel bolt and keep it in a safeplace, but not in your vehicle. If you need anew adapter, you can obtain it from theSEAT Official Service, indicating the codenumber.

56

The essentials

Loosening the wheel bolts

Fig. 77 Wheel: loosen the wheel bolts.

● Insert the box spanner (vehicle tools) ontothe wheel bolt as far as it will go. An adapteris required to unscrew or tighten the anti-theftwheel bolts ››› page 56.● Turn the wheel bolt approximately one turnto the left ››› Fig. 77 (arrow). To apply the re-quired torque, hold the wheel brace at theend. If it is not possible to loosen a wheel bolt,carefully apply pressure with one foot on theend of the box spanner. Hold on to the vehiclefor support and take care not to slip.

WARNINGSlightly loosen the wheel bolts (one turn)before raising the vehicle with the jack*. Ifnot, an accident may occur.

Raising the vehicle

Fig. 78 Crossbar: brands.

Fig. 79 Crossbar: mounting the jack on the ve-hicle.

● Place the jack* (vehicle tools) on firmground. If necessary use a large, strongboard or similar support. If the surface is slip-pery (for example tiles) place the jack on arubber mat or similar to prevent it from slip-ping ››› .

● Find the support point on the strut (sunkenarea) closest to the wheel to be changed››› Fig. 78.● Turn the jack* crank handle, located belowthe strut support point, to raise it until thetab 1 ››› Fig. 79 is below the housing provi-ded.● Align the jack* so that tab 1 “grips” ontothe housing provided on the strut and the mo-bile base 2 is resting on the ground. Thebase plate 2 should fall vertically with re-spect to the support point 1 .● Continue turning the jack* until the wheel isslightly lifted off the ground.

WARNING● Make sure that the jack* remains stable.If the surface is slippery or soft, the jack*could slip or sink, respectively, with the re-sultant risk of injury.● Only raise the vehicle with the jack* sup-plied by the manufacturer. Other jacks,even those approved for other SEAT mod-els could slip, with the consequent risk ofinjury.● Only mount the jack* on the supportpoints designed for this purpose on thestrut, and always align the jack correctly. Ifyou do not, the jack* could slip as it doesnot have an adequate grip on the vehicle:risk of injury! »

57

The essentials

● The height of the parked vehicle canchange as a result of variations intemperature and loading.

CAUTIONThe vehicle must not be raised on thecrossbar. Only place the jack* on thepoints designed for this purpose on thestrut. Otherwise, the vehicle may be dam-aged.

Removing and fitting a wheel

Change the wheel after loosening the wheelbolts and raising the vehicle with the jack.

Taking off the wheel● Unscrew the wheel bolts using the boxspanner and place them on a clean surface.● Take off the wheel.

Putting on the spare wheelWhen fitting tyres with a compulsory rotationdirection, observe the instructions in››› page 58.

● Mount the wheel.● Screw on the wheel bolts in position andtighten them loosely with a box spanner.● Carefully lower the vehicle using the jack*.

● Tighten the wheel bolts in diagonal pairsusing the wheel brace.

The wheel bolts should be clean and turneasily. Before fitting the spare wheel, inspectthe wheel condition and hub mounting surfa-ces. These surfaces must be clean before fit-ting the wheel.

Tyres with compulsory direction ofrotation

A directional tread pattern can be identifiedby the arrows on the sidewall that point in thedirection of rotation. Always observe the di-rection of rotation indicated when fitting thewheel to guarantee optimum properties ofthis type of tyres with regard to grip, noises,wear and aquaplaning.

If it is absolutely necessary to fit the sparetyre* against the direction of rotation, drivewith care as this means the tyre does not of-fer optimum driving properties. This is of par-ticular importance when the road surface iswet.

To return to directional tread tires, replace thepunctured tyre as soon as possible and re-store the obligatory direction of rotation of alltyres.

Subsequent work

● Alloy wheels: replace the wheel bolt caps.● Plate wheels: replace the wheel hubcap››› page 56.● Return all tools to their proper storing loca-tion.● If the replaced wheel does not fit in thespare wheel housing, store it safely in the lug-gage compartment ››› page 170.● Check the tyre pressure of the newly moun-ted tyre as soon as possible.● In vehicles fitted with a tyre pressure indica-tor, adjust the pressure and store the readingin the radio/Easy Connect system*››› page 362.● Have the tightening torque of the wheelbolts checked as soon as possible with a tor-que wrench (it should be 140 Nm). Meanwhile,drive carefully.● Have the flat tyre replaced as quickly aspossible.

Snow chains

Use

Snow chains should only be used on the frontwheels.

58

The essentials

Check that they are correctly seated afterdriving for a few yards; correct the position ifnecessary, in accordance with the manufac-turer's fitting instructions. Keep your speedbelow 50 km/h (30 mph).

If there is a danger of being trapped despitehaving mounted the chains, it is best to disa-ble the driving wheels (ASR) in the ESC››› page 252, Switching on/off the ESCand ASR.

Snow chains will improve braking ability aswell as traction in winter conditions.

For technical reasons snow chains may onlybe used with the following wheel rim/tyrecombination.

215/60 R16 Chains with links of maximum 15 mm



Other dimensions do not allow chains

Remove any central wheel trims and the rimring before fitting snow chains.

Remove the chains when roads are free ofsnow. Driving characteristics worsen, and thewheels become damaged quickly and mayeven be rendered unusable.

Emergency towing of the ve-hicle

Towing

Fig. 80 Right side of the front bumper: towlineanchorage screwed in.

Fig. 81 Right side of the rear bumper: towlineanchorage screwed in.

Towline anchoragesAttach the bar or rope to the towline ancho-rages.

The towline anchorages are located underthe floor panel in the luggage compartment,next to the vehicle tools ››› page 86.

Screw the towline anchorage into the screwconnection ››› Fig. 80 or ››› Fig. 81 and tight-en it with the wheel brace.

Tow rope or tow barThe tow bar offers increased safety and alower risk of damage.

The tow rope is recommended when there isno tow bar. It must be elastic so that it doesnot damage the vehicle.

Notes for the driver of the towing vehicle● The tow rope must be taut before you driveoff.● Release the clutch very carefully whenstarting the vehicle (manual gearbox), or ac-celerate gently (automatic gearbox).

Driving styleTowing requires some experience, especiallywhen using a tow rope. Both drivers shouldrealise how difficult it is to tow a vehicle. Inex-perienced drivers should not attempt to tow. »

59

The essentials

Do not pull too hard with the towing vehicleand take care to avoid jerking the tow rope.When towing on an unpaved road, there is al-ways a risk of overloading and damaging theanchorage points.

Switch on the ignition so that the turn signals,windscreen wipers and windscreen washercan work. Ensure that the steering wheel isunlocked and moves freely.

Place the gear lever in neutral on vehicleswith a manual gearbox. With an automaticgearbox, place the lever in N.

To brake, press the brake pedal firmly. Thebrake servo does not work when the engine isswitched off.

The power steering only works when the igni-tion is switched on and the vehicle is moving,provided that the battery is sufficientlycharged. Otherwise, it will need more force.

Ensure that the tow rope remains taut at alltimes.


››› page 89

Tow-starting

If the engine will not start, first try starting itusing the battery of another vehicle››› page 60. You should only attempt totow-start a vehicle if charging the batterydoes not work. This is done by leveragingwheel movement.

When tow-starting a vehicle with a petrol en-gine, do not tow it more than a short dis-tance, otherwise unburned fuel can enter thecatalytic converter.

● Engage 2nd or 3rd gear before moving off.● Press the clutch and hold the pedal down.● Switch the ignition on.● Once both vehicles are moving, release theclutch.● As soon as the engine has started, press theclutch and move the gear lever to neutral.

How to jump start

Jump leads

The jump lead must have a sufficient wirecross section.

If the engine fails to start because of a dis-charged battery, the battery can be connec-

ted to the battery of another vehicle to startthe engine.

Jump leads must comply with standard DIN72553 (see cable manufacturer's instruc-tions). The wire cross section must be at least25 mm2 for petrol engines and at least35 mm2 for diesel engines.

Note● The vehicles must not touch each other,otherwise electricity could flow as soon asthe positive terminals are connected.● The discharged battery must be properlyconnected to the on-board network.

60

The essentials

How to jump start: description

Fig. 82 Diagram of connections for vehicleswithout Start Stop system

Fig. 83 Diagram of connections for vehicleswith Start Stop system

Jump lead terminal connectionsSwitch off the ignition of both vehicles››› .

1.

Connect one end of the red jump lead tothe positive + terminal of the vehiclewith the flat battery A ››› Fig. 82.Connect the other end of the red jumplead to the positive terminal + in the ve-hicle providing assistance B .In vehicles without a Start-Stop system:connect one end of the black jump leadto the negative terminal – of the vehicleproviding the current B ››› Fig. 82.In vehicles with a Start-stop system:connect one end of the black jump leadX to a suitable ground terminal, to a sol-

id piece of metal in the engine block, orto the engine block itself ››› Fig. 83.Connect the other end of the black jumplead X to a solid metal component bol-ted to the engine block or to the engineblock itself of the vehicle with the flatbattery. Do not connect it to a point nearthe battery A .Position the leads in such a way thatthey cannot come into contact with anymoving parts in the engine compart-ment.

StartingStart the engine of the vehicle with theboosting battery and let it run at idlingspeed.

2.

3.

4a.

4b.

5.

6.

7.

Start the engine of the vehicle with theflat battery and wait for 2 or 3 minutesuntil the engine is running.

Removing the jump leadsBefore you remove the jump leads,switch off the dipped beam headlights ifthey are switched on.Turn on the heater blower and heatedrear window in the vehicle with the flatbattery. This helps minimise voltagepeaks which are generated when theleads are disconnected.When the engine is running, disconnectthe leads in reverse order to the detailsgiven above.

Make sure the battery clamps have sufficientmetal-to-metal contact with the battery ter-minals.

If the engine fails to start after about 10 sec-onds, switch off the starter and try again afterabout 1 minute.

WARNING● Please note the safety warnings referringto working in the engine compartment››› page 348.● The battery providing assistance musthave the same voltage as the flat battery »

8.

9.

10.

11.

61

The essentials

(12V) and approximately the same capaci-ty (see imprint on battery). Failure to com-ply could result in an explosion.● Never use jump leads when one of thebatteries is frozen. Danger of explosion!Even after the battery has thawed, batteryacid could leak and cause chemical burns.If a battery freezes, it should be replaced.● Keep sparks, flames and lighted ciga-rettes away from batteries, danger of ex-plosion. Failure to comply could result in anexplosion.● Observe the instructions provided by themanufacturer of the jump leads.● Do not connect the negative cable fromthe other vehicle directly to the negativeterminal of the flat battery. The gas emit-ted from the battery could be ignited bysparks. Danger of explosion.● Never attach the negative cable to fuelsystem components or the brake lines inthe other vehicle.● The non-insulated parts of the batteryclamps must not be allowed to touch. Thejump lead attached to the positive batteryterminal must not touch metal parts of thevehicle, this can cause a short circuit.● Position the leads in such a way that theycannot come into contact with any movingparts in the engine compartment.● Do not lean on the batteries. This couldresult in chemical burns.

NoteThe vehicles must not touch each other,otherwise electricity could flow as soon asthe positive terminals are connected.

Changing the wiper blades

Windscreen wipers service posi-tion

Fig. 84 Wipers in service position.

The wiper arms can be raised when the wip-ers are in service position ››› Fig. 84.

● Close the bonnet ››› page 348.● Switch the ignition on and off.● Press the windscreen wiper lever down-wards briefly 4 ››› page 35.

Before driving, always lower the wiper arms.Using the windscreen wiper lever, the wind-screen wiper arms return to their initial posi-tion.

››› page 88

62

The essentials

Changing the windscreen and rearwindow wiper blades

Fig. 85 Changing the windscreen wiperblades

Fig. 86 Changing the rear wiper blade

Raising and lowering windscreen wiperarms● Place the windscreen wipers in the serviceposition ››› page 62.

● Grip the wiper arms only by the blade'sfastening point.

Cleaning windscreen wiper blades● Raise the wiper arms.● Use a soft cloth to remove dust and dirtfrom the windscreen wiper blades.● If the blades are very dirty, a sponge ordamp cloth may be used ››› in Changingthe windscreen and rear window wiperblades on page 89.

Changing the windscreen wiper blades● Lift and unfold the wiper arms.● Press and hold release button ››› Fig. 85 1and pull gently on the wiper blade in the di-rection of the arrow.● Fit a new wiper blade of the same lengthand design on to the wiper arm and hook itinto place.● Rest the wiper arms back onto the wind-screen.

Changing the rear wiper blade● Lift and fold the wiper arm.● Turn the blade slightly ››› Fig. 86 (arrow A ).● Hold down the release button 1 while gen-tly pulling the blade in the direction of arrowB .

● Insert a new blade of the same length andtype in the rear wiper arm in the opposite di-rection to the arrow B and hook into placebutton 1 .● Replace the wiper arm on the rear window.

››› in Changing the windscreenand rear window wiper blades onpage 89

››› page 88

63

Safety

Safety

Safe drivingSafety first!

WARNING● This manual contains important informa-tion about the operation of the vehicle,both for the driver and the passengers. Theother sections of the on-board documenta-tion also contain further information thatyou should be aware of for your own safetyand for the safety of your passengers.● Ensure that the on-board documentationis kept in the vehicle at all times. This is es-pecially important when lending or sellingthe vehicle to another person.

Advice about driving

Before setting off

For your own safety and the safety of yourpassengers, always note the following pointsbefore every trip:

– Make sure that the vehicle's lights and turnsignals are working properly.

– Check tyre pressure.

– Ensure that all windows provide a clear andgood view of the surroundings.

– Make sure all luggage is secured››› page 170.

– Make sure that no objects can interfere withthe pedals.

– Adjust front seat, head restraint and mirrorsproperly according to your size.

– Ensure that the passengers in the rear seatsalways have the head restraints in the in-use position ››› page 69.

– Instruct passengers to adjust the head re-straints according to their height.

– Protect children with appropriate childseats and properly applied seat belts››› page 81.

– Assume the correct sitting position. Instructyour passengers also to assume a propersitting position ››› page 65.

– Fasten your seat belt securely. Instruct yourpassengers also to fasten their seat beltsproperly ››› page 70.

What affects driving safety?

As a driver, you are responsible for yourselfand your passengers. When your concentra-tion or driving safety is affected by any cir-

cumstance, you endanger yourself as well asothers on the road ››› , for this reason:

– Always pay attention to traffic and do notget distracted by passengers or telephonecalls.

– Never drive when your driving ability is im-paired (e.g. by medication, alcohol, drugs).

– Observe traffic laws and speed limits.

– Always reduce your speed as appropriatefor road, traffic and weather conditions.

– When travelling long distances, take breaksregularly - at least every two hours.

– If possible, avoid driving when you are tiredor stressed.

WARNINGWhen driving safety is impaired during atrip, the risk of injury and accidents increa-ses.

Safety equipment

Never put your safety or the safety of yourpassengers in danger. In the event of an acci-dent, the safety equipment may reduce the

64

Safe driving

risk of injury. The following points cover partof the safety equipment in your SEAT1):

● three-point seat belts,● belt tension limiters for the front and rearside seats,● belt tensioners for the front and rear sideseats,● front airbags,● knee airbags,● side airbags in the front seat backrests,● head-protection airbags,● “ISOFIX” anchor points for child seats in therear side seats with the “ISOFIX” system,● height-adjustable front head restraints,● rear head restraints with in-use position andnon-use position,● adjustable steering column.

The safety equipment mentioned aboveworks together to provide you and your pas-sengers with the best possible protection inthe event of an accident. However, thesesafety systems can only be effective if youand your passengers are sitting in a correctposition and use this equipment properly.

Safety is everyone's business!

Correct position of the vehi-cle occupants

Correct sitting position for the driv-er

Fig. 87 The proper distance between driverand steering wheel.

Fig. 88 Correct head restraint position for thedriver.

For your own safety and to reduce the risk ofinjury in the event of an accident, we recom-mend the following adjustments for the driver:

– Adjust the steering wheel so that there is adistance of at least 25 cm between thesteering wheel and the centre of your chest››› Fig. 87.

– Move the driver's seat forwards or back-wards so that you are able to press the ac-celerator, brake and clutch pedals to thefloor with your knees still slightly angled››› .

– Ensure that you can reach the highest pointof the steering wheel.

– Adjust the head restraint so that its upperedge is at the same level as the top of your »

1) Depending on the version/market.65

Safety

head, or as close as possible to the samelevel as the top of your head ››› Fig. 88.

– Move the seat backrest to an upright posi-tion so that your back rests completelyagainst it.

– Fasten your seat belt securely››› page 70.

– Keep both feet in the footwell so that youhave the vehicle under control at all times.

Adjustment of the driver's seat ››› page 162.

WARNING● An incorrect sitting position of the drivercan lead to severe injuries.● Adjust the driver's seat so that there is atleast 25 cm distance between the centre ofthe chest and the centre of the steeringwheel ››› Fig. 87. If you are sitting closerthan 25 cm, the airbag system cannot pro-tect you properly.● If your physical constitution prevents youfrom maintaining the minimum distance of25 cm, contact a specialised workshop.The workshop will help you decide if spe-cial specific modifications are necessary.● When driving, always hold the steeringwheel with both hands on the outside of thering at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock posi-tions. This reduces the risk of injury whenthe driver airbag is triggered.

● Never hold the steering wheel at the 12o'clock position, or in any other manner(e.g. in the centre of the steering wheel). Insuch cases, if the airbag is triggered, youmay sustain injuries to the arms, hands andhead.● To reduce the risk of injury to the driverduring sudden braking manoeuvres or anaccident, never drive with the backrest til-ted far back! The airbag system and seatbelts can only provide optimal protectionwhen the backrest is in an upright positionand the driver is wearing his or her seat beltcorrectly.● Adjust the head restraint properly to ach-ieve optimal protection.

Adjusting the steering wheel posi-tion

Read the additional information carefully››› page 22.

WARNING● Never adjust the position of the steeringwheel when the vehicle is moving, as thiscould cause an accident.● Move the lever up firmly so the steeringwheel position does not accidentallychange during driving. risk of accident!

● Make sure you are capable of reachingand firmly holding the upper part of thesteering wheel: risk of accident!● If you adjust the steering wheel so that itpoints towards your face, the driver airbagwill not protect you properly in the event ofan accident. Make sure that the steeringwheel points towards your chest.

Correct position for the front pas-senger

For your own safety and to reduce the risk ofinjury in the event of an accident, we recom-mend the following adjustments for the frontpassenger:

– Move the front passenger seat back as faras possible ››› .

– Move the seat backrest to an upright posi-tion so that your back rests completelyagainst it.

– Adjust the head restraint so that its upperedge is at the same level as the top of yourhead, or as close as possible to the samelevel as the top of your head ››› page 68.

– Always keep both feet in the footwell infront of the front passenger seat.


66

Safe driving

It is possible to deactivate the front passen-ger airbag in exceptional circumstances››› page 79.

Adjusting the front passenger seat››› page 162.

WARNING● An incorrect sitting position of the frontpassenger can lead to severe injuries.● Adjust the front passenger seat so thatthere is at least 25 cm between your chestand the dash panel. If you are sitting closerthan 25 cm, the airbag system cannot pro-tect you properly.● If your physical constitution prevents youfrom maintaining the minimum distance of25 cm, contact a specialised workshop.The workshop will help you decide if spe-cial specific modifications are necessary.● Always keep your feet in the footwellwhen the vehicle is moving; never rest themon the dash panel, out the window or on theseat. An incorrect sitting position exposesyou to an increased risk of injury in case ofa sudden braking or an accident. If the air-bag is triggered, you could sustain severeinjuries due to an incorrect sitting position.● To reduce the risk of injury to the frontpassenger in events such as sudden brak-ing manoeuvres or an accident, never trav-el with the backrest tilted far back! The air-bag system and seat belts can only pro-vide optimal protection when the backrest

is in an upright position and the front pas-senger is wearing his or her seat belt prop-erly. The further the seat backrests are til-ted to the rear, the greater the risk of injurydue to incorrect positioning of the belt webor to the incorrect sitting position!● Adjust the head restraint correctly in or-der to achieve maximum protection.

Correct sitting position for rearseat passengers

To reduce the risk of injury in the event of asudden braking manoeuvre or an accident,passengers on the rear seat bench must con-sider the following:

– Sit up straight.

– Adjust the head restraint to the correct po-sition ››› page 69.

– Always keep both feet in the footwell infront of the rear seat.


– Use an appropriate child restraint systemwhen you take children in the vehicle››› page 81.

WARNING● If the passengers in the rear seats are notsitting properly, they could sustain severeinjuries.● Adjust the head restraint correctly in or-der to achieve maximum protection.● Seat belts can only provide optimal pro-tection when seat backrests are in an up-right position and the vehicle occupantsare wearing their seat belts correctly. Ifpassengers In the rear seats are not sittingin an upright position, the risk of injury dueto incorrect positioning of the seat belt in-creases.

Examples of incorrect sitting posi-tions

Seat belts can provide optimal protection on-ly when the belt webs are properly posi-tioned. Incorrect sitting positions substantiallyreduce the protective function of seat beltsand increase the risk of injury due to incorrectseat belt position. As the driver, you are re-sponsible for all passengers, especially chil-dren.

– Never allow anyone to assume an incorrectsitting position in the vehicle while travelling››› .

The following list contains examples of sittingpositions that could be dangerous for all »

67

Safety

vehicle occupants. The list is not complete,but we would like to make you aware of thisissue.

Therefore, whenever the vehicle is in mo-tion:● Never stand in the vehicle.● Never stand on the seats.● Never kneel on the seats.● Never tilt your seat backrest far to the rear.● Never lean against the dash panel.● Never lie on the rear bench.● Never sit on the front edge of a seat.● Never sit sideways.● Never lean out of a window.● Never put your feet out of a window.● Never put your feet on the dash panel.● Never put your feet on the surface of a seat.● Do not allow anyone to travel in the foot-well.● Never travel without wearing the seat belt.● Do not allow anyone to travel in the lug-gage compartment.

WARNING● Any incorrect sitting position increasesthe risk of severe injuries. Sitting in an in-correct position exposes the vehicle occu-pants to severe injuries if airbags are trig-

gered, by striking a vehicle occupant whohas assumed an incorrect sitting position.● Before the vehicle moves, assume theproper sitting position and maintain itthroughout the trip. Before every trip, in-struct your passengers to sit properly andto stay in this position during the trip››› page 65, Correct position of the vehicleoccupants.

Correct adjustment of front headrestraints

Fig. 89 Correctly adjusted head restraint asviewed from the front and the side.


Properly adjusted head restraints are an im-portant part of passenger protection and canreduce the risk of injuries in most accident sit-uations.

● Adjust the head restraint so that its upperedge is, as far as possible, at the same levelas the top of your head, or at the very least,at eye level ››› Fig. 89.

WARNING● Travelling with the head restraints re-moved or improperly adjusted increasesthe risk of severe injuries. An improper ad-justment of the head restraints may causedeath in an accident and increase the riskof suffering injuries during abrupt brakingactions or unexpected manoeuvres.● The head restraints must always be ad-justed according to the height of the pas-senger.

68

Safe driving

Correct adjustment of rear headrestraints

Fig. 90 Head restraints in the correct position.

Fig. 91 Head restraint position warning label.

Properly adjusted head restraints are an im-portant part of the passenger protection andcan reduce the risk of injuries in most acci-dent situations

Rear head restraints– The rear head restraints have 2 positions:

use and non-use.

– One position for use (head restraint raised)››› Fig. 90. In this position, the head re-straints are used normally, protecting pas-sengers along with the rear seat belts.

– And one position for non-use (head re-straint lowered).

– To fit the head restraints in position for use,pull on the edges with both hands in the di-rection of the arrow.

WARNING● Under no circumstances should the rearpassengers travel while the head restraintsare in the non-use position. See the warn-ing label located on the rear side fixed win-dow ››› Fig. 91.● Do not swap the centre rear head re-straint with either of the outer seat rearhead restraints. Risk of injury in case of anaccident!

CAUTIONNote the instructions on the adjustment ofthe head restraints ››› page 162.

Pedal area

Pedals

– Ensure that you can always press the ac-celerator, brake and clutch pedals unim-paired to the floor.

– Ensure that the pedals can return unim-paired to their initial positions.

– Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas-tened during the trip and do not obstructthe pedals ››› .

Only use floor mats which leave the pedalsclear and which are secured to prevent themfrom slipping. You can obtain suitable floormats from a specialised dealership. Fasten-ers* for floor mats are fitted in the footwells.

If a brake circuit fails, the brake pedal must bepressed down thoroughly in order to stop thevehicle.

Wear suitable footwearAlways wear shoes which support your feetproperly and give you a good feeling for thepedals.

WARNING● Restricting pedal operation can lead tocritical situations while driving. »

69

Safety

● Never lay or fit floor mats or other floorcoverings over the original floor mats. Thiswould reduce the pedal area and could ob-struct the pedals. Risk of accident.● Never place objects in the driver footwell.An object could move into the pedal areaand impair pedal operation. In the event ofa sudden driving or braking manoeuvre,you will not be able to operate the brake,clutch or accelerator pedal. Risk of acci-dent!

Seat belts

Why wear a seat belt

Number of seats

Your vehicle has five seats, two in the frontand three in the rear. Each seat is equippedwith a three-point seat belt.

In some versions, your vehicle is approvedonly for four seats. Two front seats and tworear seats.

WARNING● Never transport more than the permittedamount of people in your vehicle.● Every vehicle occupant must properlyfasten and wear the seat belt belonging tohis or her seat. Children must be protectedwith an appropriate child restraint system.

Seat belt control lamp*

Fig. 92 Dashboard: right rear seat occupiedand corresponding seat belt fastened display.

It lights up red

Driver or passenger has not fastened seat belt.

The control lamp illuminates to remind thedriver to fasten his seat belt.

Before starting the vehicle:

● Fasten your seat belt securely.● Instruct your passengers to fasten theirseat belts properly before driving off.● Protect children by using a child seat ac-cording to the child's height and weight.

When starting to drive, if the vehicle's speedsurpasses approx. 25 km/h (15 mph) and theseat belts are not fastened or are unfastenedduring the drive, a warning sound will be

70

Seat belts

heard for a few seconds. The warning lightwill also flash .

The lamp goes out when the driver andpassenger seat belts are fastened with theignition switched on.

Rear seat belts fastened display*Depending on the model version, when theignition is switched on, the seat belt statusdisplay ››› Fig. 92 on the instrument panel in-forms the driver whether the passengers inthe rear seats have fastened their seat belts.The symbol indicates that the passenger inthis seat has fastened “his or her” seat belt.

When a seat belt in the rear seats is fastenedor unfastened, the seat belt status is dis-played for approximately 30 seconds. The in-dication can be hidden by pressing the button on the dash panel.

The seat belt status flashes for a maximum of30 seconds when a seat belt in the rear seatsis unfastened while the vehicle is in motion. Anaudible warning will also be heard if the vehi-cle is travelling at over 25 km/h (15 mph).

The protective function of seatbelts

Fig. 93 Drivers with properly worn seat beltswill not be thrown forward in the event of sud-den braking.

Properly worn seat belts hold the occupantsin the proper position. They also help preventuncontrolled movements that may result inserious injury and reduce the risk of beingthrown out of the vehicle in case of an acci-dent.

Vehicle occupants wearing their seat beltscorrectly benefit greatly from the ability ofthe belts to absorb kinetic energy. In addition,the front part of your vehicle and other pas-sive safety features (such as the airbag sys-tem) are designed to absorb the kinetic ener-gy released in a collision. Taken together, allthese features reduce the releasing kineticenergy and consequently, the risk of injury.This is why it is so important to fasten seat

belts before every trip, even when "just drivingaround the corner".

Ensure that your passengers wear their seatbelts as well. Accident statistics have shownthat wearing seat belts is an effective meansof substantially reducing the risk of injury andimproving the chances of survival when in-volved in a serious accident. Furthermore,properly worn seat belts improve the protec-tion provided by airbags in the event of anaccident. For this reason, wearing a seat beltis required by law in most countries.

Although your vehicle is equipped with air-bags, the seat belts must be fastened andworn. The front airbags, for example, are onlytriggered in some cases of head-on collision.The front airbags will not be triggered duringminor frontal or side collisions, rear-end colli-sions, overturns or accidents in which the air-bag trigger threshold value in the control unitis not exceeded.

Therefore, you should always wear your seatbelt and ensure that all vehicle occupantshave fastened their seat belts properly beforeyou drive off!

Important safety instructions forthe use of seat belts

– Always wear the seat belt as described inthis section. »

71

Safety

– Ensure that the seat belts can be fastenedat all times and are not damaged.

WARNING● If seat belts are worn incorrectly or not atall, the risk of severe injuries increases. Theoptimal protection from seat belts can beachieved only if you use them properly.● Fasten your seat belt before every trip -even when driving in town. Other vehicleoccupants must also wear the seat belts atall times, otherwise they run the risk of be-ing injured.● The seat belt cannot offer its full protec-tion if the seat belt is not positioned cor-rectly.● Never allow two passengers (even chil-dren) to share the same seat belt.● Always keep both feet in the footwell infront of your seat as long as the vehicle is inmotion.● Never unbuckle a seat belt while the ve-hicle is in motion. Risk of fatal injury.● The seat belt must never be twisted whileit is being worn.● The seat belt should never lie on hard orfragile objects (such as glasses or pens,etc.) because this can cause injuries.● Do not allow the seat belt to be damagedor jammed, or to rub on any sharp edges.● Never wear the seat belt under the arm orin any other incorrect position.

● Bulky and unfastened clothing (such asan overcoat over a sweater) impairs theproper fit and function of the seat belts, re-ducing their capacity to protect.● The slot in the seat belt buckle must notbe blocked with paper or other objects, asthis can prevent the latch plate from en-gaging securely.● Never use seat belt clips, fastening ringsor similar items to alter the position of thebelt webbing.● Frayed or torn seat belts or damage tothe connections, belt retractors or parts ofthe buckle could cause severe injuries inthe event of an accident. Therefore, youmust check the condition of all seat beltsat regular intervals.● Seat belts which have been worn in anaccident and have been stretched must bereplaced by a specialised workshop. Re-newal may be necessary even if there is noapparent damage. The belt anchorageshould also be checked.● Do not attempt to repair a damaged seatbelt yourself. The seat belts must not be re-moved or modified in any way.● The belts must be kept clean, otherwisethe retractors may not work properly.

Head-on collisions and the laws ofphysics

Fig. 94 A driver not wearing a seat belt isthrown forward violently.

Fig. 95 The unbelted passenger in the rearseat is thrown forward violently, hitting the driv-er who is wearing a seat belt.

The effects of the laws of physics in the caseof a head-on collision are easy to explain: the

72

Seat belts

moment a vehicle starts moving, a type of en-ergy called “kinetic energy” starts acting onboth the vehicle and its passengers.

The amount of “kinetic energy” depends onthe speed of the vehicle and on the weight ofthe vehicle and of its passengers. The higherthey are, the more energy there is to be “ab-sorbed” in the event of an accident.

The most significant factor, however, is thespeed of the vehicle. If the speed doublesfrom 25 km/h (15 mph) to 50 km/h (30 mph),for example, the corresponding kinetic ener-gy is multiplied by four.

Given that the passengers of the vehicle inour example do not have their seat belts fas-tened, in the event of a collision the entireamount of the passengers' kinetic energy willbe only absorbed by the mentioned impact.

Even at speeds of 30 km/h (19 mph) to50 km/h (30 mph), the forces acting on bod-ies in a collision can easily exceed one tonne(1000 kg). At greater speed these forces areeven higher.

Vehicle occupants not wearing seat belts arenot “attached” to the vehicle. In a head-oncollision, they will move forward at the samespeed their vehicle was travelling just beforethe impact. This example applies not only tohead-on collisions, but to all accidents andcollisions.

Even at low speeds the forces acting on thebody in a collision are so great that it is notpossible to brace oneself with one's hands. Ina frontal collision, unbelted passengers arethrown forward and will make violent contactwith the steering wheel, dash panel, wind-screen or whatever else is in the way››› Fig. 94.

It is also important for rear passengers towear seat belts properly, as they could other-wise be thrown forward violently through thevehicle interior in an accident. Passengers inthe rear seats who do not use seat belts en-danger not only themselves but also the frontoccupants ››› Fig. 95.

How to properly adjust yourseat belt

Fastening and unfastening yourseat belt

Fig. 96 Positioning and removing the seat beltbuckle. »

73

Safety

Fig. 97 Position of seat belt during pregnancy.


Fasten your seat beltThe seat belt cannot offer its full protection ifthe seat belt is not positioned correctly.

● Adjust the seat and head restraint correct-ly.● To fasten the belt, take hold of the latchplate and pull it slowly across your chest andlap.● Insert the latch plate into the buckle for theappropriate seat and push it down until it issecurely locked with an audible click››› Fig. 96 A.

● Pull the belt to ensure that the latch plate issecurely engaged in the buckle.

The seat belts are equipped with an auto-matic retractor on the shoulder strap. Fullfreedom of movement is permitted when theshoulder belt is pulled slowly. However, dur-ing sudden braking, during travel in steepareas or bends and during acceleration, theautomatic retractor on the shoulder belt islocked.

The automatic belt retractors on the frontseats and side rear seats are1) fitted with seatbelt tensioners ››› page 74.

Releasing the seat belt● Press the red button on the belt buckle››› Fig. 96 B. The latch plate is released andsprings out ››› .● Guide the belt back by hand so that it rollsup easily and the trim is not damaged.

Positioning seat beltsSeat belts offer their maximum protection on-ly when they are properly positioned.

WARNING● The seat belts offer best protection onlywhen the backrests are in an upright posi-

tion and the seat belts have been fastenedproperly.● Never put the latch plate in the buckle ofanother seat. If you do this, the seat beltwill not protect you properly and the risk ofinjury is increased.● Never unbuckle a seat belt while the ve-hicle is in motion. If you do, you increasethe risk of sustaining severe or fatal injuries.● An incorrectly worn seat belt can causesevere injuries in the event of an accident.● For pregnant women, the lap part of theseat belt must lie as low as possible overthe pelvis, never across the stomach, andalways lie flat so that no pressure is exer-ted on the abdomen ››› Fig. 97.● Always engage the retractor lock whenyou are securing a child seat in group 0, 0+or 1 ››› page 81.● Read and observe the warnings››› page 71.

Seat belt tensioners

How the seat belt tensioner works



Airbag system

The seat belts for the front seats and the siderear seats1) are equipped with belt tension-ers. The belt tensioners are activated by sen-sors, although only in severe head-on, lateraland rear-end collisions. This retracts andtightens the seat belts, reducing the forwardmotion of the occupants.

The belt tensioners will not be triggered in theevent of minor collisions, if the vehicle over-turns, or in accidents where no major forcesact on the vehicle.

Note● If the seat belt tensioners are triggered, afine dust is produced. This is normal and itis not an indication of fire in the vehicle.● The relevant safety requirements must beobserved when the vehicle or componentsof the system are scrapped. Specialisedworkshops are familiar with these regula-tions, which are also available to you.

Maintenance and disposal of belttensioners

The belt tensioners are components of theseat belts that are installed in the seats ofyour vehicle. If you work on the belt tension-ers or remove and install parts of the system

when performing other repair work, the seatbelt may be damaged. The consequencemay be that, in the event of an accident, thebelt tensioners function incorrectly or maynot function at all.

So that the effectiveness of the seat belt ten-sioner is not reduced and that removed partsdo not cause any injuries or environmentalpollution, regulations, which are known to thespecialised workshops, must be observed.

WARNING● Improper use or repairs not carried out byqualified mechanics increase the risk of se-vere or fatal injuries. The belt tensionersmay fail to trigger or may trigger in thewrong circumstances.● Never attempt to repair, adjust, remove orinstall parts of the belt tensioners or seatbelts.● The seat belt tensioner, seat belt and au-tomatic retractor cannot be repaired.● Any work on the belt tensioners and seatbelts, including the removal and refitting ofsystem parts in conjunction with other re-pair work, must be performed by a special-ised workshop only.● The belt tensioners will only provide pro-tection for one accident and must bechanged if they have been activated.

Airbag system

Brief introduction

Why is it so important to wear aseat belt and to sit correctly?

For the inflating airbags to achieve the bestprotection, the seat belt must always be wornproperly and the correct sitting position mustbe assumed.

The airbag system is not a substitute for seatbelts, but it is an integral part of the vehicle'soverall passive safety system. Please bear inmind that the airbag system can only workeffectively when the vehicle occupants arewearing their seat belts correctly and haveadjusted the head restraints properly. There-fore, it is most important to properly wear theseat belts at all times, not only because this isrequired by law in most countries, but also foryour safety ››› page 70, Why wear a seatbelt.

The airbag inflates in a matter of seconds, soif you are not properly seated when the air-bag is triggered, you may sustain fatal inju-ries. Therefore, it is essential that all vehicleoccupants assume a correct sitting positionwhile travelling. »


Safety

Sharp braking before an accident may causea passenger not wearing a seat belt to bethrown forward into the area of the deployingairbag. In this case, the inflating airbag mayinflict critical or fatal injuries on the occupant.This also applies to children.

Always maintain the greatest possible dis-tance between yourself and the front airbag.This way, the front airbags can completelydeploy when triggered, providing their maxi-mum protection.

The most important factors for triggering theairbag are the type of accident, the angle ofimpact and the vehicle speed.

Whether or not the airbags are triggered de-pends primarily on the vehicle decelerationrate resulting from the collision and detectedby the control unit. If the vehicle decelerationoccurring during the collision and measuredby the control unit remains below the speci-fied reference values, the front, side and/orcurtain airbags will not be triggered. Take intoaccount that the visible damage in a vehicleinvolved in an accident, no matter how seri-ous, is not a determining factor for the air-bags to have been triggered.

WARNING● Wearing the seat belt incorrectly or as-suming an incorrect sitting position canlead to critical or fatal injuries.

● All vehicle occupants, including children,who are not properly belted can sustaincritical or fatal injuries if the airbag is trig-gered. Children up to 12 years old shouldalways travel on the rear seat. Never trans-port children in the vehicle if they are notrestrained or the restraint system is not ap-propriate for their age, size or weight.● If you are not wearing a seat belt, or ifyou lean forward or to the side while travel-ling or assume an incorrect sitting position,there is a substantially increased risk of in-jury. This increased risk of injury will be fur-ther increased if you are struck by an inflat-ing airbag.● To reduce the risk of injury from an inflat-ing airbag, always wear the seat belt prop-erly ››› page 70.● Always adjust the front seats properly.

Description of airbag system


The airbag system is not a substitute for theseat belts. The airbag system offers addition-al protection for the driver and passenger incombination with the seat belts.

The airbag system comprises the follow-ing modules (as per vehicle equipment):● Electronic control unit

● Front airbags for driver and passenger● Knee airbag for the driver● Side airbags● Head airbag● Airbag control lamp on the instrumentpanel ››› page 80● Key-operated switch for front passengerairbag● Control lamp for disabled/enabled statusof the front passenger airbag.

The airbag system operation is monitoredelectronically. The airbag control lamp will il-luminate for a few seconds every time the ig-nition is switched on (self-diagnosis).

There is a fault in the system if the controllamp :● does not light up when the ignition isswitched on ››› page 80,● turns off after 4 seconds after the ignition isswitched on,● turns off and then lights up again after theignition is switched on,● illuminates or flashes while the vehicle ismoving.

The airbag system is not triggered if:● the ignition is switched off● there is a minor frontal collision

76

Airbag system

● there is a minor side collision● there is a rear-end collision● the vehicle turns over.

WARNING● The seat belts and airbags can only pro-vide maximum protection if the occupantsare seated correctly ››› page 65, Correctposition of the vehicle occupants.● If a fault has occurred in the airbag sys-tem, have the system checked immediatelyby a specialised workshop. Otherwisethere is a danger that during a collision, thesystem may fail to trigger, or not triggercorrectly.

Airbag activation

The airbags deploy extremely rapidly, withinthousandths of a second, to provide addition-al protection in the event of an accident. Afine dust may develop when the airbag de-ploys. This is normal and it is not an indicationof fire in the vehicle.

The airbag system is only ready to functionwhen the ignition is on.

In special accidents instances, several air-bags may activate at the same time.

In the event of minor head-on and side colli-sions, rear-end collisions, overturning or roll-over of the vehicle, airbags do not activate.

Activation factorsThe conditions that lead to the airbag systemactivating in each situation cannot be gener-alised. Some factors play an important role,such as the properties of the object the vehi-cle hits (hard/soft), angle of impact, vehiclespeed, etc.

Deceleration trajectory is key for airbag acti-vation.

The control unit analyses the collision trajec-tory and activates the respective restraintsystem.

If the deceleration rate is below the prede-fined reference value in the control unit theairbags will not be triggered, even though theaccident may cause extensive damage to thecar.

The following airbags are triggered in seri-ous head-on collisions:● Driver airbag.● Front passenger front airbag● Knee airbag for the driver.

The following airbags are triggered in seri-ous side-on collisions:● Front side airbag on the side of the acci-dent.● Curtain (head) airbag on the side of the ac-cident.

In an accident with airbag activation:● the interior lights switch on (if the interiorlight switch is in the courtesy light position);● the hazard warning lights switch on;● all doors are unlocked;● the fuel supply to the engine is cut.

Airbag safety instructions

Front airbags


WARNING● The deployment space between the frontpassengers and the airbags must not inany case be occupied by other passenger,pets and objects.● The airbags provide protection for justone accident; replace them once they havedeployed.● It is also important not to attach any ob-jects such as cup holders or telephonemountings to the surfaces covering the air-bag units.● Do not attempt to modify components ofthe airbag system in any way.

77

Safety

Knee airbag*


WARNING● The knee airbag is deployed in front ofthe driver's knees. Always keep the deploy-ment areas of the knee airbags free.● Never not fix objects to the cover or in thedeployment area of the knee airbag.● Adjust the driver's seat so that there is adistance of at least 10 cm (4 inches) be-tween your knees and the location of thethis airbag. If your physical constitutionprevents you from meeting these require-ments, make sure you contact a special-ised workshop.

Side airbags*


WARNING● If you do not wear a seat belt, if you leanforward, or are not seated correctly whilethe vehicle is in motion, you are at a greaterrisk of injury if the side airbag system istriggered in an accident.● In order for the side airbags to providetheir maximum protection, the prescribed

sitting position must always be maintainedwith seat belts fastened while travelling.● In a side-on collision the side airbags willnot work if the sensors do not correctlymeasure the pressure increase on the inte-rior of the doors, due to air escapingthrough the areas with holes or openings inthe door panel.● Never drive if the interior door panelshave been removed or if the panels havenot been correctly fitted.● Never drive the vehicle if the loudspeak-ers in the door panels have been removed,unless the holes left by the loudspeakershave been closed properly.● Always check that the openings areclosed or covered if loudspeakers or otherequipment are fitted inside the door pan-els.● Occupants of the outer seats must nevercarry any objects or pets in the deploy-ment space between them and the airbags,or allow children or other passengers totravel in this position. It is also importantnot to attach any accessories (such as cupholders) to the doors. This would impair theprotection offered by the side airbags.● The built-in coat hooks should be usedonly for lightweight clothing. Do not leaveany heavy or sharp-edged objects in thepockets.● Great forces, such as hard blows or kicks,must not be exerted upon the backrest bol-

ster because the system may be damaged.In this case, the side airbags would not betriggered.● Under no circumstances should protec-tive covers be fitted over seats with sideairbags unless the covers have been ap-proved for use in your vehicle. Because theairbag deploys from the side of the back-rest, the use of conventional seat coverswould obstruct the side airbag, seriouslyreducing the airbag's effectiveness.● Any damage to the original seat uphols-tery or around the seams of the side airbagunits must be repaired immediately by aspecialised workshop.● The airbags provide protection for justone accident; replace them once they havedeployed.● Any work on the side airbag system or re-moval and installation of the airbag com-ponents for other repairs (such as removalof the front seat) should only be performedby a specialised workshop. Otherwise,faults may occur during the airbag systemoperation.● Do not attempt to modify components ofthe airbag system in any way.

Curtain airbags*


78

Airbag system

WARNING● In order for the head-protection airbagsto provide their maximum protection, theprescribed sitting position must always bemaintained with seat belts fastened whiletravelling.● For safety reasons, the curtain airbagmust be disabled in those vehicles fittedwith a screen dividing the interior of the ve-hicle. See your technical service to makethis adjustment.● There must be no other persons, animalsor objects between the occupants of theouter seats and the deployment space ofthe head-protection airbags so that thehead-protection airbag can deploy com-pletely without restriction and provide thegreatest possible protection. Therefore,sun blinds which have not been expresslyapproved for use in your vehicle may not beattached to the side windows● The built-in coat hooks should be usedonly for lightweight clothing. Do not leaveany heavy or sharp-edged objects in thepockets. Please, do not hang the clothes oncoat hangers.● The airbags provide protection for justone accident; replace them once they havedeployed.● Any work on the head-protection airbagsystem or removal and installation of theairbag components for other repairs (suchas removal of the roof lining) should onlybe performed by a specialised workshop.

Otherwise, faults may occur during the air-bag system operation.● Do not attempt to modify components ofthe airbag system in any way.● The side and head airbags are managedthrough sensors located in the interior ofthe front doors. To ensure the correct oper-ation of the side and curtain airbags nei-ther the doors nor the door panels shouldbe modified in any way (e.g. fitting loud-speakers). If the front door is damaged, theairbag system may not work correctly. Allwork carried out on the front door must bedone in a specialised workshop.

Deactivating airbags

Activation and deactivation of frontpassenger airbag*

Fig. 98 Switch for activating and deactivatingthe front passenger airbag.

Fig. 99 Dashboard: control lamp for deactiva-ted front passenger airbag in centre console. »

79

Safety

Deactivate the front passenger front airbagonly if you have to use a rear-facing childseat in the front passenger seat.

SEAT recommends fitting the child seat in therear seat to avoid having to deactivate thefront passenger airbag.

Front passenger front airbag switchWhen the front passenger airbag is deacti-vated, this means that only the front passen-ger front airbag is deactivated. All the otherairbags in the vehicle remain activated.

Disconnect the front passenger front air-bag● Switch the ignition off.● Open the door on the front passenger side.● Insert the key into the slot of the switch fordeactivating the front passenger airbag››› Fig. 98. About 3/4 of the key should enter;this is as far as it will go.● Turn the key gently to change its position to. If you have difficulty, ensure that you haveinserted the key as far as it will go.● Close the front passenger door.● Check, with the ignition switched on, thatthe control lamp remains lit where itsays in the centre of thedash panel ››› Fig. 99.

Connect the front passenger front airbag● Switch the ignition off.● Open the front passenger door.● Insert the key into the slot of the switch fordeactivating the front passenger airbag››› Fig. 98. About 3/4 of the key should enter,as far as it will go.● Turn the key gently to the position. If youhave difficulty, ensure that you have insertedthe key as far as it will go.● Close the front passenger door.● Check, with the ignition switched on, thatthe control lamp is not lit where it says in the centre of the dashpanel ››› Fig. 99. The control lamp lightsup for 60 seconds and then goes off.

WARNING● The driver of the vehicle is responsible fordisabling or switching on the airbag.● Always switch off the ignition before dis-abling the front passenger airbag! Failureto do so could result in a fault in the airbagdeactivation system.● Never leave the key in the airbag disa-bling switch as it could get damaged or en-able or disable the airbag during driving.● If for any reason an airbag is deactivated,reactivate it as soon as possible so that itcan fulfil its protective function.

Airbag system control lamps

It lights up on the combi-instru-ment

Fault in airbag system and seat belt tensioners.Have the system checked immediately by a special-ised workshop.

It lights up on the dash panel

Front passenger front airbag disabled.Check whether the airbag should remain disabled

It lights up on the dash panel

Front passenger airbag enabled.The control lamp switches off automatically 60 sec-onds after the ignition is switched on

Several warning and control lamps light upfor a few seconds when the ignition is switch-ed on, signalling that the function is beingverified. They will switch off after a few sec-onds.

If the airbag and seat belt tensioner systemcontrol lamp remains on or flashes, it indi-cates a malfunction in the airbag and seatbelt tensioner system ››› . Have the systemchecked immediately by a specialised work-shop.

If the front passenger airbag is deactivated,the warning lamp re-mains lit on the dash panel to remind you that

80

Transporting children safely

the airbag is deactivated. If, with the frontpassenger airbag deactivated, this lampdoes not remain lit or if it is lit together withthe control lamp on the dash panel, thereis a fault in the airbag system ››› . If the con-trol lamp is flashing, there is a fault in the dis-abling of the airbag system ››› . Have thesystem checked immediately by a special-ised workshop.

WARNINGIn the event of a fault in the airbag and seatbelt tensioner system, the airbags and seatbelts may not trigger correctly, may fail totrigger or may even trigger unexpectedly.● The vehicle occupants run the risk of sus-taining severe or fatal injuries. Have thesystem checked immediately by a special-ised workshop.● Do not mount a child seat in the frontpassenger seat or remove the mountedchild seat! The front passenger front airbagmay deploy during an accident in spite ofthe fault.

CAUTIONAlways pay attention to any lit controllamps and to the corresponding descrip-tions and instructions to avoid damage tothe vehicle or harm to the occupants.

Transporting childrensafely

Safety for children

Introduction

For safety reasons, as we have learned fromaccident statistics, we recommend that chil-dren under 12 years of age travel in the rearseats. Depending on their age, height andweight, children travelling in rear seats mustuse a child seat or a seat belt. For safety rea-sons, the child seat should be installed in therear seat, behind the front passenger seat orin the centre back seat.

The physical laws involved and the forcesacting in a collision apply also to children››› page 72. But unlike adults, children do nothave fully developed muscle and bone struc-tures. This means that children are subject toa greater risk of injury.

To reduce the risk of injuries, children must al-ways use special child restraint systemswhen travelling in the vehicle.

We recommend the use of child safety prod-ucts from the SEAT Original Accessories Pro-gramme, which includes systems for all agesmade by “Peke” (not for all countries) (seewww.seat.com).

These systems have been especially de-signed and approved, complying with theECE-R44. regulation.

SEAT recommends securing the child seatsshown on the website as described below:

● Child seats in the opposite direction of trav-el (group 0+): ISOFIX and support bracket(Peke G0 Plus + ISOFIX Base (RWF)).● Child seats in the direction of travel (group1): ISOFIX and Top Tether (Peke G1 ISOFIXDUO Plus). »

81

Safety

● Child seats directed towards the front ofthe vehicle for group 2: safety belt and ISOFIX(Peke G3 KIDFIX)1).● Child seats directed towards the front ofthe vehicle for group 3: safety belt and ISOFIX(Peke G3 KIDFIX)1).

Follow the manufacturer's instructions andobserve any statutory requirements when in-stalling and using child seats. Always readand note ››› page 82.

We recommend you always carry the manu-facturer's Child Seat Instruction Manual to-gether with the on-board documentation.

Important information regardingthe front passenger's airbag


Read and always observe the safety informa-tion included in the following chapters:

● Safety distance with respect to the passen-ger airbag ››› page 75.

● Objects between the passenger and thepassenger side airbag ››› in Front airbagson page 77.

The passenger side front airbag, when ena-bled, is a serious risk for a child that is facingbackward since the airbag can strike the seatwith such force that it can cause serious orfatal injuries. Children up to 12 years oldshould always travel on the rear seat.

Therefore we strongly recommend you totransport children on the rear seats. This isthe safest location in the vehicle. Alternative-ly, the front passenger airbag can be disa-bled with a key-operated switch ››› page 79.When transporting children, use a child seatsuitable for the age and size of each child››› page 83.

WARNING● If a child seat is secured to the front pas-senger seat, the risk to the child of sustain-ing critical or fatal injuries in the event of anaccident increases.● An inflating front passenger airbag canstrike the rear-facing child seat and projectit with great force against the door, the roofor the backrest.

● Never install a child seat facing back-wards on the front passenger seat unlessthe front passenger front airbag has beendisabled. Risk of potentially fatal injuries tothe child! However, if it is necessary, in ex-ceptional cases, to transport a child in thefront passenger seat, the front passengerfront airbag must always be disabled››› page 79. If the passenger seat has aheight adjustment option, move it to thehighest, most upright position. If you have afixed seat, do not install any child restraintsystem in this location.● For those vehicles that do not include akey lock switch to deactivate the airbag,the vehicle must be taken to a technicalservice. Do not forget to reconnect the air-bag when an adult wants to sit in the frontpassenger seat.● All vehicle occupants, especially chil-dren, must assume the proper sitting posi-tion and be properly belted in while travel-ling.● Never hold children or babies on your lap,this can result in potentially fatal injuries tothe child!● Never allow a child to be transported in avehicle without being properly secured, or

1) Temporarily, the child seat recommended bythe Accessories Programme for groups 2 and 3will be ROMER KIDFIX XP© instead of Peke G3KIDFIX. It is available from the SEAT website.

82


to stand up or kneel on a seat while travel-ling. In an accident, the child could be flungthrough the vehicle, causing possibly fatalinjuries to themselves and to the other vehi-cle occupants.● If children assume an improper sitting po-sition when the vehicle is moving, they ex-pose themselves to greater risk of injury inthe event of a sudden braking manoeuvreor in an accident. This is particularly impor-tant if the child is travelling on the frontpassenger seat and the airbag system istriggered in an accident; as this couldcause serious injury or even death.● A suitable child seat can protect yourchild!● Never leave a child alone in the child seator inside the vehicle because depending onthe season, very high temperatures may bereached inside a parked vehicle, whichcould be fatal.● Children who are less than 1.5 metres tallmust not wear a normal seat belt without achild seat, as this could cause injuries tothe abdominal and neck areas during asudden braking manoeuvre or in an acci-dent.● Do not allow the seat belt to becometwisted and the seat belt should be proper-ly in place ››› page 70.● Only one child may occupy a child seat››› page 83, Child seats.

● When a child seat is mounted in the rearseats, the door child-proof lock should beactivated ››› page 138.

Child seats

Safety instructions


WARNINGWhen travelling, children must be securedin the vehicle with a restraint system suita-ble for age, weight and size.● Read and always observe informationand warnings concerning the use of childseats ››› page 82.

WARNINGThe retaining rings are designed only foruse with “ISOFIX” and Top Tether* systemchild seats.● Never secure other child seats that donot have the “ISOFIX” or Top Tether* sys-tem, or retaining belts or objects to the fas-tening rings - this can result in potentiallyfatal injuries to the child.● Ensure that the child seat is secured cor-rectly using the “ISOFIX” and Top Tether*securing rings.

WARNINGAn undue installation of the safety seat willincrease the risk of injury in the event of acrash.● Never tie the retainer strap to a hook inthe luggage compartment.● Never secure or tie luggage or otheritems to the lower anchorages (ISOFIX) orthe upper ones (Top Tether).

Categorisation of child seats intogroups

Use only child seats that are officially ap-proved and suitable for the child.

Child seats are subject to the regulation ECE-R 44 or ECE-R 129. ECE-R stands for: Eco-nomic Commission for Europe Regulation.

The child seats are grouped into 5 catego-ries:

Group 0 Up to 10 kg (up to around 9months)

Group 0+ Up to 13 kg (up to around 18months)

Group 1 from 9 to 18 kg (up to approx. 4years old)

Group 2 from 15 to 25 kg (up to approx. 7years old) »

83

Safety

Group 3 from 22 to 36 kg (up to approx. 7years old)

Child seats that have been tested and ap-proved under the ECE-R 44 or ECE-R 129standard bear the test mark ECE-R 44 orECE-R 129 on the seat (the letter E in a circlewith the test number below it).

Follow the manufacturer's instructions andobserve any statutory requirements when in-stalling and using child seats.

We recommend you to always include themanufacturer's Child Seat Instruction Manualtogether with the on-board documentation.

SEAT recommends you use child seats fromthe Original Accessories Catalogue. Thesechild seats have been designed and testedfor use in SEAT vehicles. You can find the rightchild seat for your model and age group atSEAT dealers.

Child seats by approval categoryChild seats may have the approval categoryof universal, semi-universal, vehicle specific(all according to the ECE-R 44 standard) or i-Size (according to the ECE-R 129 standard).

● Universal: child seats with universal appro-val can be installed in all vehicles. There is noneed to consult any list of models. In the caseof universal approval for ISOFIX, the childseat is additionally provided with a Top Tetherbelt.

● Semi-universal: semi-universal approval,in addition to the standard requirements ofuniversal approval, requires safety devices tolock the child seat, which require additionaltesting. Child seats with semi-universal ap-proval include a list of vehicle models forwhich they can be installed.● Vehicle-specific: vehicle-specific approvalrequires a dynamic test of the child seat foreach vehicle model separately. Child seatswith vehicle-specific approval also include alist of vehicle models for which they can beinstalled.● i-Size: child seats with i-Size approval mustmeet the requirements prescribed in the ECE-R 129 standard in relation to installation andsafety. Child seat manufacturers can tell youwhich seats have i-Size approval for this vehi-cle.

Attachment systems

Depending on the country, different attach-ment systems are used for safely installingchild seats.

Attachment systems overview● ISOFIX: ISOFIX is a standardised attach-ment system allowing quick and safe attach-ment of child seats in the vehicle. ISOFIX at-tachment establishes a rigid connection be-tween the child seat and the car body.

The child seat has two rigid attachment clips,called connectors. These connectors are fit-ted into the ISOFIX attachment rings foundbetween the seat cushion and the backrestof the vehicle's back seat (on the sides). ISO-FIX attachment systems are used mainly inEurope ››› page 28. If necessary, ISOFIXattachment may have to be supplementedwith a Top Tether belt or a support bracket.

● Automatic three-point seat belt. When-ever possible, it is preferable to attach thechild seats with the ISOFIX system rather thanattaching them with an automatic three-pointseat belt ››› page 27.

Additional attachment:

● Top Tether: the Top Tether belt is guidedover the back of the rear seat and attachedto an anchor point with a hook. Anchor pointsare located at the back of the rear seat back-rest on the boot side ››› page 31. Therings for retaining the Top Tether belt aremarked with an anchor symbol.● Support bracket: some child seats rest onthe floor of the vehicle with a support bracket.The support bracket prevents the child seatfrom tipping forward in the event of impact.Child seats fitted with a support bracketshould only be used in the passenger seatand side rear seats ››› . For the assembly ofthis type of seat you should also consult thelist of approved vehicles for this assembly,

84


available in the instructions for child restraintsystems.

Recommended systems for attachingchild seatsSEAT recommends attaching child seats asfollows:

● Baby carriers or child seats in the oppo-site direction of travel: ISOFIX and supportbracket or iSize.● Child seats in the direction of travel: ISO-FIX and Top Tether.

WARNINGIncorrect use of the support bracket cancause serious or fatal injury.● Make sure the support bracket is correct-ly and safely installed.

85

Emergencies

Emergencies

Self-helpVehicle tool kit, anti-puncture kit*

The tools and anti-puncture kit* are storedunder the floor panel in the luggage com-partment.

To access the vehicle tools:

– Lift up the floor surface by the plastic han-dle until it is fastened to the tabs on bothsides.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the an-ti-puncture kit* is located under the floorpanel in the luggage compartment.

The tool kit includes:

● Jack*● Wire hook for pulling off the wheel cov-er*/wheel bolt cap clip.● Box spanner for wheel bolts*● Towline anchorage● Adapter for the anti-theft wheel bolts*● Towing bracket device

Some of the items listed are only provided incertain model versions, or are optional extras.

NoteThe jack does not generally require anymaintenance. If required, it should begreased using universal type grease.

Tyre repair

TMS (Tyre Mobility System)*

Read the additional information carefully››› page 54

The Anti-puncture kit* (Tyre Mobility System)will reliably seal punctures caused by thepenetration of a foreign body of up to about4 mm in diameter. Do not remove foreignobjects, e.g. screws or nails, from the tyre.

After inserting the sealant residue in the tyre,you must again check the tyre pressureabout 10 minutes after starting the engine.

You should only use the tyre mobility set if thevehicle is parked in a safe place, you are fa-miliar with the procedure and you have thenecessary tyre mobility set! Otherwise, youshould seek professional assistance.

Do not use the tyre sealant in the followingcases:● If the wheel rim has been damaged.

● In outside temperatures below -20°C(-4°F).● In the event of cuts or perforations in thetyre greater than 4 mm.● If you have been driving with very low pres-sure or a completely flat tyre.● If the sealant bottle has passed its use bydate.

WARNINGUsing the tyre mobility system can be dan-gerous, especially when filling the tyre atthe roadside. Please observe the followingrules to minimise the risk of injury:● Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possi-ble. Park it at a safe distance from sur-rounding traffic to fill the tyre.● Ensure the ground on which you park isflat and solid.● All passengers and particularly childrenmust keep a safe distance from the workarea.● Turn on the hazard warning lights to warnother road users.● Use the tyre mobility system only if youare familiar with the necessary procedures.Otherwise, you should seek professionalassistance.● The tyre mobility set is intended for tem-porary emergency use only until you canreach the nearest specialised workshop.

86

Self-help

● Replace the repaired tyre with the tyremobility set as soon as possible.● The sealant is a health hazard and mustbe cleaned immediately if it comes intocontact with the skin.● Always keep the tyre mobility set out ofthe reach of small children.● Always stop the engine, apply the hand-brake lever firmly and engage gear if usinga manual gearbox, in order to reduce therisk of vehicle involuntary movement.

WARNINGA tyre filled with sealant does not have thesame performance properties as a conven-tional tyre.● Never drive faster than 80 km/h(50 mph).● Avoid heavy acceleration, hard brakingand fast cornering.● Drive for only 10 minutes at a maximumspeed of 80 km/h (50 mph) and then checkthe tyre.

For the sake of the environmentDispose of used or expired sealant observ-ing any legal requirements.

NoteA new bottle of sealant can be purchasedat SEAT dealerships.

NoteTake into account the separate instructionmanual of the tyre mobility set* manufac-turer.

Contents of the tyre mobility sys-tem*

Fig. 100 Standard display: contents of the an-ti-puncture kit.

The anti-puncture kit is located underneaththe floor covering in the luggage compart-ment. It includes the following components››› Fig. 100:

Tyre valve removerSticker indicating maximum speed “max.80 km/h” or “max. 50 mph”

1

2

Filler tube with capAir compressorTube for inflating tyresWarning provided by tyre pressure moni-toring system (it can also be integrated inthe compressor).Air bleed screw (in its place, the compres-sor may have a button).ON/OFF switch12 volt connectorBottle of sealantSpare tyre valve

The valve insert remover 1 has a gap atthe lower end for a valve insert. The valve in-sert can only be screwed or unscrewed in thisway. This also applies to its replacement part11 .

WARNINGWhen inflating the wheel, the air compres-sor and the inflator tube may become hot.● Protect hands and skin from hot parts.● Do not place the hot flexible inflator tubeor hot air compressor on flammable mate-rial.● Allow them to cool before storing the de-vice.● If it is not possible to inflate the tyre to atleast 2.0 bars (29 psi / 200 kPa), the tyre istoo badly damaged. The sealant is not in a »

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

87

Emergencies

good condition to seal the tyre. Do not con-tinue driving. Seek specialist assistance.

CAUTIONSwitch off the air compressor after a maxi-mum of 8 operational minutes to avoidoverheating! Before switching on the aircompressor again, let it cool for several mi-nutes.

Check after 10 minutes of driving

Screw the inflator tube ››› Fig. 100 5 againand check the pressure on the gauge 6 .

1.3 bar (19 psi / 130 kPa) and lower:● Stop the vehicle! The tyre cannot besealed sufficiently with the tyre mobility set.● You should obtain professional assistance››› .

1.4 bar (20 psi / 140 kPa) and higher:● Set the tyre pressure to the correct valueagain.● Carefully resume your journey until youreach the nearest specialised workshop with-out exceeding 80 km/h (50 mph).● Have the damaged tyre replaced.

WARNINGDriving with an unsealed tyre is dangerousand can cause accidents and serious in-jury.● Do not continue driving if the tyre pres-sure is 1.3 bar (19 psi / 130 kPa) and lower.● Seek specialist assistance.

Manual unlocking/locking

Introduction

Read the additional information carefully››› page 17, ››› page 18.

The doors, rear lid and panoramic tilting sun-roof can be locked manually and partiallyopened, for example if the key or the centrallocking is damaged.

WARNINGOpening and closing doors carelessly cancause serious injury.● If the vehicle is locked from outside, thedoors and windows cannot be opened fromthe inside.● Never leave children or disabled peoplealone in the car. They could be trapped inthe car in an emergency and will not beable to get themselves to safety.

● Depending on the time of the year, tem-peratures inside a locked and closed vehi-cle can be extremely high or extremely lowresulting in serious injuries and illness oreven death, particularly for young children.

WARNINGGetting in the way of the doors and the rearlid is dangerous and can lead to serious in-jury.● Open and close the doors and the rear lidonly when there is nobody in the way.

CAUTIONWhen opening and closing in an emergen-cy, carefully disassemble components andthen reassemble them carefully to avoiddamage to the vehicle.

Changing the windscreenwiper blades

Changing the windscreen and rearwindow wiper blades


The windscreen wiper blades are supplied asstandard with a layer of graphite. This layer is

88

Self-help

responsible for ensuring that the wipe is silent.If the graphite layer is damaged, the noise ofthe water as it is wiped across the windscreenwill be louder.

Check the condition of the wiper blades reg-ularly. If the wipers scrape across theglass, they should be changed if they aredamaged, or cleaned if they are dirty ››› .

Damaged windscreen wiper blades shouldbe replaced immediately. These are availa-ble from qualified workshops.

WARNINGWorn or dirty windscreen wiper blades re-duce visibility and increase the risk of acci-dent and serious injury.● Always replace damaged or worn wind-screen wiper blades or blades that no lon-ger clean the windscreen properly.

CAUTION● Damaged or dirty windscreen wiperscould scratch the glass.● If products containing solvents, roughsponges or sharp objects are used to cleanthe blades, the graphite layer will be dam-aged.● Never use fuel, nail varnish remover, paintthinner or similar products to clean the win-dows.● In icy conditions, always check that thewiper blades are not frozen to the glass be-

fore using the wipers. In cold weather, itmay help to leave the vehicle parked withthe wipers in service position››› page 62.

CAUTION● To prevent damage to the bonnet and thewiper arms, only leave them in the serviceposition.● Before driving, always lower the wiperarms.

Tow-starting and towing

Introduction

Tow-starting means starting the engine ofthe vehicle while another pulls it.

Towing means one vehicle pulling anotherthat is not roadworthy.

Always consider the legal provisions relatingto tow-starting and towing.

For technical reasons, towing a vehiclewith a discharged battery is not allowed.The jump start should be used instead››› page 60.

If the vehicle comes with the Keyless Accesssystem, towing is only allowed with the igni-tion on!

The vehicle battery drains if the vehicle istowed with the engine switched off and theignition connected. Depending on the batterycharge status, the drop in voltage may be solarge, even after just a few minutes, that noelectrical device in the vehicle may work e.g.the hazard warning lights. In vehicles with theKeyless Access system, the steering wheelcould lock ››› .

WARNINGA vehicle with no power should never betowed.● During towing, never switch off the igni-tion with the starter button. Otherwise, theelectronic lock of the steering columncould suddenly get blocked and it would beimpossible to steer the vehicle. This couldcause an accident, serious injury and lossof control of the vehicle.● If during towing the vehicle runs out ofpower, stop towing immediately and re-quest the assistance of specialist person-nel.

WARNINGVehicle handling and braking capacitychange considerably during towing. Pleaseobserve the following instructions to mini-mise the risk of serious accidents and in-jury:● As the driver of the vehicle being towed: »

89

Emergencies

– You should depress the brake muchharder as the brake servo does not op-erate. Pay the utmost attention to avoidcrashing into the towing vehicle.

– More strength is required at the steer-ing wheel as the power steering doesnot operate when the engine is switch-ed off.

● As the driver of the towing vehicle:– Accelerate with particular care and

caution.– Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres.– Brake earlier than usual and more

smoothly.

CAUTION● To avoid damaging the vehicle, for exam-ple the paint, remove and replace the lidand towing eye carefully.● Unburnt fuel could enter the catalyticconverter and damage it during towing.

Indications for tow-starting

Vehicle's should not generally be tow-started. The jump start should be used in-stead ››› page 60.

For technical reasons, towing the followingvehicles is not allowed:

● Vehicles with an automatic gearbox.

● If the vehicle battery is discharged, be-cause in vehicles with the Keyless Accesslocking and ignition system the steering re-mains locked and the electronic parkingbrake cannot be deactivated nor can theelectronic lock of the steering column be re-leased if they are activated.● If the battery is flat, it is possible that theengine control units may not operate correct-ly.

However, if the vehicle must absolutely betow-started (in the case of manual gear-boxes):● Engage the 2nd or 3rd gear.● Keep the clutch pressed down.● Switch on the ignition and the hazard warn-ing lights.● Once both vehicles are moving, release theclutch.● Once the engine starts, press the clutchand disengage the gear to avoid collidingwith the towing vehicle.

CAUTIONWhen tow-starting, unburnt fuel could en-ter the catalytic converter and damage it.

NoteThe vehicle can only be tow-started if theelectronic parking brake and, if appropri-

ate, the electronic lock of the steering col-umn are deactivated. If the vehicle has nopower supply or there is an electric systemfault, the engine must be tow-started to de-activate the electronic parking brake andthe electronic lock of the steering column.

Indications for towing

Tow rope or tow barIt is safer for the vehicle to be towed using atow bar, avoiding damage to the vehicle. Atow rope should only be used if a tow bar isnot available.

A tow rope should be slightly elastic to avoiddamage to both vehicles. It is advisable touse a tow rope made of synthetic fibre or sim-ilarly elastic material.

Only attach the tow rope or the tow bar tothe towing eyes provided or a towing bracket.

If the vehicle is factory-equipped with atowing bracket, it is only allowed to tow witha tow bar if this has been specially designedto be installed with a tow hitch ››› page 333.

When the vehicle needs to be towed:Check whether the vehicle may be towed››› page 91, Cases where towing a vehi-cle is not allowed.

● Switch the ignition on.90

Self-help

● Put the gearbox lever in neutral or the se-lector lever in the N ››› page 253 position.● Do not allow the vehicle to be towed atspeeds of over 50 km/h (30 mph).● The vehicle must not be towed further than50 km (30 miles).● If a breakdown lorry is used, vehicles withautomatic transmission are only allowed tobe towed with the front wheels suspended.

Towing vehicles with four-wheel drive(4Drive)Four-wheel drive vehicles (4Drive) can betowed using a tow bar or tow rope. If the vehi-cle is towed with the front or rear axle sus-pended, the engine must be switched off,otherwise the transmission may be damaged.

Cases where towing a vehicle is not al-lowed● If, due to a fault, the gearbox is out of lubri-cant.● If the vehicle battery is discharged, be-cause the steering remains locked and, if ap-propriate, the electronic parking brake can-not be deactivated or the electronic lock ofthe steering column released.● If a distance above 50 km needs to be trav-elled.

● When, for example, after an accident, thesmooth rotation of the wheels or the steeringoperation cannot be guaranteed.

When the vehicle is to tow another vehicle:● Observe legal requirements.● Keep in mind the instructions in the manualon towing vehicles.

NoteThe vehicle can only be towed if the elec-tronic parking brake and the electroniclock of the steering column are deactiva-ted. If the vehicle has no power supply orthere is an electric system fault, the enginemust be tow-started ››› page 60 to de-activate the electronic parking brake andthe electronic lock of the steering column.

Fitting the front towing eye

Fig. 101 Front bumper on right: remove the lid.

Fig. 102 Right side of the front bumper: towlineanchorage screwed in.

The housing of the screw towing eye is on theright side of the front bumper behind a lid››› Fig. 101.

The towing eye should always be kept in thevehicle. »

91

Emergencies

Bear in mind the instructions for towing››› page 90.

Fitting the towline anchorage● Remove the towing eye from the vehicletool kit in the luggage compartment››› page 86.● Extract the lid for the towing eye using thevehicle key blade (if you do not have the spe-cific tool), pressing on the side and leveringgently from left to right.● Remove the lid and let it hang from the ve-hicle.● Screw the towing eye in the housing byturning it to the maximum anticlock-wise ››› . Use a suitable object that cancompletely and securely tighten the towingeye in its housing.● After towing, unscrew the towing eyeclockwise with a suitable object.● Insert the side tab of the lid into the openingof the bumper and press until the tab is prop-erly clipped into the bumper.● Clean the towing eye if necessary and thenstore it in the luggage compartment alongwith the other vehicle tools.

CAUTIONThe towing eye must always be completelyand firmly tightened. Otherwise, it could bereleased while towing and tow-starting.

Fitting the rear towing eye

Fig. 103 Rear bumper on right: remove the lid.

Fig. 104 Right side of the rear bumper: towlineanchorage screwed in.

The housing of the screw towing eye is on theright side of the rear bumper behind a lid››› Fig. 103. Vehicles equipped as standardwith a towing bracket do not have any hous-ing for the screw towing eye behind the lid. Inthis case, the tow hitch needs to be extracted

or installed and used for towing››› page 330, ››› .

Bear in mind the instructions for towing››› page 90.

Assemble the rear towing eye (cars with-out a factory-equipped towing bracket)● Remove the towing eye from the vehicletool kit in the luggage compartment››› page 86.● Press the upper side of the lid ››› Fig. 103 tounclip it.● Remove the lid and let it hang from the ve-hicle.● Screw the towing eye in the housing byturning it to the maximum anticlockwise››› Fig. 104 ››› . Use a suitable object thatcan completely and securely tighten the tow-ing eye in its housing.● After towing, unscrew the towing eyeclockwise with a suitable object.● Insert the upper flange of the lid into theopening of the bumper and press the lowerside of the lid until the upper flange is insertedinto the bumper.● Clean the towing eye if necessary and thenstore it in the luggage compartment alongwith the other vehicle tools.

92

Fuses and bulbs

CAUTION● The towing eye must always be com-pletely and firmly tightened. Otherwise, itcould be released while towing and tow-starting.● If the vehicle is factory-equipped with atowing bracket, it is only allowed to towwith a tow bar if this has been specially de-signed to be installed with a tow hitch. If anunsuitable tow bar is used, both the towhitch and the vehicle may be damaged. In-stead, a tow rope should be used.

Driving tips for towing

Towing requires some expertise and experi-ence, especially when using a tow rope. Bothdrivers should be familiar with the difficultiesinvolved in towing. For this reason, inexper-ienced drivers should abstain from towing.

During towing, it should be ensured that noimpermissible tractive forces or shocks aregenerated. When towing on an unpavedroad, there is always a risk of overloading anddamaging the anchorage points.

During towing, the towing vehicle can signalthe change of direction even with the hazardwarning lights turned on. To do so, at thesame time, the turn signal lever must be oper-ated with ignition switched on. Meanwhile, thehazard warning lights will go off. When the

turn signal lever is returned to the rest posi-tion, the hazard warning lights will be auto-matically reactivated.

Notes for the driver of the towed vehicle● Leave the ignition on, so that the steering isnot blocked, and the electronic parking brakemay be deactivated and the turn signals andwash/wipe operated.● More strength is required at the steeringwheel as the power steering does not oper-ate when the engine is switched off.● You should depress the brake much harderas the brake servo does not operate. Avoidhitting the towing vehicle.● Bear in mind the information and instruc-tions in the manual of the vehicle to be towed.

Notes for the driver of the towing vehicle● Accelerate with particular care and cau-tion. Avoid sharp manoeuvres.● Brake earlier than usual and smoothly.● Bear in mind the information and instruc-tions in the manual of the towed vehicle.

Fuses and bulbs

Fuses

Introduction

In general, a fuse can be assigned to variouselectrical components. Likewise, an electricalcomponent can be protected by severalfuses.

Only replace fuses when the cause of theproblem has been solved. If a newly insertedfuse blows after a short time, you must havethe electrical system checked by a special-ised workshop as soon as possible.

WARNINGThe high voltages in the electrical systemcan give serious electrical shocks, causingburns and even death!● Never touch the electrical wiring of theignition system.● Take care not to cause short circuits inthe electrical system.

WARNINGUsing unsuitable fuses, repairing fuses orbridging a current circuit without fuses cancause a fire and serious injury.● Never use a fuse with a higher value. Onlyreplace fuses with a fuse of the same »

93

Emergencies

amperage (same colour and markings) andsize.● Never repair a fuse.● Never replace a fuse by a metal strip, sta-ple or similar.

CAUTION● To prevent damage to the vehicle's elec-tric system, before replacing a fuse alwaysturn off the ignition, the lights and all elec-trical elements and remove the key fromthe ignition.● If you replace a fuse with higher-ratingfuse, you could cause damage to anotherpart of the electrical system.● Protect the fuse boxes when open to pre-vent the entry of dust or humidity as theycan damage the electrical system.

Note● One component may have more than onefuse.● Several components may run on a singlefuse.

Vehicle interior fuses

Fig. 105 On the dashboard on the driver side(left guide): lid of the fuse box.

Fig. 106 Glove compartment (left guide): Ac-cess to the fuse box.

Opening and closing the fuse box situatedbelow the dash panel (left-hand drive)● Open: fold the cover down ››› Fig. 105.● Close: push back the cover it in until it clicksinto place.

Fuses behind the glove compartment(right-hand drive)To be able to access the fuse box:

94

Fuses and bulbs

● Undo the opening limiter ››› Fig. 106 A intwo steps: first, unlock the limiter by pullingback on it (arrow 1 ) and then move it gentlyto the right (arrow 2 ). Remove the guidewhen the cover is in the normal opening posi-tion (30°).● Free the side pivots B to release the coverto its second opening position (60°).

Follow the same procedure in reverse orderto return the glove compartment to its normalposition.

CAUTION● Always carefully remove the fuse boxcovers and refit them correctly to avoidproblems with your vehicle.● Protect the fuse boxes when open toavoid the entry of dust or humidity. Dirt andhumidity inside fuse boxes can cause dam-age to the electrical system.

Engine compartment fuses

Fig. 107 In the engine compartment: lid of thefuse box.

To open the engine compartment fuse box● Open the bonnet ››› page 348.● Press the locking tabs to release the fusebox cover ››› Fig. 107.● Then lift the cover out.● To fit the cover, place it on the fuse box.Push the locking tabs down until they clickaudibly into place.

Fuse placement


Only replace fuses with a fuse of the sameamperage (same colour and markings) andsize.

Fuses in the vehicle interior

No. Consumers/Amps

1 Adblue (SCR) 20

5 Gateway 5

6 Automatic gearbox lever 5

7Air conditioning and heatingcontrol panel, back windowheating, auxiliary heating.

10

8Diagnosis, handbrake switch,light switch, reverse light, interi-or lighting, driving mode, lit-updoor sill

10

9 Steering column 5

10 Radio display 7.5

11 Left lights 40

12 Radio 20

14 Air conditioner fan 40

15 Steering column release 10

16 Connectivity Box 7.5

17 Instrument panel, OCU 7.5

18 Rear camera 7.5

19 Kessy 7.5

20 SCR, engine relay, 1.5 10/15

21 4x4 Haldex Control Unit 15 »95

Emergencies

No. Consumers/Amps

22 Trailer 15

23 Electric sunroof 30

24 Right lights 40

25 Left door 30

26 Heated seats 30

27 Interior light 30

28 Trailer 25

32 Control unit for parking aid,front camera and radar 7.5/10

33 Airbag 5

34Reverse switch, climate sensor,electrochromic mirror, rearpower sockets (USB)

7.5

35 Diagnosis, headlight controlunit, headlight adjuster 10

36 Right LED headlight 7.5

37 Left LED headlight 7.5

38 Trailer 25

39 Right door 30

40 12V socket 20

42 Central locking 40

43 Beats Audio CAN and MOST. 30

44 Trailer 15

No. Consumers/Amps

45 Electric driver's seat 15

47 Rear window wiper 15

49 Starter motor; clutch sensor 5

50 Electric rear lid 40

52 Driving mode. 15

53 Heated rear window 30

Fuse arrangement in engine compartment

No. Consumers/Amps

1 ESP control unit 25

2 ESP control unit 40

3 Engine control unit (diesel/pet-rol) 30/15

4 Engine sensors 5/10

5 Engine sensors 7.5

6 Brake light sensor 5

7 Engine power supply 10

8 Lambda probe 10/15

9 Engine 5/10/20

10 Fuel pump control unit 15/20

11 PTC 40

12 PTC 40

No. Consumers/Amps

13 Automatic gearbox control unit 15/30

14 Heated windscreen 40

15 Horn 15

16 Petrol pump 5/15/20

17 Engine control unit 7.5

18 Terminal 30 (positive refer-ence) 5

19 Front windscreen washer 30

20 Alarm horn 10

22 Engine control unit 5

23 Starter motor 30

24 PTC 40

31 Pressure pump 15

33 Gearbox pump 30

37 Parking heating 20

Note● In the vehicle, there are more fuses thanthose indicated in this chapter. Theseshould only be changed by a specialisedworkshop.● Positions not containing a fuse do not ap-pear in the following tables.

96

Fuses and bulbs

● Some of the equipment listed in the ta-bles below pertain only to certain versionsof the model or are optional extras.● Please note that the above lists, whilecorrect at the time of printing, are subjectto change.

Changing a bulb

Topic introduction


Changing bulbs requires a certain degree ofpractical skill.

If you choose to change the engine compart-ment lamps yourself, remember that it is adangerous area ››› in Working in the en-gine compartment on page 348.

Always use identical bulbs with the samedesignation. The name can be found on thebase of the bulb holder.

Depending on how equipped the vehicle is,there are different sets of headlights and taillights:

● Halogen headlights.● Full-LED main headlights*● Rear bulb light

● LED rear light*

Full-LED headlight system*Full-LED headlights handle all light functions(daylight, side light, turn signal, dipped beamand route light) with light emitting diodes(LEDs) as a light source.

Full-LED headlights are designed to last thelifetime of the car and light bulbs cannot bereplaced. In case of headlight failure, go to anauthorised workshop to have it replaced.

WARNING● Take particular care when working oncomponents in the engine compartment ifthe engine is warm. Risk of burns.● Bulbs are highly sensitive to pressure. Theglass can break when you touch the bulb,causing injury.● When changing bulbs, please take carenot to injure yourself on sharp edges, inparticular on the headlight housing.

CAUTION● Remove the ignition key before workingon the electric system. Otherwise, a shortcircuit could occur.● Switch off the lights and the parking lightbefore changing a bulb.● Take good care to avoid damaging anycomponents.

For the sake of the environmentPlease ask your specialist retailer how todispose of used bulbs in the proper manner.

Note● Please check at regular intervals that alllighting (especially the exterior lighting) onyour vehicle is functioning properly. This isnot only in the interest of your own safety,but also that of all other road users.● Before changing a bulb, make sure youhave the correct new bulb.● Do not touch the glass part of the bulbwith your bare hands, use a cloth or papertowel instead, since the fingerprints left onthe glass will vaporise as a result of theheat generated by the bulb, they will bedeposited on the reflector and will impairits surface.● Depending on the level of equipment fit-ted in the vehicle, LEDs may be used forpart or all of the interior and/or exteriorlighting. LEDs have an estimated life thatexceeds than that of the car. If an LED lightfails, go to an authorised workshop for itsreplacement.

97

Emergencies

Change the front bulbs

Dipped beam headlight

Fig. 108 In the engine compartment: removethe lid.

Fig. 109 In the engine compartment: dippedbeam lamp.

Follow the steps indicated:

Raise the bonnet.1.

Move the loops ››› Fig. 108 1 in the di-rection of the arrow and remove the cov-er.Remove connector ››› Fig. 109 2 fromthe bulb.Unclip the retainer spring ››› Fig. 109 3pressing clockwise and inwards.Extract the bulb and fit the replacementso that the lug on the base fits into therecess on the reflector.Installation involves all of the abovesteps in reverse sequence.

Main beam headlight bulb and turnsignal bulb

Fig. 110 In the engine compartment: removethe lid.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Fig. 111 In the engine compartment: mainbeam headlight bulb 2 and turn signal bulb3 .


Main beam headlight bulbRaise the bonnet.Move the loop ››› Fig. 110 1 in the direc-tion of the arrow and remove the cover.Slide connector ››› Fig. 111 2 to the leftor right and pull.Remove the bulb by disconnecting theconnector.Installation involves all of the abovesteps in reverse sequence.

1.2.

3.

4.

5.

98

Fuses and bulbs

Turn signal bulbRaise the bonnet.Move the loop ››› Fig. 110 1 in the direc-tion of the arrow and remove the cover.Turn the bulb holder ››› Fig. 111 3 anti-clockwise and pull.Remove the bulb by pressing on the bulbholder and turning it anticlockwise at thesame time.Installation involves all of the abovesteps in reverse sequence.

1.2.

3.

4.

5.

Front fog light bulb*

Fig. 112 Fog light: remove the grille

Fig. 113 Fog light: detach the bulb holder


Remove the screw ››› Fig. 112 1 fromthe fog light grille using a screwdriverand extract the grille.Remove the 3 screws ››› Fig. 112 2 .Remove the metal clip situated on theupper part of the fog light by pullingaway from the vehicle 3 and extractthe fog light.Remove connector ››› Fig. 113 1 fromthe bulb.Turn the bulb holder ››› Fig. 113 2 anti-clockwise and pull.Remove the bulb by pressing on the bulbholder and turning it anticlockwise at thesame time.Installation involves all of the abovesteps in reverse sequence.Check that the bulb works properly. »

1.

2.3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.99

Emergencies

NoteDue to the difficulty of accessing fog lightbulbs, have them replaced at a TechnicalService or specialised workshop.

Change the rear bulbs

Overview of tail lights

Tail lights on side panel

Turn signal PY21W NA LL

Side light and brake light P21W LL

Tail lights on the rear lid

Left side

Side lights P21W LL

Fog light/side light P21W LL

Reverse light W16W

Right side

Side lights 2x P21W LL

Reverse light W16W

The table corresponds to a right-hand trafficvehicle. The position of lights may vary ac-cording to the country.

Rear bulbs (in the side panel)

Fig. 114 Boot: access to the bolt securing thetail light unit.

Fig. 115 Retaining tabs on reverse side of taillight.


Check which of the bulbs is defective.Open the rear lid.

1.2.

Remove the lid, levering it with the flatside of a screwdriver into the recess››› Fig. 114 1 .Remove the bulb connector.Unscrew the light securing bolt by handor using a screwdriver ››› Fig. 114 2 .Remove the light from the body, gentlypulling it toward you, and place on aclean, smooth surface.Disassemble the bulb holder unlockingthe securing tabs ››› Fig. 115 1 .Change the damaged bulb.To refit follow the steps in reverse order,taking special care when fitting the bulbholder. The securing tabs must click intoplace.

CAUTIONTake care when removing the rear light unitto make sure there is no damage to thepaintwork or any of its components.

Note● Make sure you have a soft cloth ready toplace under the glass on the rear light unit,to avoid any scratches.● In the case of LED lights, change only theturn signal bulb.

3.

4.5.

6.

7.

8.9.

100

Fuses and bulbs

Rear lights (in the rear lid)

Fig. 116 Rear lid open: remove the lid.

Fig. 117 Remove the bulb holder.

The rear lid must be open to change thebulbs.


Remove the rear lid cover in the directionindicated ››› Fig. 116.

1.

Unlock the securing tabs from the bulbholder ››› Fig. 117 1 or turn the bulbholder to the left 2 and 3 .Remove the bulb holder from its location.Lightly press the defective bulb into thebulb holder, then turn it to the left and re-move it.Fit the new bulb, pressing it into the bulbholder and turn it to the right as far as itwill go.Use a cloth to remove any fingerprintsfrom the glass part of the bulb.Check that the new bulb works properly.Carry out the same actions in reverse or-der for assembly and pay special atten-tion to placing the bulb holder, ensuringthat the tabs are properly secured.

NoteFor LED pilots, you can only change the re-verse bulb.

2.

3.4.

5.

6.

7.8.

Changing number plate light bulbs

Fig. 118 In the rear bumper: number platelight.

Fig. 119 Number plate light: detach the bulbholder.


Press the number plate light in the direc-tion of the arrow ››› Fig. 118.Remove the number plate light. »

1.

2.

101

Emergencies

Turn the connector lock ››› Fig. 119 in thedirection of arrow 1 and pull on theconnector.Rotate the bulb holder in the direction ofarrow 2 and extract it with the bulb.Replace the defective bulb with a newbulb with the same features.Insert the bulb holder in the numberplate light and turn in the opposite direc-tion of arrow 2 until it stops.Plug the connector into the bulb holder.

NoteDepending on how equipped the vehicle is,the number plate lights may be LEDs. LEDshave an estimated life that exceeds thanthat of the car. If a light with LEDs fails, goto an authorised workshop for replace-ment.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

Side turn signals

Fig. 120 Turn signal integrated in the rear viewmirror

The side turn signals are LEDS and are inte-grated in the exterior mirrors.

In case of failure, go to an authorised work-shop to have them replaced.

102

Operation

Fig. 121 Instruments and controls.

104

Controls and displays

Operation

Controls and displaysGeneral instrument panel

Door release leverCentral locking switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132Control for the electric adjustmentof the exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161Air vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181Control lever for:– Turn signals and main beam

headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150– Lane Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293– Main beam assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151– Cruise control system (CCS) . . . . . 275Depending on equipment fitted:– Lever for cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . 275Steering wheel with horn and– Driver airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22– On-board computer controls . . . . . 122– Controls for radio, telephone,

navigation and speech dialoguesystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

– Paddle levers for tiptronic gear-shift (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . . . 257

Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

Control lever for:– Windscreen wipers and washer . . . 158– Wipe and wash system . . . . . . . . . . . . 158– On-board computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112According to features: radio or dis-play for Easy Connect (navigation,radio, TV/video) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188Depending on the equipment, but-tons for:– Start-Stop system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270– Park assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314– Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154– Tyre pressure switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364– Airbag off display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79Depending on the equipment, glovecompartment with: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168– CD player* and/or SD card* . . . . . 212Front passenger airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22Front passenger airbag switch . . . . . . 79Front passenger seat heating con-trol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163Depending on the equipment, con-trols for:– Heating and ventilation system or

manual air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . 46– Automatic air conditioner . . . . . . . . . 43Depending on the equipment:– USB/AUX-IN input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

– Lighter/power socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169– Connectivity Box/Wireless Charg-

er* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239– Storage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166Gear lever for:– Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253– Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254Rotating control(Driving Experiencebutton) for driving modes . . . . . . . . . . . . 304Auto Hold switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273Electronic parking brake switch . . . . . 246Start-up push button (Keyless Ac-cess closing and start-up sys-tem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243Driver's seat heating control . . . . . . . . 163Ignition lock (vehicles without Key-less Access) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241Steering column adjustment lev-er . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22Knee airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24Bonnet lock release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348Headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156Headlight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Note● Some of the equipment listed in this sec-tion is only fitted on certain models or areoptional extras. »

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

105

Operation

● The arrangement of switches and con-trols on right-hand drive models* may beslightly different from the layout shown in››› page 104. However, the symbols used toidentify the controls are the same.

Instruments and warn-ing/control lamps

Dashboard

Introduction

Fig. 122 Related video:Dash panel

The vehicle can be fitted with a instrumentpanel digital lap timer or one Digital (SEATCockpit).

After switching the engine on with a 12-voltbattery that is heavily discharged or newlychanged some system settings (such as thetime, the date, the personalised comfort set-tings and the programming) might be alteredor deleted. Check and correct these settingsonce the battery is sufficiently charged.

WARNINGAny distraction may lead to an accident,with the risk of injury.● Do not operate the instrument panel con-trols when driving.● To reduce the risk of accident and injury,only make adjustments to the instructionson the screen of the instrument panel andto the instructions on the screen of the Info-tainment system when the vehicle is sta-tionary.

106

Instruments and warning/control lamps

Analogue instrument panel

Fig. 123 Instrument panel, on dash panel.

Details of the instruments ››› Fig. 123:

Revolution counter (with the engine run-ning, in hundreds of revolutions per mi-nute) ››› page 118.

1

Engine coolant temperature display››› page 120Displays on the screen ››› page 109.Adjuster button and display.

2

3

4

Speedometer.Fuel gauge ››› page 119.

5

6

107

Operation

Digital instrument panel (SEAT Digital Cockpit)

Fig. 124 SEAT Digital Cockpit on the instrumentpanel (classic view).

Details of the instruments:Engine coolant temperature display››› page 120Revolution counter. Revolutions per mi-nute the engine is running ››› page 118.Gear engaged or position of the selec-tor lever currently selectedScreen display ››› page 109SpeedometerDigital speed displayFuel gauge ››› page 119.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

The Digital SEAT Cockpit is an instrumentpanel digital with monochrome screen in col-our high resolution. It has a 3 or 4 views, de-pending on the version, accessible using thebutton of the multifunction steeringwheel. By selecting different information pro-files, indications other than the classic circu-lar instruments can be displayed, such asnavigation data, multimedia information ortravel data.

Information profilesWith the option INSTRUMENT PANEL (Infotain-ment button > Vehicle function but-

ton > View > Instrument cluster) youcan choose between the different display op-tions of the information that appears in theDigital SEAT Cockpit.

Classic ViewThe revolutions per minute and speedometerneedles appear along the entire length››› Fig. 124.

View 1, 2, 3 or AUTOMATIC*1)

Personalisation of the information that ap-pears in the Digital SEAT Cockpit. Only 2 of

1) Pre-set information depending on the “Drivingmode” selected.

108


these items of information can be displayedat the same time, but the user chooses whichto display, and in what order, by moving thefinger vertically over the dials.

Depending on the version, the Views can bememorised by existing the menu or keepingthe View button pressed.

● Consumption. Graphic representation ofthe current consumption and digital displayof the average consumption.● Audio. Digital display of the current audioplayback.● Altitude. Digital display of the current alti-tude above sea level.● Compass. Digital display of the compass.● Information about the final destination.Digital display of the remaining travellingtime, distance to the destination and the esti-mated time of arrival.● Operating range. Digital display of the re-maining range.● Travel time.● Route guidance.● Journey. Digital display of the distancetravelled.● Assistance systems. Graphic representa-tion of different assistance systems.● Traffic signs. Display of traffic signs detec-ted.

● Navigation. Graphical representation ofthe navigation with arrows.

It may vary based on the features, the num-ber and the contents of the selectable infor-mation profiles..

Navigation system in the SEATDigital Cockpit*

Fig. 125 Infotainment system: map transferbutton

Depending on the features, the SEAT DigitalCockpit can display a detailed map. To dothis, select the Navigation option in themenu menu on the instrument panel››› page 111.

Depending on the features or the navigationmap, it can be shown in the Digital SEATCockpit or on the Infotainment system or onboth at the same time. If it is displayed only in

the Infotainment system, the SEAT DigitalCockpit will only display the arrows for ma-noeuvres.

Transfer of navigation mapUsing the map transfer key ››› Fig. 125, themap is transferred from the Infotainment sys-tem to the Digital SEAT Cockpit and vice ver-sa.

Using the right thumbwheel of the multifunc-tion steering wheel, in the Navigation menu,you can transfer the map back to the Info-tainment System.

Display indications

Possible indications on the instrumentpanel displayDifferent pieces of information can be dis-played on the screen of the instrument panel,depending on the features of the vehicle.● Doors, bonnet and rear lid open● Warning and information messages● Odometer● Time ››› page 118● Indications of the radio and navigation sys-tem● Indications of the phone● Outside temperature »

109

Operation

● Indications of the compass● Selector lever positions● Gear-change recommendation››› page 261● Display of travel data (multifunction dis-play) and menus for different settings››› page 111● Service interval display ››› page 121● Speed warning ››› page 112● Speed warning for winter tyres● Start-Stop system status display››› page 270● Signs detected by the traffic signal detec-tion system ››› page 115● Indication of the status of active cylindermanagement (ACT®) ››› page 264● Low consumption driving ● Identifying letters on engine (LDM)● Driver assistance system display››› page 270

Doors, bonnet and rear lid openWhen the vehicle is unlocked and while driv-ing, the instrument panel display shows if anyof the doors, the bonnet or rear lid areopened and, in some cases, it is also indica-ted by an audible warning. The display mayvary according to the type of instrument pan-el fitted.

Selector lever positions (dual-clutchDSG®)The current position of the selector lever isshown on the side of the lever and on the in-strument panel display. When the lever is inthe D/S position or in the Tiptronic position, insome cases, the gear engaged in each caseis shown on the instrument panel display.

Outside temperature displayIf the outside temperature is lower than ap-proximately +4 °C (+39 °F), the “ice crystalsymbol” on the outside temperature dis-play also lights up. This symbol remains lit un-til the outside temperature exceeds +6 °C(+43 °F) ››› .

When the vehicle is stationary, when the aux-iliary heater is switched on or when driving atvery low speeds, the outside temperature in-dicated may be higher than the actual tem-perature due to the heat produced by the en-gine.

The margin of measurement ranges from-45 °C (-49 °F) to +76 °C (+169 °F).

Driving recommendationWhile driving, the instrument panel of certainvehicles may indicate a gear recommenda-tion for saving fuel ››› page 261.

OdometerThe odometer registers the total distancetravelled by the car.

The partial odometer (trip) shows the dis-tance travelled since the last time it was resetto zero.

Vehicles with analogue instrument panel:● Briefly press the button ››› Fig. 123 4to reset the trip recorder to 0.● Keep the button 4 pressed forabout 3 seconds and the previous value willbe displayed.

Vehicles with digital instrument panel:● Set the odometer to zero via the Infotain-ment system or the multifunction steeringwheel ››› page 112.

Speed warning for winter tyresIf the maximum speed set is exceeded, this isdisplayed on the instrument panel››› page 111.

The speed warning can be adjusted on theInfotainment system: using button > SET-TINGS > Driver Assistance››› page 36 button.

110


Compass indicationDepending on the equipment, when the igni-tion is on, the instrument panel display indi-cates the direction in which you are drivingwith a symbol, e.g. NW for Northwest.

When the Infotainment system is on and thereis no route guidance active, the graphic rep-resentation of a compass is also shown.

Low consumption driving*Depending on the equipment, when driving,the display appears on the instrumentpanel when the vehicle is in low consumptionstatus due to active cylinder management(ACT®)* ››› page 264.

Identifying letters on engine (LDM)Vehicles with analogue instrument panel:● Switch the ignition on, but do not start theengine.● Hold the button ››› Fig. 123 4 downfor more than 15 seconds to display the iden-tifying letters of the vehicle engine (MKB).

Vehicles with digital instrument panel:● Select the information profile Range in theinstrument cluster (Infotainment button /> View > Driving data > Range functionbutton).● Press and hold the button on the multi-function steering wheel until the menu Serv-

ice is displayed on the instrument panel dis-play ››› page 112.● Select the menu option Engine code.

WARNINGEven when the outside temperature is high-er than freezing temperature, some roadsand bridges could be frozen.● The “ice crystal symbol” indicates thatthere may be a risk of freezing.● At outside temperatures above +4 °C(+39 °F), there may be ice even when the“ice crystal symbol” is not on.● The outside temperature sensor takes aguideline measurement.

Note● There are different instrument panels andtherefore the versions and instructions onthe display may vary. In the case of dis-plays without warning or information texts,faults are indicated exclusively by the con-trol warning lamps.● Some indications on the instrument panelscreen may be concealed by a suddenevent, e.g. an incoming call.● Depending on the equipment, some set-tings and instructions can be carried out ordisplayed on the infotainment system aswell.● If there are several warnings at the sametime, the symbols will be displayed one af-

ter the other for a few seconds. The sym-bols will stay on until you remove thecause.● If when switching on the ignition warningsare shown about existing faults, it might notbe possible to change the settings or showthe information as described. In this case,go to a specialised workshop and request arepair.

Instrument panel menus

The number of menus and information itemsavailable will depend on the vehicle’s elec-tronics and features.

A specialised workshop can programme ormodify additional functions, according to thevehicle equipment. SEAT recommends visitinga SEAT dealership for this.

Some menu options can only be read whenthe vehicle is stationary.■ Driving data ››› page 112■ Assistance systems.■ Lane Assist On/Off ››› page 293■ Front Assist On/Off ››› page 280■ Blind spot detector On/Off ››› page 299■ ACC (only display) ››› page 284

■ Navigation.■ Audio.■ Telephone. »

111

Operation

■ Vehicle status ››› page 113

Service Menu3 Applies to vehicles with Active Info Display(Digital SEAT Cockpit)

In the Service menu various settings can beadjusted depending on the features.

Open the Service menuTo open the Service menu, select the infor-mation profile Range (Infotainment button / > View > Driving data > Range

button) and press and hold the button onthe multifunction steering wheel for around4 seconds. You can browse the menu with thebuttons on the multifunction steering wheel inthe usual manner.

Restart the service interval displaySelect the Service menu and follow the in-structions on the screen of the instrumentpanel.

Restart the oil serviceSelect the Restore Oil service menu andfollow the instructions on the instrument pan-el display.

Restart journey dataSelect the Reset trip menu and follow theinstructions on the instrument panel displayto reset the value.

Identifying letters on engine (LDM)Select the menu Engine code. The identify-ing letters of the engine will be shown on theinstrument panel display.

Setting the clockSelect the Time menu and set the correcttime by turning the right thumbwheel of themultifunction steering wheel.

Journey data display (multifunc-tion display)

The display of the travel data (multifunctiondisplay) shows different values about thejourney and the consumption.

Change from one display to anotherVehicles without multifunction steering wheel:● press the rocker switch on the wind-screen wiper lever ››› page 122.

Vehicles with multifunction steering wheel:● Turn the right thumbwheel of the multifunc-tion steering wheel ››› page 123.

Changing memoryPress the button on the windscreenwiper lever or the button of the multifunc-tion steering wheel.

The memory is deleted if thejourney is interrupted for more than 2hours.

Display and storage ofthe journey data and the consumptionvalues collected. When refuelling, thememory is deleted.

This memory contains travel dataup to a maximum of 19 hours and 59 mi-nutes or 99 hours and 59 minutes, or upto a maximum of 1999.9 km or9999.9 km. When one of these values isexceeded (varies depending on the ver-sion of the instrument panel), the memo-ry is deleted.

Delete journey data presets● Select the memory that you wish to erase.● Hold the button of the multifunctionsteering wheel or the button of the multi-function wheel pressed down for about 2seconds.

Select the instructionsIn the Infotainment system, in the menu Vehi-cle settings, you can display different traveldata ››› page 36.

Since start

Since refuelling

Long-term

112


The currentfuel consumption display operatesthroughout the journey, in litres/100 km;and with the engine running and the ve-hicle stopped, in litres/hour.

The averagefuel consumption is displayed after driv-ing for approximately 300 metres.

This indicates the hours(h) and minutes (min) since the ignitionwas switched on.

Approximate distance inkm that can still be travelled if the samedriving style is maintained.

Approxi-mate distance in km that can still betravelled with the current level of theAdBlue® tank with the same driving style.The indication appears from a range ofless than 2,400 km and cannot be de-activated.1)

Distance covered inkm (m) after switching on the ignition.

The average speed will beshown after driving for approximately100 metres.

Current speed displayed indigital format.

Current fuel consumption

Average fuel consumption

Travelling time

Operating range

Adblue Autonomy or Autonomy

Distance travelled

Average speed

Digital speed

Displays a list ofthe connected comfort systems that in-crease energy consumption, e.g. airconditioning.

Set a speed warning● Select the display Speed warning at--- km/h or Speed warning at --- mph.● Press the button on the windscreenwiper lever or the button on the multifunc-tion steering wheel to store the current speedand activate the warning.● Activate: adjust to the desired speed within5 seconds using the rocker switch on thewindscreen wiper lever or by turning thethumbwheel on the multifunction steeringwheel. Next, press the button or again or wait several seconds. The speed isstored and the warning activated.● Deactivate: press button or button . The stored speed is deleted.

The warning can be adjusted for speeds be-tween 30 km/h (18 mph) and 250 km/h(155 mph).

Display Oil temperatureThe engine reaches its operating tempera-ture when, under normal driving conditions,the oil temperature is between 80°C and

Convenience consumers 120ºC. If the engine is under a lot of stressand the outside temperature is high, the en-gine oil temperature can increase. This doesnot present any problem as long as the warn-ing lamps or ››› page 351 do not ap-pear on the display.

Warning and information messages(Vehicle status)

The system runs a check on certain compo-nents and functions when the ignition isswitched on and while the vehicle is moving.Faults displayed on the instrument panel asred and yellow warning symbols accompa-nied with messages and ››› page 40, de-pending on the case, even an audible warn-ing. The representation of the messages andsymbols may vary depending on the versionof the instrument panel.

Existing faults can also be checked manually.To do so, open the menu Vehicle status orVehicle ››› page 111.

The symbol lightsup or flashes (in part accompanied byaudible warnings). Stop driving! Dan-ger! Check the fault and eliminate thecause. If necessary, seek professionalassistance. »

Priority 1 warning (red).

1) Not available in all countries.113

Operation

The symbollights up or flashes (in part accompa-nied by audible warnings). Operatingfaults or the lack of operating fluids cancause damage to the vehicle or a fault.Check the faulty function as soon aspossible. If necessary, seek professionalassistance.

It provides informa-tion about processes in the vehicle.

Note● Depending on the equipment, some set-tings and instructions can be carried out ordisplayed on the infotainment system aswell.● If there are several warnings at the sametime, the symbols will be displayed one af-ter the other for a few seconds. The sym-bols will stay on until you remove thecause.● If when switching on the ignition warningsare shown about existing faults, it might notbe possible to change the settings or showthe information as described. In this case,go to a specialised workshop and request arepair.

Priority 2 warning (yellow).

Information message.

Fatigue detection (break recom-mendation)*

Fig. 126 On the screen of the instrument pan-el: fatigue detection.

The Fatigue detection informs the driver whentheir driving behaviour shows signs of fatigue.

Function and operationFatigue detection determines the driving be-haviour of the driver when starting a journey,making a calculation of tiredness. This is con-stantly compared with the current driving be-haviour. If the system detects that the driver istired, an audible warning is given with asound and an optic warning is shown with asymbol and complementary message on theinstrument panel display ››› Fig. 126. Themessage on the instrument panel display isshown for approximately 5 seconds, and de-pending on the case, is repeated. The systemstores the last message displayed.

The message on the instrument panel displaycan be switched off by pressing the button on the windscreen wiper lever or thebutton on the multi function steeringwheel ››› page 122.

The message can be recalled to the instru-ment panel display using the multifunctiondisplay ››› page 112.

Conditions of operationDriving behaviour is only calculated onspeeds above about 65 km/h (40 mph) up toaround 200 km/h (125 mph).

Switching on and offFatigue detection can be activated or deacti-vated in the Easy Connect system with the / button and the SETTINGS function but-

ton ››› page 36. A mark indicates that theadjustment has been activated.

System limitationsThe Fatigue detection has certain limitationsinherent to the system. The following condi-tions can limit the Fatigue detection or pre-vent it from functioning.

● At speeds below 65 km/h (40 mph)● At speeds above 200 km/h (125 mph)● When cornering● On roads in poor condition

114


● In unfavourable weather conditions● When a sporty driving style is employed● In the event of a serious distraction to thedriver

Fatigue detection will be restored when thevehicle is stopped for more than 15 minutes,when the ignition is switched off or when thedriver has unbuckled their seat belt andopened the door.

In the event of slow driving during a long peri-od of time (below 65 km/h, 40 mph) the sys-tem automatically re-establishes the tired-ness calculation. When driving at a fasterspeed the driving behaviour will be recalcula-ted.

WARNINGDo not let the comfort afforded by the Fati-gue detection system tempt you into takingany risks when driving. Take regular breaks,sufficient in length when making long jour-neys.● The driver always assumes the responsi-bility of driving to their full capacity.● Never drive if you are tired.● The system does not detect the tirednessof the driver in all circumstances. Consultthe information in the section ››› page 114,System limitations.

● In some situations, the system may incor-rectly interpret an intended driving ma-noeuvre as driver tiredness.● No warning is given in the event of the ef-fect called microsleep!● Please observe the indications on the in-strument panel and act as is necessary.

Note● Fatigue detection has been developedfor driving on motorways and well pavedroads only.● If there is a fault in the system, have itchecked by a specialised workshop.

Traffic sign detection system*1)

Fig. 127 On the instrument panel display: ex-amples of speed limits or overtaking prohibi-tions with their respective additional signs.

The traffic sign detection system records thestandard traffic signs in front of the vehiclewith a camera located on the base of the in-terior mirror and provides information aboutspeed limits and overtaking prohibitions. »

1) System available depending on the country.115

Operation

Within its limitations, the system also displaysadditional signals, such as time-specific pro-hibitions, signs for vehicles towing trailers››› page 330 or limitations that only apply inthe event of rain. Even on journeys withoutsigns, the system may display any applicablespeed limits.

The traffic sign detection system does notwork in all countries. Keep this in mind whentravelling abroad.

Indication on the displayIn Germany, on motorways and vehicleroads, besides speed limits and overtakingprovisions the system also displays the end ofprohibition signs. The valid speed limit at thetime in other countries is always shown.

The traffic signs detected by the system aredisplayed on the dash panel display››› Fig. 127 and, depending on the navigationsystem fitted in the vehicle, on the infotain-ment system as well ››› page 36.

Traffic sign detection system messages

Message Cause and solution

There are notraffic signsavailable

The system is starting up.OR: the camera has not rec-ognised any obligation or pro-hibition signs.

Error: Detec-tion of traf-fic signs

There is a fault in the system.Have the system checked by aspecialised workshop.

Message Cause and solution

Speed warningcurrently un-available.

The speed warning function ofthe traffic sign detection sys-tem is faulty.Have the system checked by aspecialised workshop.

Detection oftrafficsigns: Cleanthe wind-screen!

The windscreen is dirty in thecamera area.Clean the windscreen.

Detection oftrafficsigns: Limi-ted at themoment

No data transfer by the navi-gation system.Check whether the navigationsystem has current maps.OR: the vehicle is currently in aregion that is not included inthe navigation system's map.

No dataavailable

The traffic sign detection sys-tem does not work in the cur-rent country.

Activating and deactivating traffic signdisplay on the instrument panelThe permanent display of traffic signs on theinstrument panel can be activated or deacti-vated in the infotainment system using the > SETTINGS> Driver Assistancefunction buttons.

Display of traffic signsWhen the traffic sign detection system is con-nected, a camera located on the base of the

interior rear-view mirror records the trafficsigns in front of the vehicle. After checkingand evaluating the information from the cam-era, the navigation system and the currentvehicle data, up to three valid traffic signs aredisplayed ››› Fig. 127 B in conjunction withtheir corresponding additional signs.

The sign that is currently valid for thedriver is shown in the left side of thescreen For example, a maximum speedlimit of 130 km/h (100 mph) ››› Fig. 127 A.

A sign valid only in certain circum-stances, e.g. 100 km/h (60 mph) is shownsecond, together with the additional rainsign.

If the windscreen wiper isworking while you are driving, the signalwith the additional rain sign will beshown first, on the left, as it is the onethat is applicable at the time.

A sign valid only with restrictions, e.g.No overtaking at certain times, will bedisplayed third ››› Fig. 127 C.

Speed warningIf the system detects that the permittedspeed is exceeded, it may warn the driverwith a “gong” and visually with a message onthe dash panel display.

The speed warning can be adjusted or deac-tivated completely in the infotainment systemusing the > SETTINGS > Driver

First:

Second:

Additional sign:

Third:

116


Assistance function buttons››› page 36. The speed is adjusted insteps of 5 km/h (3 mph) within a range of be-tween 0 km/h (mph) and 20 km/h (12 mph)above the maximum speed permitted.

Trailer modeIn vehicles equipped with a towing bracketdevice from the factory and a trailer that iselectrically connected to the vehicle, it ispossible to activate or deactivate the displayof specific traffic signs for vehicles with trailer,such as speed limits or overtaking prohibi-tions. Activation or deactivation is performedon the infotainment system using the >SETTINGS > Driver Assistance functionbuttons ››› page 36.

For trailer mode, the display of speed limitsapplicable to the type of trailer or to the legalprovisions can be adjusted. The speed is ad-justed in steps of 10 km/h (5 mph) within arange of between 60 km/h (40 mph) and130 km/h (80 mph). If it is adjusted to a speedgreater than that which is permitted in thecountry in question for driving with a trailer,the system automatically displays the usualspeed limits, e.g. in Germany 80 km/h(50 mph).

If the speed warning for the trailer is deacti-vated, the system displays the speed limits asif there were no trailer hitched.

Limited operationThe traffic sign detection system has certainlimitations. The following cases may lead thesystem to operate with limitations or not atall:

● In the case of poor visibility, e.g. in snow,rain, fog or intense mist.● In cases of dazzling, e.g. caused by head-on traffic or by the sun.● When driving at high speeds.● If the camera is covered or dirty.● If the traffic signs are out of the camera'sfield of vision.● If the traffic signs are partially or totallycovered, e.g. by trees, snow, dirt or other vehi-cles.● In the case of traffic signs that do not fulfilthe regulations.● In the case of damaged or bent trafficsigns.● In the case of variable messages on over-head or gantry signs (LED-based variabletraffic signs or other lighting units).● If the maps on the navigation system arenot up-to-date.● In the case of adhesives affixed to vehiclesthat depict traffic signs, e.g. speed limits onlorries.

WARNINGThe technology in the traffic sign detectionsystem cannot change the limits imposedby the laws of physics and only works with-in the system's limits. Do not let the extraconvenience afforded by the traffic signdetection system tempt you into taking anyrisks when driving. The system is not a re-placement for driver awareness.● Adapt your speed and driving style to suitvisibility, weather, road and traffic condi-tions.● Poor visibility, darkness, snow, rain andfog may lead to the system failing to dis-play traffic signs or not displaying themcorrectly.● If the camera's field of vision is dirty, cov-ered or damaged, system operation maybe impaired.

WARNINGThe driving recommendations and trafficindications shown on the traffic sign detec-tion system may differ from the actual cur-rent traffic situation.● The system may not detect or correctlyshow all the traffic signs.● Traffic signs and traffic regulations havepriority over the recommendations and dis-plays provided by the system. »

117

Operation

WARNINGIf messages are ignored, the vehicle maystall in traffic and cause accidents and se-vere injuries.● Never ignore the messages displayed.● Stop the vehicle at the next opportunityand in a safe place.

NoteIn order not to compromise the system'soperation, please take the following pointsinto account:● Regularly clean the area of vision of thecamera and keep it in a clean state, withoutsnow or ice.● Do not cover the field of vision of thecamera.● Always replace damaged or worn bladeswhen required to avoid lines on the cam-era's field of vision.● Check that the windscreen is not dam-aged in the area of the camera's field of vi-sion.● The use of outdated maps on the naviga-tion system may cause the system to showtraffic signs incorrectly.● In the waypoints mode of the navigationsystem, the traffic sign detection system isonly partly available.● Failure to heed the control lamps andcorresponding text messages when they

light up may result in damage to the vehi-cle.

Time

Setting the time on the infotainment sys-tem● Press the infotainment button.● Press the SETTINGS function button.● Select the menu option Date and time toset the time ››› page 36.

Setting the time on analogue the instru-ment panel● To set the time (for all vehicle clocks), pressand hold the button on the instrumentpanel until the Time is displayed.● Release the button . The time is dis-played on the instrument panel display andthe hours field is highlighted.● Afterwards, press the button until thedesired time is displayed. To scroll quickly,hold the button .● When they have finished setting the hour,wait until the minute field is marked on the in-strument panel display.● Afterwards, press the button until thedesired time is displayed. To scroll quickly,hold the button .

● Release the button in order to finishsetting the time.

Adjusting the time in the SEAT DigitalCockpit● While on the Driving data menu selectRange (Infotainment button > View >Driving data > Range).● Press the button on the multifunctionsteering wheel until the Service menu is dis-played on the instrument panel display››› page 112.● Select the menu Time.● Adjust the correct time by turning the rightthumbwheel of the multifunction steeringwheel.

Revolution counter

The rev counter indicates the number of en-gine revolutions per minute.

Together with the gear-change indicator, therev counter offers you the possibility of usingthe engine of your vehicle at a suitablespeed.

The beginning of the red zone of the revcounter indicates the maximum speed in anygear after running-in and with the engine hot.However, it is advisable to change up a gearor move the selector lever to D (or lift your

118


foot off the accelerator) before the needlereaches the red zone ››› .

We recommend that you avoid high revs andthat you follow the recommendations on thegear-change indicator. Consult the addition-al information in ››› page 261, Gear-changeindicator.

CAUTION● To prevent damage to the engine, the revcounter needle should only remain in thered zone for a short period of time.● When the engine is cold, avoid high revsand heavy acceleration and do not makethe engine work hard.

For the sake of the environmentChanging up a gear early will help you tosave fuel and minimise emissions and en-gine noise.

Fuel level indicator

Fig. 128 Analogue instrument panel: fuelgauge

Fig. 129 Digital instrument panel: fuel gauge.

Control lamps

It lights up, and in addition, thelower diode lights up in red

Fuel tank almost empty. The fuel reserve level hasbeen reached ››› . Refuel as soon as possible.When the fuel level is very low, the lower diode flash-es in red.

It lights up yellow

Presence of water in the diesel.Switch off the engine and request the assistance ofspecialised personnel.

The display only works when the ignition isswitched on.

The fuel range is displayed on the instrumentpanel.

You can consult the tank capacity of your ve-hicle in the ››› page 48 section.

WARNINGWhen driving with low fuel, the vehicle maystall in traffic and cause accidents and se-vere injuries.● If the fuel tank level is too low, fuel couldreach the engine irregularly, particularlywhen driving up or down slopes.● The steering system and the driver assis-tance systems and brakes do not workwhen the engine is running irregularly or »

119

Operation

switches off due to lack of fuel or an irregu-lar supply thereof.● Always refuel when there is only onequarter of fuel in tank to prevent the vehicleto stop due to lack of fuel.

CAUTIONNever run the fuel tank completely dry. Anirregular fuel supply can cause misfiringand unburnt fuel could enter the exhaustsystem. The catalytic converter or the par-ticulate filter may get damaged!

NoteThe small arrow on the fuel gauge next tothe fuel pump symbol points out towardsthe side of the vehicle with the fuel tankflap.

Engine coolant temperature dis-play

Fig. 130 Analogue instrument panel: enginecoolant temperature display.

Fig. 131 Digital instrument panel: engine cool-ant temperature display.

››› Fig. 130, ››› Fig. 131:Cool zone. The engine has not reachedoperating temperature yet. Avoid high en-

A

gine speeds and stressing the engine if ithas not reached operating temperature.Normal zone. At high outside tempera-tures and when making the engine workhard, the diodes may continue lighting upand reach the upper zone. This is nocause for concern, provided the controllamp does not light up Warning area. When the engine is work-ing hard, especially at high outside tem-peratures, the diodes may light up in thewarning area.

The coolant temperature gauge only workswhen the ignition is switched on.

Control and warning lamp

It lights up red

Do not keep driving!Engine coolant level too low, coolant temperature toohigh

Flashes red

Fault in the engine coolant system.

● Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine andlet it cool down.● Check the engine coolant level››› page 353.

B

C

120


● If the warning lamp does not switch off evenif the coolant level is correct, request assis-tance from specialised personnel.

CAUTION● To ensure a long useful life for the engine,avoid high revs, driving at high speed andmaking the engine work hard for approxi-mately the first 15 minutes when the engineis cold. The phase until the engine is warmalso depends on the outside temperature. Ifnecessary, use the engine oil temperature*››› page 113 as a guide.● Additional lights and other accessories infront of the air inlet reduce the cooling ef-fect of the coolant. At high outside temper-atures and high engine loads, there is a riskof the engine overheating.● The front spoiler also ensures proper dis-tribution of the cooling air when the vehicleis moving. If the spoiler is damaged this canreduce the cooling effect, which couldcause the engine to overheat. Seek spe-cialist assistance.

Service intervals

The service interval indication appears on theinstrument panel display and the Infotain-ment system.

There are different versions of instrumentpanels and infotainment systems, so the ver-

sions and instructions on the screens mayvary.

SEAT distinguishes between services with en-gine oil change (e.g. Oil change service) andservices without engine oil change (e.g. In-spection).

In vehicles with Services established bytime or mileage, the service intervals are al-ready pre-defined.

In vehicles with LongLife Service, the inter-vals are determined individually. Thanks totechnological progress, maintenance workhas been greatly reduced. Because of thetechnology used by SEAT, with this serviceyou only need to change the oil when the ve-hicle so requires. To calculate this variation(max. 2 years), the vehicle's conditions of useand individual driving styles are considered.The advance warning first appears 20 daysbefore the date established for the corre-sponding service. The kilometres (miles) re-maining until the next service are alwaysrounded up to the nearest 100 km (miles) andthe time is given in complete days. The cur-rent service message cannot be viewed until500 km after the last service. Prior to this, on-ly lines are visible on the display.

Inspection reminderIf a service or an inspection has to be carriedout soon, a service reminder will be dis-played when the ignition is switched on.

The figure displayed are the kilometres thatcan still be travelled or the time until the nextservice.

Service dueWhen the time for a service or an inspec-tion comes, an audible warning will be emit-ted when the ignition is switched on and thefixed key symbol may appear on the in-strument panel for a few seconds, along withone of the following messages:

● Service now!● Request an inspection.● Oil service required!● Oil service and inspection re-quired!

Check a service warningWith the ignition switched on, the engine offand the vehicle at a standstill, the currentservice notification can be read:

Check the date of the current service on theinfotainment system● Press the infotainment button.● Press the SETTINGS function button››› page 36.● Select the Service menu option to displayinformation about the services. »

121

Operation

Vehicles with analogue instrument panel● Press and hold the button ››› Fig. 123 4 for more than 5 seconds toconsult the service message

Vehicles with digital instrument panel● The date of the service can only be readthrough the Service menu ››› page 112.

Resetting service interval displayIf the service was not carried out by a SEATdealership, the display can be reset as fol-lows:

Vehicles with analogue instrument panel● Switch off the ignition, press and hold but-ton ››› Fig. 123 4 .● Switch ignition back on.● Release the button and press itagain for the next 20 seconds.

Vehicles with digital instrument panel● The service interval display can only be re-set through the Service menu ››› page 112.

Do not restart the indicator between theservice intervals, otherwise the informationdisplayed will be incorrect.

If the oil change service is reset manually, theservice interval display changes to a fixedservice interval, also in vehicles with Flexibleoil change service.

Note● The service message disappears after afew seconds, when the engine is started orwhen OK/RESET is pressed on the wind-screen wiper lever, or OK on the multifunc-tion steering wheel.● In vehicles with the LongLife system inwhich the battery has been disconnectedfor a long period of time, it is not possible tocalculate the date of the next service.Therefore the service interval display maynot be correct. In this case, bear in mind themaximum service intervals permitted››› page 368.● If you reset the display manually, the nextservice interval will be indicated as in vehi-cles with fixed service intervals. For thisreason we recommend that the service in-terval display be reset by a SEAT author-ised Dealer.

Using the instrument panel

Introduction

With the ignition switched on, it is possible toread the different functions of the display byscrolling through the menus.

In vehicles with multifunction steering wheel,the multifunction display can only be operat-ed with the steering wheel buttons.

Some menu options can only be read whenthe vehicle is at a standstill.

WARNINGDistracting the driver in any way can leadto an accident and cause injuries.● Never use the menus on the instrumentpanel display while the vehicle is in motion.

NoteAfter loading or changing the 12-volt bat-tery, check the system settings. If the pow-er supply is interrupted, the system settingsmight be incorrect or deleted.

Operation with the windscreen wip-er lever

Fig. 132 Windscreen wipers lever: control but-tons.

122


As long as a priority 1 ››› page 113 warning isactive, it will not be possible to access anymenu. Some warnings can be confirmed andhidden with the button ››› Fig. 132 1 .

Select a menu or an informative display● Switch the ignition on.● If a message or vehicle symbol is displayed,press button 1 ; if necessary, several times.● To display the menus ››› page 111 or to re-turn to the selection of menus from a menu orfrom an informative display, hold down therocker button 2 .● To change from one menu to another, pressthe upper or lower part of the rocker switch.● To open the menu or the informative displayshown, press button 1 or wait a few secondsuntil the menu or the informative displayopens automatically.

Changing menu settings● In the menu displayed, press the upper orlower part of the rocker switch 2 until the re-quired menu option is checked. The optionappears framed.● Press button 1 to make the required modi-fications. A mark indicates that the system orfunction is activated.

Back to menu selectionSelect Back on the corresponding menu toexit.

NoteIf when switching on the ignition warningsare shown about existing faults, it might notbe possible to change the settings or showthe information as described. In this case,go to a specialised workshop and request arepair.

Using the multifunction steeringwheel

Fig. 133 Right side of multifunction steeringwheel: buttons to the menus and informative in-dications on the instrument panel.

As long as a priority 1 ››› page 113 warning isactive, it will not be possible to access anymenu. Some warnings can be confirmed and

hidden with the button of the multifunctionsteering wheel ››› Fig. 133.

Select a menu or an informative display● Switch the ignition on.● If a message or vehicle symbol is displayed,press the button ››› Fig. 133; if necessary,several times.● To change menus, use buttons or ››› Fig. 133.● To open the menu or the information dis-played, press the button ››› Fig. 133 orwait a few seconds until the menu or the in-formative display opens automatically.

Changing menu settings● In the menu displayed, turn the right thumb-wheel of the multifunction steering wheel››› Fig. 133 until the desired option of themenu is highlighted. The option appearsframed.● Press the button ››› Fig. 133 to make therequired modifications. A mark indicates thatthe system or function is activated.

Back to menu selectionPress the button or ››› Fig. 133.

NoteIf when switching on the ignition warningsare shown about existing faults, it might not »

123

Operation

be possible to change the settings or showthe information as described. In this case,go to a specialised workshop and request arepair.

Key for the driving assistance sys-tems*

Fig. 134 On the turn light and main beam lev-er: key for driver assistance systems.

With the turn signal and main beam headlightlever button, you can activate or deactivatethe driver assistance systems displayed in theAssistance systems menu.

Activate or deactivate a driver assistancesystem● Briefly press the button ››› Fig. 134 in the di-rection of the arrow to open the menu Assis-tance systems.

● Select the driver assistance system and ac-tivate or deactivate it ››› page 122. A mark in-dicates that driver assistance system isswitched on.● Afterwards, mark or confirm the selectionwith button on the windscreen wiperlever or button on the multifunction steer-ing wheel.

The driver assistance systems can also beswitched on and off in the infotainment sys-tem, in the menu Vehicle settings››› page 36.

Control lamps

Control and warning lamps


The control and warning lamps are indicatorsof warnings, ››› , faults ››› or certain func-tions. Some control and warning lamps comeon when the ignition is switched on, andswitch off when the engine starts running, orwhile driving.

Depending on the model, additional textmessages may be viewed on the instrumentpanel display. These may be purely informa-tive or they may be advising of the need foraction ››› page 106, Dashboard.

Depending upon the equipment fitted in thevehicle, instead of a warning lamp, some-times a symbol may be displayed on the in-strument panel.

When certain control and warning lamps arelit, an audible warning is also heard.

WARNINGIf the warning lamps and messages are ig-nored, the vehicle may stall in traffic, ormay cause accidents and severe injuries.● Never ignore the warning lamps or textmessages.● Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possi-ble.● Park the vehicle away from traffic andensure that there are no highly flammablematerials under the vehicle that couldcome into contact with the exhaust system(e.g. dry grass, fuel).● A faulty vehicle represents a risk of acci-dent for the driver and for other road users.If necessary, switch on the hazard warninglamps and put out the warning triangle toadvise other drivers.● Before opening the bonnet, switch off theengine and allow it to cool.● In any vehicle, the engine compartment isa hazardous area and could cause severeinjuries ››› page 348.

124


CAUTIONFailure to heed the control lamps and textmessages when they appear may result infaults in the vehicle.

Multifunction steering wheel*

Operating the audio, telephone and navigation system with voice control

Fig. 135 Controls on the steering wheel.

The steering wheel includes a multifunctionmodule from where it is possible to control

the audio, telephone and radio/navigationfunctions without needing to distract the driv-er.

Applies to vehicles with analogue instrument panel

Button Radio Media (except AUX) AUX Telephone* Navigation*

ATurn

Turn volume up/down. Youdo not need to be in audiomode (radio).

Turn volume up/down. Youdo not need to be in audiomode (media).


Turn volume up/down. Youdo not need to be in tele-phone mode.

Turn announcement volumeup/down. You do not need to be innavigation mode but there has tobe an announcement active whenyou adjust the volume. »

125

Operation


APress Mute volume. Mute volume. Mute volume. Mute incoming call. Mute the current navigation an-

nouncement.

B a) Enable/disable voice control.b)

This function can be used from any mode, in the case of an active call.

C / D Search for the previous/nextstationc).

Short press: Switch to theprevious/next song.Hold down: Fast rewind/for-wardd).

No function– No active call: Radio/Me-dia functions (except AUX)– Active call: no function

No function for the other modes(navigation, assistants, vehiclestatus, travel data).

E / F a) Change instrument panel menu.This function can be used from any mode (audio, media, navigation, assistants, vehicle status, travel data).

G Coloured instrument panel: change to the previous menu.Monochrome Instrument panel: switch to the previous function.

HTurn

Coloured instrument panel:List of stations available(only if the instrument panelis in audio menu).

Coloured instrument panel:next track (only if the instru-ment panel is in audiomenu).

No function

– There is no active call: Re-cent calls list.– Active call: go to the calloptions list (call in standby,hang up, mute microphone,private number, etc.).

– Active route: access the view tohalt guidance to destination.– No active route: list of most re-cent destinations.

HPress Acts on the instrument panel or confirms the instrument panel menu option depending on the menu option.

a) According to the vehicle's equipment package.b) This function can be used from any mode (audio, media, navigation, vehicle status, travel data).c) This action can be performed when you are listening to the radio; there is no need to be in audio-radio mode.d) These actions can be performed when you are listening to media; there is no need to be in audio-radio mode.

126


Applies to vehicles with Active Info Display (Digital SEAT Cockpit)


ATurn

Turn volume up/down. Youdo not need to be in audiomode (radio).



Turn volume up/down. Youdo not need to be in tele-phone mode.

Turn announcement volumeup/down. You do not need to be innavigation mode but there has tobe an announcement activewhen you adjust the volume.

APress Mute volume. Mute volume. Mute volume. Mute incoming call. Mute the current navigation an-

nouncement.

B a) Enable/disable voice controlb).This function can be used from any mode, except with an active call.

C / D Search for the previous/nextstationc).

Short press: Switch to theprevious/next song.Hold down: Fast rewind/for-wardd).

No function– No active call: Radio/Me-dia functions (except AUX)– Active call: no function

No function for the other modes(navigation, assistants, vehiclestatus, travel data).

E / F a) Change menu on instrument panel.b)

G Short pressb): change views Classic Info / Digital Maps / Semi-circular clocks / Sport (exclusive Cupra).Long pressb): access settings of “Individual Profiles”.

HTurn

List of sources available(audio/media).

List of sources available(audio/media). No function

– There is no active call: Re-cent calls list.– Active call: go to the calloptions list (call in standby,hang up, mute microphone,private number, etc.).

– Navi System Plus: Zoom in/out(with and without active route).– Navi System: If there is a map onthe Digital Scorecard: Zoom in-out (with and without activeroute). If there is no map on theDigital Scorecard: the map istransferred from the InfotainmentSystem display to the DigitalScorecard (with and without ac-tive route). »

127

Operation


HPress No function No function No function No function Auto/Manual Zoom Zoom if the

map on the DigitScorecard.

a) According to the vehicle's equipment package.b) This function can be used from any mode (audio, media, navigation, vehicle status, travel data).c) This action can be performed when you are listening to the radio; there is no need to be in audio-radio mode.d) These actions can be performed when you are listening to media; there is no need to be in audio-radio mode.

128

Opening and closing

Opening and closing

Central locking

Description


The vehicle can be locked and unlocked viathe central locking system. There are severalmethods, depending on the vehicle equip-ment:

● key with remote control ››› page 131,● lock on driver door (emergency opening››› page 16) or● interior central locking switch ››› page 132.

Unlocking one side of the vehicle onlyWhen you lock the vehicle with the key, thedoors and the rear lid are locked. When youopen the door, you can either unlock only thedriver door, or all the vehicle doors. To selectthe required option, use Easy Connect*››› page 132.

Auto Lock*The Auto Lock function locks the doors andthe rear lid when the vehicle exceeds a speedof about 15 km/h (9 mph).

The vehicle is unlocked again when the igni-tion key is removed. Alternatively, the vehiclecan also be unlocked via the central lockingswitch or by pulling one of the inside doorhandles. The Auto Lock function can beswitched on and off on the sound system oron the Easy Connect* system ››› page 132.

In the event of an accident in which the air-bags inflate, the doors will be automaticallyunlocked to facilitate access and assistance.

Anti-theft alarm system*If the anti-theft alarm system senses interfer-ence with the vehicle it triggers an audibleand visible alarm.

The anti-theft alarm system is automaticallyswitched on when locking the vehicle. Itswitches off when the vehicle is unlockedfrom a distance.

When the driver door is unlocked with the key,you should switch on the ignition within 15seconds. Otherwise the alarm will be trig-gered. On some export versions, the alarm istriggered immediately when you open a door.

To deactivate the alarm, press the buttonon the remote control key, or switch on the ig-nition. After a certain time, the alarm will au-tomatically switch off.

Switch off the vehicle interior monitoring andtow-away protection if you wish to prevent

the alarm from being triggered accidentally››› page 141.

Turn signalsThe turn signals will flash twice when the ve-hicle is unlocked and once when the vehicleis locked.

If it does not flash, this indicates that one ofthe doors, the rear lid or the bonnet is notclosed correctly.

Accidental lock-outThe central locking system prevents you frombeing locked out of the vehicle in the follow-ing situations:

● If the driver door is open, the vehicle cannotbe locked with the central locking switch››› page 132.

Lock the vehicle with the remote control key,when all the doors and the rear lid have beenclosed. This prevents the accidental lockingof the vehicle.

WARNINGDo not leave anyone (especially children)in the vehicle if it is locked from the outsideand the anti-theft security system* is ena-bled, as the doors and windows cannotthen be opened from the inside. Lockeddoors could delay assistance in an emer-gency, potentially putting lives at risk. »

129

Operation

Note● Never leave any valuable items in the ve-hicle unattended. Even a locked vehicle isnot a safe.● If the diode on the driver door sill lightsup for about 30 seconds when the vehicleis locked, the central locking system or an-ti-theft alarm* is not working properly. Youshould have the fault repaired at a SEATOfficial Service or specialised workshop.● The vehicle interior monitoring of the an-ti-theft alarm* system will only function asintended if the windows and the sunroof*are closed.

Car key

Fig. 136 Vehicle key

Fig. 137 Vehicle key with alarm button.

Vehicle keyWith the vehicle key the vehicle may belocked or unlocked remotely ››› page 129.

The vehicle key includes an emitter and bat-tery. The receiver is in the interior of the vehi-cle. The range of the vehicle key with remotecontrol and new battery is several metresaround the vehicle.

If it is not possible to open or close the vehicleusing the remote control key, this should bere-synchronised ››› page 138 or the batterychanged ››› page 137.

Different keys belonging to the vehicle maybe used.

Control lamp on the vehicle keyWhen a button on the vehicle key is pressed,the control lamp flashes ››› Fig. 136 (arrow)once briefly, but if the button is held down for

a longer period the control lamp flashes sev-eral times, such as in convenience opening.

If the vehicle key control lamp does not lightup when the button is pressed, replace thekey's battery ››› page 137.

Unfolding and folding the key shaftPress button 1 ››› Fig. 136 or ››› Fig. 137 tounlock and unfold the key shaft.

To fold the shaft away, press button 1 andfold the key shaft in until it locks in place.

Alarm button*Only press alarm button 2 in the event of anemergency! When the alarm button is press-ed, the vehicle horn is heard and the turn sig-nals are switched on for a short time. Whenthe alarm button is pressed again, the alarmis switched off.

Spare keyTo obtain a spare key and other vehicle keys,the vehicle chassis number is required.

Each new key contains a microchip whichmust be coded with the data from the vehicleelectronic immobiliser. A vehicle key will notwork if it does not contain a microchip or themicrochip has not been encoded. This is alsotrue for keys which are specially cut for thevehicle.

130

Opening and closing

The vehicle keys or new spare keys can beobtained from a SEAT Official Service, a spe-cialised workshop or an approved key servicequalified to create this kind of key.

New keys or spare keys must be synchronisedbefore use ››› page 138.

CAUTIONAll of the vehicle keys contain electroniccomponents. Protect them from damage,impacts and humidity.

Note● Only use the key button when you requirethe corresponding function. Pushing thebutton unnecessarily could accidentallyunlock the vehicle or trigger the alarm. It isalso possible even when you are outsidethe radius of action.● Key operation can be greatly influencedby overlapping radio signals close to thevehicle working in the same range of fre-quencies, for example, radio transmitters ormobile telephones.● Obstacles between the remote controland the vehicle, bad weather conditionsand discharged batteries can considerablyreduce the range of the remote control.● If the buttons of the vehicle key arepressed ››› Fig. 136 or ››› Fig. 137 or one ofthe central locking buttons ››› page 132 ispressed repeatedly in short succession, thecentral locking briefly disconnects as pro-

tection against overloading. The vehicle isthen unlocked. Lock it if necessary.

Unlocking/Locking by remote con-trol


The vehicle will be locked again automatical-ly if you do not open one of the doors or therear lid within 30 seconds after unlocking thecar. This function prevents the vehicle fromremaining unlocked if the unlocking button ispressed by mistake. This does not apply if youpress the button for at least one second.

In vehicles with a security central lockingfeature (selective unlocking of side doors)››› page 131, when the button is pressedonce, only the driver door and the fuel tankflap are unlocked. When the button is presseda second time, all the vehicle doors are un-locked.

WARNINGObserve the safety warnings ››› in De-scription on page 129.

Note● Do not use the remote control key untilthe vehicle is visible.

● Other functions of the remote control key››› page 145, Convenience opening andclosing.

Selective unlocking system

The selective unlocking system allows you toonly unlock the driver door and the fuel tankflap. All other doors and the rear lid remainlocked.

Unlocking the driver door and tank flap– Press (once) the button on the remote

control key or turn the key once in theopening direction.

Unlocking all the doors, the rear lid andthe tank flap simultaneously.– Within 5 seconds, press (twice) the but-

ton on the remote control key, or turn thekey twice within 5 seconds in the openingdirection.

The anti-theft security system* and the anti-theft alarm* are immediately disabled if youunlock only the driver door, without unlockingthe other doors.

In vehicles with Easy Connect*, you can pro-gramme the security central locking systemdirectly ››› page 132.

131

Operation

Adjusting the central locking

You can use Easy Connect* to select whichdoors are unlocked with the central lockingsystem. Using the radio or the Easy Connect*system, you can select whether the vehicleautomatically closes with the “Auto Lock”programme at speeds of more than 15 km/h(9 mph).

Programming the unlocking of the doors(vehicles with Easy Connect)– Select the button > SETTINGS function

button > Opening and closing > Centrallocking > Unlocking doors.

Programming the Auto Lock (vehicles withradio)– Select: SETUP button > control button Central locking > Locking whiledriving.

Programming the Auto Lock (vehicles withEasy Connect)– Select: button > SETTINGS function

button > Opening and closing > Centrallocking > Locking while driving.

Unlocking doorsYou can choose to unlock all the doors oronly the driver door when you unlock thevehicle. In all the options, the fuel tank flap isalso unlocked.

With the Driver setting, when you press the button on the remote control key once, onlythe driver door is unlocked. If that button ispressed twice, the rest of the doors and therear lid will be unlocked.

In vehicles with a conventional key, turn thekey in the door lock, in the direction of open-ing, twice within 2 seconds.

If the button is pressed, all the vehicledoors are locked. At the same time, a confir-mation signal* is heard.

Auto Lock while drivingIf you select on, all the vehicle doors arelocked at speeds above 15 km/h (9 mph).

Central locking switch


Please note the following when using thecentral locking switch to lock your vehicle:

● It is not possible to open the doors or therear lid from the outside (for safety reasons,e.g. when stopped at traffic lights).● The LED in the central locking switch lightsup when all the doors are closed and locked.● You can open the doors individually fromthe inside by pulling the inside door handle.

● In the event of an accident in which the air-bags inflate, doors locked from the inside willbe automatically unlocked to facilitate ac-cess and assistance.

WARNING● The central locking switch also operateswhen the ignition is switched off and auto-matically locks all the vehicle doors whenthe button is pressed.● The central locking switch does not oper-ate if the vehicle is locked from the outsideand the anti-theft security system isswitched on.● Locked doors could delay assistance inan emergency, potentially putting lives atrisk. Do not leave anyone, especially chil-dren, in the vehicle.

NoteYour vehicle will lock automatically when itreaches a speed of about 15 km/h (9 mph)(Auto Lock) ››› page 129. You can unlock thevehicle again using the button on thecentral locking switch.

132

Opening and closing

Related video Keyless Access

Fig. 138 Handsfree

Unlocking and locking the vehiclewith Keyless Access*

Fig. 139 Keyless Access locking and ignitionsystem: In the proximity of the car. Open-ing the rear lid with sensor-controlled opening(Easy Open)

Fig. 140 Locking and ignition system withoutKeyless Access: sensor surface A for unlock-ing inside the door handle and sensor surfaceB for locking on the exterior of the handle.

Depending on the equipment, the vehiclemay have the Keyless Access system.

Keyless Access is a key-free locking and igni-tion system to unlock and lock the vehiclewithout actively using its key. To do this, allthat is required is to have a valid vehicle key inthe detection area where you are attemptingto access the vehicle ››› Fig. 139 and totouch one of the sensor surfaces on the doorhandles ››› Fig. 140 or operate the soft-touch/handle on the rear lid››› page 141 ››› .

The vehicle can be unlocked and locked viathe front doors only. When doing so, the re-mote control key must be no further than ap-prox. 1.5 m away from the door handle. »

133

Operation

It does not matter where you carry the key,for instance whether it is in your jacket pocketor in a briefcase.

Once the doors have been locked, they can-not be opened again immediately. This willenable you to check that the doors are prop-erly closed.

If you wish, when unlocking, you can unlockonly the corresponding door or the entire ve-hicle. The necessary adjustments can be per-formed in vehicles with a driver informationsystem ››› page 36.

General informationIf a valid key is in the proximity of the car,››› Fig. 139 the Keyless Access locking andstarting system gives the key entry as soon asone of the sensor surfaces on the door han-dles is touched or the softtouch/handle onthe rear lid is operated. The following featuresare then available without having to use thevehicle key actively:

● Keyless Entry: unlocking the vehicle usingthe handles of the front doors or the soft-touch/handle on the rear lid.● Keyless Exit: locking the vehicle using thesensor of the driver or passenger door han-dle.● Easy Open: opening the rear lid moving onefoot below the rear bumper.

● Press & Drive: keyless starting of the enginewith the starter button ››› page 241.

The central locking and locking systems op-erate in the same way as a normal lockingand unlocking system. Only the controlschange.

Unlocking the vehicle is confirmed with adouble flash of the indicator lights; locking bya single flash.

If the vehicle is locked and then all doors andthe rear lid are closed leaving the last keyused inside the vehicle and none outside, thevehicle will not lock immediately. All the ve-hicle's indicator lights will flash four times.The vehicle will lock after a few seconds ifyou do not open any door or the rear lid.

The vehicle will lock again after a few sec-onds if you unlock the vehicle but fail to openany door or boot hatch.

Unlocking and opening the doors (Key-less-Entry)● Grip one of the front door handles. In doingthis, the sensor surface ››› Fig. 140 A (arrow)on the handle is touched and the vehicle un-locks.● Open the door.

On vehicles with selective opening or info-tainment system configuration, pulling thedoor handle twice will unlock all doors.

In vehicles without safety system“Safelock”: closing and locking the doors(Keyless-Exit)● Switch the ignition off.● Close the driver's door.● Touch (once) the locking sensor surface B(arrow) on one of the front door handles. Thedoor that is used must be closed.

In vehicles with a safety system“Safelock”: closing and locking the doors(Keyless-Exit)● Switch the ignition off.● Close the driver's door.● Touch (once) the sensor surface B (arrow)on one of the front door handles. The vehiclelocks with the “Safelock” security system››› page 137. The door that is used must beclosed.● Touch (twice) the sensor surface B (arrow)of one of the front door handles to lock thevehicle without activating the “Safelock” se-curity system ››› page 137.

Unlocking and locking the boot hatchWhen the vehicle is locked, the rear lid auto-matically unlocks on opening if there is a val-id vehicle key in the proximity ››› Fig. 139 .

Open or close the rear lid normally.

134

Opening and closing

After closing, the hatch locks automatically. Ifthe complete vehicle is unlocked, the rear lidwill not lock automatically after closing it.

Rear lid with sensor-controlled open-ing/closing (Easy Open)If there is a valid vehicle key in the proximity››› Fig. 139 of the rear lid, it is possible tounlock and open or close it moving one footin the area of the sensors ››› Fig. 139 loca-ted under the rear bumper.

● Switch the ignition off.● Stand in front of the rear bumper, in themiddle.● With a brisk movement, bring your foot andlower leg as close as you can to the bumper.The lower part of the leg needs to be close tothe upper sensor area and your foot to thelower sensor area ››› Fig. 139 1 .● Quickly remove your foot and lower legfrom the sensor areas ››› Fig. 139 2 . Therear lid will be automatically opened.● If the rear lid fails to open, repeat the pro-cedure after a few seconds.

The third brake light flashes once to show theboot has opened with the Easy Open func-tion.

The rear lid can be closed with another footmovement similar to the opening one (provi-ded a valid vehicle key is in the proximity ofthe rear lid).

When closed, the rear lid automatically locksif the vehicle has been locked beforehandand there is no valid key inside.

While the rear lid is in motion (either openingor closing), it can be stopped with anotherfoot movement similar to the opening one(provided a valid vehicle key is in the proximi-ty of the rear lid).

The Easy Open feature is not available or on-ly has limited availability in the following sit-uations (examples):

● If the rear bumper is very dirty.● If the rear bumper is wet with salt water, e.g.after having driven on gritted roads.● If the electrical unlocking tow hitch is notcovered.● If the vehicle has been equipped at a latertime with a tow bracket.

In the event of heavy rain, the Easy Open fea-ture may take a little longer to open the bootor may deactivate automatically, to avoid theboot opening by accident, e.g. because ofthe running water.

The Easy Open function can be connectedand disconnected permanently in the info-tainment system by pressing the buttonand the SETTINGS > Opening and clos-ing function buttons ››› page 36.

What happens when locking the vehiclewith a second keyIf there is a vehicle key inside the vehicle andit is locked from the outside with a second ve-hicle key, the key inside the vehicle is blockedfor engine ignition ››› page 241. In order toenable engine ignition, press the button onthe key inside the vehicle.

Automatically disabling sensorsIf the vehicle is not locked or unlocked for along period of time, the proximity sensors onthe passenger doors are automatically disa-bled.

If one of the sensor surfaces on the door han-dles is often activated in an unusual mannerwith the vehicle locked (e.g. by the branchesof a bush rubbing against it), all proximitysensors are disabled for a certain period oftime.

Sensors will again be enabled:

● After a time.● OR: if the vehicle is unlocked with the but-ton on the key.● OR: if the boot is opened.● OR: if the vehicle is unlocked manually withthe key. »

135

Operation

Keyless Access temporary disconnectionfunction*You can deactivate the vehicle's Keyless Ac-cess unlocking for a locking and unlockingcycle.

● Move the gear lever to position P (if the ve-hicle has automatic gearbox), since other-wise the vehicle cannot be locked.● Close the door.● Push the central locking button on the re-mote control and touch the locking sensorsurface of the driver door handle››› Fig. 140 B within the following 5 seconds.Do not grasp the door handle; otherwise thevehicle will not unlock. Deactivation is alsopossible if the vehicle is locked through thedriver’s door lock.● To check that the function has been deacti-vated, wait at least 10 seconds, grip and pullon the door handle. The door should notopen.

The next time the door can only be unlockedvia the remote control or the lock cylinder.The next time the door is locked/unlocked,Keyless Access will be active again.

Convenience functionsTo close all the electric windows using theconvenience function, keep a finger on thelocking sensor surface B (arrow) of the door

handle for a few seconds until the windowshave closed.

The doors opened by touching the sensorsurface of the door handle depend on thesettings that have been activated in the info-tainment system with the > SETTINGS >Opening and closing function buttons.

WARNINGIf there is a valid key in the proximity of therear lid, in some cases the Easy Open func-tion may be accidentally activated and therear lid will open, for example, whensweeping under the rear bumper, when di-recting a water jet or high pressure steamto the area or when carrying out mainte-nance work or repairs in that area. If acci-dentally opened, the rear lid could injuresomebody situated in its area of operationor cause material damage.● Therefore, always make sure that there isno unsupervised valid key in the area nearthe rear lid.● Before carrying out any maintenance orrepair work on the vehicle, always disablethe Easy Open feature via the infotainmentsystem.● Before washing the vehicle, always disa-ble the Easy Open feature via the infotain-ment system.● Before attaching a bicycle rack or a trail-er, ››› page 330, always disable the EasyOpen feature via the infotainment system.

CAUTIONThe sensor surfaces on the door handlescould engage if hit with a water jet or highpressure steam if there is a valid vehiclekey in the proximity. If at least one of theelectric windows is open and the sensorsurface B (arrow) on one of the handles isactivated continuously, all windows willclose.

Note● If the vehicle battery has little or nocharge, or the vehicle key battery is almostor entirely out of charge, you will probablynot be able to lock or unlock the vehiclewith the Keyless Access system. The vehi-cle can be unlocked or locked manually››› page 88.● To control the proper locking of the vehi-cle, the release function is disabled for ap-prox. 2 seconds.● If the message Keyless access systemfaulty is displayed on the screen of thedash panel, abnormalities may occur in theoperation of the Keyless Access system.Contact a specialised workshop. SEAT rec-ommends visiting a SEAT dealership forthis.● Depending on the function set on the in-fotainment system for the mirrors, the exte-rior mirrors will unfold and the surroundlighting will come on when unlocking thevehicle using the sensor surface on the

136

Opening and closing

driver and passenger door handles››› page 160.● If there is no valid key inside the vehicleor the system fails to detect one, a warningwill display on the dash panel screen. Thiscould happen if any other radio frequencysignal interferes with the key signal (e.g.from a mobile device accessory) or if thekey is covered by another object (e.g. analuminium case).● If the sensors are very dirty, e.g. have alayer of salt, the correct functioning of thesensors on the door handles may be affec-ted. In this case, clean the vehicle.● If the vehicle is equipped with an auto-matic gearbox, it may only be locked in thegear stick is in position P.● To improve the safety of your vehicle, theremote control of the system is equippedwith a position sensor. If this remote controldoes not detect movement for a certainlength of time, the system will concludethat the vehicle cannot be opened (e.g. ona night table) so it will be disabled.

Anti-theft security system (Safe-lock)*

The following message is displayed on the in-strument panel to remind the driver that whenthe vehicle is closed from the outside, the an-ti-theft security system is switched on. Do

not forget the Safelock. Please seeInstruction Manual. The vehicle cannotbe opened from inside. This makes it more dif-ficult for unauthorised persons to break intothe vehicle ››› in Description on page 129.

The anti-theft security system can be switch-ed off each time the vehicle is locked:

● Turn the key a second time to the lock posi-tion, in the door lock, within two seconds. Ifnecessary, remove the protective cover onthe driver door handle ››› page 16 or● Press the button on the remote controlkey for a second time within 2 seconds.

The flashing frequency of the diode in thedoor sill immediately confirms the process.Initially, the diode flashes in a fast sequencefor a brief period, then it stops for approxi-mately 30 seconds and, lastly continuesflashing slowly.

Replacing the battery

Fig. 141 Vehicle key: opening the battery com-partment.

Fig. 142 Vehicle key: removing the battery.

SEAT recommends you ask a specialisedworkshop to replace the battery.

The battery is located to the rear of the vehi-cle key, under a cover. »

137

Operation

Changing the battery● Unfold the vehicle key blade ››› page 130.● Remove the cover from the back of the ve-hicle key ››› Fig. 141 in the direction of the ar-row ››› .● Extract the battery from the compartmentusing a suitable thin object ››› Fig. 142.● Place the new battery in the compartmentas shown ››› Fig. 142, pressing in the oppositedirection to that shown by the arrow ››› .● Fit the cover as shown ››› Fig. 141, pressingit onto the vehicle key casing in the oppositedirection to that shown by the arrow until itclicks into place.

CAUTION● If the battery is not changed correctly,the vehicle key may be damaged.● Use of unsuitable batteries may damagethe vehicle key. For this reason, always re-place the dead battery with another of thesame voltage, size and specifications.● When fitting the battery, check that thepolarity is correct.

For the sake of the environmentPlease dispose of your used batteries cor-rectly and with respect for the environ-ment.

Synchronising the vehicle key

If the button is pressed frequently outsideof the vehicle range, it is possible that the ve-hicle can no longer be locked or unlocked us-ing the key. In this case, the key must be re-synchronised as described below:

● Unfold the vehicle key blade ››› page 130.● If necessary, remove the cover from thedriver door lever ››› page 16.● Press the button on the vehicle key. Forthis, it must remain with the vehicle.● Open the vehicle within one minute usingthe key blade. The key has been synchron-ised.● If necessary, fit the cap.

Childproof lock

Fig. 143 Childproof lock on the left hand sidedoor.

The childproof lock prevents the rear doorsfrom being opened from the inside. This sys-tem prevents minors from opening a door ac-cidentally while the vehicle is running.

This function is independent of the vehicleelectronic opening and locking systems. Itonly affects rear doors. It can only be activa-ted and deactivated manually, as describedbelow:

Activating the childproof lock– Unlock the vehicle and open the door in

which you wish to activate the childprooflock.

– With the door open, rotate the groove in thedoor using the ignition key, clockwise forthe left hand side doors ››› Fig. 143 and an-ti-clockwise for the right hand side doors.

138

Opening and closing

Deactivating the childproof lock– Unlock the vehicle and open the door

whose childproof lock you want to deacti-vate.

– With the door open, rotate the groove in thedoor using the ignition key, anti-clockwisefor the left hand side doors ››› Fig. 143 andclockwise for the right hand side doors.

Once the childproof lock is activated, thedoor can only be opened from the outside.The childproof lock can be activated or de-activated by inserting the key in the groovewhen the door is open, as described above.

Anti-theft alarm system*

Description

The anti-theft alarm makes it more difficult tobreak into the vehicle or steal it.

The anti-theft alarm is automatically turnedon when the vehicle is locked with the key.

● The turn signal light will flash twice onopening and deactivating the alarm.● The turn signal light will flash once on clos-ing and activating the alarm.

When does the system trigger an alarm?The anti-theft alarm siren will be triggered forabout 30 seconds accompanied by soundand optical (flashing) warning signals andwill be repeated about ten times when thevehicle is locked and the following unauthor-ised actions are attempted:

● Opening a door that is mechanically un-locked using the vehicle key without switchingon the ignition in the next 15 seconds (in cer-tain markets, such as the Netherlands, there isno 15 second waiting time and the alarm isactivated immediately on opening the door).● A door is opened.● The bonnet is opened.● The rear lid is opened.● When the ignition is switched on with a non-authorised key.● When the vehicle battery is disconnected.● Movement inside the vehicle (in vehicleswith interior monitoring ››› page 141).● When the vehicle is towed (in vehicles withanti-tow system ››› page 141).● When the vehicle is raised (in vehicles withanti-tow system ››› page 141).● When the vehicle is transported on a ferryor by rail (vehicles with an anti-tow system orvehicle interior monitoring ››› page 141).● When a trailer connected to the anti-theftalarm system is disconnected.

How to turn OFF the alarmUnlock the vehicle with the unlocking buttonon the key or turn on the ignition with a validkey.

Note● After 28 days, the indicator light will beswitched off to prevent the battery from ex-hausting if the vehicle has been left parkedfor a long period of time. The alarm systemremains activated.● If, after the audible warning goes off, an-other monitored area is accessed (e.g. therear lid is opened after a door has beenopened), the alarm is triggered again.● The anti-theft alarm is not activatedwhen the vehicle is locked from within usingthe central locking button .● If the driver door is unlocked mechanical-ly with the key, only the driver door is un-locked, the rest of the doors remain locked.Only when the ignition has been turned onwill the other doors be available - but notunlocked - and the central locking buttonwill be activated.● If the vehicle battery is run down or flatthen the anti-theft alarm will not operatecorrectly.● Vehicle monitoring remains active even ifthe battery is disconnected or not workingfor any reason. »

139

Operation

● The alarm is triggered immediately if oneof the battery cables is disconnected whilethe alarm system is active.

Vehicle interior monitoring and an-ti-tow system*

It is a monitoring or control function incorpo-rated in the anti-theft alarm* which detectsunauthorised vehicle entry by means of ultra-sound.

Activation– It is automatically switched on when the

anti-theft alarm is activated.

Deactivation– Open the vehicle with the key, either me-

chanically or by pressing the button onthe remote control. The time period fromwhen the door is opened until the key is in-serted in the contact should not exceed 15seconds, otherwise the alarm will be trig-gered.

– Press the button on the remote controltwice. The volumetric sensor and tilt sen-sors will be deactivated. The alarm systemremains activated.

The vehicle interior monitoring and the anti-tow system are automatically switched onagain next time the vehicle is locked.

The vehicle interior monitoring and anti-towsensor (tilt sensor) are automatically switch-ed on when the anti-theft alarm is switchedon. In order to activate it, all the doors andthe rear lid must be closed.

If you wish to switch off the vehicle interiormonitoring and the anti-tow system, it mustbe done each time that the vehicle is locked;if not, they will be automatically switched on.

The vehicle interior monitoring and the anti-tow system should be switched off if animalsare left inside the locked vehicle (otherwise,their movements will trigger the alarm) orwhen, for example, the vehicle is transportedor has to be towed with only one axle on theground.

False alarms

Interior monitoring will only operate correctlyif the vehicle is completely closed. Please ob-serve related legal requirements.

The following cases may cause a falsealarm:● Open windows (partially or fully).● Panoramic/tilting sunroof open (partially orcompletely).

● Movement of objects inside the vehicle,such as loose papers, items hanging from therear vision mirror (air fresheners), etc.

Note● If the vehicle is relocked and the alarm isactivated without the volumetric sensorfunction, relocking will activate the alarmwith all its functions, except the volumetricsensor. This function is reactivated whenthe alarm is switched on again, unless it isdeliberately switched off.● If the alarm has been triggered by thevolumetric sensor, this will be indicated bya flashing of the warning lamp on the driverdoor when the vehicle is opened. The flashis different to the flash indicating the alarmis activated.● The vibration of a mobile phone left in-side the vehicle may cause the vehicle in-terior monitoring alarm to trigger, as bothsensors react to movements and shakes in-side the vehicle.● If on activating the alarm, any door or therear lid is open, only the alarm will be acti-vated. The vehicle interior monitoring andthe anti-tow system will only be activatedonce all the doors are closed (including therear lid).

140

Opening and closing

Deactivating the vehicle interiormonitoring and anti-tow system*

When the vehicle is locked, the alarm will betriggered if movements are detected in the in-terior (e.g. by animals) or if the vehicle's incli-nation is changed (e.g. during transport). Youcan prevent the alarm from being triggeredaccidentally by switching off the vehicle inte-rior monitoring and/or tow-away protection.

● To disconnect vehicle interior monitoringand anti-tow protection, switch off the igni-tion and use the infotainment system to se-lect the following: button > function but-ton SETTINGS > Open and close > Cen-tral locking > Vehicle interior mon-itoring.● When the vehicle is locked now, the vehicleinterior monitoring and the tow-away protec-tion are switched off until the next time thedoor is opened.

If the anti-theft security system (Safelock)*››› page 137 is switched off, the vehicle interi-or monitoring and the tow-away protectionare automatically switched off.

WARNINGObserve the safety warnings ››› in De-scription on page 129.

Rear lid (luggage compart-ment)

Related video

Fig. 144 Handsfree

Rear lid with electric opening andclosing*

Fig. 145 Rear lid open: button to close rear lidimmediately.

Fig. 146 Centre console: button to open andclose rear lid.

Opening the rear lid● Unlock the vehicle ››› page 129 and brieflypress the handle of the rear lid. On vehicleswith Keyless Access you can directly pressthe handle of the rear lid. The rear lid is un-locked if an authorised key is recognised inthe proximity of the vehicle.● OR: press the button on the centre consolefor at least one second ››› Fig. 146. The but-ton also works when the ignition is switchedoff.● OR: press and hold the button of the ve-hicle key for approx. 1 second. If the vehicle islocked, only the rear lid is unlocked (the doorsremain locked).● OR: on vehicles with Keyless Access andsensor-controlled opening you can open therear lid by moving one foot in the area of thesensors located below the rear bumper (Easy »

141

Operation

Open). The rear lid will be automaticallyopened.

Closing the rear lid● Briefly press the button on the rear lid››› Fig. 145 ››› .● OR: press the button located on thecentre console until the rear lid is closed››› Fig. 146.● OR: on vehicles with Keyless Access, pressand hold the vehicle key button until therear lid is closed or move one foot in the areaof the sensors located below the rear bumper(Easy Open) ››› page 133. The key of the ve-hicle must not be further away than 1.5 mfrom the boot or inside the vehicle.● OR: manually move the rear lid in the direc-tion of closing until it closes automatically.● The rear lid goes down automatically to thefinal position and also closes automatically››› .

Interrupting opening or closingAfter beginning to open or close the rear lid,the action can be halted by pressing one ofthe buttons.

Continue opening or closing the rear lid byhand. To do this, some force will have to beused.

If you press one of the buttons again, therear lid will move again in the original direc-tion.

If the rear lid is met with resistance or an ob-stacle during the automatic opening or clos-ing, opening or closing will be interrupted im-mediately. For the closing process, the rearlid opens again slightly.

● Check why it has not been possible to openor close the rear lid.● Try to open or close the rear lid again.● If necessary, the rear lid can be opened orclosed by hand using reasonable force.

Special feature for pulling a trailerIf the factory-fitted towing bracket is electri-cally connected to a trailer ››› page 330, theelectric rear lid can only be opened or closedwith the buttons on the rear lid itself.

Acoustic warningsThroughout the process of opening or closingthe rear lid, acoustic warnings can be heard.Exception: when the rear lid is opened man-ually using the handle or the Easy Open func-tion with the movement of the foot or closedusing the button on the rear lid itself››› Fig. 145.

Modifying and memorising the openingangleIf the space behind or above the vehicle isless than the travel area of the rear lid, youcan change the opening angle of the rear lid.

To memorise a new opening angle, the rearlid must be open at least halfway.

● Interrupt the opening process in the desiredposition.● Press the button ››› Fig. 145 on the rearlid for at least 3 seconds.

The opening angle is memorised. Memorisa-tion is indicated by blinking of the hazardwarning lights and an audible warning.

Resetting and memorising the opening an-gleFor the rear lid to reopen completely, theopening angle must be reset and memorisedagain.

● Release the rear lid and open it to thememorised height.● Lift the rear lid by hand as far as it goes. Todo this, some force will have to be used.● Press the button ››› Fig. 145 on the rearlid for at least 3 seconds.● This resets and memorises the factory-setopening angle. Memorisation is indicated by

142

Opening and closing

blinking of the hazard warning lights and anaudible warning.

Automatic protection against overheatingIf the system is operated repeatedly in a shortspace of time, it automatically switches off toprevent overheating.

Once the system is cool again, the functioncan be reused. Until then, the rear lid can onlybe opened and closed by hand using reason-able force.

If with the rear lid open the vehicle battery isdisconnected ››› page 355 or the corre-sponding fuse burns out ››› page 93, the sys-tem will have to be reset. This requires closingthe rear lid completely once.

Emergency unlocking››› page 18

WARNINGIf a lot of snow builds up on the rear lid or itis heavily loaded, the rear lid may not openor, after opening, it may lower by itself dueto the extra weight and cause serious in-jury.● Do not open the rear lid when there is alot of snow on it or when carrying a load(e.g. on a rack).● Before opening the rear lid, remove thesnow or the load.

WARNINGIf the rear lid is closed incorrectly or with-out due care, it could result in serious in-jury.● Never leave the vehicle unattended or al-low children to play inside or next to it, es-pecially if the rear lid is open. Childrencould enter the luggage compartment,close the rear lid and become trapped. Alocked vehicle can reach extremely highand low temperatures, depending on thetime of year, thus causing serious injuries,illness or even death.

CAUTIONBefore opening or closing the rear lid, makesure that there is enough space to open orclose it, e.g. when pulling a trailer or in agarage.

Rear lid automatic locking

Where the vehicle has been locked by press-ing the button on the remote control withthe rear lid open, the rear lid will lock auto-matically when closed.

The automatic rear lid locking time extensionfunction can be activated. Where this func-tion is activated and once the rear lid hasbeen unlocked by pressing the button onthe remote control key ››› page 131, the rear

lid can be re-opened for a certain length oftime.

Where required, the automatic tailgate lock-ing time extension function can be activatedor deactivated at an Authorised SEAT Serv-ice, which will provide all the necessary infor-mation.

Before the vehicle locks automatically, thereis a risk of intruders getting into the vehicle.Therefore, we recommend you always lockthe vehicle by pressing the button on theremote control or by using the central lockingbutton.

WARNINGObserve the safety warnings ››› in Intro-duction on page 88.● Always close the rear lid properly. Risk ofaccident or injury.● The rear lid must not be opened when thereverse or rear fog lights are lit. This maydamage the tail lights.● Do not close the rear lid by pushing itdown with your hand on the rear window.The glass could smash. Risk of injury!● Ensure the rear lid is locked after closingit. If not, it may open unexpectedly whiledriving.● Closing the rear lid without observingand ensuring it is clear could cause seriousinjury to you and to third parties. Make surethat no one is in the path of the rear lid. »

143

Operation

● Never drive with the rear lid open or half-closed, exhaust gases may penetrate intothe interior of the vehicle. Danger of poi-soning!● If you only open the rear lid, do not leavethe key inside. The vehicle cannot beopened if the key is left inside.

Controls for the windows

Opening and closing the electricwindows

Fig. 147 Detail of the driver door: controls forthe windows.


The front and rear electric windows can beoperated by using the controls on the driverdoor. The other doors each have a switch fortheir own window.

Always close the windows fully if you park thevehicle or leave it unattended ››› .

You can use the electric windows for approx.10 minutes after switching off the ignition ifneither the driver door nor the front passen-ger door has been opened and the key hasnot been removed from the ignition.

Safety switch *The safety switch ››› Fig. 147 5 on the driverdoor can be used to disable the electric win-dow buttons on the rear doors.

Safety switch not pressed: buttons on reardoors are activated.

Safety switch pressed: buttons on rear doorsare deactivated.

The safety control symbol lights up in yel-low if the buttons on the rear doors areswitched off.

WARNINGObserve the safety warnings ››› in Intro-duction on page 88.● Incorrect use of the electric windows canresult in injury.

● Never close the rear lid without observingand ensuring it is clear, to do otherwisecould cause serious injury to you and thirdparties. Make sure that no one is in the pathof a window.● If the ignition is switched on, the electricequipment could be activated with risk ofinjury, for example, in the electric windows.● The doors can be locked using the re-mote control key. This could become anobstacle for assistance in an emergencysituation.● Therefore always take the key with youwhen you leave the vehicle.● The electric windows will work until theignition has been switched off and one ofthe front doors has been opened.● If necessary, use the safety switch to dis-able the rear electric windows. Make surethat they have been disabled.

NoteIf the window is not able to close because itis stiff or because of an obstruction, thewindow will automatically open again››› page 145. If this happens, check why thewindow could not be closed before at-tempting to close it again.

144

Opening and closing

Roll-back function

The roll-back function reduces the risk of in-jury when the electric windows close.

● If a window is obstructed when closing au-tomatically, the window stops at this pointand lowers immediately ››› .● Next, check why the window does not closebefore attempting it again.● If you try within the following 10 secondsand the window closes again with difficulty orthere is an obstruction, the automatic closingwill stop working for 10 seconds.● If the window is still obstructed, the windowwill stop at this point.● If there is no obvious reason why the win-dow cannot be closed, try to close it again bypulling the tab within ten seconds. The win-dow closes with maximum force. The roll-back function is now deactivated.● If more than 10 seconds pass, the windowwill open fully when you operate one of thebuttons. One-touch closing is reactivated.

WARNINGObserve the safety warnings ››› in Open-ing and closing the electric windows onpage 144.● The roll-back function does not preventfingers or other parts of the body getting

pinched against the window frame. Risk ofaccident.

Convenience opening and closing

Use the convenience opening/closing func-tion to easily open/close all the windowsfrom the outside.

Convenience open function– Press and hold the button on the remote

control key until all the windows havereached the desired position, or

– First unlock the vehicle using the buttonon the remote control key and then keepthe key in the driver door lock until all thewindows have reached the required posi-tion.

Convenience close function– Press and hold the button on the remote

control key until all the windows are closed››› , or

– Lock the driver's door with the key and holdthe key in the lock position until all the win-dows are closed

Programming convenience opening in theEasy Connect*– Select: button > SETTINGS function

button > Opening and closing > Openingthe window by holding down buttonor > Front window on/off.

WARNING● Never close the windows without duecare or proper control. There is a risk of suf-fering injury.● For safety reasons, you should only usethe remote control open and close func-tions within about 2 metres of the vehicle.To avoid injuries, always keep an eye on thewindows when pressing the button to closethem. The windows stop moving as soon asthe button is released.

One-touch opening and closing

One-touch opening and closing means youdo not have to hold down the button.

Buttons ››› Fig. 147 1 , 2 , 3 and 4 havetwo positions for opening windows and twofor closing them. This makes it easier to openand close windows to the desired position.

One-touch closing– Pull up the window button briefly up to the

second position. The window closes fully. »145

Operation

One-touch opening– Push down the window button briefly up to

the second position. The window opensfully.

Resetting one-touch opening and closingThe automatic open and close function willnot work if the battery has been temporarilydisconnected. The function can be restoredas follows:

– Close the window as far as it will go by lift-ing and holding the electric window switch.

– Release the switch and then lift it again for 1second. This will re-enable the automaticfunction.

If you push (or pull) a button to the first stage,the window will open (or close) until you re-lease the button. If you push or lift the buttonbriefly to the second stage, the window willopen (one-touch opening) or close (one-touch closing) automatically. If you operatethe button while the window is opening orclosing, it stops at this position.

Sunroof*

Introduction

The sunroof consists of two glass parts. Therear part is fixed and cannot be opened. It al-so has a sun blind.

WARNINGIf the sunroof is used negligently or withoutpaying due attention, it can cause seriousinjury.● Open or close the sunroof and the sunblind only when no one is in their path ofmovement.● Never leave any key inside the vehiclewhen exiting.● Never leave a child or any other personwho may need help in the vehicle, espe-cially if they have access to the vehiclekey. If using they key unattended, theycould lock the vehicle, start the engine,switch on the ignition and activate the sun-roof.● After switching off, it is still possible toopen or close the sunroof during a shortspace of time provided that neither thedriver nor passenger door is opened.

CAUTION● To prevent damage, during winter tem-peratures remove any ice or snow that

might be on the car roof before opening thesunroof or adjusting the tilt position.● Before leaving the vehicle or in case ofrainfall, always close the sunroof. With thesunroof open or in a tilted position, watercan enter the interior and can cause con-siderable damage to the electrical system.As a result, other damage can occur in thevehicle.

Note● Leaves and other loose objects that ac-cumulate on the sunroof rails should beregularly cleaned away either by hand orwith a vacuum.● If the sunroof does not work correctly, theanti-trap function will not work either. Con-tact a specialised workshop.

146

Opening and closing

Opening and closing the sunroof

Fig. 148 On the interior roof lining: sunroofbutton.

The sunroof only works when the ignition isswitched on. Once the ignition has beenswitched off, you can still open or close thesunroof for a few minutes provided the driverdoor and the front passenger door are notopened.

The sun blind automatically opens along withthe sunroof if completely closed or if in frontof the sunroof. The sun blind remains in theprevious position and does not automaticallyclose with the sunroof. The sun blind can onlybe closed completely once the sunroof hasbeen closed.

The button ››› Fig. 148 has two levels. Thefirst level switches the sunroof to the tilted po-sition, opening or closing it fully or partially.

On the second level, the sunroof automati-cally moves to the corresponding final posi-tion after briefly pressing the button. Activat-ing the button again stops the automaticfunction.

Adjusting the tilt position of the sunroof● Press the rear part of the button B to thefirst level.● Automatic function: briefly press the rearpart of button B to the second level.

Closing the sunroof from a tilted position● Press the front part of the button A to thefirst level.● Automatic function: briefly press the frontpart of the button A to the second level.

Stopping the automatic operation by ad-justing the tilted position of the sunroof orby closing the sunroof● Press button A or B again.

Opening the sunroof● Press button C backwards to the first level.● Automatic function to the comfort position:briefly press button C backwards to the sec-ond level.

Closing the sunroof● Press button D forwards to the first level.

● Automatic function: briefly press button Dforwards to the second level.

Stopping the automatic operation duringthe opening or closing● Press button C or D again.

Opening and closing the sun blind

Fig. 149 On the interior roof lining: switches forthe sun blind.

The electrical sun blind works when the igni-tion is switched on.

When the sunroof is in its most tilted position,the sun blind automatically goes into a venti-lation position. The sun blind remains in thisposition also with the sunroof closed.

Buttons ››› Fig. 149 1 and 2 have two levels.The first level opens or closes the sun blindfully or partially. »

147

Operation

By briefly pressing the button to the secondlevel, the sun blind automatically moves tothe corresponding final position. Activatingthe button again stops the automatic func-tion.

Once the ignition has been switched off, youcan still open or close the sun blind for a fewminutes provided the driver door and thefront passenger door are not opened.

Opening the sun blind● Press button 1 to the first level.● Automatic function: briefly press button 1to the second level.

Closing the sun blind● Press button 2 to the first level.● Automatic function: briefly press button 2to the second level.

Stopping the automatic operation duringthe opening or closing● Press button 1 or 2 again.

NoteWhen the sunroof is open, the electric sunblind can only be closed to the front edgeof the sunroof.

Convenience function to open orclose the sunroof*

Fig. 150 Driver door lever: sensor surfaces.

The sunroof can be opened and closed withthe convenience function, just like the win-dows.

Using the door lock*● Hold the key in the door lock of the driverdoor in either the unlocking or locking posi-tion to open or close the roof in the tilted po-sition. Release the key to interrupt this func-tion.

Using the remote control● Keep the locking/unlocking button pressedto open/close the roof. If you release the but-ton is the opening/closing will stop.

Using the Keyless Access* system (onlyclosing)● Press and hold the locking sensor surface››› Fig. 150 B on the door handle to close thesunroof. If you release the sensor surface, theclosing movement stops.

WARNINGIf the sunroof is used negligently or withoutpaying due attention, it can cause seriousinjury.

Anti-trap function of the panoramicsliding sunroof and the sun blind

The anti-trap function can reduce the risk ofinjury when closing the sunroof and the sunblind ››› . If the sunroof or sun blind encoun-ter resistance or an obstacle when closing,they reopen immediately.

● Check why the sunroof or sun blind do notclose.● Try to close the sunroof or sun blind again.● If the sunroof or sun blind cannot be closeddue to an obstacle or some resistance, itstops at the corresponding position and thenopens. For automatic closing, a new closingattempt might take place.● If the sunroof or sun blind is still unable toclose, close it without the anti-trap function.

148


Closing the sunroof or sun blind withoutthe anti-trap function● Sunroof: within approximately 5 seconds ofhaving activated the roll-back function, pressthe button ››› Fig. 148 to the second levelin the direction of arrow ››› Fig. 148 D untilthe sunroof closes completely.● Sun blind: within approximately 5 secondsof having activated the anti-trap function,press button ››› Fig. 149 2 until the sun blindcloses completely.● The sunroof or sun blind close withoutthe anti-trap function intervening!● If the sunroof or sun blind will still not close,visit a specialised workshop.

WARNINGClosing the sunroof or sun blind without theanti-trap function can cause serious inju-ries.● Always be careful when closing the sun-roof and sun blind.● No person should ever remain in the wayof the sunroof or sun blind, especially whenclosing without the anti-trap function.● The anti-trap function does not preventfingers or other parts of the body from be-coming trapped against the roof frame andinjuries occurring.


Lights

Related video

Fig. 151 Vehicle lights

Control lamps

It lights up

Driving light totally or partially faulty.

Fault in the cornering light system.

It lights up

Rear fog light switched on ››› page 153.

It lights up

Left or right turn signal.The control lamp flashes twice as fast when a turnsignal is faulty.

Hazard warning lights on ››› page 154.

It lights up

Trailer turn signals

It lights up

Main beam on or flasher on ››› page 150.

It lights up

The Light Assist system is on ››› page 152.

Several warning and control lamps light upfor a few seconds when the ignition is switch-ed on, signalling that the function is beingverified. They will switch off after a few sec-onds.

WARNINGObserve the safety warnings ››› in Con-trol and warning lamps on page 124.

Side light and dipped beam head-light


The driver is personally responsible for thecorrect use and adjustment of the lights in allsituations. »

149

Operation

Audible warnings to advise the driver thatthe lights have not been switched offIf the key is not in the ignition and the driverdoor is open, an audible warning signal isheard in the following cases: this will remindyou to turn the light off.

● When the parking light is on ››› page 150.● When the light switch is in position or .

WARNINGThe side lights or daytime running lightsare not bright enough to illuminate the roadahead and to ensure that other road usersare able to see you.● Always use your dipped beam headlights if it is raining or if visibility is poor.

WARNINGIf the headlights are set too high and notused correctly, there is a risk of dazzling ordistracting other road users. This could re-sult in a serious accident.● Always make sure that the headlights arecorrectly adjusted.

NoteThe legal requirements regarding the useof vehicle lights in each country must beobserved.

Daytime running lights

The daytime running lights consist of individu-al lights, integrated in the front headlights. Byconnecting the daytime running lights, theselights are switched on1) ››› .

The daytime running lights switch on everytime the ignition is switched on, if the switch isin positions or , according to the level ofexterior lighting.

When the light switch is in position , a lightsensor automatically switches dipped beamon and off (including the control and instru-ment lighting) or the daytime running lightsdepending on the level of exterior lighting.

WARNING● Never drive with daytime lights if the roadis not well lit due to weather or lightingconditions. Daytime lights do not provideenough light to illuminate the road properlyor be seen by other road users.

● On vehicles with rear lights with bulbs,when activating the daytime running lightthe rear lights are not switched on. A vehi-cle which does not have the rear lights onmay not be visible to other drivers in thedarkness, in the case of heavy rain or inconditions of poor visibility.

Turn signal and main beam lever


Push the lever all the way down to turn off thecorresponding function.

Convenience turn signalsFor the one-touch signalling, when the igni-tion is switched on, move the lever as far aspossible upwards or downwards and releasethe lever. The turn signal will flash three times.

One-touch signalling is activated and deacti-vated in the Easy Connect system via the button and the function button SETTINGS >Lights > One-touch signalling››› page 36.

1) On vehicles equipped with rear LED lights, therear side light is switched on as well.

150


In vehicles that do not have the correspond-ing menu, this function can be deactivated ina specialised workshop.

WARNINGImproper or lack of use of the turn signals,or forgetting to deactivate them can con-fuse other road users. This could result in aserious accident.● Always give warning when you are goingto change lane, overtake or when turning,activating the turn signal in good time.● As soon as you have finished changinglane, overtaking or turning, switch the turnsignal off.

WARNINGIncorrect use of the headlights may causeaccidents and serious injury, as the mainbeam may distract or dazzle other drivers.

Note● If the convenience turn signals are oper-ating (three flashes) and the other conven-ience turn signals are switched on, the ac-tive part stops flashing and only flashesonce in the new part selected.● The turn signal only works when the igni-tion is switched on. The hazard warninglights also work when the ignition is switch-ed off.

● If a trailer turn signal malfunctions, thecontrol lamp will stop flashing (trailer turnsignals) and the vehicle turn signal willflash at double speed.● The main beam headlights can only beswitched on if the dipped beam headlightsare already on.● In cold or damp weather conditions, theheadlights, tail lights and turn signals maymist up inside temporarily. This is normaland in no way effects the useful life of thevehicle lighting system.

Automatic dipped beam control*

The automatic dipped beam control is merelyintended as an aid and is not able to recog-nise all driving situations.

When the light switch is in position , thevehicle lights and the instrument panel andswitch lighting switch on and off automatical-ly in the following situations ››› in Daytimerunning lights on page 150:

Automatic switch-ing on

Automatic switch-ing off

The photo sensor de-tects darkness, for exam-ple, when driving througha tunnel.

When adequate lightingis detected.

Automatic switch-ing on

Automatic switch-ing off

The rain sensor detectsrain and activates thewindscreen wipers.

When the windscreenwipers have been inac-tive for a few minutes.

WARNINGIf the road is not well lit and other roadusers cannot see the vehicle well enoughor at all, accidents may occur.● The automatic dipped beam control() only switches on the dipped beamwhen there are no changes in brightness,and not, for example when it is foggy.

Main beam assist (Light Assist)*

The main beam assist acts within the limits ofthe system and depending on environmentaland traffic conditions. Once switched on, thesystem is activated as of a speed of about 60km/h (37 mph) and is deactivated belowabout 30 km/h (18 mph) ››› .

When the system is activated and the cam-era detects other vehicles that may be daz-zled, the main beam is automatically switch-ed off. Otherwise, the main beam is automati-cally switched on.

The main beam assist generally detects illu-minated areas and deactivates the main »

151

Operation

beam when passing through a town, for ex-ample.

Switching the main beam assist on and off

Func-tion

Use

Activate:

– Switch the ignition on and turn the lightswitch to position .– From the base position, move the mainbeam and turn signal lever forwards››› page 150. When the warning lamp is displayed on the instrument panel dis-play, the main beam assist is switchedon.

Deacti-vate:

– Turn the light switch to a different posi-tion to ››› page 149.– OR: with main beam on, move the turnsignal and main beam lever backwards.– OR: move the turn signal and mainbeam lever forward to manually enablethe main beam. The main beam assistwill then be deactivated.

MalfunctionsThe following conditions may prevent themain beam headlight control from turning offthe headlights in time or from turning off alto-gether:

● In poorly lit towns with highly reflectivesigns.● Other insufficiently lit road users (such aspedestrians or cyclists).

● On tight bends and steep slopes (bumps)and when oncoming vehicles are partiallyobscured.● When the drivers of other oncoming vehi-cles (such as a truck) can see over a guardrail in the centre of the road.● If the camera is damaged or the powersupply is cut off.● In fog, snow and heavy rain.● With dust and sand turbulence.● With loose gravel in the field of vision of thecamera.● When the field of vision of the camera ismisted up, dirty or covered by stickers, snow,ice, etc.

WARNINGThe convenience features of the mainbeam assist should not encourage the tak-ing of risks. The system is not a replace-ment for driver concentration.● You are always in control of the mainbeam and adapting it to the light, visibilityand traffic conditions.● It is possible that the main beam head-light control does not recognise all drivingsituations and is limited under certain cir-cumstances.● When the field of vision of the camera isdirty, covered or damaged, operation ofthe main beam control may be affected.This also applies when changes are made

to the vehicle lighting system, for example,if additional headlights are installed.

CAUTIONTo avoid affecting the operation of the sys-tem, take the following points into consid-eration:● Clean the field of vision of the cameraregularly and make sure it is free of snowand ice.● Do not cover the field of vision of thecamera.● Check that the windscreen is not dam-aged in the area of the field of vision of thecamera.

NoteMain beam and headlight flasher can beturned on and off manually at any time withthe turn signal and main beam lever››› page 150.

152


Fog lights

Fig. 152 Instrument console: light panel.

The warning lamps or also show, on thelight switch or instrument panel, when the foglights are on.

● Turn on the fog lights* ; pull the lightswitch to the first point ››› Fig. 152 1 , frompositions , or .● Turn on the rear fog light : completely pullthe light switch 2 from position , or.● To switch off the fog lights, press the lightswitch or turn it to position .

NoteThe rear fog light can dazzle drivers behindyou. You should use the rear fog light onlywhen visibility is very poor.

Fog lights with cornering light func-tion*

The cornering light function is an additionalfunction to the dipped beam headlights toimprove lighting of the side of the road whentaking a sharp turn at low speed.

The cornering light function works when thedipped beam headlights are already on andit is enabled when driving at speeds belowapproximately 40 km/h (25 mph).

Forward gear● If the steering wheel is turned to the right orthe right-hand turn signal switched on, theright-hand fog lamp is gradually switched on.● If the steering wheel is turned to the left orthe left-hand turn signal switched on, the left-hand fog lamp is gradually switched on.● After the turn, the cornering light function isgradually switched off.

Reverse gear● When engaging the reverse gear, both foglights turn on.

“Coming home” function

This function may be connected/disconnec-ted through the radio menu. The “Coming

Home” and/or “Leaving Home” delay timemay also be set (default: 30 sec).

Vehicle with halogen headlightsIn the “Coming Home” function, the daytimerunning lights (DRL), the rear side lights andthe licence plate lights are turned on.

Vehicle with full-LED headlightsIn the “Coming Home” function, the dippedbeams, the daytime running lights (DRL), therear side lights, the number plate lights andthe courtesy lights in the rear view mirror(Welcome Light) switch on.

Automatic* activation of “Coming Home”For vehicles with a light and rain sensor (rota-ry light switch in position ).

● Switch off the engine and remove the keyfrom the ignition with the rotary light switch inposition ››› page 33.● The automatic “Coming Home” function isonly active when the light sensor detectsdarkness.● When the car door is opened, the “ComingHome” lighting comes on.

Manual “Coming Home” activationFor vehicles with a light and rain sensor (rota-ry light switch without position ). »

153

Operation

● Switch off the engine and remove the keyfrom the ignition.● Activate the headlight flashers for approxi-mately 1 second.● Activated for any position of the rotary lightswitch.● When the car door is opened, the “ComingHome” lighting comes on. The headlights areturned off 60 seconds after the vehicle dooris opened.

Deactivation● If no door has been closed, they go out au-tomatically after 60 seconds.● After the last door has been closed, theheadlights will be switched off after the“Coming Home” delay (as established in theradio menu) has elapsed.● On turning the light switch to position ››› page 33.● When the ignition is switched on (whenstarting the engine).

Function “Leaving Home”

The “Leaving Home” function is only availablefor vehicles with a light and rain sensor (rota-ry light switch in position ).

This function may be connected/disconnec-ted through the radio menu. The “Leaving

Home” function switch-off delay may also beset (default: 30 sec).

Vehicle with halogen headlightsIn the “Leaving Home” function, the daytimerunning lights (DRL), the rear side lights andthe licence plate lights are switched on.

Vehicle with full-LED headlightsIn the “Leaving Home” function, the dippedbeams, the daytime running lights (DRL), therear side lights, the number plate lights andthe courtesy lights in the rear view mirror(“Welcome Light”) switch on.

Activation● When the vehicle is unlocked using the re-mote control.● The “Leaving Home” function is only activa-ted when the rotary light switch is in position and the light sensor detects darkness.

Deactivation● When the “Leaving Home” delay periodends (default: 30 sec).● When the vehicle is locked using the remotecontrol.● When the light control is switched into a po-sition other than .● With the ignition is switched on.

Welcome light*3 Valid for vehicles with a light and rain sensorand Full LED headlights.

The Welcome light is a light located on theexterior mirrors facing the ground which isswitched on or off if the lights control is in the position and the “Coming Home” /“Leaving Home” function is switched on or off.

Hazard warning lights

Fig. 153 Dashboard: switch for hazard warninglights.


The hazard warning lights are used to drawthe attention of other road users to your vehi-cle in emergencies.

If your vehicle breaks down:

154


1. Park your vehicle at a safe distance frommoving traffic.

2. Press the button to switch on the hazardwarning lights ››› .

3. Switch the ignition off.

4. Apply the handbrake.

5. For a manual gearbox, engage 1st gear;for an automatic gearbox, move the gearlever to P.

6. Use the warning triangle to draw the at-tention of other road users to your vehicle.

7. Always take the vehicle key with you whenyou leave the vehicle.

All turn signals flash simultaneously when thehazard warning lights are switched on. Thetwo turn signal turn signal lamps and theturn signal lamp in the switch will flash atthe same time. The simultaneous hazardwarning lights also work when the ignition isswitched off.

Emergency braking warningIf the vehicle brakes suddenly and continu-ously at a speed of more than 80 km/h (50mph), the brake light flashes several times persecond to warn the vehicles driving behind. Ifyou continue braking, the hazard warninglights will come on automatically when thevehicle comes to a standstill. They switch off

automatically when the vehicle starts tomove again.

WARNING● The risk of an accident increases if yourvehicle breaks down. Always use the haz-ard warning lights and a warning triangle todraw the attention of other road users toyour stationary vehicle.● Due to the high temperatures that thecatalytic converter can reach, never parkin an area where the catalytic convertercould come into contact with highly inflam-mable materials, for example dry grass orspilt petrol. This could start a fire.

Note● The battery will run down if the hazardwarning lights are left on for a long time,even if the ignition is switched off.● The use of the hazard warning lights de-scribed here is subject to the relevant stat-utory requirements.

Parking lights

When the parking light is switched on, (rightor left turn signal), the front side light and therear light on the corresponding side of the ve-hicle stay lit. The parking lights can only beactivated with the ignition switched off and

the turn signal and main beam lever in thecentral position, before being triggered.

Parking light on both sides

With the ignition switched off and the lightswitch in position , when locking the vehiclefrom the outside, the parking lights on bothsides of the vehicle light up. In doing so, onlythe side lights of both headlights light up, andadditionally the tail lights will do so partially.

Motorway light*

The motorway light is available on vehiclesequipped with full-LED lights.

The function is connected/disconnected viathe corresponding Easy Connect systemmenu.

● Activation: when going above 110 km/h(68 mph) for more than 30 seconds, the dip-ped beam raises slightly to increase the driv-er's visibility distance.● Deactivation: when reducing the speed ofthe car below 100 km/h (62 mph), the dippedbeam returns to its normal position.

155

Operation

Driving abroad

The light beam of the dipped beam lights isasymmetric: the side of the road on whichyou are driving is lit more intensely.

When a car that is manufactured in a countrythat drives on the right travels to a countrythat drives on the left (or vice versa), it is nor-mally necessary to cover part of the head-light bulbs with stickers or to change the ad-justment of the headlights to avoid dazzlingother drivers.

In such cases, the regulations specify certainlight values that must be complied with fordesignated points of the light distribution. Thisis known as “Tourist light”.

The light distribution of the halogen and full-LED headlights allows the specific “touristlight” values to be met without the need forstickers or changes in the settings.

Note“Tourist light” is only allowed temporarily. Ifyou are planning a long stay in a countrythat drives on the other side, you shouldtake the vehicle to an Authorised TechnicalService to change the headlights.

Headlight range control

Fig. 154 Next to the steering wheel: regulatorheadlight range control.

The headlight range control ››› Fig. 154 ismodified according to the value of the head-light beam and the vehicle load status. Thisoffers the driver optimum visibility and theheadlights do not dazzle oncoming drivers››› .

The headlights can only be adjusted whenthe dipped beam is switched on.

To reset, turn switch ››› Fig. 154:

Value Vehicle load statusa)

Two front occupants, luggage compart-ment empty

All seats occupied, luggage compart-ment empty

Value Vehicle load statusa)

All seats occupied, luggage compart-ment full. With trailer and minimumdrawbar load.

Driver only, luggage compartment fullWith trailer and maximum drawbar load.

a) If the vehicle load does not correspond to thoseshown in the table, it is possible to select intermediarypositions.

OR:Using the Easy Connect system, by means ofthe button and the function button SET-TINGS > Lights > Headlight heightadjustment ››› page 36).

Setting 0 Two front occupants, luggage com-partment empty

Setting 1 All seats occupied, luggage compart-ment empty

Setting 2All seats occupied, luggage compart-ment full. With trailer and minimumdrawbar load.

Setting 3Driver only, luggage compartment fullDriving with trailer and minimumdrawbar load.

156


Dynamic headlight range controlThe control is not mounted in vehicles withdynamic headlight range control. The head-light range is automatically adjusted accord-ing to the vehicle load status when they areswitched on.

WARNINGHeavy objects in the vehicle may meanthat the headlights dazzle and distract oth-er drivers. This could result in a serious ac-cident.● Adjust the light beam to the vehicle loadstatus so that it does not blind other driv-ers.

Lighting of the instrument panel,screens and controls

Depending on the model, the lighting of theinstrument panel and controls can be adjus-ted in the Easy Connect system, using the button and the SETTINGS function button

››› page 36.

With the ignition on and without light activa-tion, the analogue instrument panel lightingremains activated in daytime light conditions.The lighting is reduced as the exterior light di-minishes. In some cases, e.g. when drivingthrough a tunnel without the function ac-tive, the instrument panel lighting may evenswitch off. The objective of this function is toprovide the driver with a visual indication thathe or she should activate the dipped beam.

If your vehicle is equipped with a digital in-strument panel (Digital SEAT Cockpit), thefollowing message will appear Turn on thelights on the instrument panel.

Interior and reading lights1)


Glove compartment and luggage com-partment lighting*When opening and closing the glove com-partment on the front passenger side and therear lid, the respective light will automaticallyswitch on and off.

Footwell lighting*The lights in the footwell area below the dash(driver and front passenger sides) will switchon when the doors are opened and will de-crease in intensity while driving. The intensityof these lights can be adjusted using the ra-dio menu (see Easy Connect > LightSettings > Interior lighting››› page 36).

Ambient light*The ambient light lights up the area of thecentre console, the footwell area and, de-pending on the version, the front door panels.

The ambient lighting in the door panels maychange colour. The brightness and colour ofthese lights can be adjusted using the radiomenu (see Easy Connect > Light Set-tings > Interior lighting››› page 36).

NoteThe reading lights switch off when the vehi-cle is locked using a key or after several mi-nutes if the key is removed from the ignition.This prevents the battery from discharging.

1) Depending on the features fitted in the vehicle,LEDs can be used for the following interior lights:front vanity mirror light, rear vanity mirror light,footwell light, sun blind and glove compartmentlight.

157

Operation

Visibility

Sun visors

Fig. 155 Sun visor

Options for adjusting driver and front pas-senger sun visors:● Lower the sun visor towards the wind-screen.● The sun visor can be pulled out of itsmounting and turned towards the door››› Fig. 155 1 .● Swing the sun visor towards the door, longi-tudinally backwards.

Vanity mirror lightThere may be a vanity mirror, with a cover, onthe rear of the sun visor. When the cover isopened 2 a light comes on.

The lamp goes out when the vanity mirrorcover is closed or the sun visor is pushedback up.

WARNINGFolded sun blinds can reduce visibility.● Always store sun blinds and visors in theirhousing when not in use.

NoteThe light above the sun visor automaticallyswitches off after a few minutes in certainconditions. This prevents the battery fromdischarging.

Windscreen wiper and win-dow wiper systems

Window wiper lever


CAUTIONIf the ignition is switched off with the wind-screen wipers active, they complete theirwipe before returning to the rest position.When switching the ignition back on, thewindscreen wiper will continue to operateat the same wiping level. Ice, snow and oth-

er obstacles on the windscreen may dam-age the wiper and the windscreen wipermotor.● If necessary, remove snow and ice fromthe windscreen wipers before starting yourjourney.● Carefully lift the frozen windscreen wip-ers from the glass. SEAT recommends a de-icer spray for this operation.● Do not switch on the windscreen wipers ifthe windscreen is dry. Cleaning with thewindscreen wipers while dry can causedamage.● In icy conditions, always check that thewiper blades are not frozen to the glass be-fore using the wipers. In cold weather, itmay help to leave the vehicle parked withthe wipers in service position››› page 62.

Note● The windscreen and window wipers onlyfunction when the ignition is switched onand the bonnet or rear lid, respectively, areclosed.● The interval wipe speed varies accordingto the vehicle speed. The faster the vehicleis moving, the more often the windscreen iscleaned.● The rear wiper is automatically switchedon when the windscreen wiper is on and thecar is in reverse gear.

158


Windscreen wiper functions

Windscreen wipers performance in differ-ent situations

If the vehicle is at astandstill

The activated position provi-sionally changes to the previ-ous position.

During automaticwipe

The air conditioner comes onfor approximately 30 secondsin air recirculation mode to pre-vent the smell of the wind-screen washer fluid enteringthe inside the vehicle.

For the intervalwipe

Intervals between wipes de-pend on the vehicle's speed.The higher the vehicle speedthe shorter the intervals.

Heated windscreen washer jets*The heating only thaws the frozen jets, it doesnot thaw the water in the washer hoses.When the ignition is switched on the heatedwindscreen washer jets automatically adjustthe heat depending on the ambient tempera-ture.

Headlight wash/wipe system*The headlight washers/wipers clean theheadlight lenses.

After the ignition is switched on, the first andevery fifth time the windscreen washer isswitched on, the headlights are also washed.

Therefore, the windscreen wiper lever shouldbe pulled towards the steering wheel whenthe dipped beam or main beam are on. Anyencrusted dirt (such as insects) should becleaned regularly (e.g. when refuelling).

To ensure the headlight washers work cor-rectly in winter, any snow which has got intothe bumper jet supports should be cleanedaway. If necessary, remove snow with an an-ti-icing spray.

NoteThe wiper will try to wipe away any obsta-cles that are on the windscreen. The wiperwill stop moving if the obstacle blocks itspath. Remove the obstacle and switch thewiper back on again.

Rain sensor*

Fig. 156 Windscreen wipers lever: adjust therain sensor A .

Fig. 157 Rain sensor sensitive surface

The rain sensor controls the frequency of thewindscreen wiper intervals, depending on theamount of rain ››› . The sensitivity of the rainsensor can be adjusted manually. Manualwipe ››› page 158.

Move the lever to the required position››› Fig. 156:

Rain sensor off.Rain sensor on; automatic wipe if neces-sary.Setting sensitivity level of rain sensor– Set control to the right: high sensitivity.– Set control to the left: low sensitivity.

When the ignition is switched off and thenback on, the rain sensor stays on and startsoperating again when the windscreen wipersare in position 1 and the vehicle is travellingat more than 16 km/h (10 mph). »

0

1

A

159

Operation

Rain sensor modified behaviourPossible causes of faults and mistaken read-ings on the sensitive surface ››› Fig. 157 of therain sensor include:

● Damaged wipers: a film of water on thedamaged blades may lengthen the activa-tion time, reduce the washing intervals or re-sult in a fast and continuous wipe.● Insects: insects on the sensor may triggerthe windscreen wiper.● Salt on the road: in winter, salt spread onthe roads may cause an extra long wipewhen the windscreen is almost dry.● Dirt: dry dust, wax, coating on glass (Lotuseffect) or traces of detergent (car wash) mayreduce the effectiveness of the rain sensor ormake it react more slowly, later or not at all.● Windscreen crack: the impact of a stonewill trigger a single wipe cycle with the rainsensor on. Next the rain sensor detects the re-duction in the sensitive surface area andadapts accordingly. The behaviour of thesensor will vary with the size of the damagecaused by the stone.

WARNINGThe rain sensor may not detect enough rainto switch on the wipers.● If necessary, switch on the wipers man-ually when water on the windscreen ob-structs visibility.

Note● Clean the sensitive surface of the rainsensor regularly and check the blades fordamage ››› Fig. 157 (arrow).● To remove wax and coatings, we recom-mend a window cleaner containing alco-hol.

Mirror

Anti-dazzle rear view mirror

It is dangerous to drive if you cannot seeclearly through the rear window.

Rear view mirror with automatic anti-daz-zle function*The anti-dazzle function is activated everytime the ignition is switched on.

When the anti-dazzle function is enabled, theinterior rear vision mirror will darken auto-matically according to the amount of light itreceives. The anti-dazzle function is cancel-led if reverse gear is engaged.

WARNINGIn the event that an automatic anti-dazzlerear vision mirror breaks, an electrolyte flu-id may leak. This could cause irritation tothe skin, eyes and respiratory organs. If you

come into contact with this liquid, it mustbe rinsed with large quantities of water. Ifnecessary, get medial help.

CAUTIONIn the event that an automatic anti-dazzlerear vision mirror breaks, an electrolyte flu-id may leak. This liquid attacks plastic sur-faces. Clean it with a wet sponge as soonas possible.

Note● If the light incident in the interior rear vi-sion mirror is obstructed (e.g. with the sunblind*), the anti-dazzle rear vision mirrorwith automatic setting will not operate per-fectly.● When the interior lights are on or reversegear engaged, the mirrors do not darkenwith automatic adjustment for anti-dazzleposition.

160


Adjusting the exterior rear-viewmirrors

Fig. 158 Driver door: control for the exteriormirror.


Synchronized regulation of the exteriormirrors● In the Settings - Convenience menu,select whether or not the exterior mirrorsshould move in synchronisation.● Turn the knob to position L1).● Adjust the left-hand exterior mirror. Theright exterior mirror will be adjusted at thesame time (synchronised).

● If necessary, correct the right-hand rear-view mirror: rotate the control to position R1).● In the Easy Connect system the exteriormirrors can be adjusted using the buttonand the SETTINGS function button.

Fold the rearview mirrors when locking thevehicle*The Easy Connect system, the > SET-TINGS > Mirrors and windscreen wip-ers can be used to have the exterior mirrorsfold in when the vehicle is parked and locked››› page 36.

When the vehicle is locked with the remotecontrol, the exterior mirrors are retracted au-tomatically. When the vehicle is opened withthe remote control, the exterior mirrors aredeployed automatically.

WARNINGConvex or wide-angle* exterior mirrorsgive a larger field of vision. However, theymake objects look smaller and furtheraway than they really are. If you use thesemirrors to estimate the distance to vehiclesbehind you when changing lane, you couldmisjudge the distance. Risk of accident!

CAUTION● If one of the mirror housings is knockedout of position (e.g. when parking), the mir-rors must first be fully retracted with theelectric control. Do not readjust the mirrorhousing by hand, as this will interfere withthe mirror adjuster function.● Before washing the vehicle in an auto-matic car wash, please make sure to re-tract the exterior mirrors to prevent themfrom being damaged. Electrically retracta-ble exterior mirrors must not be folded in orout by hand. Always use the electricalpower control.

NoteIf the electrical adjustment should fail tooperate, both of the mirrors can be adjus-ted by hand by lightly pressing the edge ofthe mirror glass.

1) Regulation in right-hand drive vehicles is sym-metrical.

161

Operation

Seats and head restraints

Adjusting the seats andheadrests

Manual adjustment of the seats


WARNINGThe safe driving chapter contains impor-tant information, tips, suggestions andwarnings that you should read and observefor your own safety and the safety of yourpassengers ››› page 64.

WARNING● Adjust the front seats only when the vehi-cle is stationary. Failure to follow this in-struction could result in an accident.● Be careful when adjusting the seatheight. Careless or uncontrolled adjust-ment can cause injuries.● The front seat backrests must not be re-clined for driving. Otherwise, seat belts andthe airbag system might not protect asthey should, with the subsequent danger ofinjury.

Electric driver's seat adjustment*


WARNING● If the electric front seats are used negli-gently or without paying due attention, itcan cause serious injury.● The front seats can also be electricallyadjusted when the ignition is switched off.Never leave a child or any other personwho may need help in the vehicle.● In the event of an emergency, electricaladjustment can be stopped by pressingany control.

CAUTIONTo avoid damaging the electrical compo-nents of the front seats, please refrain fromkneeling on the seat or applying sharppressure at a single point to the seat cush-ion and backrest.

Note● It may not be possible to electrically ad-just the seat if the vehicle battery is verylow.● If the engine is started while the seats arebeing electrically adjusted, the adjustmentwill stop.

Adjusting the front head restraints


Adjust the head restraint ››› page 21 sothat as far as possible the top of the head re-straint is level with the top of your head. Whenthis is not possible, try to get as close as pos-sible to this position.

Adjustment of the rear head re-straints

Fig. 159 Rear centre head restraint: releasepoint.

When transporting people in the back seat,place the head restraints of the occupiedseats at a minimum of the next socket up››› .

162


Adjusting the head restraints– To set the head restraint higher, grasp the

sides with both hands and move it upwards,until you see it engage.

– To set the head restraint lower down, pressthe 1 ››› Fig. 159 button and move it down-wards.

Removing the head restraintTo remove the head restraint, the corre-sponding backrest must be partially foldedforward.

– Unlock the backrest ››› page 165.

– Move the head restraint upwards until it ar-rives to the top.

– Press button 1 ››› Fig. 159, while simulta-neously pressing on the security hole 2››› Fig. 159 with a flat screwdriver a maxi-mum of 5 mm wide, and remove the headrestraint.

– Move the backrest until it engages properly››› .

Fitting the head restraintTo mount the external head restraints, thecorresponding backrest must be partially fol-ded forward.

– Unlock the backrest ››› page 165.

– Insert the head restraint bars into theguides until they perceptibly engage. It

should not be possible to remove the headrestraint from the backrest.

– Move the backrest until it engages properly››› .

WARNING● Please observe the general notes››› page 69.● Remove the rear head restraints onlywhen it is necessary for the placement of achild seat ››› page 81. After removing a childseat, remount the head restraint immedi-ately. Travelling with the head restraints re-moved or improperly adjusted increasesthe risk of severe injuries.

Seat functions

Introduction

WARNINGInappropriate use of the seat functions cancause severe injuries.● Assume the proper sitting position beforeyour trip and remain in it throughout. Thisalso applies to the other occupants.● Always keep hands, fingers, feet and oth-er parts of the body away from the operat-ing radius and the adjustment of seats.

Seat heating

Fig. 160 On the centre console: front seatsheating switch

The seat cushions can be heated electricallywhen the ignition is switched on. The backrestis also heated in some versions.

The seat heating should not be engaged inany of the following conditions:

● The seat is unoccupied.● The seat has a covering.● There is a child seat installed in the seat.● The seat cushion is wet or damp.● The indoor or outdoor temperature is great-er than 25°C (77°F).

ActivatePress the button or . Seat heating isswitched on fully. »

163

Operation

Adjusting the heating outputPress the button or repeatedly until thedesired temperature is reached.

DeactivatingPress the button or until all the warninglamps switch off.

WARNINGChildren and people who cannot perceivepain or temperature because of medica-tions, paralysis or chronic diseases (e.g.diabetes) or have a limited perception ofthese, may suffer burns to the back, but-tocks or legs when using seat heating, anoccurrence that may entail a very lengthyrecovery period or from which it may not bepossible to recover fully. Seek medical ad-vice if you have doubts regarding yourhealth.● People with limited pain and temperaturethresholds must never use seat heating.● If an abnormality in the device's temper-ature control is detected, have it checkedby a specialist workshop.

WARNINGIf the fabric of the cushion is wet, this canadversely affect the operation of the seatheating, increasing the risk of burns.● Make sure the seat cushion is dry prior tousing the seat heater.

● Do not sit on the seat with clothing that iswet or damp.● Do not leave clothing that is wet or dampon the seat.● Do not spill liquid on the seat.

CAUTION● To avoid damaging the heating elementsof the seat heaters, please do not kneel onthe seat or apply sharp pressure to a singlepoint on the seat cushion or backrest.● Liquids, sharps objects and insulatingmaterials (e.g. covers or child seats) candamage the seat heating.● In the event of smells, switch off the seatheating immediately and have it inspectedby a specialised workshop.

For the sake of the environmentThe seat heating should remain on onlywhen needed. Otherwise, it is an unneces-sary fuel waste.

Front centre armrest

The centre armrest can be adjusted to vari-ous levels.

Adjusting the centre armrest– To adjust the tilt, lift the armrest from the

starting position so that it is engaged.

– To return the armrest to the starting posi-tion, remove the armrest from the upperfixed position and lower it.

The armrest can be moved backwards andforwards.

164


Folding down and lifting the rearseat backrest

Fig. 161 On the rear seat backrest: releasebutton 1 ; red mark 2 .

Fig. 162 In the trunk: levers for remote releaseof the left part 1 and right part 2 of the rearseat backrest.

The rear seat backrest is split and each partbe lowered separately to extend the luggagecompartment.

When the rear seat backrest is lowered no-body else can travel in the correspondingseats (not even a child).

Lowering the rear seat backrest with theunlock button● Lower the head restraint properly.● Push the unlock button ››› Fig. 161 1 for-wards and at the same time lift the backrest.● The rear seat backrest is not engagedwhen the red marking of the button 2 is visi-ble.

Lowering the rear seat backrest with theremote release lever● Lower the head restraint properly.● Open the rear lid.● Pull the remote release lever of the left part››› Fig. 162 1 or right part 2 of the backrestin the direction of the arrow. The releasedpart of the rear seat backrest is folded auto-matically down and forwards.● If this occurs, close the rear lid.

The rear seat backrest is not engaged whenthe red marking of the button ››› Fig. 161 2 isvisible.

Folding up the rear seat backrest● Lift the backrest and press it firmly into thelock until it engages ››› .

● It should not be possible to see the redmark of the unlock button 2 .● The backrest must be properly engaged.

WARNINGSerious injuries can be caused if the rearseat backrest is lowered or lifted withoutdue care and attention.● Never lower or lift the rear seat backrestwhile driving.● Do no trap or damage the seat belt whenraising the rear seat backrest.● When lowering or lifting the rear seatbackrest, keep your hands, fingers, feetand other body parts out of its path.● For the rear seat belts to offer the neces-sary protection all the parts of the rearbackrest must be properly engaged. This isparticularly important in the case of thecentre rear seat. If someone is seated in aseat whose backrest is not properly engag-ed they will fly forward, along with thebackrest, during an accident or a suddendriving or braking manoeuvre.● A red signal on button 2 warns that thebackrest is not engaged. Always checkthat the red marking is not visible when thebackrest is in the upright position.● When the rear seat backrest is lowered oris not properly engaged nobody else cantravel in the corresponding seats (not evena child). »

165

Operation

CAUTIONSerious damage can be caused to the vehi-cle and other objects if the rear seat back-rest is lowered or lifted without due careand attention.● Before lowering the rear seat backrest,always adjust the front seats so that nei-ther the head restraints nor the cushions ofthe rear backrest can hit them.

Transport and practicalequipment

Storage compartments

Storage areas under the frontseats*

Fig. 163 Storage compartment under the frontseats.

There is a storage compartment with a coverunder each front seat.

The drawer* is opened by pulling on the han-dle of the cover ››› Fig. 163.

To close the drawer, press the cover until itlocks into position.

WARNING● The drawers will hold a maximum weightof 1.5 kg.● Do not drive with the drawer cover open.There is an injury risk for passengers if thecargo is released in case of sudden brakingor an accident.

166

Transport and practical equipment

Folding table*

Fig. 164 Left-hand front seat: folding table.

Fig. 165 Left-hand front seat: folding tablewith drinks holder.

Depending on the model version, at the rearof the front seats, there may be “plane-style”folding tables for the passengers in the rearseats to use.

Folding the table● Push the table downwards, as much as youcan.

Folding the table or adjusting its inclina-tionThe foldable table can be used at differentinclinations.

● Press the unlocking lever under the table››› Fig. 165 1 and keep it that way.● Adjust: Adjust the inclination of the table bypressing the lever.● Fold: Push the table downwards whilepressing the lever.

Drink holderA drink holder is built into the folding table 2 .

With the foldable table extended, remove thedrink holder 2 following the direction of thearrow. To store the drink holder, insert it intothe table against the direction of the arrow.

WARNINGThe table must always be closed whiledriving to decrease the risk of injuries.

Drink holders

Fig. 166 Centre console: drinks holder.

Front drink holders– Place drinks in the holder ››› Fig. 166.

Placement of two drinks is possible. There isalso the possibility of placing larger plasticbottles in the trims of the doors.

WARNING● Do not place any hot drinks in the drinkholder while the vehicle is moving. Hotdrinks could spill and cause burns, whichmay cause an accident.● Do not use hard china cups or glasses.These could cause injury in the event of anaccident.

CAUTIONYou should avoid putting open drinks con-tainers in the drink holders. The drinks »

167

Operation

could otherwise spill over and cause dam-age to e.g. the electrical equipment or theseat covers.

Glove compartment

Fig. 167 Glove compartment

Opening/closing– To open the glove compartment, pull the

handle in the direction of the arrow.

– To close the glove compartment, move thecover upwards until it engages.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the CDplayer is located in the glove compartment.Separate operating instructions are enclosedfor this equipment in the corresponding In-struction Manual.

WARNINGThe cover of the glove compartment shouldalways be closed while driving. Failure tofollow this instruction could result in an ac-cident.

Other storage compartments

You will find more object holders, compart-ments and supports in other parts of the vehi-cle:

● In the top of the glove compartment in vehi-cles that do not have a CD reader. The loadof the compartment should not exceed 1.2 kg.● In the centre console under the centre arm-rest*.● Coat hooks in the door frames ››› .● Other storage compartments are found inthe rear seat, to the left and the right of theseats.

WARNING● Please make sure that any items of cloth-ing hanging from the coat hooks do not ob-struct your view to the rear.● The coat hooks should only be used forlightweight clothing. Do not leave anyheavy or sharp objects in the pockets.

● Do not use clothes hangers to hang upthe clothing, as this could interfere with thefunction of the head-protection airbags.

168


Power sockets

Fig. 168 Centre console: front 12 volt powersocket. Rear of the centre console: USBsockets.

Fig. 169 Detailed view of the side trim in theboot: 12-volt power socket.

In the centre console– Remove the cap located on the centre con-

sole of the socket ››› Fig. 168. .

– Insert the plug of the electrical applianceinto the power socket.

In the luggage compartment*– Lift the power socket cover ››› Fig. 169.

– Insert the plug of the electrical applianceinto the power socket.

Electrical equipment can be connected tothe 12 volt power socket. The appliances con-nected to each power socket must not ex-ceed a power rating of 120 Watt.

USB power socketsDepending on the equipment and the coun-try, the vehicle may also have USB connec-

tions exclusively for charging or as a powersocket.

These USB ports are located at the rear ofthe console, between the front seats››› Fig. 168 . These connectors can work ata maximum power of up to 10.5 W per port.

They are not intended for file playback.

WARNINGThe power socket works only when the igni-tion is on. Improper use may cause seriousinjury or even fire. Children should there-fore not be left in the vehicle unattended ifthe button is also left behind. Otherwisethere is a possibility that they may be in-jured.

CAUTIONAlways use the correct type of plugs toavoid damaging the sockets.

Note● The use of electrical appliances with theengine switched off will cause a batterydischarge.● Should the connected appliance over-heat, immediately switch it off and discon-nect it from the socket.● Before switching the ignition on or off, un-plug the appliances from the USB ports to »

169

Operation

protect them from any damage caused byfluctuations in voltage.

Storing objects

Loading the luggage compartment

All luggage and other loose objects must besafely secured in the luggage compartment.Unsecured objects which shift back and forthcould impair the driving safety or drivingcharacteristics of the vehicle by shifting thecentre of gravity.

– Distribute the load evenly in the luggagecompartment.

– Place heavy objects as far forward as pos-sible in the luggage compartment.

– Place the heavy objects first.

– Secure heavy objects to the fitted fasteningrings ››› page 172.

WARNING● Loose luggage and other objects in theluggage compartment could cause seriousinjuries.● Always stow objects in the luggage com-partment and secure them on the fasteningrings.

● Use suitable straps to secure heavy ob-jects.● During sudden manoeuvres or accidents,loose objects can be thrown forward, injur-ing vehicle occupants or passers-by. Thisincreased risk of injury will be further in-creased if a loose object is struck by an in-flating airbag. If this happens, objects mayshoot outward like a missile. Risk of fatal in-jury.● Please note that the centre of gravitymay shift when transporting heavy objects;this may affect vehicle handling and leadto an accident. Therefore, it is essential toadjust your speed and driving style ac-cordingly, to avoid accidents.● Never exceed the allowed axle weights orallowed maximum weight. If said weightsare exceeded, the driving characteristics ofthe vehicle may change, leading to acci-dents, injuries and damage to the vehicle.● Never leave your vehicle unattended, es-pecially when the rear lid is open. Childrencould climb into the luggage compartment,closing the door behind them; they will betrapped and run the risk of death.● Never allow children to play in or aroundthe vehicle. Close and lock all the doorsand the rear lid when you leave the vehicle.Before you lock the vehicle, make sure thatthere are no adults or children in the vehi-cle.

Note● Air circulation in the vehicle helps reducefogging of the windows. Used air escapesthrough ventilation slits in the side trim ofthe luggage compartment. Ensure that theventilation slots are never covered.● Straps for securing the load to the fas-tening rings are commercially availablefrom accessory shops.

170


Luggage compartment shelf

Fig. 170 In the boot: removing and installingthe shelf.

Fig. 171 In the boot: removing and installingthe shelf.

The luggage compartment cover blocks theview into the luggage compartment.

Removing● Detach the cord loops ››› Fig. 170 B fromtheir hooks A .● Remove the rear shelf from the side sup-ports ››› Fig. 171 by pulling it upwards andthen take it out.

If necessary, the rear shelf can be stored un-der the luggage compartment double floor››› page 171.

Fitting● Insert the cover horizontally so that the “re-cess” fits onto the axis of the supports››› Fig. 171 and press down until it engages.● Hook the loops ››› Fig. 170 B to the rear lid.

WARNING● The luggage compartment cover mustalways be fixed properly (risk of accident).● The luggage compartment cover shouldnot be used as a storage shelf. Articlesplaced on this cover could cause injury tovehicle occupants in an accident or if thebrakes are applied suddenly.

Storing the rear shelf

Fig. 172 In the boot: covers for storing the rearshelf.

Fig. 173 In the boot: fitting the rear shelf.

The rear shelf can be stored under the lug-gage compartment variable floor.

● Remove the left and right covers ››› Fig. 172.● Press the rear shelf until it engages in itshousing ››› Fig. 173. »

171

Operation

● Put the left and right covers in their originalposition.

Tailboard for transporting longitems*

Fig. 174 On the rear seat backrest: openingthe tailboard.

Fig. 175 In the boot: opening the tailboard.

On the rear seat, behind the central armrest,there is a tailboard for transporting long itemsin the interior, such as skis.

To avoid soiling the interior, dirty objectsshould be wrapped (e.g. in a blanket) beforethey are inserted through the tailboard.

When the armrest is down, nobody may trav-el in the centre rear seat.

Opening the tailboard● Lower the centre armrest.● Pull the release lever in the direction of thearrow and push the tailboard cover››› Fig. 174 1 down and forwards.● Open the rear lid.● Insert the long objects through the gapfrom the luggage compartment.● Secure the objects with the seat belt.● Close the rear lid.

Closing the tailboard● Lift the tailboard cover until it engages. Thered mark on the luggage compartment sideshould never be visible.● Close the rear lid.● Lift the centre armrest if necessary.

NoteThe tailboard can also be opened from theluggage compartment. To do so, press the

release lever down, in the direction of thearrow, and the cover upwards ››› Fig. 175.

Fastening rings*

Fig. 176 In the boot: fastening rings.

In the front and rear part of the luggage com-partment there are fastening rings to securethe luggage ››› Fig. 176.

In order to use the fastening rings, they mustbe lifted beforehand.

WARNINGIf unsuitable or damaged belts or retainingstraps are used, they could break in theevent of braking or an accident. Objectscould then be launched across the passen-ger compartment and cause serious or fa-tal injuries.

172


● Always use belts or retaining straps thatare suitable and in a good condition.● Belts and retaining straps should be se-curely fastened to the fastening rings.● Objects in the luggage compartmentthat are unsecured could move suddenlyand modify the handling of the vehicle.● Secure all objects, little and large.● Never exceed the maximum tensile loadof the fastening ring when securing objects.● Never secure a child seat to the fasteningrings.

Note● The maximum tensile load that the fas-tening rings can support is 3.5 kN.● Belts and securing systems for the ap-propriate load can be obtained from speci-alised dealerships. SEAT recommends visit-ing a SEAT dealership for this.● The fastening rings are rendered unusa-ble for versions with a spare wheel.

Retaining hooks

Fig. 177 In the boot: retaining hooks.

At the rear of the luggage compartment, onthe left and right, there are fixed retaininghooks ››› Fig. 177.

The retaining hooks have been designed tosecure light shopping bags.

WARNINGNever use the retaining hooks as fasteningrings. In case of sudden braking or an acci-dent, the hooks could break.

CAUTIONEach hook is designed for a maximum loadof 2.5 kg.

Net bag*

Fig. 178 In the boot: net bag hooked up at floorlevel.

Fig. 179 In the boot: rings 1 and hooks 2 forattaching the net bag.

The luggage compartment prevents lightluggage from moving. The net bag has a zipand can be used to store small objects.

The net bag can be hooked up to the lug-gage compartment in different ways. »

173

Operation

Hooking the net bag into the luggagecompartment floor● As applicable, lift the front fastening rings››› Fig. 178 2 .● Secure the net hooks to the fastening rings

2 ››› . The bag zip should be facing up-wards.● Secure the net hooks to the fastening rings

1 .

Hook the net bag next to the load thresh-old● Secure the short net hooks to the fasteningrings ››› Fig. 179 1 ››› . The bag zip shouldbe facing upwards.● Secure the straps in the bag hooks 2 .

Removing the net bagThe hooked up net bag is taut ››› .

● Remove the hooks and the net bag strapsfrom the fastening rings and from the baghooks.● Store the net bag in the luggage compart-ment.

WARNINGTo secure the elastic net bag on the fasten-ing rings it must be stretched out. Oncehooked up it is taut. If the net bag is hookedup or unhooked incorrectly the hooks couldcause injuries.

● Always secure the net hooks properly sothat they do not suddenly release from thefastening rings when hooking or unhookingthem.● On hooking or unhooking them, protectyour eyes and face in case the hooks arereleased suddenly.● Always hook up the net bag hooks in thedescribed order. If a hook is unexpectedlyreleased the risk of injury is increased.

Luggage compartment variablefloor

Fig. 180 Variable boot floor: raised position; lowered position.

174


Fig. 181 Variable boot floor: tilted position.

Variable floor in high position● To move from the low position to the highposition, lift the floor using the handle››› Fig. 180 1 , and pull it back until the frontof the floor has fully passed the supports 2 .● Move the floor forward over the supports asfar as the rear seat backrest and then lowerthe floor with the handle 1 .

Variable floor in low position● To move from the high position to the lowposition, lift the floor using the handle››› Fig. 180 1 , and pull it back until the frontof the floor has fully passed the supports 2 .● Now let the front part fall to the floor andslide the floor forwards as far as the rear seatbackrest; lower the floor at the same timewith the handle 1 .

Variable floor in the tilted positionWhen the variable floor is tilted you can ac-cess the spare wheel/anti-puncture kit area.

● Lift the variable floor in the high position us-ing handle ››› Fig. 180 1 , pull it up and pushit towards the backrest of the rear seats untilthe floor folds along the hinge line and themovable part of the floor is resting on itself.● Rest the floor on its housings ››› Fig. 181 (ar-rows).

Variable floor with folded seats● To move from the high position to the lowposition, lift the floor using the handle››› Fig. 180 1 and pull it back a little.● Push the variable floor towards the foldedrear seats with the handle 1 using somedownward pressure so that the moving partof the floor is flush with the backs of the rearseats.

WARNINGDuring a sudden driving or braking ma-noeuvre, or in the event of an accident, ob-jects could be flung though the interior andcause serious or fatal injuries.● Always secure objects, even when theluggage compartment floor is properly lif-ted.● Only objects that do not protrude morethan 2/3 the height of the floor may be car-

ried between the rear seat and the raisedluggage compartment floor.● Only objects that do not weigh than ap-proximately 7.5 kg may be carried betweenthe rear seat and the raised luggage com-partment floor.

CAUTION● The maximum weight that can be loadedon the luggage compartment variable floorin the top position is 150 kg.● Do not let the luggage compartmentfloor fall when closing it. Always carefullyguide it downwards in a controlled manner.Otherwise, the lining and the floor of theluggage compartment could be damaged.

NoteSEAT recommends the use of straps to se-cure objects to retaining rings.

Roof carrier*

Introduction

The vehicle roof has been designed to opti-mise aerodynamics. For this reason, crossbars or conventional roof carrier systemscannot be secured to the roof water drains. »

175

Operation

As the roof water drains are integrated in theroof to reduce air resistance, only SEAT-ap-proved cross bars and roof carrier systemscan be used.

Cases in which cross bars and the roofcarrier system should be disassembled.● When they are not used.● When the vehicle is washed in a car wash.● When the vehicle height exceeds the maxi-mum height, for example, in some garages.

WARNINGWhen heavy or bulky loads are transportedon the roof carrier system, car driving per-formance is affected, as the centre of grav-ity shifts and there is greater wind resist-ance.● Always secure the load properly usingbelts or retaining straps that are suitableand in a good condition.● Bulky, heavy, long or flat loads have anegative effect on aerodynamics, the cen-tre of gravity and driving performance.● Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres.● Adapt your speed and driving style at alltimes to suit visibility, weather, road andtraffic conditions.

CAUTION● Remove the cross bars and the roof carri-er system before entering a car wash.● Vehicle height is increased by the instal-lation of cross bars or a roof carrier systemand the load secured on them. For this pur-pose, check that your vehicle's height doesnot surpass the headspace limit, for exam-ple, for underpasses or for entering garagedoors.● Cross bars, the roof carrier system andthe load secured on them should not inter-fere with the roof aerial or hamper the pathof the panoramic sun roof and the rear lid.● On opening the rear lid make sure that itdoes not knock into the roof load.

For the sake of the environmentWhen cross bars and a roof carrier systemare installed, the increased air resistancemeans that the vehicle uses more fuel.

Attach the cross bars and the roofcarrier system

Fig. 182 Attachment points for the roof railingsfor the roof carrier system.

The crossbars are the basis of a series ofspecial roof carrier systems. For safety rea-sons, special fixtures must be used to safelytransport luggage, bicycles, skis, surf boardsor boats on the roof. Suitable accessoriescan be acquired at SEAT dealerships.

Always secure the crossbars and the roofcarrier system properly. Always take the as-sembly instructions that come with the cross-bars and the roof carrier system in questioninto account.

The crossbars are assembled on the roof rail-ings. The distance between crossbars››› Fig. 182 A should be between 70 and 90cm and the distance between the crossbars

176


and the brackets of the roof railings B mustbe 15 cm.

WARNINGIncorrect attachment and use of the cross-bars and the roof carrier system may causethe whole system to detach from the roofand cause an accident and injuries.● Always take the manufacturer assemblyinstructions into account.● Use only crossbars and the roof carriersystem when they are in perfect conditionand are properly secured.● Secure the crossbars and the roof carriersystem properly.● Check threaded joints and attachmentstravelling and if necessary tighten them af-ter you have travelled a short distance.When making long trips, check the threa-ded joints whenever you stop for a rest.● Always fit the special roof carrier sys-tems correctly for wheels, skis and surf-boards, etc.● Do not modify or repair the crossbars orroof carrier system.

NoteAlways read the assembly instructions thatcome with the crossbars and the roof carri-er system carefully and keep them in thevehicle.

Loading the roof carrier system

The load can only be secured if the crossbarsand the roof carrier system are properly in-stalled ››› .

Maximum authorised roof loadThe maximum permissible roof load is 75 kg.This figure comes from the combined weightof the roof carrier, the cross bars and the loaditself on the roof ››› .

Always check the weight of the roof carriersystem, the cross bars and the weight of theload to be transported and weigh them ifnecessary. Never exceed the maximum au-thorised roof load.

If you are using cross bars and a roof carrierwith a lower weight rating, you will not beable to carry the maximum authorised roofload. In this case, do not exceed the maxi-mum weight limit for the roof carrier which islisted in the fitting instructions.

Distributing a loadDistribute loads uniformly and secure themcorrectly ››› .

Check attachmentsOnce the cross bars and roof carrier systemhave been installed, check the bolted con-nections and attachments after a short jour-

ney and subsequently with a certain frequen-cy.

WARNINGExceeding the maximum authorised roofload can result in accidents and considera-ble vehicle damage.● Never exceed the maximum authorisedload on the roof and on the axles or the ve-hicle's maximum authorised weight.● Never exceed the load capacity of thecross bars and the roof carrier system,even if the maximum authorised roof loadhas not been reached.● Secure heavy items as far forward aspossible and distribute the vehicle loaduniformly.

WARNINGIf the load is loose or not secured, it couldfall from the roof carrier system or causeaccidents and injuries.● Always use belts or retaining straps thatare suitable and in a good condition.● Secure the load properly.

177

Operation

Air conditioning

Heating, ventilation andcooling

Introduction


Viewing Climatronic informationOn the screen of Climatronic control unit andon the screen of the factory-fitted Easy Con-nect system, the theoretical values of thetemperature zones are shown.

The unit of temperature measurement can bechanged in the Easy Connect system.

Dust and pollen filterThe dust and pollen filter with its activatedcharcoal cartridge serves as a barrieragainst impurities in the air taken into the ve-hicle interior.

The dust and pollen filter must be changedregularly so that air conditioner performanceis not adversely affected.

If the filter loses efficiency prematurely due touse in areas with very high levels of air pollu-tion, the filter must be changed more fre-quently than stated in the Service Schedule.

WARNINGReduced visibility through the windows in-creases the risk of serious accidents.● Always ensure that all windows are freeof ice and snow, and that they are not fog-ged, so as to maintain good visibility of ev-erything outside.● The maximum heat output required to de-frost windows as quickly as possible is onlyavailable when the engine has reached itsnormal running temperature. Only drivewhen you have good visibility.● Always ensure that you use the heatingsystem, fresh air system, air conditionerand the heated rear window to maintaingood visibility to the outside.● Never leave the air recirculation on for along period of time. If the cooling system isswitched off and air recirculation modeswitched on, the windows can mist oververy quickly, considerably limiting visibility.● Switch air recirculation mode off when itis not required.

WARNINGStuffy or used air will increase fatigue andreduce driver concentration possibly re-sulting in a serious accident.● Never leave the fresh air fan turned off oruse the air recirculation for long periods oftime; the air in the vehicle interior will notbe refreshed.

CAUTION● To replace the pollen filter, always visit aservice centre.● Switch the air conditioner off if you thinkit may be broken. This will avoid additionaldamage. Have the air conditioner checkedby a specialised workshop.● Repairs to the air conditioner require spe-cialist knowledge and special tools. SEATrecommends visiting a SEAT Official Serv-ice.

Note● When the cooling system is turned off, aircoming from the outside will not be dried.To prevent fogging of the windows, SEATrecommends leaving the cooling system(compressor) turned on. To do this, pressthe button. The button lamp shouldlight up.● The maximum heat output required to de-frost windows as quickly as possible is onlyavailable when the engine has reached itsnormal running temperature.● Keep the air intake slots in front of thewindscreen free of snow, ice and leaves toensure heating and cooling are not im-paired, and to prevent the windows frommisting over.

178

Air conditioning

Operating the Climatronic throughthe Easy Connect system*

3 Applies to vehicles with a Media SystemTouch/Colour.

Fig. 183 Easy Connect screen: air conditionermenu.

In the Easy Connect system it is also possibleto perform various adjustments to the Clima-tronic.

Open the air conditioner menu● Press the button on the Climatroniccontrol panel.● OR: press the button in Easy Connect.With the rotating switch select the air con-ditioner menu and open it.

On the touch screen you can see andchange the current settings, for example, thetemperature set for the driver and passengersides, the air distribution and the fan speed.

To switch a function on or off, or to select asubmenu, you must press the correspondingfunction button.

Function button: Function

OFF Switch off and switch on the Climatron-ic.

SYNC Synchronise driver and front passengertemperatures.

SET-TINGS

The air conditioning settings submenuis opened. The following settings canalso be adjusted:

Air conditioning profile.:Adjust the power of the fan in AUTOmode. You can choose between low,medium and high.

Automatic air recirculation:Switching automatic air recirculationon and off ››› page 181.

BACK : Close the submenu.

* The auxiliary heater submenu opens.

*It enables manual switching on or off ofthe windscreen heater.

It enables activation and deactivationof the PureAir and opens the submenu.

Operating the Climatronic throughthe Easy Connect system*

3 Applies to vehicles with Media System Plus /Navi System / Navi System Plus.

Fig. 184 Easy Connect screen: air conditionermenu.

In the Easy Connect system it is also possibleto perform various adjustments to the Clima-tronic.

Open the air conditioner menu● Press the button of the Climatroniccontrol panel.

On the top of the screen you can see andchange the current settings, such as, for ex-ample, the temperature set for the driver sideand for that of passenger. Temperatures up to+22°C (+72°F) are shown with blue arrows,and temperatures over +22°C (+72°F) with redarrows. »

179

Operation

To switch a function on or off, or to select asubmenu, you must press the correspondingfunction button.


OFF Climatronic is switched off.

ON Climatronic is switched on.

SYNC Synchronise driver and front passengertemperatures.

SET-TINGS

The air conditioning settings submenuis opened. The following settings canalso be adjusted:

Automatic supplementaryheater: to activate/deactivate the au-tomatic activation of the auxiliary heat-ing for colder countries (only for en-gines with auxiliary heating). With theoption deactivated, depending on theoutside temperature the heating mayneed more time than normal to reach acomfortable temperature.

Automatic front window heat-ing:* to switch the automatic wind-screen heating on and off ››› page 182.

Automatic air recirculation:to switch automatic air recirculation onand off ››› page 181.

BACK: to close the submenu.

* The auxiliary heater submenu opens.


*It enables manual switching on or off ofthe windscreen heater.

It enables activation and deactivationof the PureAir and opens the submenu.

Air conditioning user instructions

The interior cooling system only works whenthe engine is running and fan is switched on.

The air conditioner operates most effectivelywith the windows and the panoramic slidingsunroof closed. However, if the vehicle hasheated up after standing in the sun for sometime, the air inside can be cooled more quick-ly by opening the windows and the panoram-ic sliding sunroof briefly.

Climatronic: change the temperature uniton the screen of the factory-fitted info-tainment systemThe temperature display can be changedfrom Celsius to Fahrenheit on the screen ofthe Infotainment system using the Infotain-ment button > Settings > Units but-ton.

The cooling system cannot be activatedIf the air conditioning system cannot beswitched on, this may be caused by the fol-lowing:

● The engine is not running.● The fan is switched off.● The air conditioner fuse has blown.● The outside temperature is lower than ap-proximately +3°C (+38°F).● The air conditioner compressor has beentemporarily switched off because the enginecoolant temperature is too high.● Another fault in the vehicle. Have the airconditioner checked by a specialised work-shop.

Special characteristicsIf the humidity and temperature outside thevehicle are high, condensation can drip offthe evaporator in the cooling system andform a pool underneath the vehicle. This isnormal and does not indicate a leak!

NoteAfter starting the engine, any residual hu-midity in the air conditioner could mist overthe windscreen. Switch on the defrost func-tion as soon as possible to clear the wind-screen of condensation.

180

Air conditioning

Air outlets

Fig. 185 On the dash panel air vents.

Air ventsTo ensure proper heating, cooling and venti-lation in the vehicle interior, air vents››› Fig. 185 1 should remain open.

● Turn the corresponding thumbwheel (de-tail) in the required direction to open andclose the air vents. When the thumbwheel isin the position, the corresponding air vent isclosed.● Change the air direction using the ventila-tion grille lever.

There are other additional, non-adjustable airvents in the dash panel 2 , in the footwell andin the rear area of the interior.

NoteFood, medicine and other heat or cold sen-sitive objects should never be placed infront of the air outlets as they may be dam-aged or made unsuitable for use by the aircoming from the air vents.

Air recirculation mode

Basic points

Air recirculation:

Manual recirculation

Air recirculation mode prevents the ambientair from entering the interior.

When the outside temperature is very high,selecting manual air recirculation mode for ashort period refreshes the vehicle interiormore quickly.

For safety reasons, air recirculation mode isswitched off when the button is pressedor the air distributor turned to .

Switching the manual air recirculationmode on and off Activate: press the button until the warn-ing lamp lights up.

Deactivate: press the button until thewarning lamp goes off. »

181

Operation

Functioning mode of automatic air recircu-lation (air conditioning menu)With the automatic air recirculation mode ac-tivated, the entry of fresh air into the cabin in-terior is enabled. If the system detects a highconcentration of hazardous substances in theambient air, air recirculation mode is switchedon automatically. When the level of impuritiesdrops to within a normal range, recirculationmode is switched off.

The system is unable to detect unpleasantsmells.

The air recirculation will not connect auto-matically in versions without humidity sensorand in the following external conditions:

● The outside temperature is lower than +3°C(+38°F).● The cooling system is switched off and theoutside temperature is below +10°C (+50°F).● The cooling system is switched off, the out-side temperature is below +15°C (+59°F) andthe windscreen wipers are switched on.

Activation/deactivation of automatic air recir-culation is done in the air conditioner menu,under Configuration.

WARNINGObserve the safety warnings ››› in Intro-duction on page 178.

● If the cooling system is switched off andair recirculation mode switched on, thewindows can mist over very quickly, con-siderably limiting visibility.● Switch air recirculation mode off when itis not required.

CAUTIONDo not smoke when air recirculation isswitched on in vehicles with an air condi-tioner. The smoke taken in could lie on thecooling system vaporiser and on the acti-vated charcoal cartridge of the dust andpollen filter, leading to a permanently un-pleasant smell.

NoteClimatronic: air recirculation mode is acti-vated to prevent exhaust gas or unpleasantodours from entering the vehicle interiorwhen it is in reverse and while the automat-ic windscreen wiper is working.

Heated windscreen*

Fig. 186 Windscreen humidity and tempera-ture sensor.

The heated windscreen is comprised of a setof heated wires placed between the layers ofthe windscreen which, when electric currentis supplied to them, heat up and cause thetemperature of the glass to rise.

Its function is to assist the air-conditioningsystem to prevent the windscreen from mist-ing up or to demist it faster if it does mist up.

The system can be switched on manually orautomatically.

Manual activation● Press the button of the Climatroniccontrol panel.● Press the function button to switch thewindscreen heating on or off.

182

Air conditioning

Automatic activationTo facilitate use of the heated windscreen itcan turn on automatically.

The Climatronic control panel can detect thedanger of the windscreen misting thanks to itstemperature and humidity sensors, switchingthe system on or off accordingly ››› Fig. 186.Moreover, it will also be activated automati-cally when the button is pressed on theClimatronic control panel.

Adjust it as follows for it to switch on automat-ically:

● Press the button of the Climatroniccontrol panel.● Press the SETTINGS function button on theinfotainment system.● Switch the function on or off by pressing theAutomatic windscreen heating function button.

183

Operation

Auxiliary heater (additionalheater)*

Introduction

The auxiliary heater runs on fuel from the ve-hicle's tank and can be used while you aredriving and when the vehicle is stationary.

The auxiliary heater can be switched on usingthe fast heating button of the air conditioningcontrols, with the remote control or by previ-ously programming a departure time in theauxiliary heater menu of the infotainment sys-tem.

In winter, with the auxiliary heater switchedon, you can defog the windscreen and leaveit free of ice and snow (if it is a thin layer) be-fore you start driving.

If the outside temperature is very high, the ve-hicle interior can be ventilated with the en-gine off using the auxiliary heater.

WARNINGSwallowing a battery with a 20 mm diame-ter or any other button battery can causeserious and even fatal injuries within a veryshort time.● Always keep the remote control, keyringswith batteries, the spare batteries, buttonbatteries and all other batteries over 20mm out of reach of children.

● If you suspect that someone may haveswallowed a battery, seek immediate med-ical attention.

WARNINGThe auxiliary heater exhaust fumes containcarbon monoxide, an odourless and colour-less toxic gas. Carbon monoxide can causepeople to lose consciousness. It can alsocause death.● Never switch on the auxiliary heater orleave it running in enclosed spaces orareas with no ventilation.● Never programme the auxiliary heater sothat it switches itself on and is running in anenclosed space or an area with no ventila-tion.

WARNINGThe components of the auxiliary heater areextremely hot and could cause a fire.● Always park your vehicle so that no partof the exhaust system can come in contactwith easily flammable materials that mightbe below the vehicle, such as dried grass.

CAUTIONNever place food, medicines or other tem-perature-sensitive objects close to the airvents. Food, medicines and other objectssensitive to heat or cold may be damaged

or made unsuitable for use by the air com-ing from the vents.

NoteAfter switching the engine on with a 12-voltbattery that is heavily discharged or newlychanged or after a jump start some systemsettings (such as the time, the date, thepersonalised comfort settings and the pro-gramming) might be altered or deleted.Check and correct these settings once thebattery is sufficiently charged.

Switching on and off the auxiliaryheater

Switching the auxiliary heater on:

Manually with the fast heating button of theair conditioner controls. The control lamp ofthe button will light up ››› page 178.

Manually with the remote control››› page 185.

Automatically by programming and activat-ing a departure time ››› page 186.

Switching the auxiliary heater off:

Manually with the fast heating button of theair conditioner controls. The control lamp ofthe button goes off ››› page 178.

184

Air conditioning

Switching the auxiliary heater off:

Manually with the remote control››› page 185.

Automatically once the programmed depar-ture time has arrived or after the program-med operating time has elapsed››› page 186.

Automatically when the control lamp (fuellevel indicator) ››› page 342 lights up.

Automatically when the 12-volt batterycharge is too low ››› page 355.

Special featureOnce switched off, the auxiliary heater willcontinue to operate for a short period of timein order to burn the fuel remaining in the sys-tem and also to expel the exhaust fumes.

Remote control

Fig. 187 Independent heating: radiofrequencyremote control key

Fig. 187 Meaning

Switch the auxiliary heater on

Switch the auxiliary heater off

1 Control lamp

If the buttons of the remote control are press-ed unnecessarily, it could switch on the auxili-ary heater involuntarily, even when it is out ofrange or when the control lamp is flashing.

Control lamp on the remote controlWhen the buttons are pressed, the controllamp on the remote control provides the userwith different information:

Control lamp 1 Meaning

It lights up for approx. 2seconds in green.

The auxiliary heater hasbeen switched on usingthe button.

It lights up for approx. 2seconds in red.

The auxiliary heater hasbeen switched off usingthe button.

It flashes for approx. 2seconds in green (ap-prox. 4 times per sec-ond).

No ona) signal has beenreceived.

It flashes quickly for ap-prox. 2 seconds in green(approx. 10 times persecond).

The independent heat-ing is blocked.Possible causes: the fueltank is almost empty, the12-volt battery charge isvery low or there is afault.

It flashes for approx. 2seconds in red (approx. 4times per second).

No offa) signal has beenreceived.

It lights up for approx.2 seconds in orange,then green or red.

The remote control bat-tery is almost flat. How-ever, the on or off signalhas been received.

It lights up for approx.2 seconds in orange,then flashes in green orred.

The remote control bat-tery is almost flat. No onor off signal has been re-ceived. »

185

Operation

Control lamp 1 Meaning

Flashes orange foraround 5 seconds.

The remote control bat-tery is flat. No on or offsignal has been re-ceived.

a) The remote control is out of range. In this case it willbe necessary to get closer to the vehicle and pressthe corresponding button again.

Replacing the remote control batteryWhen pressing the buttons, if the controllamp of the remote 1 flashes for approx. 5orange or does not light up, the batteriesmust be replaced.

The battery is located beneath a cover onthe back of the remote control.

● To open the cover, lift it slightly at the bot-tom and slide it down.● Remove the old battery.● Insert the new battery. When doing so, takeinto account the polarity and use batteries ofthe same type ››› .● Replace the battery cover by inserting thetabs at the top and pressing the bottom.

RangeThe receiver is inside the vehicle. The remotecontrol, when fitted with new batteries, has arange of several hundred metres. Obstaclesbetween the remote control and the vehicle,

bad weather conditions and discharged bat-teries can considerably reduce the range ofthe remote control.

CAUTION● The radio frequency remote control con-tains electronic components. Therefore,avoid getting it wet and exposing it toknocks or direct sunlight.● The use of inappropriate batteries maydamage the radio frequency remote con-trol. For this reason, always replace theused battery with another of the same volt-age, size and specifications.

For the sake of the environment● Please dispose of your used batteriescorrectly and with respect for the environ-ment.● The remote control battery may containperchlorate. Observe the legal provisionsregarding disposal.● Care should be taken so as not to oper-ate the remote control unintentionally soas to prevent the auxiliary heater beingswitched on accidentally.

Programming the auxiliary heater

Before programming it, check that the vehi-cle's date and time are set correctly ››› .

The auxiliary heater is programmed in theAuxiliary heater menu of the infotainmentsystem.

Open the Auxiliary heater menu.● Press the button on the Climatroniccontrol panel.● Press the function button.

Function button: function

Switch off: The auxiliary heater is immediatelyswitched off.

Heat, Ventilate: Set to heat or ventilate the vehi-cle interior when the auxiliary heater is switched on.By pressing the function button , you can selectthe desired mode.

Set: Opens the Auxiliary heater menu.

Departure time 1, Departure time2, Departure time 3: Three different de-parture times (hh.mm) may be programmed. Ifthe auxiliary heater should only be switchedon a certain day of the week, this can also beselected.

Duration: The duration determines the oper-ating time of the auxiliary heater when switch-ed on using the fast heating button on theair conditioning controls. The duration is alsoused to calculate the departure time for themanual air conditioner. It can be set between10 and 60 minutes at 10-minute intervals.

This returns to the main menu.

186

Air conditioning

The programmed departure time determinesthe approximate time it should take to reachthe temperature set in the vehicle. The start ofthe heating operation is determined automat-ically depending on the outside temperature.

Checking the programmingWhen a departure time is activated and theignition is switched off the control lamp of thefast heating button lights up for approxi-mately 10 seconds.

WARNINGNever programme the auxiliary heater sothat it switches itself on and is running in anenclosed space or an area with no ventila-tion. The auxiliary heater exhaust fumescontain carbon monoxide, an odourlessand colourless toxic gas. Carbon monoxidecan cause people to lose consciousness. Itcan also cause death.

Operating instructions

The auxiliary heater exhaust system locatedbelow the vehicle must be kept clear of snow,mud and other objects. The exhaust fumesmust be able to exit freely. The emissionsgenerated by the auxiliary heater are re-moved via an exhaust pipe fitted underneaththe vehicle.

On heating the vehicle interior, depending onthe outside temperature, the warm air is firstdirected at the windscreen and then to therest of the vehicle interior through the airvents. Directing the diffusers – towards thewindows for example – can affect air distribu-tion.

When will the auxiliary heater not be acti-vated?● The auxiliary heater requires about asmuch power as the dipped beam headlights.If the 12-volt battery charge is too low, theauxiliary heater switches off automaticallyand cannot be switched on. This avoids prob-lems when starting the engine.● The heating must be activated every timeyou want to set off. Similarly, the departuretime must reactivate each time.● The control lamp (fuel level indicator)lights up.

Note● Noises will be heard while the auxiliaryheater is running.● When the air humidity is high and the in-side temperature low, condensation fromthe heating and ventilating system mayevaporate when the auxiliary heater isswitched on. In this case, steam may be re-leased from underneath the vehicle. Thisdoes not mean that there is a vehicle mal-function.

● If the vehicle is tilted, e.g. if parked on aslope, the operation of the auxiliary heatermay be restricted if the fuel tank level islow (just above the reserve level).● If the auxiliary heater is used a number oftimes for a long period of time, the 12-voltbattery will lose its charge. To recharge thebattery, the vehicle must be driven for anumber of kilometres from time to time. Asa guideline: the journey should last approx-imately as long as the heater was connec-ted.● At temperatures below +5 °C (+41 °F), theauxiliary heater may switch itself on auto-matically when the engine is switched on.The auxiliary heater is switched off againafter a certain time.

187

Infotainment System

Infotainment System

IntroductionSafety instructions related to theInfotainment system

Travelling on today's roads requires the driv-er's full attention at all times.

Only operate the infotainment system and itsvarious functions when the traffic situationreally permits this.

WARNING● Before starting the trip, you should famili-arise yourself with the different infotain-ment system functions.● High audio volume may represent a dan-ger to you and to others.● Adjust the volume in a way that you candistinguish surrounding noise, for example,horns and sirens, etc.● Changes to the Infotainment system set-tings should be made when the car is stop-ped, or by a passenger.

WARNINGDistracting the driver in any way can leadto an accident and cause injuries. Operat-

ing the Infotainment system can distractyour attention from the traffic.● Always drive carefully and responsibly.● Select volume settings that allow you toeasily hear signals from outside the vehicleat all times (e.g. emergency services sirensand horns).● Hearing may be impaired if using too higha volume setting, even if only for short peri-ods of time.

WARNINGThe volume level may suddenly changewhen you switch audio source or connect anew audio source.● Lower the base volume before connect-ing or switching audio sources.

WARNINGThe driving recommendations and trafficindications shown on the navigation systemmay differ from the current traffic situation.● Traffic signs and traffic regulations havepriority over the recommendations and dis-plays provided by the navigation system.● Adjust your vehicle speed and drivingstyle to suit visibility, weather, road andtraffic conditions.

WARNINGConnecting, inserting or removing a datamedium while driving can distract your at-tention from the traffic and cause an acci-dent.

WARNINGConnecting leads for external devices mayobstruct the driver.● Arrange the connecting leads so thatthey do not obstruct the driver.

WARNINGExternal devices that are loose or not prop-erly secured could move around the pas-senger compartment during a sudden driv-ing or braking manoeuvre or an accidentand cause damage or injury.● Never place or fit external devices to thedoors, windscreen, steering wheel, dashpanel, the backs of the seats, on top of ornear the area marked “AIRBAG” or betweenthese areas and the occupants. Externaldevices can cause serious injury in an acci-dent, especially when the airbags inflate.

WARNINGThe armrest may obstruct the driver's armmovements, which could cause an acci-dent and severe injuries.

188

Introduction

● Always keep the armrest closed while thevehicle is in motion.

WARNINGOpening a CD or DVD player's housing canlead to injuries from invisible laser radia-tion.● Have CD or DVD players repaired only bya qualified workshop.

CAUTIONThe Infotainment system can be damagedby the incorrect insertion of a data storagedevice or the insertion of an incompatibledata storage device.● When inserting a data storage device,make sure it is correctly positioned.● Applying force may irreparably damagethe memory card slot locking mechanism.● Only use compatible memory cards.● When inserting and removing CDs andDVDs, always hold them at right angles tothe front of the CD/DVD drive without tilt-ing so as not to scratch them.● If a CD or DVD is inserted while another isalready in the unit or being ejected, theDVD drive may be irreparably damaged.Always wait until the data medium is com-pletely ejected.

CAUTIONAny foreign objects stuck to a data storagedevice and non-round media may damagethe CD or DVD player.● Only clean, standard 12 cm CDs or DVDsshould be used.– Do not affix stickers or other items to

the data medium. Stickers may peel offand damage the drive.

– Do not use printable data media. Prin-ted labels and coverings may peel offand damage the CD/DVD drive.

– Do not insert 8 cm single CDs or irregu-larly shaped CDs or DVDs.

– Do not insert DVD-Plus discs, DualDiscs or Flip Discs, as these are thickerthan normal CDs.

CAUTIONThe vehicle loudspeakers may be dam-aged if the volume is too high or the soundis distorted.

NoteFor the proper functioning of the Infotain-ment system it is important that the dateand time set in the vehicle are correct.

189

Infotainment System

Overview of the unit

Media System Touch and Media System Colour

Fig. 188 Overview of the controls (this configura-tion depends on the version).

Radio Mode (change of band frequency››› page 207Touchscreen ››› page 193Vehicle settings ››› page 36,››› page 231Media mode (audio sources)››› page 209

1

2

3

4

Phone Mode ››› page 232Full Link ››› page 197Selecting the main menu ››› page 192Volume. Off/on ››› page 192Slot for memory cards ››› page 212Settings button (search and selection)››› page 192

5

6

7

8

9

10

190

Introduction

Media System Plus / Navi System / Navi System Plus

Fig. 189 Overview of the controls

Radio Mode (change of band frequency››› page 207Touchscreen ››› page 193Navigation Mode ››› page 219Media mode (audio sources) ››› page 209Phone Mode ››› page 232Voice controlFull Link ››› page 197

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Vehicle settings ››› page 36,››› page 231Selecting the main menu ››› page 192Volume. Off/on ››› page 192Proximity sensor ››› page 195Settings button (search and selection)››› page 192

8

9

10

11

12

General instructions for use

Introduction

Fig. 190 Related video »191

Infotainment System

If the setup is changed, this may change thedisplay on the screen and in some cases, theInfotainment system may behave in a mannerdifferent to that described in this manual.

Note● Lightly pressing the buttons or brieflypressing the touchscreen is sufficient tooperate the Infotainment system.● Not all listed function buttons and func-tions described may be available due tothe device software used in your market.The equipment is not faulty if a functionbutton is missing from the screen.● Due to country-specific legislation, cer-tain functions may not be available on thescreen when the vehicle is travelling abovea certain speed.● Using a mobile telephone in the vehiclemay cause noise from the vehicle loud-speakers.● Restrictions on the use of devices usingBluetooth® technology may apply in somecountries. For further information, contactthe local authorities.● On some vehicles with ParkPilot, the vol-ume of the audio source is automaticallylowered when reverse gear is selected. Thevolume can be lowered in the menu Sound> Volume.

Diagram of the menus

The Infotainment system touchscreen can beused to select the different main menus.

Press the Infotainment button to openthe menus summary.

The display of the touchscreen's main menucan be switched between “grid” and “carou-sel” via the Settings/System > Displaymenu.

Infotainment rotary/push knobs

Rotary/push knobsThe left-hand rotary knob is the volumecontrol or the on/off button.

The right-hand rotary knob is the setup but-ton.

Infotainment buttonsThe buttons on the unit are shown in thismanual with the word “infotainment button”and their function within a rectangle, for ex-ample, the infotainment button .

The Infotainment buttons are used by press-ing them or pressing and holding.

Switching on and off

To manually switch the Infotainment systemon and off, briefly press the left rotary knob .

When switching on, the system starts-up withthe last set volume, provided that this doesnot exceed the preset maximum start-up vol-ume. Select Sound > Volume.

The unit will switch off automatically whenthe key is removed from the ignition or whenthe on/off button is pressed (depending onthe equipment fitted or the vehicle). If the In-fotainment system is switched on again, it willswitch off automatically after approximately30 minutes (switch-off delay).

Note● The Infotainment system is a part of thevehicle. It cannot be used in any other vehi-cle.● If the battery has been disconnected, theignition must be activated before switchingon the Infotainment system.

Changing the basic volume

Increasing or decreasing the volume ormuting the soundRaise the volume: turn the volume control clockwise or move the left thumbwheel onthe multifunction steering wheel upward .

192

Introduction

Lower the volume: turn the volume control clockwise or move the left thumbwheel onthe multifunction steering wheel downward.

Changes in volume are indicated by a vol-ume bar on the screen. The volume can becontrolled using the steering wheel controls.In this case, the changes in volume are dis-played on the instrument panel by a volumebar.

It is possible to preset certain volume settingsand adjustments. Select Sound > Volume

Muting the Infotainment system sound● Turn the volume control anti-clockwiseuntil it displays .

Muting the Infotainment system sound stopsthe media source that is playing The screendisplays .

NoteIf the base volume has been considerablyincreased to play a certain audio source,lower the volume again before switching toanother audio source.

Handling the function buttons anddisplay instructions

Fig. 191 View of some of the function buttonson the screen.

Fig. 192 Sound setup menu

The Infotainment system comes equippedwith a touchscreen.

Active areas of the screen that call up a cer-tain function are called “function buttons”.

These buttons are operated by briefly press-ing the screen or by pressing and holding.

The function buttons appear in the instruc-tions with the label “function button” and abutton symbol inside a rectangle .

Function buttons start functions or open sub-menus. The currently selected menu is dis-played in the title bar ››› Fig. 191 A of thesubmenus.

Inactive (grey) function buttons cannot be se-lected.

Increase or decrease the size of the im-ages displayed on the screenThe size of the navigation map image››› page 219 and, for example, photos whenviewing images ››› page 209 can be en-larged or reduced. To do so, enlarge or re-duce the image displayed by moving two fin-gers.

Overview of screen and function buttons

Display and function buttons: operationand effect

AThe title bar shows the selected menuand, where applicable, other functionbuttons.

B Press it to open another menu. »

193

Infotainment System


C

The scroll bar is shown on the right and itssize depends on the entries in the list.Move the bar on the screen by pressinglightly and without lifting the finger, see››› page 194, Opening list entries andsearching in lists.

D

Movable cursor: Move the cursor aroundthe screen by pressing lightly and withoutlifting the finger.

OR: To move the cursor to a particular po-sition, press that spot on the screen.

Fixed crosshair: Press the up, down, leftand right arrows to move the sound ac-cording to preference. The cursor D willmove.

OR: Press the central button to centre thestereo sound in the centre of the passen-ger compartment

Press it on some lists to move up a level,one by one.

BACK

Press to return from the submenus one ata time to the main menu or to undo theentries made.

When pressed, a pop-up window opens(options window) which displays othersetup options.


/

Some functions or messages are accom-panied by a check box and are activated or deactivated by pressing saidcheck box.

OK Press to confirm an entry or a selection.

× Press to close a pop-up window or an in-put window.

/ Press them to change the setup adjust-ments one at a time.

Move the slider around the screen bypressing it lightly and without lifting yourfinger.

Opening list entries and searchingin lists

Fig. 193 Entries on a setup menu list.

The entries on a list can be activated bypressing them on the screen directly or by us-ing the adjustment button.

Mark list entries using the setup buttonand open them● Turn the setup button to mark the entries onthe list with a rectangle one by one and con-tinue searching the list in this manner.● Press the setup button to activate themarked entry on the list.

Search lists (scrolling the screen)The scroll bar is shown on the right and itssize depends on the entries in the list››› Fig. 193 1 .

● Briefly press the screen above or below thescroll marker.● OR: Place a finger over the scroll markerand without lifting it, move it around thescreen. Lift your finger off the screen whenyou reach the desired position.● OR: Place your finger in the centre of thescreen and without lifting it, move it aroundthe screen. Lift your finger off the screenwhen you reach the desired position.

194

Introduction

Input masks with on-screen keypad

Fig. 194 Input window with on-screen keypad.

Input windows with on-screen keypad areused for functions such as entering an entryname, selecting a destination address or en-tering a search term for searching long lists.

The function buttons listed below are notavailable in all countries or for all topics.

Subsequent chapters only explain thosefunctions that differ from those in the screenshown in the figure.

The input line with cursor is located in the topbar of the screen. All inputs are displayedhere.

Input windows for “free text input”In the input masks for open text, you may en-ter letters, numbers and special characters inany combination.

Input windows for selecting a saved entry(e.g. selection of a destination address)It is only possible to select a sequence of let-ters, numbers and special characters thatmatches a stored entry.

Suggestions for matching destinations ap-pear depending on the characters entered inthe input line ››› Fig. 194 4 . In the case ofcompound names, it is necessary to enter aspace.

If there are fewer than 99 selectable entries,the number of remaining entries is displayedafter the input line 3 . Pressing this functionbutton displays these remaining entries in alist.

Overview of the function buttons

Function icon and text: operation and ef-fect

Lettersand dig-its

Press them to copy them into the inputline.

1

Press to change the keypad to anotherlanguage. Keypad languages can be se-lected from the menu System set-tings > Language.

2 Press to show symbols on the keypad.

3Displays the number and opens the list ofremaining selectable entries that matchthe entered text.

Function icon and text: operation and ef-fect

4 Scroll bar, the size of which depends onthe number of matching entries.

5

Hold and press to display a pop-up win-dow with the special characters based onsaid letter. Press the desired character toenter it. Some special characters can bewritten out instead (e.g. “AE” for “Ä”).

Press to enter a space.

Press to delete characters in the input linefrom right to left.

Press and hold to delete several charac-ters.

BACK

Press to close the input window.

Proximity sensors3 Valid for: Navi System and Navi System Plus.

The Infotainment system is equipped with anintegrated proximity sensor ››› Fig. 189 11 .

The image on the screen changes from dis-play mode to automatic operation when yourhand moves toward it. In operation mode, thefunction buttons are automatically highligh-ted to facilitate their use.

195

Infotainment System

Additional information and displayoptions

The displays appearing on the screen mayvary depending on the settings, and may dif-fer from those described here.

The status bar on the screen can display, forexample, the current time and outside tem-perature.

All displays can be viewed only after com-pletely restarting the Infotainment system.

Initial configuration wizard

Fig. 195 Initial configuration wizard

The initial configuration wizard will help youto set up your Infotainment system the firsttime you switch it on.

Every time you switch on the Infotainmentsystem, the initial setup screen will appear

››› Fig. 195 if any parameters have not beenset or if the NEVER function button has notbeen pressed.


CLOSE

Closes the Configuration Wizard, andthe main menu or last mode in whichyou used the Infotainment system willappear. The next time you switch onthe system, the Configuration Wizardwill start up again.

NEVER

Disables the possibility of changingthe settings of the Infotainment sys-tem. If you want to perform the initialsystem setup, you must enter via Sys-tem setup and select Configura-tion Wizard.

START Starts up the Configuration Wizard.

A

Press to configure the time and date (ifit has a navigation system it will beconfigured automatically with theGPS).

B

Press to search and store to memorythe radio stations that have the bestreception at that moment on all avail-able bands (AM, FM and DAB).

C Press to link your mobile telephone tothe Infotainment system.

D a)Press to select your home address us-ing your current position or by man-ually entering an address.


PREVIOUS NEXT

To go to the previous or next parameterto set.When a parameter has been set, theonly way to reset it is from the mainmenu, clicking on it, and not using thePrevious/Next buttons.When setting any parameter, a confir-mation mark will appear on it .

FINISH

Once one or more settings have beenapplied, click on this in the main menuof the wizard to confirm and finalizethe settings.If there are any parameters you havenot set, the next time you connect theInfotainment system, the Initial Config-uration Wizard will start up.

a) Only valid for Navi System and Navi System Plus.

196

Connectivity

ConnectivityData transfer

This communication can allow data to beread and/or written.

From the SETTINGS menu > Data transfer forSEAT apps, there is a checkbox to acti-vate/deactivate the function and a dropdownmenu called Operation via apps which con-trols the level of interaction between the appsand the system.

Full Link*

Full Link technology description


The Full Link system provides a way of bring-ing together technologies that allow commu-nication between the Infotainment Systemand mobile devices:

● MirrorLink®

● Android Auto™● Apple CarPlay™

InterfacesTo access the Full Link system, press the Info-tainment button (Full Link) or press the in-fotainment button and then select theFull Link context.

The connection to Full Link is made through aUSB interface.

WARNINGIf a mobile terminal is not secured or is in-correctly secured in the vehicle, it couldmove around the passenger compartmentin the event of a sudden driving manoeuvre,emergency stop or accident, resulting in in-jury.● While driving, mobile terminals must besecurely fastened in position, outside theairbag deployment zones, or safely stowedaway.

WARNINGAny applications that are not suitable orexecute incorrectly may cause damage tothe vehicle, accidents and serious injuries.● SEAT recommends the use of the Appsthat SEAT provides for this vehicle.● To make full use of SEAT Apps, you mustactivate the option , Settings/System >Data transfer for SEAT apps.

● The interaction level of the Apps on thesystem must be: ALLOW.● Protect the mobile terminal with its appli-cations from improper use.● Never make modifications to the applica-tions.● Consult the instruction manual for themobile terminal.

WARNINGThe use of applications while driving candistract your attention from the traffic. Dis-tracting the driver in any way can lead toan accident and cause injuries.● Always drive carefully and responsibly.

CAUTION● In areas where special regulations applyor the use of mobile terminals is forbidden,the mobile terminal must be switched off atall times. The radiation produced by themobile terminal when switched on may in-terfere with sensitive technical and medi-cal equipment, possibly resulting in mal-function or damage to the equipment.● SEAT cannot be held liable for any dam-age caused to the vehicle as a result of theuse of applications that are of poor qualityor are defective, the inadequate program-ming of the applications, the insufficientcoverage of the network, the loss of data »

197

Infotainment System

during transmission or the improper use ofmobile terminals.

Note● Use of Full Link technology may result inhigh consumption of your 3G/4G data plan.● SEAT recommends having a high batterycharge on the device when connected toFull Link.● SEAT recommends that to use Full Link,the “Date and time” should be correctlyconfigured. Select Settings/System >Date and Time.● SEAT applications are designed to com-municate with the vehicle and interact withit via the Full Link connection, therefore itsfunctionality is linked to the mobile devicebeing connected via USB.● You can find further information on thetechnical requirements, compatible devi-ces, suitable applications and availabilityat www.seat.com or at SEAT dealers.

Is Full Link blocked?

Fig. 197 Message on Infotainment systemscreen.

To unblock this feature, you must obtain theaccessory from your SEAT dealer. Otherwise,a message like this will appear on the screenwhenever you select the feature ››› Fig. 197.

Requirements for Full Link

Fig. 198 Full Link Requirements

Full Link Activated: If you do not haveFull Link in your vehicle you can acquire itas an accessory at your Authorised Serv-ice.Compatible Phones. Go to the Mirror-Link®, Android Auto™ or Apple CarPlay™

1

2

198

Connectivity

websites to confirm whether your phoneis compatible with the system.Mirror Link– Check smartphone compatibility:

www.mirrorlink.com/phones– MirrorLink® 1.1 or higher– Some of the Apps certified by SEAT or

the CCC must be installed in the de-vice.

Android Auto– Check smartphone compatibility. An-

droid Auto™: www.android.com/auto/– Android 5.0 (Lollipop) or higher– Install Android Auto™ appApple CarPlay– Check smartphone compatibility. Apple

CarPlay™:www.apple.com/ios/carplay– iPhone 5 or higher and iOS 7.1 or higher– Turn on the SIRI personal assistant (see

phone settings)

USB cable connecting car to phone:use the USB cable approved and sup-plied by the phone's official distributor.

3

Activation of Full Link

Fig. 199 Full Link Setup

Fig. 200 Full Link menu

Data connection via Wi-Fi or SIM is notnecessary to establish the connection be-tween the smartphone and Full Link.

Data connection via Wi-Fi or SIM is neces-sary to enable all of the app features1).

Proceed as follows to use Full Link:

● Switch on the Infotainment system● Connect the smartphone to the vehicle'sUSB port using a USB cable ››› page 239.● In the main menu for the Full Link setup, se-lect Activate data transfer for SEATapps ››› Fig. 199:

Finally, a message will appear stating thatdata transfer will commence when the deviceis connected. Please note that data is trans-ferred over connections between your vehi-cle and mobile device. Press OK. Once selec-ted, the technology compatible with your de-vice can be used.

NoteDepending on your smartphone, it mayhave to be unlocked for the connection tooccur.

1) Using the data connection to transfer thesmartphone apps to Full Link may involve addi-tional charges. Please check the charges withyour operator.

199

Infotainment System

What should I do if it does not con-nect?

Restart the mobile device

Check the USB cable visually.Make sure that the USB cable is not damaged. Checkthat both connections (USB/micro USB) are not dam-aged or worn.

Visually checkthat the USB portsare properly con-nected.Check that the ve-hicle and deviceUSB connectionsare not damagedand/or worn.

Clean the USB ports (deviceand vehicle).

Try another compatible mo-bile device.

Have the USB port replaced ata SEAT Authorised Service.

Have the mobile device re-paired or replace it.

Try another compatible mobile device.

Pairing of portable devices sup-porting the MirrorLink®, AndroidAuto™ and/or Apple CarPlay™technologies

Fig. 201 Full Link menu

CarouselWhen you enter the Full Link context for thefirst time, the technologies available for pair-ing the portable device are displayed.

Once the device connects via USB, the sys-tem will offer you the technologies availablefor establishing a connection with your mo-bile phone.

In the event of simultaneous connections be-tween two devices with different operating

systems, a choice will be presented for whichone to make the connection with ››› Fig. 201.

View of the device listiPhone™ devices only support Apple Car-Play™.

There are some Android devices that supportMirrorLink® and Android Auto™.

Bear in mind that once the device is connec-ted it will not be available as an audio source.

Full Link setup


Activating data transfers for SEAT applications : allowsthe exchange of information between the vehicle andapplications authorised by SEAT.

Last ModeIf a session using one technology ends with-out the disconnection being made from theInfotainment system (simply by disconnect-ing the cable) then when the device is nextconnected to it, the session will start withoutthe user being required to take any action1).

InformationConsult the mobile device manual.

1) Unless the device requires the screen to be un-locked in order to establish the connection.

200

Connectivity

Depends on each technology:

Availability in a countryThird party applications

For further information:

MirrorLink®:www.mirrorlink.com

Apple CarPlay™:www.apple.com/ios/carplay

Android Auto™:www.android.com/auto

Note● In order to use Android Auto™ technologyit is necessary to download the AndroidAuto™ application, located on GooglePlay™.● Only compatible applications can beused, in accordance with the technologyconnected.

1.2.

MirrorLink®

Fig. 202 Function buttons in the general viewof compatible applications.

Fig. 203 Other MirrorLink function buttons.

MirrorLink® is a protocol which enables com-munication between a portable device andthe Infotainment system via USB.

Using it makes it possible to display and man-age the content and functions displayed on

the portable device on the Infotainment sys-tem screen.

To avoid distracting the driver while driving,only specially adapted applications can beused ››› in Full Link technology descrip-tion on page 197.

RequirementsIn order to use MirrorLink®, the following re-quirements must be met:

● The mobile device must be compatible withMirrorLink®.● The mobile device must be connected tothe Infotainment system via USB.● Depending on the mobile device used, asuitable application must be installed for theuse of MirrorLink® on the device.

Initiating the connection● In order to initiate the connection with themobile device, it is simply necessary to con-nect it to the Infotainment system via the USBconnection.● A pop-up screen will appear, which will re-quest that you accept the device.

Function buttons and possible messages


Full Link To return to the Full Link main menu. »201

Infotainment System


CLOSE APPSPress to close the open apps. Thenpress the apps to be closed or theClose all function button to close

all the open applications.

1 : 1 Press to change to the mobile de-vice screen.

SETTINGS To open the Full Link setup

››› Fig. 203 1 Press to return to the MirrorLink®

main menu.

››› Fig. 203 2Press to display all the functionbuttons in the lower or upper right-hand margin of the screen.

››› Fig. 203 / Allows buttons 1 and 2 to be

hidden or shown.››› Fig. 189 12

MirrorLink® setup


Activate MirrorLink pop-up windows : Allows Mirror-Link® pop-up windows in applications that support it.

Apple CarPlay™*3 Valid for compatible iPhone™ mobile tele-phones. Also, iPhone™ mobile telephones onlysupport Apple CarPlay™

Apple CarPlay™ is a protocol which enablescommunication between a mobile telephoneand the Infotainment system via USB.

This makes it possible to display and operatethe mobile telephone on the Infotainmentsystem screen.

RequirementsIn order to use Apple CarPlay™, the followingrequirements must be met:

● Make sure that you do not have AppleCarPlay™ restricted on your device, at: Set-tings > General > Restrictions >CarPlay > ON.● The mobile device must be compatible withApple CarPlay™.● The mobile device must be connected tothe Infotainment system via USB.

Initiating the connectionIn order to initiate the connection with themobile device, it is simply necessary to con-nect it to the Infotainment system via the USBconnection.

● A pop-up screen will appear, which will re-quest that you accept the device.

● If you start the session using AppleCarPlay™ technology, it will not be possibleto pair another device via Bluetooth®. The fol-lowing message will appear in the mainPhone menu:

Please disconnect Apple CarPlayfirst, before you can connect an-other mobile telephone.

Holding down the steering wheel multifunc-tion button or the button of the Info-tainment system will start the Apple™ “voiceengine”.

To return to the basic contents of the Infotain-ment system, press the SEAT icon.

Android Auto™*3 Valid for compatible Android mobile phones.

Android Auto™ is a protocol which enablescommunication between a portable deviceand the Infotainment system via USB.

This makes it possible to display and operatethe mobile telephone on the Infotainmentsystem screen.

RequirementsIn order to use Android Auto™, the followingrequirements must be met:

202

Connectivity

● The mobile device must be compatible withAndroid Auto™.● The mobile device must be connected tothe Infotainment system via USB.● The Android Auto™ application should al-ready be downloaded and installed on themobile device.

Initiating the connectionIn order to initiate the connection with themobile device, it is simply necessary to con-nect it to the Infotainment system via the USBconnection, and to be sure to follow the in-structions of the device being paired.

● The first connection to Android Auto™ mustbe done while the vehicle is stationary.● Once the first pop-up window about ac-cepting data transfer between the car andthe device has been accepted, a messagewill appear requesting that you check yourmobile device for the confirmations neededto pair it with the Infotainment system.● If you are initiating the session usingAndroid Auto™ technology via USB, the mo-bile telephone connects automatically viaBluetooth® to the Infotainment system tele-phone and it will not be possible to pair an-other mobile telephone via Bluetooth®.

Holding down the steering wheel multifunc-tion button or the button of the Info-

tainment system will start the Android™“voice engine”.

To return to the basic contents of the Infotain-ment system, press the Return to SEATbutton.

NoteSome mobile devices require a change inthe USB connection mode in order to useAndroid Auto™.● Make sure that your mobile is in “MediaTransfer Protocol (MTP)” mode before it isconnected by USB to the Infotainment sys-tem.

NoteAndroid Auto™ requires the use of Google™services, as well as certain basic applica-tions of the Android system.● Make sure that you always have Google™services updated in order to use this tech-nology.

Frequently asked questions aboutFull Link

What is the connection method? USB Cable.

Will the USB cable be supplied with the vehicle? No. The USB cable supplied with the device shouldbe used.

Is there a navigation option? Navigation is possible in each one of the Full Linktechnologies if the technology is available in yourcountry and if you have the Navigation app.

What is the difference between using the Full Linksystem navigator (via telephone) instead of an-other navigator? Advantages: Daily updates.Issues: data consumption, reception problems.

Can I send voice messages? With certified apps, such as SEAT ConnectApp, youcan answer but not send voice messages.

What apps are visible while driving? Depending on the technology:– for MirrorLink®: SEAT-certified apps and CCC,– for Android Auto™: Apps selected by Google™,– for Apple CarPlay™: Apps selected by Apple™.

Where can I find compatible apps? Compatible apps can be found on the following links:www.mirrorlink.com/www.android.com/auto/www.apple.com/ios/carplay/ »

203

Infotainment System

Where can I download apps? On Google Play™ for Android Auto™/MirrorLink® andon Apple Store™ for Apple CarPlay™.

If Full Link stops working, where can I have it re-paired? If the problem is in the car, you should go to the deal-er. If the problem is in the mobile device, you shouldsee your mobile telephone vendor.

Will WhatsApp be certified? This depends on the technology.

Is MirrorLink® available in my country? Yes, MirrorLink® is available in all the countries andregions where SEAT operates.

What are the differences between MirrorLink®,Android Auto™ and Apple CarPlay™? MirrorLink® is not compatible with Android Auto™ andApple CarPlay™, as they are different technologies.They all coexist in Full Link, although Android Auto™ isdesigned for mobile devices with the Android™ oper-ating system, and Apple CarPlay™ for iPhone.

Can MirrorLink® be installed in a previous SEATmodel? No, this is not possible.

Where can I find more information about FullLink? If you have any questions, please see our Innova-tion/Connectivity sections on our website:www.seat.es or www.seat.com or e-mail [email protected]

SEAT Media Control*

Introduction3 Not available for model: Media System Touch /Colour


The SEAT Media Control1) app can be usedto remotely operate some partial functions inRadio mode, Media mode and Navigationmode. Information can be exchanged be-tween a device and the Infotainment System.

Each one of the functions is operated bymeans of a Tablet or partially by means of amobile phone.

Operating requirements:● A tablet or mobile phone.● The app must be available on the corre-sponding device.● There must be a WLAN connection betweenthe Infotainment System and the device. Se-lect Menu > Media > Settings > WLAN >Share connection via WLAN > Configu-ration.

Make sure that data transfer for apps is acti-vated:

● From the SETTINGS menu > Data trans-fer for SEAT apps, there is a checkbox toactivate/deactivate the function and a drop-down menu called Operation via appswhich controls the level of interaction be-tween the apps and the system. Select Menu> Settings/System > Transfer datafrom mobile devices.

You can obtain information about technicalrequirements on the SEAT website or at SEATdealerships.

Telephone functions are not part of the func-tions of this app.

1) Availability depends on the country.204

Connectivity

Data transmission and controlfunctions

Fig. 205 SEAT Media Control Main menu

The Infotainment System can be operatedfrom other seats in the vehicle as follows, withthe help of SEAT Media Control:

● Radio remote control.● Multimedia playback remote control.

The following information can be exchangedbetween a device and the Infotainment Sys-tem, depending on the country and theequipment:

● Navigation destinations.● Traffic information.● Social media contents.● Audio transmission.● Vehicle data.

● Location-specific information, for example,POIs.

WLAN access point*

Introduction3 Not available for model: Media System Touch /Colour

The Infotainment System can be used toshare a WLAN connection with up to 8 devi-ces ››› page 205, Setting up WLAN connec-tion sharing.

The Infotainment System can also use theWLAN hotspot of an external wireless deviceto provide Internet to the devices connectedto the hotspot (WLAN client) ››› page 206,Setting up Internet access.

Note● Data transmission may incur charges.Due to the high volume of data exchanged,SEAT recommends the use of a flat ratemobile phone deal for data transmission.Mobile phone operators can provide therelevant information.● The exchange of data packages over theinternet may generate additional costs, de-pending on your mobile phone rate, partic-ularly if you are abroad (for example,roaming rates).

Setting up WLAN connection shar-ing

The Infotainment System can be used toshare a WLAN connection with 8 wireless de-vices.

Establishing the connection with the wire-less network (WLAN)● Press the Infotainment button andthen press the Settings / System menu.● Activate the wireless network (WLAN) on theInfotainment System. To do so, press theWLAN function button.● Activate the wireless network (WLAN) on thewireless device that is to be connected. Ifnecessary, refer to the manufacturer’s in-struction manual.● Activate the mobile device assignment onthe Infotainment System. To do so, press theEnable WLAN connection button and activate

the checkbox.● Enter and confirm the network key dis-played on the wireless device.

The following settings can also be made onthe menu Share connection:

WPA2 encryption automatical-ly generates a network key.

Network key automatically gen-erated. Press the function button to »

Security level:

Network key:

205

Infotainment System

manually change the network key. Thenetwork key must have a minimum of 8characters and a maximum of 63.

WLAN Network name (maximum of 32characters).

Activatethe checkbox to deactivate the visibilityof the wireless (WLAN) network.

The wireless (WLAN) connection is establish-ed. To complete the connection, it may benecessary to enter other data into the wire-less device.

Repeat this process to connect other wirelessdevices.

Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS)1)

Wi-Fi Protected Setup can be used to createa ciphered local wireless network quickly andsimply.

● Establish the connection with the wirelessnetwork (WLAN) ››› page 216.

SSID:

Do not send network name (SSID):

● Press the WPS button on the WLAN router2)

until the warning light on the router startsflashing.● OR: Press and hold the WLAN button on theWLAN router until the WLAN light on the routerstarts flashing.● Press the WPS button on the WLAN device.The wireless (WLAN) connection is establish-ed.

Repeat this process to connect other wirelessdevices.

Setting up Internet access

The Infotainment System can use the WLANhotspot of an external wireless device to es-tablish an internet connection.

Establishing the connection with the wire-less network (WLAN)● Activate and check the wireless hotspot onthe external device. If necessary, refer to themanufacturer’s instruction manual.● Press the Infotainment button andthen press the Settings / System menu; OR

access the Media or SEAT Media Controlmode and press the SETTINGS menu.● Press the WLAN menu and then enter Inter-net access settings on your phone and acti-vate the checkbox.● Press the Find function button and selectthe wireless device you want from the list.● If necessary, enter the network key of thewireless device in the Infotainment Systemand confirm with OK.

To manually enter the net-work settings of an external wireless(WLAN) device.

The wireless (WLAN) connection is establish-ed. To complete the connection, it may benecessary to enter other data into the wire-less device.

NoteDue to the large number of different wire-less devices in existence, it is not possibleto guarantee fault-free operation of allfunctions.

Manual settings:

1) This function depends on the equipment andthe country in question.2) If the WLAN router does not support WPS thenetwork must be configured manually.

206

Operating modes

Operating modes

Radio

Related video

Fig. 206 Radio mode

RADIO main menu

Fig. 207 RADIO main menu.

Fig. 208 Radio mode: station list (FM).

Press the infotainment button to openthe Radio main menu ››› Fig. 207.

RADIO main menu function buttons


1To change the group of memory but-tons slide a finger over the memorybuttons from left to right or vice-versa

BAND Allows you to select the frequencyband.

STATIONLIST

Opens the list of currently receivableradio from the active frequency band.

MANUAL Allows you to select the frequencymanually.

VIEWAllows you to select the informationshown on the screen. Only available inDAB mode.

SETTINGS Opens the setup menu of the activefrequency band (FM, AM or DAB).


/

Selects the previous or next stored sta-tion or of the station list. This settingcan be changed in the Radio settingsmenu (FM, AM, DAB).

1 to 18a) Memory buttons ››› page 208.

SCANStops the scan function (only visiblewhen the function is under way). It canbe activated in the settings menu (FM,AM and DAB).

a) The Media System / Touch Colour model has 15memories.

Information and possible icons

Display: Meaning

A

View the frequency or the name of thestation and, where applicable, the radiotext. The name of the radio station andthe radio text will only be displayed ifequipped with RDS and if it is active.

RDSOff

The RDS radio data service is deactiva-ted.

TPTraffic information can be retrieved: se-lect Radio > Settings > Trafficstation.

No stations with traffic news are availa-ble.

The radio station is stored on a memorybutton. »

207

Infotainment System

Display: Meaning

AF off The tracking of alternative frequencies isdisabled.

Note● The availability of AM and DAB bands de-pends on the country and/or equipment. Inthe event that the AM and DAB bands arenot available, the BAND function buttontext will not be shown.● Bear in mind that being underground, intunnels, in areas with tall buildings ormountains can interfere with radio signals.● Foil or metal-coated stickers attached tothe windows may affect reception on vehi-cles with a window aerial.● Radio stations are responsible for thecontent of the information they transmit.

Memory buttons

Fig. 209 RADIO main menu.

In the Radio main menu, you can store sta-tions from all available frequency wave-lengths on the numbered function buttons.These function buttons are called “memorybuttons”.

Functions of the memory buttons

Selecting thestation fromthe memorybuttons

Press the memory button corre-sponding to the desired station.

The stored stations can only beplayed by pressing the corre-sponding memory button providedit can be received at your currentlocation.

Functions of the memory buttons

Change mem-ory bank

Move your finger over the screenfrom left to right or vice-versa.

OR: Press one of the function but-tons ››› Fig. 209 A

The memory buttons are displayedin three memory banks.

Storing thestation on thememory but-tons

Keep and hold the desired memorybutton until an audible signal isheard, the station will be stored onthis memory button. You can alsostore a station from a station list.

Storing thestation logo onthe memorybuttons

A station logo can be assigned tothe stations stored on the memorybuttons.A logo is automatically assignedfrom the database if the Advancedradio settings option is enableda).A logo can also be assigned man-ually from an external data source(USB/SD card).

a) Not available for the Media System Touch/Colourmodel.

208

Operating modes

Media

Introduction


“Media sources” are audio sources contain-ing audio files on various different data stor-age devices (e.g. CD, memory card, externalMP3 player). These audio files can be playedby the Infotainment system via their corre-sponding drives or audio input sockets (inter-nal CD drive, memory card slot, AUX-IN multi-media socket etc.).

CopyrightAudio and video files on data storage devicesare usually protected by intellectual propertyrights, as per the corresponding national andinternational laws. Be aware of the current le-gal provisions!

Note● Do not use memory card adapters.● SEAT assumes no liability for any deterio-ration or loss of files on data storage devi-ces.

MEDIA main menu

Fig. 211 MEDIA main menu.

Using the Media main menu, different mediasources can be selected and played.

● Press the infotainment button to openthe Radio main menu ››› Fig. 211.

It will continue playing the last media sourceselected from the same point.

The media source being played is indicatedon the dropdown list when pressing theSOURCE function button ››› Fig. 211.

If there is no available media source, the Me-dia main menu is displayed.

Function buttons of the main Media menu


SOURCE

Indicates the media source beingplayed. Press to select another mediasource ››› page 211.

JUKEBOX a): Internal hard drive (SSD)››› page 214.

CD/DVD a): Internal CD and DVD drive››› page 212.

SD CARD 1 , SD CARD 2 *: SD memorycard ››› page 212.

USB 1 , USB 2 *: External data storagedevice connected to the USB port ››› page 213.

AUX : External audio source connectedto the AUX-IN multimedia socket››› page 213.

BT AUDIO : Bluetooth® audio››› page 213.

WLAN *b): External audio source con-nected by WLAN ››› page 216

SELEC-TION Opens the track list.

/ Changes track in Media mode or fastforward/rewind.

Playback stops. The function buttonchanges to . »

209

Infotainment System


Playback is resumed. The functionbutton changes to .

a)

Play more like this.Creates a virtual playlist that includestracks with a similar rhythm to the onebeing played if available using Grace-note®.

SET-TINGS Opens the Media Settings menu.

REPEAT

Repeat all tracks.

Repeats all the tracks that are on thesame memory level as the track beingplayed at that moment. If in the MediaSettings menu the Mix/Repeat including subfolders option

is enabled, it also includes the subfold-ers.

REPEAT

The current track will be repeated.


MIX

Random play.

Includes all the tracks that are on thesame memory level as the track beingplayed at that moment. If in the MediaSettings menu the Mix/Repeat including subfolders option

is enabled, it also includes the subfold-ers.

a) The DVD drive and the Jukebox (SSD) are onlyavailable for the “Navi System Plus” model.b) Not available for the Media System Touch/Colourmodel.

Messages and symbols on the MEDIA mainmenu

Display: Meaning

A

Displays information about the artistname, album name and song title (CDtext , ID3 tag on compressed audiofiles).

Audio CD: displays track information ifavailable via Gracenote®a). If no data isavailable, it only displays Track and thenumber corresponding to the position itoccupies on the data storage device.

Display: Meaning

B

View of album cover: If there are variouscovers within the same folder/album, thesystem only displays one of them.It prioritizes displaying the covers in thefollowing manner:1. Cover embedded in the file(s).2. Image in file folder.3. Image provided by the Gracenote®a)

database.4. Default icon for the connected device.

If playing a video file, by pressing theicon (cover) it can be played on fullscreen.

C

The playing time so far and time remain-ing in minutes and seconds. In the caseof audio files with variable bit rates (VBR)the remaining time may vary.

RDSOffb)

The RDS radio data service is deactiva-ted. The RDS can be activated in the FMsetup menu.

TPb) The TP function is active and can betuned in.

b) There is no traffic news station available.

210

Operating modes

Display: Meaning

b) DAB not available.

a) Gracenote® is a database available on the Infotain-ment system hard drive that contains information onthe tracks of different artists and albums. In order forthe user to benefit from the functions offered byGracenote®, the tracks must contain the artist and/oralbum data (only available for the model: “Navi Sys-tem Plus”.b) Depends on the market and unit in question.

Note● When the media source is inserted, play-ing will not start automatically; it is neces-sary for the user to select the source. Norwill the media source change when it isejected.● In order to see the different covers insideof the same album/folder, make sure thatthe tracks contain different informationabout the Artist or Album in its metadata. Ifnot, you will see the same cover for all oftracks contained in the same album/folder.

Changing the Media source

Fig. 212 MEDIA mode: change media source.

● From the Media main menu, press the Infotainment button repeatedly to cyclethrough the available media sources.● OR: From the Media main menu, press theSOURCE function button ››› Fig. 212 and se-

lect the desired media source.

In the pop-up window, the Media sources notselected are shown as deactivated (in grey).

When a Media source that has already beenplayed is selected again, playback is re-sumed from the point at which it was stop-ped.

Optional Media playback sources

Function button: media source

JUKEBOX a) Internal hard drive (SSD)››› page 214.

CD/DVD a) Internal CD/DVD drive››› page 212.

SD CARD 1SD memory card ››› page 212.

SD CARD 2 *

USB 1 External data storage device con-nected to the USB port ››› page 213.USB 2 *

AUXExternal audio source connectedto the AUX-IN multimedia socket››› page 213.

BT AUDIO Bluetooth® audio ››› page 213.

WLAN *b) External audio source connectedby WLAN ››› page 216

a) The DVD drive and the Jukebox (SSD) are onlyavailable for the “Navi System Plus” model.b) Not available for the Media System Touch/Colourmodel.

NoteThe Media source can be changed in theTrack list view: select Media > View.

211

Infotainment System

Insert or eject a CD or DVD1)

3 Not available for model: Media SystemTouch/Colour

Fig. 213 Slots for data storage devices in theglove compartment.

The driver should refrain from operating theunit while the vehicle is in motion. Insert orchange the data storage device before mov-ing off!

The CD and DVD drive can play audio CDsand DVDs and audio data CDs and DVDs.

Insert a CD or DVD● Hold the CD or DVD with the printed sidefacing up.

● Push the CD or DVD into the DVD slot››› Fig. 213 3 to the point where it is drawn inautomatically.

Eject a CD or DVD● Press button 1 .● The CD or DVD in the drive will be ejectedand must be removed within approximately10 seconds.

Insert or eject a memory card

Depending on the features and the country,the vehicle may have one or two slots for SDcards.

Inserting a memory cardInsert the compatible memory card, bevellededge first and with the label face up (con-tacts face down), into slot ››› Fig. 213 2 or››› Fig. 188 9 , until properly inserted.

If a memory card cannot be inserted, makesure it is positioned correctly and is compati-ble with the unit.

Removing a memory cardThe inserted memory cards must be pre-pared for removal.

● From the main Media menu, press theSETTINGS button to open the Media Set-tings menu or press the infotainment button and then press Settings / System , to

open menu System settings.● Press the Remove safely function button. Adropdown menu appears with the followingoptions: SD1 Card, SD2 Card*, USB1 andUSB2*. After correctly ejecting the memorycard from the system, the function button be-comes inactive (grey colour).● Press the inserted memory card. The mem-ory card “jumps” to the eject position.● Remove the memory card.

Unreadable memory cardIf a memory card is inserted and the datacannot be read, the relevant warning ap-pears.

1) The DVD drive is only available for the model:“Navi System Plus”.

212

Operating modes

External data storage device con-nected to the USB port

Depending on the features and the country,the vehicle may have one or two USB con-nections ››› page 239.

Audio files on an external data storage deviceconnected to the USB port can be playedand controlled via the Infotainment system.

Where this manual refers to external datastorage devices, this means USB mass stor-age devices containing supported audio files,such as MP3 players, iPods™ and USB sticks.

Only supported audio files are displayed andplayed. Other files are ignored.

Further operation of the external data medi-um (changing track, selecting tracks andplayback modes) is described in the appro-priate chapters of this manual ››› page 209.

Instructions and restrictionsCompatibility with Apple™ devices and othermedia players depends on the unit.

The USB port supplies the usual USB volt-age of 5 volts for a USB connection.

External hard disks with a capacity greaterthan 32 GB must be reformatted for the FAT32file system in some circumstances. You willfind the necessary software and informationon the Internet.

Take into account all other instructions andlimitations regarding requirements for mediasources.

DisconnectingAny connected data storage devices mustbe prepared before their disconnection in or-der to remove them.

● From the main Media menu, press theSETTINGS button to open the Media Set-tings menu or press the infotainment button and then press Settings / System , to

open menu System settings.● Press the Remove safely function button. Adropdown menu appears with the followingoptions: SD1 Card, SD2 Card*, USB1 andUSB2*. After correctly ejecting the data stor-age device from the system, the function but-ton becomes inactive (grey colour).● Now the data storage device can be dis-connected.

Note● Do not connect an external media playerat the same time to play music via Blue-tooth® and via the USB port with the In-fotainment system, as this could causeplayback limitations.● If the external player is an Apple™ device,it cannot be simultaneously connected byUSB and by Bluetooth®.

● If a connected device is not recognised,disconnect all the connected devices andtry connecting the device again.● Do not use memory card adaptors, USBextension cords or USB hubs!

External audio source connected tothe AUX-IN multimedia socket

Depending on the equipment and countrythere may be an AUX-IN multimedia socket.

The connected external audio source isplayed over the vehicle speakers and cannotbe controlled via the Infotainment systemcontrols.

The connection of an external audio source isindicated by AUX on the screen.

Connecting an external audiosource via Bluetooth®

Bluetooth® Audio mode allows you to listen toaudio files being played on a Bluetooth® au-dio source (e.g., a mobile telephone) connec-ted via Bluetooth® (audio playback by Blue-tooth®) over the vehicle speakers. »

213

Infotainment System

Conditions● The Bluetooth® audio source must supportthe A2DP Bluetooth® profile.● In the Bluetooth Settings menu the Bluetooth Audio (A2DP/AVRCP) function must

be on. Select Phone > Settings > Blue-tooth

Starting Bluetooth® audio transfer● Activate Bluetooth® visibility on the externalBluetooth® audio source (e.g., mobile tele-phone).● Lower the base volume on the Infotainmentsystem.● In the MEDIA main menu, press the SOURCEfunction button and select BT audio .● Press Search for new device in order to con-nect an external Bluetooth® audio source forthe first time ››› page 234.● OR: Select a Bluetooth® external audiosource from the list.● Please refer to the instructions on thescreen of the Infotainment system and on theBluetooth® audio source regarding the rest ofthe procedure.

You may still need to manually start playbackon the Bluetooth® source.

When playback on the Bluetooth® audiosource is stopped, the Infotainment systemremains in Bluetooth® Audio mode.

Controlling playbackThe extent to which the Bluetooth® audiosource can be controlled via the Infotainmentsystem depends on the connected Blue-tooth® audio source.

The available functions will depend on theBluetooth® Audio profile that the connectedexternal player supports.

With media players that support the AVRCPBluetooth® profile, playback on the Blue-tooth® audio source can be automaticallystarted or stopped when the unit is switchedto Bluetooth® Audio mode or to a different au-dio source. In addition, it is possible to view orchange the track via the Infotainment system.

Note● Due to the large number of possible Blue-tooth® audio sources, it is not possible toguarantee fault-free operation of all de-scribed functions.● To play music, do not link the externalmedia player simultaneously to Bluetooth®

and the USB interface of the infotainmentsystem, as this can cause limitations duringplayback.

● Do not connect an external media playerto play music via Bluetooth® and via theUSB port ››› page 213 at the same timewith the Infotainment system, as this couldcause playback limitations.● If the external player is an Apple™ device,it cannot be simultaneously connected byUSB and by Bluetooth®.

Jukebox (SSD)3 Only available for the model: Navi System Plus

Fig. 214 Manage Jukebox

The “jukebox” is located on the hard drive ofthe Infotainment system (SSD1)).

Compressed audio files (MP3 and WMA) andsome video files (Podcasts, AVIs, etc.) can be

1) Solid-State-Drive (SSD).214

Operating modes

imported from different data storage devicesto the jukebox and this used to play them.

The files will only be copied when the engineis running. Copying copy-protected CDs andDVDs is prohibited

Importing files● In Media mode, press the SETTINGS func-tion button and then select Manage jukebox .● Press the IMPORT function button.● Select the desired source from the Selectsource menu.

The data storage device is prepared. This op-eration may take a few seconds.

● Activate the checkboxes to the right of thefiles or folders to be imported.● If Select all is activated, all files and folderson the data storage device will be imported.● Press the IMPORT function button.

Depending on the selection, all files and fold-ers will be imported with the indicated nameto the Jukebox.

If no track information is available, the audiofiles will be placed in the following folders:

Audio data CD■ Album■ Unknown albums■ Track. mp31)

■ Artists■ Unknown artists■ Unknown albums■ Track. mp31 )

Functions and progress display during thecopying operationWhile copying, an animation is displayedalong with the progress percentage on theimport screen.

Audio data CD: It is not possible to copy andplay files at the same time.

● Press the Cancel function button to end theimport of the whole track that is currently be-ing imported.● To obtain information on the status of theimport, press the Information function button.● Press the BACK function button to closethe import screen with the progress informa-tion.● When the file import ends, a message willappear.

Deleting files● In Media mode, press the SETTINGS func-tion button and then select Manage jukebox .● Press the DELETE function button.● Activate the checkboxes to the right of thefiles or folders to be deleted.● If Select all is activated, all the files andfolders on the data storage device will be de-leted.● Press the DELETE function button. Thefiles and folders will be deleted according tothe selection made.● When the files have been deleted, a mes-sage will appear.● Press the BACK function button to closethe menu.

Opening stored audio and video files● Change to Jukebox (SSD) content.

When storing the tracks, they are stored un-der different categories and lists according tothe information available.

The tracks saved can be checked andopened from these lists according to differentcategories. »

1) The name and extension of the file are exam-ples.

215

Infotainment System

Jukebox● Playlist● Artist● Album● Music genre● Title● Video● Non-playable files (an unsupported file hasbeen imported).

Note● If the Infotainment system cancels acopying operation, check the storagespace on the internal hard drive and checkthe data storage device.● Due to copyright laws, before anychange in ownership of the Infotainmentsystem, all files stored on the jukebox mustbe deleted.● There are several possible reasons whyfiles may be shown as inactive (grey): filesthat cannot be imported (e.g. images), filesthat are already stored in the Jukebox orfiles that take up more space than availa-ble in the internal memory.

Connecting an external audiosource through WLAN*

3 Not available for model: Media SystemTouch/Colour

WLAN allows wireless connection between anexternal audio source (for example a smartphone) and the Infotainment system.

To use this connection, the device being con-nected must have an app compatible withthe UPnP (Universal Plug and Play) communi-cation protocol, allowing the app to providethe system with the available media content.

Conditions● Having a compatible (UPnP) app installedon the mobile device.● Having the Enable WLAN connection op-tion active, which can be found in the wirelessconnection configuration.● Pairing the mobile device to the Infotain-ment system using a password generated bythe system. The pairing must be done fromthe mobile device that you wish to connect tothe Infotainment system.

Starting the WLAN audio transfer● Lower the base volume on the Infotainmentsystem.● Start the UPnP app or the app for the play-back of the WLAN audio source.

● In the MEDIA main menu, press the SOURCEfunction button and select WLAN .● Please refer to the instructions on thescreen of the Infotainment system and on theWLAN audio source regarding the rest of theprocedure.

Controlling playbackThe extent to which the WLAN audio sourcecan be controlled via the Infotainment systemdepends on the connected WLAN audiosource and the application used.

Note● The Infotainment system does not pro-vide an internet connection, it only estab-lishes a wireless connection between themobile device and said system.● Via the WLAN, only the connection be-tween the device and the Infotainment sys-tem can be guaranteed, its operation de-pends on the application itself.

216

Operating modes

DVD video mode3 Only available for the model: Navi System Plus

Fig. 215 DVD main menu.

Fig. 216 DVD mode control menu.

Regional code of video DVDQuite often, the playback of DVD video islimited to certain regions (for example, to theUS and Canada) by so-called region “co-des”. These DVDs can only be played onunits that are coded for the same region.

The unit's DVD drive is configured to read theregional code for the region in which the vehi-cle was originally sold.

Starting the DVD mode● Insert a compatible DVD in the DVD drive.

The reading of DVD data may take a few sec-onds.

The DVD's “intro” (short initial sequence) isplayed. Next, the different DVD menus aredisplayed.

Controlling a DVD menu● Briefly touch the screen to activate thefunction buttons in the DVD mode main menu››› Fig. 215.


SOURCE Display and selection of the source.

DVDMENU

To display the control menu and return tothe main DVD screen ››› Fig. 216.

A Chapter display.

BDisplays play time duration and remainingplay time.


C

: Move the control menu window.

: Minimise the control menu window.

: Maximise the control menu window.

: Close the control menu.

DUse the arrow buttons to browse the DVDmenu. Confirm the selection by pressingOK .

E Press to open the DVD main menu.

/ To move to the next or previous chapter.

Playback stops. The function buttonchanges to .

Playback is resumed. The function but-ton changes to .

SET-TINGS

This menu contains the Video (DVD) set-tings.

Note● The visual appearance of the DVD filmmenus and the menu options which it offersare the responsibility of the DVD manufac-turer.● The difference in behaviour of some filmswhen using the same mode is the responsi-bility of the DVD manufacturer.● You may not be able to play video DVDswhich you have burned yourself. »

217

Infotainment System

● The Infotainment system screen only dis-plays the image when the vehicle is stop-ped. Whilst in motion, the screen discon-nects (the image), but the audio remainsactive.

Images

Fig. 217 Images main menu.

Using the Images menu, image files can beviewed (e.g. photos) individually or as a slide-show.

The image files must be stored on a compati-ble data storage device (e.g., a CD or an SDcard).

● Press the Infotainment button andthen select the Images context.● Press the SOURCE function button to selectthe source where the pictures in question arelocated.


SOURCE Viewing and selecting the source.

SELEC-TION Opens a list of image files.

The image viewed was obtained via GPSlocalisation and upon pressing this func-tion button, the navigator menu opens tostart a route to this destination.

/ Rotate the view of the image to the left orthe right.

Reset the view of the image.

To stop the playback of a slideshow. The function button changes to .

To continue the playback of a slideshow.The function button changes to .

/

To change to the PREVIOUS or NEXT im-age.

The same function can be performed bysliding your finger horizontally acrossthe screen.

SET-TINGS Open the Image settings menu.

Enlarging or reducing the viewTo enlarge or reduce the view of the imagedisplayed:

● Stretch or reduce the image on the screenusing 2 fingers.

Rotating the view/imageTo rotate an image, in addition to the buttonsprovided for this ( / ), you can also presson the screen (e.g. with your thumb) and,while continuing to press with your thumb,slide another finger (e.g. your index finger)around it like a compass either clockwise (torotate the image to the right) or anti-clock-wise (to turn the image to the left). This will ro-tate the image 90° with respect to its currentposition.

Requirements for viewing images

Image files Maximum resolu-tion

BMP 4MP

JPEG 4MP (Progressive Mode)

JPG 64MP

GIF 4MP

PNG 4MP

218

Operating modes

Navigation1)

Introduction


General informationUsing all the data available, the Infotainmentsystem calculates the optimum route to thedestination.

The destination is defined by entering an ad-dress or a point of interest, e.g. a petrol sta-tion or hotel. Traffic reports, if any, will also betaken into account in the route calculation(dynamic route guidance ››› page 227).

Spoken instructions and visual guidance onthe navigation unit and on the instrumentpanel will direct you to your destination.

CAUTIONThe navigation announcements playedmay be inaccurate (e.g. due to out-of-datenavigation data).

Instructions for navigation

When the Infotainment system is unable to re-ceive any data from GPS satellites (due to adense tree canopy, underground car park),navigation can still continue using the vehiclesensors.

Possible limitations in navigationIn areas that are not or are only partially digi-tised on the data storage device (e.g. insuffi-cient definition of one-way streets and roadcategories), the Infotainment system will stillattempt to provide route guidance.

Navigation area and updating navigationdataRoads and streets are subject to constantchange (e.g. new roads, changes to streetnames and building numbers). Therefore, ifthe navigation data is not updated, then er-rors or inaccuracies may occur during guid-ance.

SEAT recommends updating navigation dataon a regular basis. Up to date navigation datacan be downloaded from www.seat.com oracquired at a SEAT dealer.

Updating and using navigation da-ta from an SD card

3 Only available for the model: Navi System

The Infotainment system always requires thenavigation data that is currently valid for thisunit in order to allow all functions to be usedin full. Using an old version may lead to errorsduring navigation.

Updating navigation dataThe current navigation data can be downloa-ded in the internet at www.seat.com and stor-ed in a SD card compatible with the unit.

Suitable SD Cards can be acquired at SEATdealerships.

The procedure is described on the internet atwww.seat.com.

Using navigation data● Insert the memory card ››› page 212.● Do not remove the memory card while test-ing. Wait for the testing icon to disappear.

If the inserted memory card contains validnavigation data, the following message ap-pears: “The source contains a validnavigation database”. It is now possible tonavigate with the memory card data. When »

1) Valid for: Navi System and Navi System Plus.219

Infotainment System

the memory card is no longer needed by thehardware, it will be prepared for removal››› page 212.

Note● The inserted memory card must be pre-pared before it is ejected››› page 212.● Press the Infotainment button andthen Settings/System to open the Systemsettings menu.● Navigation is not possible without the SDcard.● Do not remove the memory card whilethe navigation data is in use. This coulddamage the memory card!● The navigation memory card may not beused as memory for other files. The info-tainment system will not recognise the filessaved.● SEAT recommends only using originalSEAT memory cards to use navigation data.The use of other memory cards could limitits operation.

Updating and installing navigationdata

3 Only available for the model: Navi System Plus

The Infotainment system is equipped with aninternal navigation data memory. The re-quired navigation data are already installedon the system.

The Infotainment system always requires thenavigation data that is currently valid for thisunit in order to allow all functions to be usedin full. Using an old version may lead to errorsduring navigation.

Updating navigation dataTo update navigation data visit our website:www.seat.com.

The navigation data must be installed afterdownloading. Navigation is not possible fromthe memory card.

Installing navigation dataThe installation process takes about 2 hours.

If the Infotainment system is switched off, theinstallation process is paused and will auto-matically resume when switched back on.

● Switch the ignition on.

● Insert the memory card containing the nav-igation data ››› page 212.● Press the Infotainment button andthen select the System context.● In the System settings menu, press theSystem information function button.● Press Update software to import the storednavigation data.● Follow the instructions displayed on thescreen.

Once installed, the memory card can be re-moved. The memory card must be preparedfor removal ››› page 212.

CAUTIONDo not remove the memory card while thenavigation data is being installed. Thememory card may be irreparably dam-aged!

Note● The navigation memory card may not beused as memory storage for other files. TheInfotainment system will not recognise thefiles saved on it.● SEAT recommends a CLASS 101) memorycard for the use of navigation data. The useof other memory cards could limit its oper-ation.

1) The speed class of an SD card.220

Operating modes

Navigation main menu

Fig. 219 Navigation main menu

The Navigation main menu allows you to se-lect a new destination, call up a previouslyused or stored destination and search forpoints of interest.

Opening the main Navigation menu● Press the Infotainment system button to open the last menu that was open in navi-gation.

Function buttons and messages on themain Navigation menu


A The split screen is displayed ››› page 226.

B Messages and function buttons on the mapdisplay ››› page 226.


NEW DESTINATION : To enter a new destination››› page 221.

ROUTE : During route guidance ››› page 223.

MY DESTS. : To activate or manage stored destina-tions ››› page 223.

POI : Search for points of interest (car parks, fuel sta-tions and restaurants) within a particular search area››› page 225.

VIEW : To modify or activate or deactivate the splitscreen and show POI ››› Fig. 219 A ››› page 225.

SETTINGS : Open the Navigation Settingsmenu.

New destination (enter destina-tion)

Fig. 220 Search screen.

● In the Navigation main menu, press theNew destination function button.● Press the Options function button and se-lect the required type of destination (Search,Address, POI on the route or On map).● Using voice control*, if you say Town, streetand number, without pauses, and then the in-struction “Start Route Guidance” a route tothe given destination will start.

SearchSearch for addresses and Points of Interestusing the keypad to enter them ››› Fig. 220.

For cities, post codes and points of interest,the full details must be entered. You can alsosearch for points of interest by names or cat-egories. When necessary, enter the name ofthe city to refine the search.

››› Fig. 220

A Press to open the cursor buttons (, ),which allow you to move within the text.

AddressAfter entering a country and a town, you canstart navigating towards the centre of the se-lected town.

When narrowing down the destination ad-dress, please note that every entry restrictsthe available range of subsequent selections.For instance, if the street you are looking for is »

221

Infotainment System

not in the postcode area you have selectedin a previous window, you will not be able tofind the street at the street selection stage.


Country : To select the desired country.

City : To enter the desired city or postcode.

Street : To enter the desired street name.

House number : To enter the desired house number.

Junction : To select the desired intersection.

Last destinations : Open the My destinationsmenu ››› page 223.

Start : Start route guidance to the selected address.

On the map● Select the destination on the map or enterit using GPS coordinates and confirm withOK .


Save : To save the selected point of interest in thedestination memory ››› page 223.

Edit : To edit a destination or to enter another desti-nation.

Route options : To adjust route options, see Naviga-tion Settings > Route options.

Start : Starts guided navigation to the selected pointof interest.

After starting route guidance

Fig. 221 Route calculation.

After starting route guidance, the route to thefirst destination will be calculated.

The calculation will be performed in accord-ance with the data selected in the Routeoptions menu.

After starting route guidance, three alterna-tive routes will be suggested depending onthe selected setup ››› Fig. 221. These 3 routescorrespond to the selectable route options:Economical, Fast and Short.

Route criteria: Meaning

Blue route: Economical route, the route is calculatedby taking into consideration economic factors.

Red route: Fastest route to the destination, even if itis necessary to make a deviation.

Route criteria: Meaning

Orange route: Shortest route to the destination,even if it results in longer travelling time. The routemay have unconventional sections such as secon-dary roads.

● Select the desired route by pressing it.

Once the route has been calculated, the sys-tem gives the first navigation announcement.Up to 3 navigation announcements are givenbefore a turn.

● Press the adjustment knob ››› Fig. 189 12 tolisten to the last audible navigation instruc-tion.

A navigation announcement informs youwhen you have reached your “destination”.

A navigation announcement informing youthat you have reached the “destination area”is given if the exact destination cannot bereached because it is located in a non-digi-tised area.

During dynamic route guidance, you re-ceive information about reported traffic con-gestion on the route. An additional navigationannouncement is given if the route is recalcu-lated due to traffic congestion.

During a navigation announcement, you canchange its volume using the button ››› Fig. 189 10 .

222

Operating modes

For other adjustments to the navigation rec-ommendations, select Navigation > Set-tings > Navigation announcementssettings.

Note● If you miss a turning during route guid-ance and are currently unable to turn back,keep on driving until the navigation systemoffers a new route.● The quality of the navigation recommen-dations given by the Infotainment systemdepends on the navigation data availableand any reported traffic problems.

Route

In the Navigation main menu, press the Routefunction button.

The Route function button is only displayedwith route guidance activated.


Stop route guidance : Aborts current route guidance.

Enter destination : To enter a new destination or a newstopover ››› page 221.

Congestion ahead : To exclude a section (of 0.2 to 10km in length) from the current route, e.g. to avoidcongestion. To cancel the exclusion, press the Routefunction button and then Cancel congestion .


Change route a): The map of the calculated route ap-pears and by holding a finger on the route and drag-ging the finger across said map, the route is changedto the road(s) that you want and the new route is thenrecalculated.

Route details : View route information for current route.

a) Only available for the model: Navi System Plus

My destinations (destination mem-ory)

The stored destinations can be selected fromthe My destinations menu.

● Press the My dests. function button in themain Navigation menu.● Select the desired function button.Store position , Routes , Destinations ,Last destinations or Home address .

Store position● By pressing the Store position function but-ton, the vehicle's current position is stored asa Flagged destination in the destinationmemory.● Mark the Flagged destination in thedestination memory.● Press the Store function button.

The name can be changed in the followinginput window. Press the function button tostore the destination.

RoutesIn the Route mode, you can define variousdestinations (final destination and stopovers).

The starting point of a route is always thecurrent vehicle position determined by the In-fotainment system. The destination is theend point of a route. Stopover destinationsare driven to before the destination.

● In the Navigation main menu, press theMy Dests. function button.● Press the Routes function button. Theroutes stored previously will appear.

If you have not stored any routes or want tocreate a new route, press the New route func-tion button and then follow the instructions asfor a new destination, before pressing Store .

Pressing on a stored route brings up the fol-lowing function buttons:


Delete : To delete a stored route.

Edit : To edit and store a route.

Start : To start route guidance. »

223

Infotainment System

Function buttons and indications in the Newroute or Edit route menu

Function button or message: function or meaning

Stopover.

Destination.

...Estimated time of arrival at destina-tion.

... Calculated distance to destination.

... Travelling time.

... Distance to the next stopover.

Press on the destination to display the functionbuttons.

Delete destination.

To start guidance direct to the selec-ted destination. Destinations thatcome before the selected destinationare ignored.

To open the detailed view of the desti-nation in question.

Available function buttons.

New dest. To add a new destination to the tour.

Destina-tions

To add a new destination from Mydestinations to the tour.

Storing To store the created tour in the tourmemory.

Start To start route guidance.

Calculate To update calculated distance and es-timated arrival time.a)

Stop To stop route guidance to the activedestination.b)

To move a stopover or a destination toanother position on the list. Press anddrag to move the destination.

a) This function button is only displayed with routeguidance activated and when a destination has beenadded to the tour.b) This function button is only displayed with routeguidance activated.

Last destinationsView of destinations for which a route has al-ready been started.

My destinations● Press the Options function button and se-lect the desired function button.


Destination memory : View of destinations stored man-ually and from imported vCards ››› page 228, Im-porting vCards (electronic business cards).

Favourites : View of destinations stored as favourites.

Contacts : View of entries in the phonebook that havea stored address (postal address).

Home addressOnly one address or position can be storedas the home address at any one time. Thestored home address can be edited or over-written.

If a home address has already been stored,route guidance will be started to the storedhome address.

If a home address has not yet been stored, anaddress can be assigned as the home ad-dress.

Assigning the home address for the first time:

Position : Press to store the vehicle's current positionas the home address.

Address : Press to enter the home address manually.

Editing the home address:

The home address can be edited in the Naviga-tion settings > Manage memory menu.

224

Operating modes

Points of interest (POI)

Fig. 222 Points of interest on the map.

The points of interest saved in the navigationdata memory are divided into different pointof interest categories. Each point of interestcategory is assigned a symbol for display onthe map.

If a database of points of interest has beenimported into the Infotainment system,››› page 228, Importing Personal POI thecategory Personal POI is also shown.

In the Map settings menu, the categories ofpoints of interest to display on the map canbe configured. Up to 10 categories of pointsof interest can be selected.

Selecting a point of interest on the map


1There are several points of interest in the area.Press this symbol to open a list of points of in-terest.

2The only point of interest in this zone. Press thesymbol to open the detailed view of the point ofinterest.

Quick POI searchIn the Navigation main menu, press the POIfunction button and the three main catego-ries will appear. Alternatively, enter the nameof the point of interest to be searched usingthe new destination keypad, or pressSearch nearby on the map ››› table on

page 226.

View

In the Navigation main menu, press the Viewfunction button.


2D Map display in two dimensions (con-ventional).


3D

Map display in three dimensions (bird'seye view).

Buildings are also displayed in threedimensions. The places of interest andwell-known buildings are shown in de-tail and in colour.

a) To display the destination on the map.

a) To display the route on the map.

Auto /Day / Night

To change between day and night for-mat.

Split screen Press to display the split screen››› page 226.

POI Display points of interest on the map.

a) This function button is only displayed with routeguidance activated.

225

Infotainment System

Split screen

Fig. 223 Split screen displayed.

The split screen ››› Fig. 223 A may displayany of the information described below:

● Press on the name of the split screen to se-lect a display option.


Audio : Indicates the selected audio source.

Compass : Displays a compass with the current trav-elling direction and indicates the current position ofthe vehicle (street name).

Manoeuvre : Displays a list of the next manoeuvres,POIs or TMCs on the route and pressing them bringsup additional information

Most frequent routes a): Information on the user's mostfrequent routes.


Position : current vehicle position in coordinates andGPS status (satellite reception).

a) This function button is only shown when route guid-ance is not active or when predictive route guidanceis active.

Press the function button to close the splitscreen.

At any moment during navigation, pressinginside the map will make a pop-up menu ap-pear with the following functions:


Street name or coordinates : shows the details of thepoint selected on the map.

Only when you press on an icon on the map:

POI : name of the point of interest (when only oneappears on the map).

Group of POIs : more points of interest (when youpress on the map on various POIs grouped to-gether).

Favourite : name of the favourite.

Home : Home address.

Start route guidance : starts guidance directly.

Add stopover destination : only when you have an ac-tive route.

Search nearby : enters in the search menu, but onlyfor the area around the point selected on the map.


Demo mode start (only when demo mode is active)

Map display

Fig. 224 Messages and function buttons onthe map display.

Function buttons and messages on themap display.To activate function buttons and , pressfunction button .


Current altitude indicator.

To centre the vehicle position on the map.

226

Operating modes


To centre the destination on the map. Thisfunction button is only displayed if eitherDisplay destination on map or Displayroute on the map is selected››› page 225.

To change the orientation of the map(north-facing or direction of travel). Thisfunction is only available in 2D mode.

View map scale. Turn the setup button ormove your fingers together/apart on thetouchscreen to change the scale of themap.

To select automatic scaling. If the func-tion is active, the symbol is displayed inblue.

Briefly zooms in on the map. After a fewseconds, it automatically returns to thelast selected scale.

It can mute or repeat the last announce-ment, or can change the announcementvolume.

Road signs: Depending on the vehicle's equip-ment, the road signs stored in the navigation data aredisplayed. Select Navigation > Settings >Map > Show road signs.

Traffic reports and dynamic routeguidance to the destination (TRAF-FIC)

Fig. 225 Traffic reports

The Infotainment system constantly receivestraffic reports (TMC/TMCpro) in the back-ground, provided a TMC traffic news stationcan be received at the current location. Thestation being listened to does not have to bethe traffic news station.

List of available traffic reports● Press the Infotainment ››› Fig. 189 9button and then select the Traffic context.

Dynamic route guidanceIn order for dynamic route guidance to func-tion, Dynamic route must be activated in theroute options.

If during route guidance a traffic report is re-ceived that affects the route being travelled,an alternative route will be searched for if theInfotainment system calculates that time canbe saved.

Traffic reports on map (selection)

Symbol: Meaning

: Slow traffic

: Traffic jam

: Accident

: Slippery road surface (ice or snow)

: Slippery road surface

: Danger

: Road works

: Strong wind

: Road closed to traffic

During route guidance, traffic congestion thatdoes not affect the route calculated is dis-played in grey.

227

Infotainment System

Predictive navigation

Fig. 226 Predictive navigation

When you activate Predictive navigation, thesystem detects and stores in the backgroundroutes that are frequently followed, withoutthem being active destination routes. Thisfunction has no navigation announcementsunless the user requires them, getting themby pressing the adjustment knob››› Fig. 189 12 .

● On the main screen of the Navigation menu,in the pop-up window, press theFrequent routes button. To display frequently

followed routes press the Show on map button››› Fig. 226.

Importing vCards (electronic busi-ness cards)

Importing vCards to the destination mem-ory● Insert the data storage device with the stor-ed vCards or connect it to the Infotainmentsystem ››› page 209.● Press the SETTINGS function button in themain Navigation menu.● In the Navigation settings menu, pressthe Import destinations function button.● Select the data carrier with the vCardssaved in the list.● Press Import all vCards from this folder .● Confirm the import notice with the OKfunction button.

The saved vCards will now be in the destina-tion memory ››› page 223 and may be usedfor navigation.

NoteOnly one address per vCard can be impor-ted. In the event any vCards have multipleaddresses, only the main address will beimported.

Importing Personal POI

Importing the Personal POI to a points ofinterest destination memory● Insert the data storage device with the stor-ed Personal POI or connect it to the Infotain-ment system ››› page 209.● Press the Infotainment button and thenselect Settings.● In the Settings menu, press theManage memory function button.● Press Update my POIs and then pressUpdate and Next to import the Personal

POIs.● Confirm the import notification with the OKfunction button.

The stored Personal POI are now in the pointsof interest destination memory ››› page 225and can be used for navigation purposes.

The stored Personal POI can be deleted inthe Navigation Settings menu.

228

Operating modes

Navigation with images

Fig. 227 Images main menu.

Selecting an image and starting routeguidanceBear in mind the requirements and formats ofthe compatible images.

● Insert the data storage device with the stor-ed images or connect it to the Infotainmentsystem.● Press the Infotainment button andthen select the Images context.● Press the SOURCE ››› Fig. 227 function but-ton and select the data storage device wherethe images are stored.● Select the desired image.

● If the image displayed was taken using GPSlocalisation, the function button will appear.Press to start guidance to a destination.

Route guidance in Demo mode

If demo mode is activated in the NavigationSettings menu, an additional pop-up win-dow opens when you start route guidance.

● Pressing the Demo mode function buttonstarts a “virtual route guidance” to the desti-nation you have entered.● If you press the Normal function button, a“real route guidance” starts.

Navigation in Offroadmode*1)

Introduction

Offroad* navigation is a function for offroaddriving that provides directions in “non-digi-tised areas” at low speeds.

Non-digitised areas are areas about whichthe system does not have information for thestreets or terrain. It does not detect streets,

buildings or natural limits such as mountainsor rivers, although they may be shown on themap.

Offroad* navigation is not suitable for drivingon conventional roads as it does not detectone-way streets, motorway entries or similar.

Offroad Navigation Menu

Fig. 228 Offroad Navigation Menu start

Press the SETTINGS function button in themain Navigation menu.

● In the menu, press the Waypoint modefunction button.● The Offroad Navigation menu opens››› Fig. 228. »

1) Only available for the model: Navi System Plus229

Infotainment System

Function buttons in the Offroad Navigationmenu


RECORD : Initiates the plotting of an Offroad tour.

MEMORY : Opens a list allowing the selection of astored Offroad tour.

EXIT : Ends Offroad navigation.

Recording an Offroad tour

Fig. 229 Recording an Offroad tour

An Offroad tour is formed by a series of stor-ed waypoints.

Starting recording● In the Offroad Navigation menu, in the pop-up window press the RECORD pop-up button.● In the pop-up window, the user is able toplot the tour with a given destination or start

plotting the route without giving a final desti-nation.● Starts plotting the route.

The offroad markers can be recorded by in-dicating a manual waypoint.

● In the Offroad Navigation menu, press theADD WAYPOINT function button. The tour way-

points defined manually are shown on themap by a marker.

Ending recording● Press the STOP RECORDING function buttonin the main Offroad Navigation menu.

Managing stored Offroad tours

Fig. 230 Offroad Navigation menu, storedtours

● Press the MEMORY function button in theOffroad Navigation menu.

● A list of stored Offroad tours opens, if thereare any.

When a tour is selected, the following iconswill appear ››› Fig. 230:

Export the tour to an SD card.Edit the name of the tour.Delete the tour.Load tour


IMPORT : allows the import of an Offroad route in“.GPX” format.

Loading an Offroad tourWhen the Offroad tour is selected, press Play and the selected tour will be loaded ontothe Navigation system.

230

Operating modes

Creating an Offroad tour

Fig. 231 Offroad route guidance mode

Start route guidance● Loads the stored Offroad tour.● Starting off in a stored route is not detectedby the system automatically.

Setup


Invert : Reverses the direction of the stored Offroadtour.

Next point : Starts the Offroad tour from the nearestpoint.

Start : Starts the complete Offroad tour.

When route guidance starts, the systemswitches to the map view.

Stopping route guidance● Press the Options button on the screen andthen press Stop .

End waypoint navigation● Press the EXIT function button in the Off-road Navigation menu.

WARNINGTerrain features are disregarded duringroute guidance Drive slowly and followingthe instructions in order to perform the ma-noeuvre as far as possible!● The general direction of travel is indica-ted straight ahead by direction arrows inthe Infotainment System pop-up window››› Fig. 231 A .

NoteIf an Offroad tour is being recorded, this isautomatically stored if Offroad navigationis discontinued.

Vehicle Menu

Introduction to using the Vehiclemenu

By pressing button of the infotainmentsystem you will access its main menu with thefollowing options:

● VIEW● MINIPLAYER, in the top right corner (Radioor Media function if the HDC descent con-trol* is not active).● PREVIOUS-NEXT (to change screen)● SETTINGS ››› page 36

With the function button VIEW you can ac-cess the following information:

Sport*If the corresponding equipment is available,the information that appears in the Sport op-tion is the following:

Instantaneous power expressed in kWG forcesTurbo pressure, expressed in bar (“bar”),kilopascals (“kPa”) or in pounds persquare inch (“psi”). Press the Setup but-ton to change the units of pressure.Coolant temperatureOil temperature »

1.2.3.

4.5.

231

Infotainment System

Only 3 of these items of information can bedisplayed at the same time, but the userchooses which to display, and in what order,by moving the finger vertically over the dials.

Press the Next button to display the Laptimer menu1).

Offroad*If the corresponding equipment is available,the information that appears is the following:

Compass.Altimeter: altitude above sea level.Turning angle of steered wheels.Coolant temperature.Lubricating oil temperature

Only the altimeter and 2 more of these itemsof information can be displayed at the sametime, but the user chooses which to display,and in what order, by moving their finger ver-tically over the dials.

ConsumersBy pressing the CONSUMERS button, informa-tion on the status of the vehicle's main con-

1.2.3.4.5.

sumption devices is obtained. It is shown via aconsumption indicator bar in l/h (gal/h)2).

Driving dataThe onboard computer is equipped with 3memories that work automatically. In thesememories you can see the distance travelled,average speed, time passed, average con-sumption and autonomy of the vehicle.

Ecotrainer*If the corresponding equipment is available,the ECOTRAINER will provide information ondriving style. The information on driving styleis only evaluated and displayed when movingforward.

Vehicle statusPress the Vehicle status button to access infor-mation on the Vehicle status messagesand Start-Stop system. The Vehicle statusmessages are displayed, in addition to beingspecified on the corresponding button.

Telephone

General information


The Telephone functions described belowcan be used through the Infotainment systemif there is a mobile telephone connected to itvia Bluetooth® ››› page 234.

In order for the mobile telephone to be ableto connect to the Infotainment system the tel-ephone must be equipped with Bluetooth®.

If there is no mobile telephone connected tothe Infotainment system, the telephone man-agement system will not be available.

The instructions shown on the screen for thetelephone menus will depend on the mobiletelephone used. There may be variations.

1) This lap timer is independent of the one thatappears on the instrument panel.2) In the case of Gas (CNG) vehicles, the units arein kg/h.

232

Operating modes

Only use compatible Bluetooth® devices. Forfurther information on compatible Bluetooth®

products, ask your nearest SEAT dealer orcheck on the internet.

Use the instruction manual of the mobile tele-phone and of any accessories.

If you detect any operating issues betweenyour mobile telephone and the Infotainmentsystem, restart your mobile by switching it offand on again.

Some functions and setup can only be per-formed when the vehicle is stopped and arenot available on all mobile telephones.

WARNINGGeneral, mandatory, legal and country-specific instructions and laws for the use ofmobile phones inside the vehicle must al-ways be considered.

WARNINGSpeaking by telephone and using the mo-bile telephone management system whilstdriving can distract you from the road andcause an accident.● Always drive carefully and responsibly.● Select volume settings that allow you toeasily hear signals from outside the vehicleat all times (e.g. emergency services sirensand horns).

● In areas of little or no coverage or, insome cases, in a tunnel, garage or under-pass, your call may be cut off and you maynot be able to make even emergency calls.

WARNINGIf a mobile telephone is not secured or is in-correctly secured in the vehicle, it couldmove around the passenger compartmentin the event of a sudden driving manoeuvreor emergency stop, resulting in injury.● While the vehicle is in motion, always se-cure the mobile telephone properly outsidethe airbag deployment zone.

WARNINGMobile telephones may interfere with andalter the correct operation of pacemakersif they are carried directly over them.● Maintain a minimum distance of at least20 centimetres between the aerials of themobile telephone and the pacemaker.● Do not carry your switched-on mobiletelephone in your breast pocket directlyover the pacemaker.● If you suspect interference, switch off themobile telephone immediately.

CAUTIONHigh speeds, poor weather or road condi-tions and the quality of reception can all

affect the audio quality of a telephone con-versation in the vehicle.

Note● Restrictions on the use of devices usingBluetooth® technology may apply in somecountries. For further information, contactthe local authorities.● If you wish to connect a device to the tel-ephone management system via Blue-tooth® technology, consult the safetywarnings in its instruction manual. Only usecompatible Bluetooth® devices.

Places with special regulations

Switch off the mobile telephone and the mo-bile’s Bluetooth® function in places with a riskof explosion. In the majority of cases, theseplaces are signposted, but not always clearly››› in General information on page 233.They include, for example:

● the vicinity of chemical pipelines and tanks● The lower decks of boats and ferries.● In the proximity of vehicles that run on liquidgas (such as propane or butane).● places where the air is laden with chemi-cals or particles such as flour, dust or metalpowder. »

233

Infotainment System

● all other places where the vehicle enginemust be switched off.

WARNINGSwitch off the mobile phone in areas with arisk of explosion! The mobile telephone canautomatically connect to the mobile tele-phone network again if it loses the Blue-tooth® connection to the telephone man-agement system.

CAUTIONIn areas where special regulations apply orthe use of mobile telephones is prohibited,both the telephone and the telephonemanagement system must be switched off.The radiation produced by the mobile tele-phone when switched on may interfere withsensitive technical and medical equipment,possibly resulting in a malfunction or dam-age to the equipment.

Bluetooth®

Bluetooth® technology allows a mobile tele-phone to be connected to your vehicle's tele-phone management system. In order to usethe telephone management system with a

mobile telephone with Bluetooth® technolo-gy, it is first necessary to pair them.

Some Bluetooth® mobile telephones detectand automatically connect when turning onthe ignition if a connection has been previ-ously established. For this to take place thetelephone must be switched on and its Blue-tooth® function activated, and there must beno active Bluetooth® connection with otherdevices.

Bluetooth® connections are free.

Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Blue-tooth® SIG, Inc.

Bluetooth profiles®

When a mobile phone is connected to the tel-ephone management system, a data ex-change takes place via one of the Bluetooth®

profiles.

● Hands-Free Profile (HFP): When connect-ing a mobile telephone to the phone manag-er through the HFP the calls can be managedvia the Infotainment system.● Audio profile (A2DP): This profile makes iteasier to transmit audio to the infotainmentsystem with stereo quality. This function mayrequire connecting additional profiles formanaging and controlling audio playback.

● Phone book access profile (PBAP):Serves to download phone book contactsfrom the mobile telephone to the Infotainmentsystem.● Message profile (MAP):1) Serves thedownload and synchronise short messages(SMS) of the mobile telephone to the Infotain-ment system.

NoteTo prevent them from being heard throughthe speakers, the button and mobile tele-phone alert tones must be disconnected.Where necessary, disconnect the headsetfrom the mobile telephone you wish to con-nect to the system.

Pairing and connecting a mobiletelephone to the Infotainment sys-tem

In order to manage a mobile telephone viathe Infotainment system, it is necessary topair both devices once.

For your safety, we recommend you make thelink when the vehicle is stationary. In somecountries it is not possible to perform the pair-ing with the vehicle running.

1) Not available for the Media System Touch/Col-our model.

234

Operating modes

ConditionsYou must guarantee the following setup in themobile phone and the Infotainment system:

● The ignition must be switched on.● The Bluetooth® function of the mobile tel-ephone and the Infotainment system must beactive as well as visibility.● The keypad lock on the mobile telephonemust be deactivated.

Follow instructions in the manual for the mo-bile telephone.

During the pairing process, it is necessary toenter data via the mobile telephone's keypad.

Pairing a mobile telephone● Make sure the mobile device's Bluetooth®

function is activated and visible.● Press the infotainment button.● Press the Find telephone > Results functionbutton.

OR:

● Press the infotainment button.● Press the function button Setup >Select mobile phone > Results .

OR:

● Press the infotainment button.

● Press the Settings > Bluetooth > Find devices> Results button.

The name of the Bluetooth® function of yourInfotainment system will be displayed on themain Telephone screen and you can edit thisname via the Bluetooth settings menu

The search process can take up to 1 minute.On the screen, the system will dynamicallyupdate the names of the Bluetooth® devicesfound.

As soon as the search is completed, thenames of the Bluetooth® devices found aredisplayed on-screen.

● Select the Bluetooth® device you want toconnect on the infotainment system. In cer-tain circumstances, it is possible that to finishthe connection between the two devices, youmust enter additional data in the mobile tele-phone and Infotainment system.● Use your mobile telephone to enter andconfirm your PIN code, as indicated in the dis-play of the infotainment system.● If more Bluetooth® profile pairing requestsare received on the mobile telephone, makesure to reply to them.

OR:

● Compare the PIN code shown on the dis-play of the Infotainment system with thatshown on the mobile telephone. If theymatch, confirm on both devices.

When the pairing has been finalized correct-ly, the Telephone main menu will appear. Thephone book, call list and SMS messages stor-ed in the mobile phone will be loaded oncethe requests have been accepted in the mo-bile phone. After downloading, the data willbe available on the Infotainment system.

Pairing and connection of mobile tele-phonesYou can pair up to 20 mobile telephones tothe Infotainment system, but the number of si-multaneous connections varies:

● Media System Touch / Colour: a phoneconnected to the hands-free profile and thesame or a different device connected to theBluetooth® audio profile.● Media System Plus / Navi System: two mo-bile phones simultaneously connected to thehands-free profile and one of them is alsoconnected Bluetooth® audio profile.● Navi System Plus: two mobile phones simul-taneously connected to the hands-free pro-file and one of them or a third one connectedto the Bluetooth® audio profile.

When the Infotainment system is switched on,it automatically connects to the last connec-ted mobile telephone. If it is not possible toconnect to this mobile telephone, the tele-phone management system will try to auto-matically connect to the next mobile tele-phone on the list of paired devices. »

235

Infotainment System

The maximum range of the Bluetooth® con-nection is approx. 10 meters. The activeBluetooth® connection disconnects if this dis-tance is exceeded. The connection is auto-matically re-established as soon as the de-vice is once again within Bluetooth® range.

WARNINGDo not perform the pairing and connectionprocess while driving. This may cause anaccident!

Note● It may be necessary to confirm the phonebook data and SMS transfer request on themobile telephone.● Check that there are no requests pend-ing acceptance in your mobile phone. Ifthere are, this could block some of thefunctions in the Telephone menu.

Telephone main menu

Fig. 233 Telephone main menu (view of the 8"screen).

Assign a user profileThe data from the phonebook, the call listsand the stored speed dial buttons are as-signed to a user profile and remain stored onthe telephone management system. This in-formation will be available every time the mo-bile telephone is connected to the telephonemanagement system.

After the first connection, it will take a few mi-nutes for the data from the phonebook of thelinked mobile phone to be available in the In-fotainment system. The next time that themobile telephone is connected (e.g. on thenext journey) the phonebook is updated au-tomatically.

If any entries in the mobile phonebook havebeen modified while connected, a manualupdate of the phonebook data can be initi-

ated from the User profile settingsmenu.

Telephone management can store a maxi-mum of 4 user profiles for mobile telephones.If you wish to link/connect another mobilephone, the oldest user profile will automati-cally be replaced.

Telephone management system functionbuttons● Press the infotainment button to openthe Phone main menu.


1Name of connected mobile telephone.Press the icon to the left to connect orpair with another mobile telephone.

2Speed dial buttons, to which telephonenumbers from the phonebook may beassigned respectively.

3

To change to another telephone con-nected to the hands-free profile. Thisbutton will only be visible when thereare two telephones connected ashands-free. The active user profile cor-responds to the telephone appearingon the screen.

DIALNUMBER

To open the number pad and enter atelephone number ››› page 237.

CONTACTS To open the phonebook of the connec-ted mobile telephone.

236

Operating modes


SMSa) To open the menu for SMS messages.

CALLS To open call lists of the connected mo-bile telephone ››› page 238.

SETTINGS To open the Telephone settingsmenu.

a) Not available for the Media System Touch/Colourmodel.

Display and symbols of the tele-phone management system

Fig. 234 Active call.

Display: Meaning ››› Fig. 234

AName of the mobile network operator (pro-vider) to which the mobile telephone is con-nected.

Display: Meaning ››› Fig. 234

B

View of stored telephone number or name. Ifthe name stored in the phonebook has anassigned photo, it can be displayed: selectTelephone > Settings > Userprofile > Show pictures forcontacts*.

Press to accept a call.

Press to end a call.

OR: Press to reject an incoming call.

Press to mute or to reactivate the ring toneduring an incoming call.

Press to mute the microphone during an ac-tive call and to reactivate it.

This button keeps the call active. While thecall is on hold the listener will not hear theconversation. To reactivate it, press the callaccept button . To reject it, press the rejectbutton .

Press to add a participant to the active call.

Charge status of a mobile telephone con-nected via “Hands-free profile” (HFP) Blue-tooth®.

Strength of coverage signal received by themobile telephone.

Enter telephone number menu

Fig. 235 Enter telephone number menu.

Open the Enter telephone number menuPress the DIAL NUMBER function button fromthe PHONE main menu.

Possible functions

Enter telephonenumber

Entering a phone number withthe keypad.

Press the function button tomake a call.

Select a con-tact from thelist

Enter the first letters of the con-tact to find using the keypad.The available entries appear inthe phonebook.

Select the desired contact fromthe phonebook to make the call. »

237

Infotainment System

Possible functions

Enter the coun-try code

To enter a country code, insteadof the first two digits (interna-tional access code e.g. “00”)you can enter the character “+”.

Press the function button 0 forapprox. 2 seconds to add the +.

Assistance call

Press the function button to ob-tain help in the event of break-down. For this the network ofSEAT dealerships is available toyou with their Mobile Service.

Information call

Press the function button to ob-tain information on the SEATbrand and the additional serv-ices contracted related to trafficand travel.

Call mailbox

Press the Voicemail functionbutton to make the call.

OR: Press the function buttonfor about 2 seconds to make acall.

If the number for the mailbox hasnot yet been stored, enter it andconfirm with OK .

Note● Breakdown service and information callscan incur an additional cost on your tele-phone bill.● The Roadside Assistance and Informationservices might not work properly, for exam-

ple, if the vehicle and the operator of theconnected mobile telephone are in differ-ent countries. If you are not able to usethese services contact an authorised SEATworkshop.

Call Menu (call lists)

Possible displays in the Calls menu

Display: Meaning

Missed calls : Displays the numbers of missed

and unanswered calls.

Dialled numbers : Indicates the numbers dial-led on the mobile telephone and on the Info-tainment system telephone managementsystem.

Received calls : Indicates the numbers of thecalls received on the mobile telephone andon the Infotainment system telephone man-agement system.

NoteThe availability of the call lists will dependon the mobile phone used.

238

Multimedia

MultimediaUSB/AUX-INPort

Fig. 236 Centre console: USB/AUX-IN input.

Fig. 237 Centre console, rear section: USBconnectors.

Depending on the special characteristics andthe country, the vehicle may have aUSB/AUX-IN port.

The USB/AUX-IN port can be found in thestorage compartment area of the centreconsole ››› Fig. 236.

The operating description is located in››› page 209.

Depending on the equipment and the coun-try, the vehicle may also have USB connec-tions exclusively for charging or as a powersocket.

These USB ports are located at the rear ofthe console, between the front seats››› Fig. 237.

Connectivity Box* / WirelessCharger*


Fig. 239 Centre console: slot for mobile phoneconnection.

The Connectivity Box includes different func-tions that will help to use your mobile device.

They are the “Wireless Charger” and the“Mobile Signal Amplifier”.

The Wireless Charger only features the“Wireless Charger” function.

“Wireless Charger”The “Wireless Charger” allows mobile devi-ces with Qi1) technology to be charged with-out a cable.

To charge your mobile phone wirelessly:

● Place your mobile device with Qi technolo-gy1) in the middle of the pad with the screenfacing up ››› Fig. 239. »

1) Qi technology allows you to charge your mo-bile phone wirelessly.

239

Infotainment System

When you do so, make sure there are no ob-jects between the pad and the mobile phone.

The mobile phone will start charging auto-matically. For further information aboutwhether your mobile device uses Qi technol-ogy, please check your mobile phone's usermanual or visit the SEAT website.

“Mobile Signal Amplifier”The “Mobile Signal Amplifier” allows you toreduce the radiation in your vehicle and enjoybetter reception.

For safety reasons, it is recommended thatyou pair the radio and the mobile device us-ing Bluetooth® and place the mobile phoneon the Connectivity Box pad, so as to havebetter reception without having to handle themobile phone.

To establish a connection with the vehicle'sexternal aerial:

● Place your mobile device in the middle ofthe pad with the screen facing up ››› Fig. 239.

When you do so, make sure there are no ob-jects between the pad and the mobile phone.

Your mobile phone will automatically beready to make use of the external aerial.

WARNINGThe mobile phone may heat up due to thewireless charging. Think about the temper-

ature of your device before you pick it up,and take care when removing it.

Note● Your mobile device must support the Qiwireless inductive charging interfacestandard for proper operation.● If your mobile phone has a cover or a pro-tective casing, this may affect the Connec-tivity Box functions.● There must be no metallic objects be-tween the pad and the mobile device thatmight affect the wireless charging or theconnection with the external aerial.● The charging time and the temperaturevary in accordance with the device used.● To avoid malfunction, ensure that the mo-bile phone is correctly placed on the pad.● The maximum charging capacity is 5 W.● Qi technology does not allow you tocharge more than one mobile device simul-taneously.● No improvement in the transmission qual-ity can be guaranteed if there is more thanone mobile phone on the pad.● You are advised to keep the engine run-ning to guarantee proper wireless chargingof your device.● When a telephone with Qi technology isconnected by USB, the charging will beperformed through the medium specifiedby each mobile device manufacturer.

240

Start and driving

Driving

Start and driving

Starting and stopping theengine

Switching the ignition on and start-ing the engine with the key

Fig. 240 Ignition key positions.


Diesel engines can take a few seconds longerthan usual to start on cold days. Thereforethe clutch pedal (manual gearbox) or thebrake pedal (automatic gearbox) must re-main pressed until the engine starts up. Dur-

ing preheating, the warning lamp remainslit.

The preheating time depends on the coolantand exterior temperatures. With the engine atoperating temperature, or at outside temper-atures above +8°C, the warning lamp willlight up for about one second. This meansthat the engine starts immediately.

If the engine does not immediately start up,interrupt the starting process and try againafter 30 seconds. To start the engine again,return the key to position 1 .

Start-Stop system*If the vehicle is stopped and the Start-Stopsystem* switches off the engine, the ignitionremains switched on.

Automatic transmission: before leaving thevehicle, make sure that the ignition is switch-ed off and the selector lever is in position P.

Driver messages on the instrument paneldisplay

Press the clutchThis message appears on vehicles with amanual gearbox if the driver tries to start theengine without having the clutch pedalpressed. The engine will only start if you pressthe clutch pedal.

Press the brakeThis message appears on vehicles with anautomatic gearbox if the driver tries to startthe engine without having the brake pedalpressed.

Select N or PThis message appears if you try to start orstop the engine when the selector lever of theautomatic gearbox is not in position P or N.The engine can only be started and stoppedin those positions.

Engage position P; the vehicle canmove; doors can only close in posi-tion P.For safety reasons, this driver message ap-pears and an audible warning sounds if theselector lever of the automatic gearbox is notin position P after you switch off the ignition.Move the selector lever to the P position, oth-erwise the vehicle could roll away.

Gear change: selector lever in thedrive position!This driver message is displayed when theselector lever is not in the position P when thedriver door is opened. Additionally, a buzzingsound is emitted. Put the selector lever in po-sition P, otherwise the vehicle could roll away. »

241

Driving

Ignition is switched onThis driver message is displayed and a buz-zer is sounded when the driver door isopened with the ignition switched on.

WARNING● Never run the engine in confined spaces,as the exhaust gases are poisonous.

CAUTIONAvoid high engine speeds, full throttle andextreme load conditions until the enginehas reached its normal operating tempera-ture, otherwise this can damage the en-gine.

For the sake of the environmentDo not warm up the engine by idling it. Youshould drive off as soon as you start the en-gine. This will help avoid unnecessary ex-haust emissions.

Note● If it is difficult to turn the ignition key tothe position 2 , move the steering wheel toboth sides to release the steering lock.● When starting from cold, the engine maybe a little noisy for the first few seconds un-til oil pressure has built up in the hydraulic

valve lifters. This is quite normal, and nocause for concern.● If the vehicle battery is disconnected andreconnected, the key must remain in theposition 1 for around 5 seconds beforestarting up.● Vehicles with automatic transmission,de-pending on the country, after switching offthe ignition, you can only remove the igni-tion key if the selector lever is in position“P” (parking lock). Next, the selector leveris locked.

Switching off the engine with thekey

Switching off the engine– Stop the vehicle.

– Turn the ignition key to position 1››› Fig. 240.

Engaging the steering wheel lockIn vehicles with automatic gearbox, the igni-tion key can only be removed when the se-lector lever is in position P1).

– Remove the key from the ignition in posi-tion 1 ››› Fig. 240 ››› .

– Turn the steering wheel until you hear it en-gage.

Possible vehicle theft is prevented with thesteering lock engaged.

WARNING● Never switch the engine off until the vehi-cle is stationary. The brake servo and pow-er steering functions will not be completelycovered under warranty. More force mayalso be needed to turn the steering wheelor to brake. As you cannot steer and brakein the normal manner, there is a greater riskof accidents and serious injury.● Never remove the key from the ignition ifthe vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, thesteering could suddenly lock, making it im-possible to steer the vehicle: risk of acci-dent!● Always take the key with you when youleave the vehicle. This is particularly impor-tant if there are children in the vehicle, asthey might otherwise be able to start theengine or use power-operated equipment(e.g. the electric windows), which couldcause injuries.

CAUTIONIf the engine has been running under highload for a long time, there is a risk of heat

1) Depending upon country.242

Start and driving

building up in the engine compartment af-ter it has been switched off; this couldcause engine damage. For this reason, youshould idle the engine for approximately 2minutes before you switch it off.

NoteAfter the engine is switched off the radiatorfan may run on for up to 10 minutes, even ifthe ignition is switched off. It is also possi-ble that the fan turns itself on once more ifthe coolant temperature increases due tothe heat accumulated in the engine com-partment or due to its prolonged exposureto solar radiation.

Starter button*

Fig. 241 In the lower part of the centre con-sole: start button.

Fig. 242 On the right of the steering column:emergency start.

The vehicle engine can be started with astarter button (Press & Drive). To do so, theremust be a valid key inside the vehicle in thearea of the front or rear seats.

In vehicles with the Keyless Access››› page 129 system, the engine can also bestarted with the key in the luggage compart-ment.

Opening the driver's door when exiting thevehicle activates the electronic lock on thesteering column if the ignition is disabled.

Switching the ignition on/off manuallyBriefly push the starter button without touch-ing the brake or clutch pedal ››› .

For vehicles with both manual and automatictransmission, the starter button textSTART ENGINE STOP flashes like a heartbeat

when the system is preset for switching theignition on and off.

Automatic ignition switch-offIf the driver leaves the vehicle, taking the ve-hicle key with them but leaving the ignition on,the ignition is not switched off automatically.The ignition is switched off automatically bypressing the lock button on the remote con-trol or manually by pressing the sensor sur-face on the door lever ››› Fig. 140

Emergency starting functionIf no valid key is detected inside the vehicle,an emergency start-up will be required. Therelevant message will appear in the dashpanel display. This may happen when, for ex-ample, the battery of the vehicle key button isvery low or flat:

● Immediately after pushing the starter but-ton, keep the vehicle key next to the right trimof the steering column ››› Fig. 242, as closeas possible to the Kessy logo.● The ignition connects and the engine startsautomatically.

Emergency disconnectionIf the engine does not switch off after brieflypressing the starter button, an emergencydisconnect will be required: »

243

Driving

● Press the starter button twice within 3 sec-onds or press it once for more than 1 sec-ond ››› .● The engine turns off automatically.

Engine restart featureIf no valid key is detected inside the vehicleafter the engine stops, you will only have 5seconds to restart it. A warning will display onthe dash panel screen.

After this interval, it will not be possible tostart the engine without a valid key inside thevehicle.

Automatic deactivation of the ignition onvehicles with the Start-Stop systemThe ignition is switched off automaticallywhen the vehicle is stopped and the auto-matic engine shutdown is active, if:

● The driver's seat belt is not fastened,● the driver does not step on any pedal,● the driver door is opened.

After automatically turning off the ignition, ifthe dipped beam is on, the side light re-mains on for approx. 30 minutes (if the bat-tery has enough charge). If the driver locksthe vehicle or manually turns off the light, theside light goes out.

WARNINGAny accidental movement of the vehiclecould result in serious injury.● When switching on the ignition, do notpress the brake or clutch pedal, otherwisethe engine could start immediately.

WARNINGIf vehicle keys are used negligently or with-out due care, this may cause accidents andserious injury.● Never leave any key inside the vehiclewhen exiting. Otherwise, a child or unau-thorised person could lock the vehicle,start the engine or connect the ignitionand, in this way, operate electronic equip-ment (e.g. the windows).

Note● Before leaving the vehicle, always dis-connect the ignition manually and, if ap-propriate, take into account the instruc-tions on the screen of the dash panel.● If the vehicle is stationary for a long timewith the ignition on, the vehicle batterymight be discharged and it might not bepossible to start the engine.● In diesel vehicles, there may be a delay inthe engine starting if it requires preheating.● If during the STOP phase you press theSTART ENGINE STOP button, the ignition is

switched off and the button flashes.

● If the indication is displayed on the in-strument panel display “Start-Stop systemdeactivated: Start the engine manually”,the START ENGINE STOP button will blink.

Starting the engine3 Valid for vehicle: with Keyless Access

StepStarting the engine with thestarter button ››› page 243 (Press& Drive).

1.

Press and hold the brake pedal untilstep 5 is performed.In vehicles with a manual gearbox:press and hold the clutch down until theengine starts.

2. Put the gearbox lever in neutral or the se-lector lever in position P or N.

3.

Briefly press the starter button ››› Fig. 241without pressing the accelerator. For theengine to start there must be a valid key inthe vehicle.After starting the engine, the light of theSTART ENGINE STOP button changes to a

fixed light indicating that the engine hasstarted.

4.If the engine does not start, stop and waitfor approx. 1 minute before trying again. Ifnecessary, carry out an emergency start››› page 243.

244

Start and driving

StepStarting the engine with thestarter button ››› page 243 (Press& Drive).

5.Disconnect the electronic parking brakewhen you are about to start driving››› page 246.

WARNINGNever leave the vehicle with the enginerunning, especially if a gear or gear rangeis engaged. The vehicle could then sudden-ly move or something strange could hap-pen that would cause damage, fire or seri-ous injury.

WARNINGCold start sprays could explode or cause asudden increase in the engine speed.● Never use sprays to cold start the engine.

CAUTION● The starter motor or the engine may bedamaged if you try to start the engine whiledriving or if you restart it immediately afterswitching it off.● If the engine is cold, avoid high enginespeeds, pushing the engine too hard andrapid acceleration.● Do not start the engine by pushing thevehicle or towing it. Unburnt fuel could en-ter the catalytic converter and damage it.

Note● Do not wait until the engine warms upwith the vehicle stationary; if you havegood visibility through the windows, startdriving immediately. This helps the enginereach operating temperature faster and re-duces emissions.● Electrical components with a high powerconsumption are switched off temporarilywhen the engine starts.● When starting with a cold engine, noiselevels may briefly increase. This is quitenormal, and no cause for concern.● When the outside temperature is below+5 °C (+41 °F), if the engine is diesel, somesmoke may appear under the vehicle whenthe fuel-operated auxiliary heater is on.

Stopping the engine3 Valid for vehicle: with Keyless Access

Step Switch off the engine with thestarter button ››› page 243.

1. Stop the vehicle completely ››› .

2. Press and hold the brake pedal until thestep 4 is performed.

3. If you are driving an automatic vehicle,place the selector lever in position P.

4. Connect the electronic parking brake››› page 246.

Step Switch off the engine with thestarter button ››› page 243.

5.

Briefly press the start-up button››› Fig. 241. The START ENGINE STOP buttonblinks again. If the engine fails to switchoff, perform an emergency disconnect››› page 243.

6. If the vehicle is equipped with a manualgearbox, put it into 1st or reverse.

WARNINGNever switch off the engine while the vehi-cle is moving. This could cause loss of con-trol of the vehicle, accidents and serious in-jury.● The airbags and belt tensioners do notwork when the ignition is switched off.● The brake servo does not work with theengine off. Therefore, you need to press thebreak pedal harder to brake the vehicle.● Power steering does not work when theengine is not running. You need morestrength to steer when the engine is switch-ed off.● If the ignition is switched off, the steeringcolumn could be locked, making it impossi-ble to control the vehicle.

CAUTIONIf the engine is made to work hard for a longtime, it may overheat after being switchedoff. To prevent damage to the engine »

245

Driving

before switching it off, leave it idle for ap-prox. 2 minutes in neutral.

NoteAfter switching off the engine, the coolingfan may continue to operate in the enginecompartment for a few more minutes, evenwith the ignition off. The radiator fan is au-tomatically switched off.

“My Beat” Function

For vehicles with a convenience key there isthe “My Beat” function. This feature providesan additional indication of the vehicle ignitionsystem.

When accessing the vehicle, e.g. by openingthe doors with the remote control, theSTART ENGINE STOP button flashes, calling at-

tention to the relevant starter system button.

Upon switching the ignition on/off, the light ofthe START ENGINE STOP button flashes. Withthe engine switched off, after a few seconds,the STOP ENGINE START button stops flashingand goes out.

With the engine running, theSTART ENGINE STOP button light stays on, indi-

cating that the engine is running. The timethat lapses between the moment the userstarts the engine with the START ENGINE STOPbutton and the lighting changes from flashing

to fixed will depend on specific engine sizecharacteristics. Upon switching the ignitionoff with the START ENGINE STOP button, it startsflashing again.

In vehicles with the Start-Stop system, the“My Beat” function also offers additional in-formation:

● When the engine stops during the Stopphase, the light of the START ENGINE STOP but-ton stays on, since, even though the engine isoff, the Start-Stop system is active.● When the engine cannot be stated againwith the Start-Stop system, ››› page 270, andneeds to be started manually, theSTART ENGINE STOP button flashes to indicate

this fact.

Braking and parking

Information on the brakes

New brake padsFor the first 400 km (250 miles), new brakepads have not yet reached their maximumbraking capacity, and need to be “run in” first.However, you can compensate for the slightlyreduced braking effect by applying morepressure on the brake pedal. Avoid overload-ing the brakes while running them in.

WearThe rate of wear on the brake pads dependsa great deal on how you drive and the condi-tions in which the vehicle is operated. This is aparticular problem in urban traffic and shortstretches, or with very sporty driving.

Depending on the speed, the braking forceand the environmental conditions (for exam-ple, the temperature, air humidity, etc.) noisesmay be produced on braking.

Wet roads or road saltIn certain situations (for example, on drivingthrough flooded areas, in severe downpoursor after washing the vehicle) the braking ac-tion could be delayed if the discs and padsare damp, or frozen in winter. In this case thebrakes should be “dried” by pressing thebrake pedal several times.

At high speed and with the windscreen wipersactivated, the brake pads will briefly touchthe brake discs. This takes place, althoughunnoticeable to the driver, at regular intervalsto improve the response time of the brakeswhen they are wet.

The effectiveness of the brakes can also betemporarily reduced if the vehicle is driven forsome distance without using the brakes whenthere is a lot of salt on the road in winter. Thelayer of salt that accumulates on the discsand pads can be removed by gently apply-ing the brakes a few times.

246

Start and driving

CorrosionThere may be a tendency for corrosion toform on the discs and dirt to build up on thebrake pads if the vehicle is used infrequentlyor the brakes are not used very often.

If the brakes are not used frequently, or if rusthas formed on the disks, it is advisable toclean off the pads and disks by braking firmlya few times at a moderately high speed ››› .

Fault in the brake systemIf the brake pedal travel should ever increasesuddenly, this may mean that one of the twobrake circuits has failed. Drive immediately tothe nearest specialised workshop and havethe fault repaired. Drive there slowly and re-member that you will have to apply morepressure on the brake pedal and allow forlonger stopping distances.

Low brake fluid levelMalfunctions can occur in the brake system ifthe brake fluid level is too low. The brake fluidlevel is monitored electronically.

Brake servoThe brake servo increases the pressure youapply to the brake pedal. It works only whenthe engine is running.

WARNING● Apply the brakes heavily to clean thebrake system only in a suitable traffic situa-tion. Do not put other road users in danger:there is risk of causing an accident.● Ensure the vehicle does not move while inneutral, when the engine is stopped. Failureto follow this instruction could result in anaccident.● If the brake fluid loses its viscosity and issubjected to heavy use, vapour bubblescan form in the brake system. This reducesthe efficiency of the brakes.

CAUTION● Never let the brakes “drag” by leavingyour foot on the pedal when it is not neces-sary to brake. This overheats the brakes, re-sulting in longer stopping distances andgreater wear.● Before driving down a long, steep gradi-ent, it is advisable to reduce speed and se-lect a lower gear. This makes use of enginebraking and relieves the brakes. If you stillhave to use the brakes, it is better to brakefirmly at intervals than to apply the brakescontinuously.

Note● If the brake servo is out of action, for ex-ample when the car is being towed, you willhave to press the brake pedal considerably

harder than normal to make up for the lackof servo assistance.● If you wish to equip the vehicle with ac-cessories such as a front spoiler or wheelcovers, it is important that the flow of air tothe front wheels is not obstructed, other-wise the brakes can overheat.

Control lamps

It lights up red

Brake fluid level too low ››› page 354 or fault in thebrake system. Do not carry on driving!

It lights up red

Electronic parking brake ››› page 248.The warning lamp turns off when the electronic park-ing brake is released.

It lights up green

Auto Hold function activated ››› page 273.

It lights up yellow

Front brake pads worn.

WARNING● If the brake warning lamp does not go outor if it lights up when driving, the brake fluid »

247

Driving

level in the reservoir is too low so there is arisk of an accident ››› page 354, Brake fluid.Stop the vehicle and do not drive on. Ob-tain technical assistance.● If the brake warning lamp lights up to-gether with the ABS lamp this could bedue to an ABS fault. This could cause therear wheels to lock quickly when you brake.This could cause the rear to break away.Risk of skidding. Stop the vehicle and seektechnical assistance.

Electronic parking brake

Fig. 243 Centre console, lower part: electron-ic parking brake button.

The electronic parking brake replaces thehandbrake.

Activating the electronic parking brakeThe electronic parking brake can be activa-ted whenever the vehicle is at a standstill,even when the ignition is switched off. Acti-vate it whenever you leave or park the vehi-cle.

● Pull and hold the ››› Fig. 243 button.● The parking brake is activated when thecontrol light of the ››› Fig. 243 button (arrow)and the red control light of the display inthe dash panel are on.● Release the button.

Releasing the electronic parking brake● Switch the ignition on.● Press the button ››› Fig. 243. At the sametime step hard on the brake pedal or, if theengine is running, press the accelerator pedalslightly.● The control light of the ››› Fig. 243 button(arrow) and the red control light of the dis-play in the dash panel go out.

Automatic release of the electronic park-ing brake on starting the engineThe electronic parking brake is automaticallyswitched off when starting if, after the driver'sdoor is closed and the driver's seat belt fas-tened, any of the following situations takeplace:

● In vehicles with automatic transmission: agear range is engaged or the vehicle isswitched to another one and the acceleratorpedal is lightly pressed.● In vehicles with manual transmission: theclutch pedal is pressed fully before startingoff and the accelerator is pedal lightly press-ed.● To facilitate certain manoeuvres there areexceptions that allow the automatic parkingbrake to be released without the driver's seatbelt being fastened.

The parking brake can be prevented from be-ing automatically released by continuouslypulling up the ››› Fig. 243 switch whenstarting off.

The electronic parking brake is not discon-nected until the button is released. Thiscan facilitate starting off when a heavy loadis towed ››› page 330.

Automatic activation of the electronicparking brake when exiting the vehicle in-correctlyIn vehicles with automatic transmission, theelectronic parking brake is activated auto-matically when exiting the vehicle incorrectlyif:

● The selector lever is in the D/S or R positionor in the Tiptronic selector gate.● AND: the vehicle is stationary.

248

Start and driving

● AND: the driver door is open.

Emergency braking functionOnly use the emergency brake function if youare unable to stop the vehicle with the footbrake ››› .

● Pull and hold the ››› Fig. 243 button inthis position to forcefully stop the vehicle. Atthe same time, an acoustic warning can beheard.● To stop the braking process, release thebutton or press the accelerator.

WARNINGThe improper use of the electronic parkingbrake can cause accidents and serious in-jury.● Never use the electronic parking brake tostop the vehicle, unless it is an emergency.Braking distances can be considerably lon-ger, since, under certain circumstances,only the rear wheels brake. Always use thefoot brake.● Never accelerate from the engine when agear range or a gear is engaged and theengine is running. The vehicle could move,even if the electronic parking brake is acti-vated.

CAUTIONTo prevent the vehicle from unintentionallymoving when parking it, first apply the

electronic parking brake and then removeyour foot from the brake pedal.

Note● In vehicles with a manual gearbox, re-leasing the clutch and accelerating at thesame time automatically disconnects theelectronic parking brake.● If the vehicle battery is flat, it will not bepossible to disconnect the electronic park-ing brake. Use the jump-start››› page 60.● When the electronic parking brake is ap-plied or released, noises may be heard.● The system performs automatic and au-dible tests sporadically in the parked vehi-cle if some time elapses without the elec-tronic parking brake being used.

Parking

The electronic parking brake should alwaysbe applied when the vehicle is parked.

Always note the following points when park-ing the vehicle:

– Use the brake pedal to stop the vehicle.

– Apply the electronic parking brake.

– Put it in 1st gear.

– Switch the engine off and remove the keyfrom the ignition. Turn the steering wheelslightly to engage the steering lock.

– Never leave a vehicle key in the vehicle.

Additional notes on parking the vehicle ongradients:Turn the steering wheel so that the vehiclerolls against the kerb if it started to roll.

● If the vehicle is parked facing downhill, turnthe front wheels so that they point towardsthe kerb.● If the vehicle is parked facing uphill, turnthe front wheels so that they point away fromthe kerb.● Secure the vehicle as usual by applying theelectronic parking brake firmly and putting itin 1st gear.

WARNING● Take measures to reduce the risk of injurywhen you leave your vehicle unattended.● Never park where the hot exhaust systemcould ignite inflammable materials, such asdry grass, low bushes, spilt fuel etc.● Never allow vehicle occupants to remainin the vehicle when it is locked. They wouldbe unable to open the vehicle from the in-side, and could become trapped in the ve-hicle in an emergency. In the event of anemergency, locked doors will delay assis-tance to vehicle occupants. »

249

Driving

● Never leave children alone in the vehicle.They could set the vehicle in motion, for ex-ample, by releasing the electronic parkingbrake or the gearshift lever, which wouldcause the vehicle to move, but uncontrolla-bly.● Depending on weather conditions, it maybecome extremely hot or cold inside thevehicle. This can be fatal.

Braking and stability sys-tems

Control lamps

It lights up

Fault in the ESC or disconnection caused by the sys-tem.As the ESC operates in conjunction with the ABS, theESC light will also come on if a fault should occur inthe ABS.

Flashes

ESC or ASR activated.

It lights up

ASR manually deactivated.

Alternatively: ESC in Sport mode ››› page 252.

It lights up

ABS faulty or does not work.

The control lamps light up together when theignition is switched on and should turn off af-ter approximately 2 seconds. This is the timetaken for the function check.

Hydraulic Brake Assist (HBA)

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)The ESC helps to improve safety. It reducesthe tendency to skid and improves the stabili-ty and roadholding of the vehicle. The ESCdetects critical handling situations, such asvehicle understeer or oversteer, or wheelspinon the driving wheels. It stabilises the vehicleby braking individual wheels or by reducingthe engine torque. The warning lamp willflash on the instrument panel when the ESC isintervening .

The ESC includes the anti-lock brake system(ABS), the hydraulic brake assist (HBA), thetraction control system (ASR), electronic dif-ferential lock (EDS), electronic torque control(XDS) and tractor-trailer sway mitigation*.ESC also helps stabilise the vehicle bychanging the torque.

Anti-lock brake system (ABS)ABS prevents the wheels from locking up un-der braking until the vehicle has reached avirtual standstill. You can continue to steer thevehicle even when the brakes are on full.Keep your foot on the brake pedal and do notpump the brakes. You will feel the brake pedalpulsate while the ABS is working.

Hydraulic Brake Assist (HBA)The brake assist system can reduce the re-quired braking distance. The braking force isautomatically boosted if you press the brakepedal quickly in an emergency. You mustkeep pressing the brake pedal until the dan-ger has passed.

Traction control system (ASR)In the event of wheelspin, the traction controlsystem reduces the engine torque to matchthe amount of grip available. This helps thecar to start moving, accelerate or climb agradient.

Electronic differential lock (EDL)When the EDL detects wheelspin, it brakesthe spinning wheel and directs the power tothe other driven wheel. This function is activeup to approximately 100 km/h (62 mph).

To prevent the disc brake of the braked wheelfrom overheating, the EDL cuts out automati-cally if subjected to excessive loads. The

250

Start and driving

vehicle can still be driven. The EDL will switchon again automatically when the brake hascooled down.

Tractor-trailer sway mitigation*If the vehicle is pulling a trailer, it will controlthe following: tractor-trailers tend to sway.When the swaying of the trailer is felt by thevehicle and detected by the ESC, it will auto-matically brake the towing vehicle within thelimits of the system and mitigate the sway.Tractor-trailer sway mitigation is not availablein all countries.

Electronic torque management (XDS)When taking a curve, the driveshaft differen-tial mechanism allows the outer wheel to turnat a higher speed than the inner wheel. In thisway, the wheel that is turning faster (outerwheel) receives less drive torque than the in-ner wheel. This may mean that in certain sit-uations the torque delivered to the innerwheel is too high, causing the wheels to spin.On the other hand, the outer wheel is receiv-ing a lower drive torque than it could transmit.This causes an overall loss of lateral grip onthe front axle, resulting in understeer or“lengthening” of the trajectory.

The XDS system can detect and correct thiseffect via the sensors and signals of the ESC.

Via the ESC, the XDS will brake the insidewheel and counter the excess driving torque

of that wheel. This means that the driver's de-sired trajectory is much more precise.

The XDS system works in combination withthe ESC and is always active, even when ASRtraction control is disconnected, or the ESC inSport mode or disconnected.

Multi-collision BrakeIn an accident, the multi-collision brake canhelp the driver by braking to avoid the risk ofskidding during the accident, which couldlead to further collisions.

The multi-collision brake works for front, sideor rear accidents, when the airbag controlunit records its activation level and the acci-dent takes place at a speed of over 10 km/h(6 mph). The ESC automatically brakes thevehicle, as long as the accident has not dam-aged the ESC, the brake hydraulics or the on-board network

The following actions control automatic brak-ing during the accident:

● When the driver presses the accelerator,the automatic braking does not take place.● When the braking pressure through press-ing the brake pedal is greater than the sys-tem’s braking pressure the vehicle will brakeautomatically.● Multi-collision braking will not be availableif ESC is malfunctioning.

WARNING● The ESC, ABS, ASR, EDS and the electron-ic torque control system cannot exceed thelimits imposed by the laws of physics. Al-ways bear this in mind, especially on wet orslippery roads. If you notice the systemscutting in, you should reduce your speedimmediately to suit the road and trafficconditions. Do not be encouraged to takerisks by the presence of more safety sys-tems. If you do, an accident may occur.● Please remember that the accident riskalways increases if you drive fast, espe-cially in corners or on a slippery road, or ifyou follow too close behind the vehicle infront of you. The ESC, ABS, brake assist,EDS and the electronic torque control sys-tem cannot prevent accidents: risk of acci-dents!● Accelerate with caution on slippery sur-faces (for example, icy or snow-covered).Despite the control systems, the drivenwheels could spin, affecting the stability ofthe vehicle: risk of accident!

Note● The ABS and ASR will only operate cor-rectly if the four wheels have identicaltyres. Any differences in the rolling radiusof the tyres can cause the system to re-duce engine power when this is not desired.● The regulating processes of the systemscan make noises when they intervene. »

251

Driving

● If the warning lamp lights up, or al-ternatively, there could be a fault››› page 124.

Switching on/off the ESC and ASR

The ESC is switched on automatically whenthe engine is started, and only works whenthe engine is running and includes the ABS,EDS and ASR systems.

The ASR function should only be switched offin situations in which traction is insufficient, in-cluding:

● When driving in deep snow or on surfacesthat are not very firm.● To “free” the vehicle if it gets stuck.

Then switch the ASR function back on.

Depending on the finishes and versions, thereis the possibility of disconnecting only theASR or activating the ESC Sport mode.

Disable ASRThe Easy Connect system menu is used toswitch off the ASR ››› page 36. The trac-tion control system will be disabled.

The control lamp lights up. For vehicles witha driver information system* the driver will beinformed that ASR is disabled.

Activate ASRThe Easy Connect system menu››› page 36 is used to switch on the ASR.The traction control system will be enabled.

The control lamp switches off. For vehicleswith a driver information system* the driverwill be informed that ASR is enabled.

ESC in “Sport” modeSport mode can be connected via the EasyConnect ››› page 36 system menu. Infront-wheel drive vehicles, the interventionsby the ESC and the ASR are limited. In four-wheel drive vehicles, the interventions by theESC are limited and the ASR is switched offcompletely ››› .

The control lamp lights up. For vehicles witha driver information system* the driver will beinformed that:

Electronic Stability Control(ESC): sport. Warning! Limitedstability

Disable ESC “Sport” modeThrough the Easy Connect system menu››› page 36. The warning lamp willswitch off. For vehicles with a driver informa-tion system* the driver will be informed that:

Electronic Stability Control(ESC): on

ESC in “Offroad” mode1)

Turn the Driving Experience button to selectthe Offroad mode and connect it››› page 305. The interventions of the ESC, aswell as of the ASR, EDS and the ABS, adapt toirregular terrain.

In the following exceptional situations it maymake sense to activate the Offroad mode toallow the wheels to spin:

● When “swinging” the vehicle to get it un-stuck.● Driving in deep snow or on loose surfaces.● When driving on rough terrain with much ofthe car's weight is lifted off the wheels (axlearticulation).● Steep descents with braking on unpavedterrain.

1) Only for 4Drive models.252

Start and driving

For your safety we recommend that you turnoff the Offroad mode when it is not absolute-ly necessary.

Disable the ESC Offroad modeTurn the Driving Experience button to select adifferent driving mode ››› page 305.

ESC in “Snow” mode1)

Turn the Driving Experience button to selectthe “Snow” mode and connect it.››› page 305 Traction control system (ASR)interventions adjust to the adhesion of snowyroads.

Disable the ESC “Snow” modeTurn the Driving Experience button to select adifferent driving mode ››› page 305.

WARNINGThe ESC Sport mode should be activatedonly when traffic conditions and the abilityof the driver allow it. Danger of skidding!● With ESC in Sport mode, the stabilisingfunction will be limited to allow for a sporti-er drive. The driving wheels could spin andthe vehicle could skid.

WARNINGYou should only activate the Offroad Modeor disable the ASR if the experience of thedriver and traffic conditions allow it. Dan-ger of skidding!● With the Offroad mode activated, thestabilisation function is limited. In particu-lar, if the road is too smooth and slippery,the driving wheels could spin and the vehi-cle could skid.

NoteIf the ASR or the ESC is disconnected or theSport mode is selected, cruise control* willbe switched off.

Manual gearbox

Changing gear


In some countries the clutch pedal must befully pressed down for the engine to start.

Selecting reverse gear● Engage reverse gear only when the vehicleis stopped.

Changing down gearsWhile driving, changing down a gear must al-ways be done gradually, i.e. to the gear di-rectly below and when the engine speed isnot too high ››› . Changing down while by-passing one or various gears at high speedsor at high engine speeds can damage theclutch and the gearbox, even if the clutchpedal remains depressed ››› .

WARNINGWhen the engine is running, the vehicle willstart to move as soon as a gear is engagedand the clutch released. This is also thecase with the electronic parking brakeswitched on.● Never engage reverse gear when the ve-hicle is moving.

WARNINGIf the gear is changed down inappropriate-ly by selecting a gear that is too low, youmay lose control of the vehicle, causing anaccident and serious injuries. »


Driving

CAUTIONWhen travelling at high speeds or at highengine speeds, selecting a gear that is toolow can cause considerable damage to theclutch and the gearbox. This can also oc-cur if the clutch pedal is pressed and heldand it does not engage.

CAUTIONTo prevent damage and avoid prematurewear, please observe the following:● Do not rest your hand on the gear leverwhile driving. The pressure applied by yourhand is transmitted to the gearbox selectorforks.● Always ensure that the vehicle is com-pletely stopped before engaging the re-verse gear.● Always press the clutch to the floor whenchanging gears.● Never hold the vehicle “on the clutch” onhills with the engine on.

Automatic gearbox/DSG au-tomatic gearbox*

Introduction

Your vehicle is equipped with an electronical-ly controlled manual gearbox. Torque be-

tween the engine and the gearbox is trans-mitted via two independent clutches. Theyreplace the torque converter found on con-ventional automatic gearboxes and allow forsmooth, uninterrupted acceleration of the ve-hicle.

The tiptronic system allows the driver tochange gears manually if desired››› page 257, Engaging gears with the tip-tronic mode*.

Control lamps

It lights up green

The brake pedal is not engaged.To select a range of gears, press the brake pedal.

Flashes green

The interlock button on the selector lever is notpressed.Movement of the vehicle is prevented. Engage the se-lector lever lock.

Selector lever positions


The selector lever position engaged is high-lighted on the display in the instrument clus-

ter. With the selector lever in the manualgearbox positions G, D, E and S, the engagedgear is also indicated on the display.

P – Parking lockWhen the selector lever is in this position, thedriven wheels are locked mechanically. Theparking lock must be engaged only when thevehicle is stationary ››› .

The interlock button (the button on the selec-tor lever handle) must be pressed in and si-multaneously the brake pedal must be de-pressed before moving the selector lever ei-ther in or out of position P.

R – Reverse gearReverse gear must be engaged only whenthe vehicle is stationary and the engine isidling ››› .

To move the selector lever to position R, theinterlock button must be pressed in and at thesame time the brake pedal must be de-pressed. The reverse lights come on when theselector lever is in the R position with the igni-tion on.

N – Neutral (idling)With the selector lever in this position, thegear is in neutral.

254

Start and driving

D/S – Permanent drive (forward) positionThe selector lever in the D/S position enablesthe gears to be controlled in normal mode(D) or Sport (S). To select Sport mode (S),move the selector lever backwards. Movingthe lever again will select normal mode (D).The selected driving mode is shown on the in-strument panel display.

In normal mode (D), the gearbox automati-cally selects the best gear ratio. This de-pends on the engine load, the road speedand the dynamic gear control programme(DCP).

Sport mode (S) must be selected for a sportydriving style. This setting makes use of the en-gine's maximum power output. When accel-erating the gear shifts will be noticeable.

Press the brake pedal to move the selectorlever from N to D/S when the vehicle is sta-tionary or at speeds below 3 km/h (2 mph)››› .

Under certain circumstances (e.g. when driv-ing in mountains) it can be advantageous toswitch temporarily to tiptronic mode››› page 257, in order to manually selectgear ratios to suit the driving conditions.

WARNING● Take care not to accidentally press theaccelerator pedal when the vehicle is stop-ped. The vehicle could otherwise start

moving immediately (in some cases even ifthe parking brake is engaged) resulting inthe risk of an accident.● Never move the selector lever to R or Pwhen driving. Failure to follow this instruc-tion could result in an accident.● With selector lever in any position (ex-cept P) the vehicle must always be heldwith the foot brake when the engine is run-ning. This is because an automatic gearboxstill transmits power even at idling speed,and the vehicle tends to “creep”. The ac-celerator pedal must on no account bepressed inadvertently when a gear is en-gaged with the vehicle stationary. The ve-hicle could otherwise start moving immedi-ately (in some cases even if the parkingbrake is engaged) resulting in the risk of anaccident.● While you are selecting a gear and thevehicle is stopped with the engine running,do not accelerate. Failure to follow this in-struction could result in an accident.● As a driver you should never leave yourvehicle if the engine is running and a gear isengaged. If you have to leave your vehiclewhile the engine is running, you must applythe handbrake and engage the parkinglock (P).● To avoid accidents, apply the handbrakeand put the selector lever in position P be-fore opening the bonnet and working on thevehicle with the engine running. Please al-ways observe the important safety warn-

ings ››› page 348, Working in the enginecompartment.

Note● If the selector lever is moved accidental-ly to N when driving, release the accelera-tor and let the engine speed drop to idlingbefore selecting gear range D or S again.● Should the power supply to the selectorlever be interrupted in position P, the selec-tor lever will be locked. If this should hap-pen the manual release can be used››› page 43.

Selector lever lock

Fig. 244 Selector lever lock.

The selector lever lock prevents gears frombeing engaged inadvertently, so that the ve-hicle is not set in motion unintentionally. »

255

Driving

The selector lever lock is released as follows:

– Switch the ignition on.

– Press the brake pedal and, at the sametime, hold the lock button in the direction ofthe arrow ››› Fig. 244.

Automatic selector lever lockWith the ignition switched on, the selectorlever is locked in the positions P and N. Thebrake pedal must be pressed to release thelever while pressing the release button if theselector lever is in the position P. As a remind-er for the driver, with the lever in positions P orN the following message will be shown on thedisplay:

When stationary, apply footbrakewhile selecting a gear.

Level lock only engages with the vehicle sta-tionary and at speeds of up to 5 km/h(3 mph). At speeds of over 5 km/h (3 mph) thelever lock is automatically deactivated in po-sition N.

The selector lever lock is not engaged if theselector lever is moved quickly through posi-tion N (e.g. when shifting from R to D). Thismakes it possible, for instance, to rock the ve-hicle “backwards and forwards” if it is stuck.The selector lever lock engages automatical-ly if the brake pedal is not depressed and thelever is in position N for more than about twoseconds.

Interlock buttonThe interlock button on the selector leverhandle prevents the driver from inadvertentlyengaging certain gears. Press the button in todisengage the selector lever lock.

Safety interlock for ignition keyDepending on the country, once the ignitionhas been turned off, the key may be removedonly if the gear selector is in position P. Whilethe key is not in the ignition, the selector leveris locked in position P.

Note● If the selector lever lock does not en-gage, there is a fault. The transmission is in-terrupted to prevent the vehicle from acci-dentally moving. Follow the procedure be-low in order for the selector lever lock toengage again:– With a 6-speed gearbox: press the

brake pedal and release it again.– With a 7-speed gearbox: press the

brake pedal. Move the selector lever toposition P or N and subsequently en-gage a gear.

● Despite a gear being engaged, the vehi-cle does not move forwards or back. Pro-ceed to the next mode:– When the vehicle does not move in the

required direction, the system may nothave the gear range correctly engag-

ed. Press the brake pedal and engagethe gear range again.

– If the vehicle still does not move in therequired direction, there is a systemmalfunction. Seek specialist assistanceand have the system checked.

256

Start and driving

Engaging gears with the tiptronicmode*

Fig. 245 Centre console: changing gear withtiptronic

Fig. 246 Steering wheel: automatic gearboxlevers

The tiptronic gives the driver the option tochange gears manually.

Changing gear manually with the selectorleverIt is possible to change to tiptronic mode,both when the vehicle is stopped and whiledriving.

– To switch to tiptronic mode, move the selec-tor lever from position D/S to the right. Assoon as the change is made the selectorlevel will be shown in the position M on theinstrument panel display (for example M4means that the fourth gear is engaged).

– Move the selector lever forwards + to se-lect a higher gear ››› Fig. 245.

– Move the selector lever backwards – toselect a lower gear.

Changing gear manually with the gear-shift paddles*The gearshift paddles can be used when theselector lever is in the position D/S or M.

– Press the gearshift paddle + to select ahigher gear ››› Fig. 246.

– Press the gearshift paddle – to select alower gear.

– With the selector lever in position D/S, if nopaddle is operated during a short period oftime, the gearbox control system switchesback to automatic mode. To switch to per-manent manual gear change using the

gearshift paddles, move the selector leverfrom position D/S to the right.

When accelerating, the gearbox automati-cally shifts up into the next gear shortly be-fore the maximum engine speed is reached.

If you select a lower gear, the automaticgearbox will not shift down until there is norisk of over-revving the engine.

When the kick-down feature is used, thegearbox shifts down to a lower gear, depend-ing on road speed and engine speed.

Driving tips

The gearbox changes gear ratios automati-cally as the vehicle moves.

The engine can only start with the selectorlever in position P or N. At low temperatures,below -10 °C (+14 °F), the engine can onlystart with the selector lever in position P.

Starting the vehicle– Press and hold the brake pedal.

– Press and hold the interlock button (thebutton on the selector lever handle), movethe selector lever to the desired position, forinstance D ››› page 254, and release theinterlock button. »

257

Driving

– Wait for the gearbox to engage the gear (aslight movement can be felt).

– Release the brake and press the accelera-tor ››› .

Stopping briefly– Apply the foot brake to hold the vehicle

briefly when stationary (for instance at traf-fic lights). Do not press the accelerator.

Stopping/ParkingIf the driver door is opened and the selectorlever is not in position P, the vehicle couldmove. The driver message will be: Gearchange: selector lever in the driveposition!. Additionally, a buzzer will sound.

– Press and hold the brake pedal ››› .

– Apply the handbrake.

– Move the selector lever to position P.

Holding the car on a hill– Always apply the brake pedal firmly to pre-

vent the vehicle from “moving backwards; ifnecessary, apply the handbrake” ››› . Donot try to stop the vehicle “rolling back” byincreasing the engine speed when a gear isengaged (pressing the accelerator) ››› .

Starting off uphill– Apply the handbrake.

– Once you have engaged a gear press theaccelerator carefully and disengage thehandbrake.

Driving downhill: in some situations (onmountain roads or when towing a trailer orcaravan) it can be advantageous to switchtemporarily to the manual gearbox pro-gramme so that the gear ratios can be selec-ted manually to suit the driving conditions››› .

On level ground it is sufficient to move the se-lector lever to position P. On slopes, first en-gage the parking brake and then put the se-lection lever into the P position. This avoidsoverloading the locking mechanism and it willbe easier to move the selector lever from po-sition P.

WARNINGObserve the safety warnings ››› in Selec-tor lever positions on page 255.● Never allow the brake to rub and do notuse the brake pedal too often or for longperiods. Constant braking causes over-heating in the brakes. This could signifi-cantly reduce braking power, increasebraking distance or even result in the totalfailure of the brake system.● To avoid rolling back on gradients alwayshold the vehicle with the footbrake orhandbrake if you have to stop.

CAUTION● If you stop the vehicle on a gradient, donot attempt to stop it from rolling by de-pressing the accelerator when a gear hasbeen selected. This could cause overheat-ing and damage the automatic gearbox.Apply the handbrake firmly or press thebrake pedal in order to prevent the vehiclefrom rolling back.● If you allow the car to roll with the selec-tor lever in position N with the engineswitched off, the automatic gearbox will bedamaged as it will not be lubricated.● In certain driving situations or traffic con-ditions, such as frequently starting, pro-longed “creeping” of the vehicle or trafficjams with continuous stoppages, the gear-box could overheat causing damage! If thewarning lamp lights up, stop the vehicleas soon as possible and wait for the gear-box to cool ››› page 261.

Kick-down feature

The kick-down feature allows maximum ac-celeration to be reached.

When the accelerator pedal is pressed rightdown past the point of resistance at full throt-tle, the gearbox will shift down to a lowergear, depending on road speed and enginespeed. The upshift to the next higher gear is

258

Start and driving

delayed until the engine reaches maximumrpm.

WARNINGPlease note that if the road surface is slip-pery or wet, the kick-down feature couldcause the driving wheels to spin, whichcould result in skidding.

Launch control program3 Valid for vehicles: with Launch-Control/6-Speed DSG with diesel engines superior to 125kW and petrol engines superior to 140 kW.

The Launch control programme enablesmaximum acceleration.

Condition: the engine must have reached op-erating temperature and the steering wheelmust not be turned.

The engine speed for launch-control is differ-ent on petrol and diesel engines. To use thelaunch-control you must disconnect the anti-slip regulation (ASR) through the Easy Con-nect system menu ››› page 36. Thewarning lamp will stay switched on or willflash slowly depending on whether or not thevehicle has a driver information system*.

On vehicles with the driver information sys-tem, the ESC lamp lights up permanently andthe corresponding text message Stabilitycontrol deactivated (temporary) appearson the instrument panel to indicate the deac-tivation status.

– When the engine is running, switch off thetraction control (ASR)1).

– Turn the selector lever to the position “S” ortiptronic, or else select the sport drivingmode from the SEAT Drive Profile*››› page 304.

– Press the brake pedal firmly with your leftfoot and hold it down for at least one sec-ond.

– With your right foot, press the acceleratordown to the full throttle or kick-down posi-tion. The engine speed will stabilise atabout 3,200 rpm (petrol engine) or about2,000 rpm (diesel engine).

– Take your left foot off the brake pedal.

WARNING● Always adapt your driving style to thetraffic conditions.● Only use the launch control programmewhen road and traffic conditions permit,

and make sure your manner of driving andaccelerating the vehicle does not incon-venience or endanger other road users.● Make sure that the ESC remains switchedon. Please note that when the ASR and ESCare deactivated, the wheels may start tospin, causing the vehicle to lose grip. Riskof accident!● After putting the vehicle into gear, the“sport” mode of the ESC should be deacti-vated again by briefly pressing the OFFbutton.

Note● After using the Launch control pro-gramme, the temperature in the gearboxmay have increased considerably. In thiscase, the programme could be disabled forseveral minutes. The programme can beused again after the cooling phase.● Accelerating with the Launch control pro-gramme places a heavy load on all parts ofthe vehicle. This can result in increasedwear and tear.

1) Vehicles without driver information system: thewarning lamp flashes slowly/Vehicles with driverinformation system: the warning lamp stays on.

259

Driving

Downhill speed control*

The downhill speed control function helps thedriver when driving down steep gradients.

Downhill speed control is activated when theselector lever is in D/S and the driver appliesthe foot brake. The automatic gearbox auto-matically engages a lower gear that is suita-ble for the slope. The downhill speed controlfunction attempts to maintain the speed atwhich the vehicle was travelling when thefoot brake was applied (subject to the laws ofphysics and technical drive limitations). Itmay be necessary to adjust the speed againusing the foot brake in certain situations. Giv-en that the downhill speed control can onlychange down to 3rd gear, on very steep de-scents the tiptronic mode may be required. Inthis case, manually reduce the tiptronic to2nd or 1st gear to use the engine brake andreduce the charge on the brakes.

Downhill speed control is deactivated assoon as the road levels out again or you pressthe accelerator pedal.

On vehicles with cruise control system*››› page 275, downhill speed control is acti-vated when you set a cruising speed.

WARNINGThe downhill speed control cannot defy thelaws of physics. Therefore, speed cannot

be maintained constant in all situations. Al-ways be prepared to use the brakes!

Inertia mode

The inertia mode enables the kinetic energyof the vehicle to be harnessed enabling cer-tain stretches to be driven without using theaccelerator. This enables fuel to be saved.Use the inertia mode to “let the vehicle roll”before, for example, arriving in a town.

Switching on inertia modeCondition: selector lever must be in positionD, gradients below 12 %.

– Select, in SEAT Drive Profile*, Eco mode››› page 304.

– Take your foot off the accelerator.

The driver message Inertia will be dis-played. At speeds higher than 20 km/h (12mph), the gearbox will automatically disen-gage and the vehicle will roll freely, withoutthe effect of the engine brake. While the vehi-cle rolls, the engine runs at idling speed.

Stopping inertia mode– Press the brake or the accelerator pedal.

To make use of the braking force and switchoff the engine again, simply press the brakepedal briefly.

Applying both the inertia mode (= prolongedsection with less energy) and the switchingoff using inertia (= shorter section withoutthe need for fuel) facilitates improved fuelconsumption and emission balance.

WARNING● If the inertia mode has been switched on,take into account, when approaching anobstacle and releasing the acceleratorpedal, that the vehicle will not deceleratein the usual manner: risk of accident!● When using inertia mode while travellingdown hills, the vehicle can increase speed:risk of accident!● If other users drive your vehicle, warnthem about inertia mode.

Note● Inertia mode is only available in eco(SEAT Drive Profile*) driving mode.● The driver message Inertia is only dis-played with the current consumption. In in-ertia mode the gear will no longer be dis-played (for example “E” will appear insteadof “E7”).● On downhill sections with gradientsabove 15 %, the inertia mode will automati-cally be switched off temporarily.

260

Start and driving

Emergency program

A backup programme is in place if a faultshould occur in the control system.

If all the positions of the selector lever areshown over a light background on the instru-ment panel display, there is a system faultand the automatic gearbox will operate inwith the backup programme. When the back-up programme is activated, it is possible todrive the vehicle, however, at low speeds andwithin a selected range of gears. In some ca-ses driving in reverse gear may not be pos-sible.

CAUTIONIf the gearbox operates with the backupprogramme, take the vehicle to a special-ised workshop and have the fault repairedwithout delay.

Indications on the instrument paneldisplay

Clutch Clutch overheating! Please stop!

The clutch has overheated and could bedamaged. Stop the vehicle and wait for thegearbox to cool with the engine at idlingspeed and the selector lever in position P.When the warning lamp and the driver mes-

sage switch off, have the fault corrected by aspecialised workshop without delay. If thewarning lamp and the driver message do notswitch off, do not continue driving. Seek spe-cialist assistance.

Gearbox malfunctions Gearbox: Fault! Stop the vehicleand place the lever in the posi-tion P.

There is a fault in the gearbox. Stop the vehi-cle in a safe place and do not continue driv-ing. Seek specialist assistance.

Gearbox: System fault! You maycontinue driving.

Have the fault corrected by a specialisedworkshop without delay.

Gearbox: System fault! You cancontinue driving with restric-tions. Reverse gear disabled

Take the vehicle to a specialised workshopand have the fault repaired without delay.

Gearbox: System fault! You cancontinue driving in D untilswitching off the engine

Stop the vehicle in a safe place well awayfrom moving traffic. Seek specialist assis-tance.

Gearbox: too hot. Adapt yourdriving accordingly

Continue driving at moderate speeds. Whenthe warning lamp switches off, you can con-tinue driving in a normal manner.

Gearbox: press the brake and en-gage a gear again.

If the fault was caused by a gearbox with ahigh temperature, this driver message will bedisplayed when the gearbox has cooledagain.

Gear-change recommenda-tion

Gear-change indicator

Fig. 247 Instrument panel: gear-change indi-cator (manual gearbox).

A gear change will be recommended if thegear you are in is not the most economicalchoice. If no gear-change is recommended, it »

261

Driving

means that you are already in the most eco-nomical gear.

Vehicles with a manual gearboxThe following display symbols ››› Fig. 247mean:

● Changing to a higher gear: the sugges-ted gear appears to the right of the currentgear when a higher gear is recommended.● Changing to a lower gear: the sugges-ted gear appears to the left of the currentgear when a lower gear is recommended.

The gear recommendation may occasionallyskip a gear (2nd and 4th).

Vehicles with an automatic gearbox*The display is only visible in tiptronic mode››› page 257.

The following display symbols mean:

● Shifting up a gear● Shifting down a gear

CAUTIONThe gear-change indicator is intended tohelp save fuel, but it is not intended to rec-ommend the right gear for all driving situa-tions. In certain situations, only the drivercan choose the correct gear (for instancewhen overtaking, driving up a steep gradi-ent or towing a trailer).

NoteThe display disappears from the instrumentpanel when you press the clutch pedal.

Address

Introduction to the subject

Electro-mechanical power steering assiststhe driver when steering.

Electro-mechanical power steering adaptselectronically to the speed of the car, torqueand turning angle.

If the power steering should fail at any time orthe engine is switched off (for instance whenbeing towed), the car can still be steered.However, more effort than normal will be re-quired to turn the steering wheel.

Driver lamps and indications

It lights up red

Faulty steering! Parking the vehicleIf the warning lamp remains on and the driver indica-tion appears, the power steering could be faulty.Do not keep driving. Seek specialist assistance.

It lights up yellow

Address: System fault! You can keepdrivingIf the warning lamp comes on, the steering could re-act with more difficultly or more sensitivity than nor-mal. In addition, when driving in a straight line thesteering wheel may be off-centre.Drive slowly to a specialised workshop and have thefault repaired.

Steering lock: fault! Go to an Offi-cial ServiceThe electronic steering lock is malfunctioning.Take the vehicle to a specialised workshop as soonas possible and have the fault repaired.

The control lamp should light up for a fewseconds when the ignition is switched on. Itshould go out once the engine is started.

WARNINGIf the warning lamps and the correspondingmessages are ignored when they light up,the vehicle may stall in traffic and causeaccidents and severe injuries.● Never ignore the warning lamps or mes-sages.● Stop the vehicle at the next opportunityand in a safe place.

WARNINGTake it immediately to a specialised work-shop and have the fault repaired: risk of ac-cident!

262

Start and driving

CAUTIONFailure to heed the control lamps and cor-responding text messages when they lightup may result in damage to the vehicle.

NoteIf the lamp (in red yellow) lights up brief-ly, you may continue driving.

Run-in and economical driv-ing

Running in the engine

A new vehicle should be run in over a dis-tance of 1500 km (1000 miles). For the first1,000 km the engine speed should not ex-ceed 2/3 of the maximum permissible enginespeed. In doing so, do not accelerate at fullthrottle and do not drive with a trailer! From1000 to 1500 km (600 to 1000 miles) youcan gradually increase the engine rpm androad speed.

During its first few hours of running, the inter-nal friction in the engine is greater than lateron when all the moving parts have beddeddown.

How the vehicle is driven for the first 1,500 kminfluences the future engine performance.

Subsequently, also drive at a moderate rate,especially when the engine is still cold: thiswill lead to less engine wear and tear and willprolong its useful life.

You should also avoid driving with the enginespeed too low. Change down to a lower gearwhen the engine no longer runs “smoothly”. Ifthe engine revs too much, cut fuel injection toprotect the engine.

Environmental compatibility

Environmental protection is a top priority inthe design, choice of materials and manufac-ture of your new SEAT.

Constructive measures to encourage re-cycling● Joints and connections designed for easydismantling.● Modular construction to facilitate disman-tling.● Increased use of single-grade materials.● Plastic parts and elastomers are marked inaccordance with ISO 1043, ISO 11469 andISO 1629.

Choice of materials● Use of recycled materials.

● Use of compatible plastics in the same partif its components are not easily separated.● Use of recycled materials and/or materialsoriginating from renewable sources.● Reduction of volatile components, includingodour, in plastic materials.● Use of CFC-free coolants.

Ban on heavy metals, with the exceptionsdictated by law (Annex II of ELV Directive2000/53/EC): cadmium, lead, mercury,hexavalent chromium.

Manufacturing methods● Reduction of the quantity of thinner in theprotective wax for cavities.● Use of plastic film as protection during vehi-cle transport.● Use of solvent-free adhesives.● Use of CFC-free coolants in cooling sys-tems.● Recycling and energy recovery from resi-dues (RDF).● Improvement in the quality of waste water.● Use of systems for the recovery of residualheat (thermal recovery, enthalpy wheels,etc.).● The use of water-soluble paints.

263

Driving

Economical and environmentally-friendly driving

Fuel consumption, environmental pollutionand wear to the engine, brakes and tyres de-pends largely on driving style. Fuel consump-tion can be reduced by 10-15% with an eco-nomical driving style and proper anticipationof traffic conditions. The following sectiongives you some tips on lessening the impacton the environment and reducing your oper-ating costs at the same time.

Active cylinder management (ACT®)*Depending on vehicle equipment, the activecylinder management (ACT®) may automati-cally deactivate some of the engine cylindersif the driving situation does not require toomuch power. When it is switched off, no fuel isinjected into these cylinders, hence total fuelconsumption may be reduced. The numberof active cylinders can be seen on the instru-ment panel display. ››› page 109.

Foresight when drivingAcceleration causes the vehicle to consumemore fuel. If you think ahead when driving,you will need to brake less and thus acceler-ate less. Wherever possible, let the car rollslowly to a stop, with a gear engaged (for in-stance when you can see that the next trafficlights are red). This takes advantage of theengine braking effect, reducing wear on the

brakes and tyres. Emissions and fuel con-sumption will drop to zero due to the overrunfuel cut-off.

Changing gear to save energyAn effective way of saving is to change in ad-vance to a higher gear. Running the engine athigh rpm in the lower gears uses an unneces-sary amount of fuel.

Manual transmission: shift up from first tosecond gear as soon as possible. In any case,we recommend that you change to a highergear upon reaching 2,000 rpm. Choosing theright gear enables fuel savings. Select thehighest possible gear appropriate for thedriving situation (the engine should continuefunctioning with cyclical regularity).

Automatic transmission: accelerate gradu-ally and without reaching the “kick-down”position.

Avoid driving at high speedAvoid travelling at top speed, whenever pos-sible. Fuel consumption, emission of harmfulgases and noise pollution multiply dispropor-tionately as speed is increased. Driving atmoderate speeds will help to save fuel.

Reduce idling timeIn vehicles with the Start-Stop system idling isautomatically reduced. In vehicles withoutthe Start-Stop system it is worth switching off

the engine, for example, at level crossingsand at traffic lights that remain red for longperiods of time. When an engine has reachedoperating temperature, and depending onthe cylinder capacity, keeping it switched offfor a minimum of about 5 seconds alreadysaves more than the amount of fuel necessa-ry for restarting.

The engine takes a long time to warm upwhen it is idling. Mechanical wear and pollu-tant emissions are also especially high duringthis initial warm-up phase. It is therefore bestto drive off immediately after starting the en-gine. Avoid running the engine at high speed.

Regular maintenanceRegular servicing helps in saving fuel evenbefore the engine is started. A well-servicedengine gives you the benefit of improved fuelefficiency as well as maximum reliability andan enhanced resale value. A badly servicedengine can consume up to 10% more fuelthan necessary.

Avoid short journeysThe engine and catalytic converter need toreach their optimal operating temperaturein order to minimise fuel consumption andemissions.

A cold engine consumes a disproportionateamount of fuel. The engine reaches its work-ing temperature after about four kilometres

264

Start and driving

(2.5 miles), when fuel consumption will returnto a normal level.

Check tyre pressureAlways make sure the tyres are inflated to thecorrect pressures ››› page 359 to save fuel. Ifthe pressure is below half bar, fuel consump-tion may increase by 5%. Due to the greaterrolling resistance, under-inflation also increa-ses tyre wear and impairs handling.

Do not use winter tyres all year round asthey increase fuel consumption by up to 10%.

Avoid carrying unnecessary loadsGiven that every kilo of extra weight will in-crease the fuel consumption, it is advisable toalways check the luggage compartment tomake sure that no unnecessary loads are be-ing transported.

Since the luggage rack increases the aero-dynamic drag of the vehicle, you should re-move it when not needed. At speeds of100-120 km/h (62-75 mph), this will save 12%of fuel.

Save electrical energyThe engine drives the alternator, therebygenerating electricity. This implies that anyincrease in power consumption also increa-ses fuel consumption! For this reason, switchoff any unneeded electrical devices. Devicesthat use a lot of electricity includes the blow-

er at a high setting, the rear window heatingor the seat heating*.

Power management

This system helps to ensure relia-ble starting

The power management controls the distri-bution of electrical energy and thus helps toensure that there is always enough poweravailable to start the engine.

If a vehicle with a conventional electrical sys-tem is left parked for a long time, the batterywill gradually lose its charge because certainelectrical devices, such as the electronicgearbox lock continues to draw current evenwhen the ignition is off. In some cases theremay not be enough power available to startthe engine.

Your vehicle is equipped with an intelligentpower management system to control thedistribution of electrical energy. This signifi-cantly improves reliability when starting theengine, and also prolongs the useful life of thebattery.

The main functions incorporated in the powermanagement system are battery diagnosis,residual current management and dynam-ic power management.

Battery diagnosisThe battery diagnosis function constantlyregisters the condition of the battery. Sensorsdetect the battery voltage, battery currentand battery temperature. This enables thesystem to calculate the current power leveland charge condition of the battery.

Residual current managementThe residual current management reducespower consumption while the vehicle isparked. It controls the supply of power to thevarious electrical devices while the ignition isswitched off. The system takes the battery di-agnosis data into consideration.

Depending on the power level of the battery,switch off the individual electrical devicesone after the other to prevent the batteryfrom losing too much charge and to ensurethat the engine can be started reliably.

Dynamic power managementWhile the vehicle is moving, this function dis-tributes the available power to the variouselectrical devices and systems according totheir requirements. The power managementensures that on-board systems do not con-sume more electrical power than the alterna-tor can supply, and thus maintains the maxi-mum possible battery power level. »

265

Driving

Note● Neither is the power management systemable to overcome the given physical limits.Please remember that the power and use-ful life of the battery are limited.● When there is a risk that the vehicle willnot start, the alternator power failure orlow battery charge level warning lamp willbe shown ››› page 124.

Flat battery

Starting ability has first priority.

Short trips, city traffic and low temperaturesall place a heavy load on the battery. Inthese conditions a large amount of power isconsumed, but only a small amount is sup-plied. The situation is also critical if electricaldevices are in use when the engine is not run-ning. In this case power is consumed whennone is being generated.

In these situations you will be aware that thepower management system is intervening tocontrol the distribution of electrical power.

When the vehicle is parked for long peri-odsIf you do not drive your vehicle for a period ofseveral days or weeks, the power manage-ment will gradually shut off the electrical de-vices one by one or reduce the amount of

current they are using. This limits the amountof power consumed and helps to ensure reli-able starting even after a long period. Someconvenience functions, such as remote vehi-cle opening, may not be available under cer-tain circumstances. These functions will berestored when you switch on the ignition andstart the engine.

With the engine switched offFor example, if you listen to the sound systemwith the engine switched off the battery willrun down.

If the energy consumption means there is arisk that the engine will not start, a text willappear in vehicles with a driver informationsystem*.

This driver indicator tells you that you muststart the engine so that the battery can re-charge.

When the engine is runningAlthough the alternator generates electricalpower, the battery can still become dis-charged while the vehicle is being driven. Thiscan occur when a lot of power is being con-sumed but only a small amount supplied, es-pecially if the battery is not fully charged ini-tially.

To restore the necessary energy balance, thesystem will then temporarily shut off the elec-trical devices that are using a lot of power, or

reduce the current they are consuming. Heat-ing systems in particular use a large amountof electrical power. If you notice, for instance,that the seat heating* or the rear windowheater is not working, they may have beentemporarily switched off or regulated to alower heat output. These systems will beavailable again as soon as sufficient electri-cal power is available.

You may also notice that the engine runs at aslightly faster idling speed when necessary.This is quite normal, and no cause for con-cern. The increased idling speed allows thealternator to meet the greater power require-ment and charge the battery at the sametime.

Engine management andemission control system

Introduction

WARNING● Because of the high temperatures whichcan occur in the exhaust purification sys-tem (catalytic converter or particulate fil-ter), do not park the vehicle where the ex-haust can come into contact with flamma-ble materials under the car (e.g. on grass orat the forest edge). Fire hazard!

266

Start and driving

● Do not apply wax underneath the vehiclearound the area of the exhaust system: Firehazard!

Control lamps

It lights up

Fault in the emission control system. (e.g. faultylambda sensor).Reduce speed and drive carefully to the nearest spe-cialised workshop to have the engine checked.

Flashes

Combustion fault which could damage the catalyticconverter.Reduce speed and drive carefully to the nearest spe-cialised workshop to have the engine checked.

It lights up

Particulate filter blocked ››› page 267.

It lights up

Fault in the management of the gasoline engine.Have the engine checked by a specialised workshopas soon as possible.

The warning lamp (Electronic Power Control)lights up when the ignition is switched on while sys-tem operation is being verified. It should go out oncethe engine is started.

It lights up

Diesel engine glow plug system.The engine glow plug system has been activated.The engine can be started straight away when thelamp switches off.

Flashes

Fault in the management of the diesel engine.Have the engine checked by a specialised workshopas soon as possible.

NoteWhile the control lamps are on , , or there might be faults in the engine,fuel consumption may go up and the en-gine might lose power.

Catalytic converter

To maintain the useful life of the catalyticconverter● Use only unleaded petrol with petrol en-gines, as lead damages the catalytic con-verter.● Do not let the fuel get too low in the tank.● For engine oil changes, do not replenishwith too much engine oil ››› page 352, Top-ping up engine oil.● Never tow the vehicle to start it, use jumpleads if necessary ››› page 60.

If you notice misfiring, uneven running or lossof power when the vehicle is moving, reducespeed immediately and have the vehicle in-spected at the nearest specialised workshop.In general, the exhaust warning lamp willlight up when any of the described symptomsoccur. If this happens, unburnt fuel can enterthe exhaust system and escape into the envi-ronment. The catalytic converter can also bedamaged by overheating.

CAUTIONNever run the fuel tank completely dry be-cause the irregularity of the fuel supplymay cause ignition problems. This allowsunburnt fuel to enter the exhaust system,which could cause overheating and dam-age the catalytic converter.

For the sake of the environmentEven when the emission control system isworking perfectly, there may be a smell ofsulphur from the exhaust gas under someconditions. This depends on the sulphurcontent of the fuel used. Quite often theproblem can be solved by changing to an-other brand of fuel.

Particulate filter

The particulate filter eliminates most of thesoot from the exhaust gas system. Under »

267

Driving

normal driving conditions, the filter cleans it-self. The particulate filter is cleaned automat-ically without need for indication by thewarning lamp . This may be noticed be-cause the engine idle speed increases andan odour may be detected.

If automatic filter purification cannot be car-ried out (because only short trips are taken,for example), soot will accumulate on the fil-ter and the particulate filter warning lamp will switch on.

Facilitate the automatic filter cleaning proc-ess by driving in the following manner:

● Drive for approximately 15 minutes at aminimum speed of 60 km/h (37 mph) in 4th or5th gear (automatic gearbox: S gear range).● Maintain the engine speed at approximate-ly 2,000 rpm.

The rise in temperature causes the soot onthe filter to burn. On completion of the clean-ing the warning lamp will switch off. If thewarning lamp does not switch off, go immedi-ately to a specialised workshop to rectify theproblem.

Driving tips

Driving on flooded roads

To prevent damage to the vehicle when driv-ing through water, for example, along a floo-ded road, please observe the following:

● The water should never come above thelower edge of the bodywork.● Drive at pedestrian speed.

WARNINGAfter driving through water, mud, sludge,etc., the braking effect can be delayedslightly due to moisture build-up on thediscs and brake pads. Applying the brakescarefully several times will remove themoisture and restore the full braking effect.

CAUTION● Driving through flooded areas may se-verely damage vehicle components suchas the engine, transmission, running gear orelectrical system.● Whenever driving through water, theStart-Stop system* must be switched off››› page 270.

Note● Check the depth of the water before en-tering the flooded zone.

● Do not stop in the water, drive in reverse,or stop the engine in any situation.● Note that vehicles travelling in the oppo-site direction may splash water that couldexceed the maximum permitted waterheight for your vehicle.● Avoid driving through salt water (corro-sion).

Total traction (4Drive)3 Valid for vehicles: 4Drive all-wheel drive

On four-wheel drive models, the engine pow-er is distributed to all four wheels

General notesOn four-wheel drive vehicles, the enginepower is distributed to all four wheels. Thedistribution of power is controlled automati-cally according to your driving style and theroad conditions. Also see ››› page 250.

The four-wheel drive is specially designed tocomplement the superior engine power. Thiscombination gives the vehicle exceptionalhandling and performance capabilities, bothon normal roads and in more difficult condi-tions, such as snow and ice. Even so (or per-haps especially for this reason), it is importantto observe certain safety points ››› .

268

Start and driving

Winter tyresThanks to four-wheel drive, your vehicle willhave plenty of traction in winter conditions,even with the standard tyres. Nevertheless,we still recommend that winter tyres or all-season tyres be fitted on all four wheels togive even better braking response.

Snow chainsOn roads where snow chains are mandatory,this also applies to cars with four-wheel drive››› page 58.

Changing tyresOn vehicles with four-wheel drive, all fourtyres must have the same rolling circumfer-ence. Also avoid using tyres with varyingtread depths ››› page 361.

Off-roader?If your SEAT vehicle is not an off-roader: itdoes not have enough ground clearance tobe used as such. It is therefore best to avoidrough tracks and uneven terrain as much aspossible.

WARNING● Even with four-wheel drive, you should al-ways adjust your speed to suit the condi-tions. Do not let the extra safety featurestempt you into taking any risks when driv-ing. Risk of accident!

● The braking capability of your vehicle islimited by the tyres' grip. It is therefore nodifferent from a car without four-wheeldrive. So do not be tempted to drive too faston firm or slippery roads just because thevehicle still has good acceleration in theseconditions. Risk of accident!● On wet roads bear in mind that the frontwheels may start to “aquaplane” and losecontact with the road if the car is driven toofast. If this should happen, there will be nosudden increase in engine speed to warnthe driver, as occurs with a front-wheeldrive car. For this reason you should alwayschoose a driving speed suitable for theroad conditions. Risk of accident!

269

Driving

Driver assistance systems

Start-Stop system*

Control lamps

It lights up

The Start-Stop system is available, the automatic en-gine shutdown is active.

It lights up

The Start-Stop system is not available.

Instructions for the driver on the instru-ment panel displayStart-Stop system deactivated.Start the engine manually

This driver message is displayed when cer-tain conditions are not met during the stop-ping phase and the Start-Stop system can-not restart the engine. The engine must bestarted manually.

Start-Stop system: Fault! Functionnot available

There is a fault in the Start-Stop system. Takethe vehicle to a workshop to have the fault re-paired.

Description and operation

The Start-Stop system helps save fuel andreduce CO2 emissions.

In Start-Stop mode, the engine will automati-cally switch off when the vehicle stops or isstopping; for example when stopping at traf-fic lights. The ignition remains switched onduring the stopping phase. The engine auto-matically switches back on when required. Inthis situation, the light of theSTART ENGINE STOP button stays on1).

As soon as the ignition is switched on, theStart-Stop function is automatically activa-ted.

Further information about the Start-Stop sys-tem can be found on the Easy Connect sys-tem: by pressing the button in the Vehi-cle status menu.

Vehicles with a manual gearbox● Before stopping the vehicle or when it isstopped, put it into neutral and release theclutch pedal. The engine will switch off. Thewarning lamp will appear on the instru-ment panel display. The engine may stop be-fore the vehicle comes to a halt in the decel-eration phase (at 7 km/h).

● When the clutch pedal is pressed the en-gine will start up again. The warning lamp willswitch off.

Vehicles with an automatic gearbox● Use the foot brake to bring the vehicle to astop and keep the brake pedal pressed downwith your foot. The engine will switch off. Thewarning lamp will appear in the display.The engine may stop before the vehiclecomes to a halt in the deceleration phase (at7 km/h or 2 km/h, depending on the vehicle’sgearbox).● When you take your foot off the brake ped-al the engine will start up again. The warninglamp will switch off. In vehicles with the AutoHold* system, when the system is active, theengine will not start if you remove your footfrom the brake pedal. The car starts whenyou press the accelerator pedal.

Basic requirements for the Start-Stopmode● The driver door must be closed.● The driver must have their seat belt fas-tened.● The bonnet must be closed.● The engine must have reached a minimumservice temperature.

1) Only in vehicles with Keyless Access.270


● The reverse gear must not be engaged.● The vehicle must not be on a very steepslope.

The system can interrupt the Start-Stopmode frequently for different reasons.

The engine does not switch offBefore the stopping phase, the system verifieswhether certain conditions are met. The en-gine does not switch off, in the following sit-uations for example:

● The engine has not yet reached the mini-mum required temperature for the Start-Stopmode.● The interior temperature selected for the airconditioner has not yet been reached.● The interior temperature is very high/low.● Defrost function button activated››› page 43.● The parking aid* is switched on.● The battery is very low.● The steering wheel is overly turned or is be-ing turned.● If there is a danger of misting.● After engaging reverse gear.● In case of a very steep gradient.

The indication is shown on the instrumentpanel display, and in addition, the driver infor-mation system* shows, .

The engine starts by itselfDuring a stopping phase the normal Start-Stop mode can be interrupted in the followingsituations: The engine restarts by itself with-out involvement from the driver.

● The interior temperature differs from thevalue selected on the air conditioner.● Defrost function button activated››› page 43.● The brake has been pressed several timesconsecutively.● The battery is too low.● High power consumption.

Additional information related to the auto-matic gearboxThe engine stops when the selector lever is inthe positions P, D, N and S, in addition to whenin manual mode. With the selector lever in po-sition P, the engine will also remain switchedoff when you take your foot off the brakepedal. In order to start the engine up againthe accelerator must be pressed, or anothergear engaged or the brake released.

If the selector lever is placed in position R dur-ing the stopping phase, the engine will startup again.

Change from position D to P to prevent theengine from accidentally starting whenchanging and passing by position R.

Additional information about vehicles withAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)In vehicles with ACC function, the engine willstart up again in certain operating conditionsif the radar sensor detects that the vehicleahead drives off again.

WARNING● Never switch the engine off until the vehi-cle is stationary. The brake servo and pow-er steering functions will not be completelycovered under warranty. More force mayalso be needed to turn the steering wheelor to brake. As you cannot steer and brakein the normal manner, there is a greater riskof accidents and serious injury.● Never remove the key from the ignition ifthe vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, thesteering could lock making it impossible tosteer the vehicle.● To avoid injury, make sure that the Start-Stop system is switched off when workingin the engine compartment ››› page 272.

CAUTIONThe Start-Stop system must always beswitched off when driving through floodedareas ››› page 272.

Note● In vehicles with an automatic gearbox,you can control whether the engine should »

271

Driving

switch off or not by reducing or increasingthe brake force applied. While the vehicleremains stopped, the engine will not stop ifthe brake pedal is slightly pressed, in trafficjams with frequent stopping and startingfor example. As soon as strong pressure isapplied to the brake pedal, the engine willstop.● In vehicles with manual gearbox, duringthe stopping phases the brake pedal mustremain depressed to prevent the vehiclefrom moving.● If the engine “stalls” in vehicles withmanual gearbox, it can be directly startedup again by immediately pressing theclutch pedal.● In vehicles with an automatic gearbox, ifthe selector lever is placed in position D, Nor S after engaging reverse gear, the vehi-cle must be driven at a speed faster than 10km/h (6 mph) for the system to return toconditions in which the engine can be stop-ped.

Manually switching on/off theStart-Stop system

Fig. 248 Centre console: Start-Stop systembutton.

If you do not wish to use the system, you canswitch it off manually.

● To manually switch on/off the Start-Stopsystem, press the button ››› Fig. 248.

The button symbol remains lit up yellowwhen the system is switched off.

NoteThe system is automatically switched oneach time the engine is deliberately stop-ped during a stopping phase. The enginewill start automatically.

Hill Descent Control (HDC)

Control lamps3 Valid for vehicles: 4Drive all-wheel drive

It lights up white

Hill Descent Control is active.

It lights up grey

Hill Descent Control is not active. The system isswitched on, but is not adjusting.

Some control and warning lamps will light upbriefly when the ignition is switched on tocheck certain functions. They will switch offafter a few seconds.



Hill Descent Control limits the speed on steepdescents by automatically braking all fourwheels, both when moving forward and in re-verse. As the anti-lock brake system remainsactive, it prevents the wheels from locking. Invehicles with manual transmission, the HillDescent Control adapts the theoretical

272


speed without slowing the engine below itsidling speed.

After starting the descent of a slope below30 km/h (18 mph), speed is limited to a mini-mum of 2 km/h (1 mph) and a maximum of30 km/h (18 mph). When appropriate, thedriver may increase or decrease the speedwithin the limit by pressing the accelerator orthe brake. At this point the function is interrup-ted and, if necessary, it is then reactivated.

Even so, it is imperative that the surface guar-antees sufficient adhesion. For this reason,the Hill Descent Control will not fulfil its func-tion when, for example, descending a slopewith a frozen or slippery surface.

Hill Descent Control is available when thedash panel display shows the message .

Hill Descent Control automatically intervenesif the following conditions are met:

● The vehicle engine is running.● The Offroad driving profile has been selec-ted ››› page 304. Driving at a speed below 30km/h (18 mph) (the message is shown onthe dash panel display).● The slope of the descent is at least 10%when driving forward and 9% when driving inreverse.● The brake and the accelerator are notpressed.

Hill Descent Control is deactivated on press-ing the brake and the accelerator or if theslope is below 5%. The function may be dis-connected manually in the Easy Connectsystem by pressing the button > HDCfunction button ››› Fig. 50.

WARNINGAlways be ready to brake. Otherwise, anaccident could occur and cause injury.● Hill Descent Control is only an auxiliarysystem that in some situations may not suf-ficiently brake the vehicle when goingdown a slope.● The speed of the vehicle may increasedespite the intervention of Hill DescentControl.

Auto Hold Function


Fig. 249 In the lower part of the centre con-sole: Auto Hold function button.

The control light of the ››› Fig. 249 buttonremains on when the Auto Hold function isconnected.

Once connected, the Auto Hold function as-sists the driver in keeping the vehicle station-ary at repeated intervals or for a certain peri-od of time with the engine running, for exam-ple, when going up a slope, when stopped attraffic lights or in heavy traffic with intermit-tent stops.

When connected, the Auto Hold function au-tomatically prevents the vehicle from rollingwhen stationary without pressing the brakepedal. »

273

Driving

After detecting that the vehicle is stationaryand the brake pedal has been released, theAuto Hold function holds the vehicle. The driv-er can lift their foot off the brake pedal.

When the driver touches the acceleratorpedal or accelerates slightly to continue driv-ing, the Auto Hold function releases the brake.The vehicle moves according to the slope ofthe road.

If the vehicle is stationary and one of the con-ditions required by the Auto Hold function isimpaired, it disconnects itself and the button'scontrol light goes out ››› Fig. 249. The elec-tronic parking brake connects automatically,if necessary, to park the vehicle safely ››› .

Conditions for keeping the vehicle station-ary with the Auto Hold function● The driver door must be closed.● The driver's seat belt must be fastened.● The engine is running.

Switching the Auto Hold function on andoffPress the button ››› . The control lamp onthe button goes out when the Auto Hold func-tion is switched off.

Automatically engaging and disengagingthe Auto Hold functionIf the Auto Hold function was switched on withthe button before disengaging the ignition,the function will remain on after the ignition isre-engaged.

If the Auto Hold function was not switched on,it will automatically remain off next time theignition is engaged.

The Auto Hold function is automaticallyswitched on if the following conditions aremet:

All conditions must be met at the sametime ››› :

Manual gearbox Automatic gear-box

1. The vehicle is kept stationary with the brakepedal on a flat surface or on a slope.

2. The engine rotates “correctly”.

Upon pressing theclutch and acceler-ating at the sametime, the brake re-leases gradually.

Upon accelerating,the brake releasesgradually.

The Auto Hold function is automaticallyturned off if the following conditions aremet:

Manual gearbox Automatic gear-box

1.If any of the conditions mentioned on

››› page 274, Conditions for keeping the ve-hicle stationary with the Auto Hold function

are no longer met.

2. If the engine is running irregularly or an anom-aly is detected.

3. If the engine is turnedoff or stalls.

If the engine is switch-ed off.

4.The clutch and the

accelerator arepressed at the same

time.

If the accelerator ispressed.

5.

If any of the tyres hasonly minimal contactwith the ground, e.g.

in the case of axle ar-ticulation.

WARNINGThe smart technology incorporated intothe Auto Hold function cannot defy thelaws of physics; it only works within the lim-its of the system. The greater convenienceprovided by the Auto Hold function shouldnever tempt you to take any risk that maycompromise safety.

274


● Never leave the vehicle running and withthe Auto Hold function switched on.● The Auto Hold function cannot alwayskeep the vehicle stationary uphill or down-hill or stop it sufficiently, for example, onslippery or frozen surfaces.

NoteBefore entering a car wash, always switchoff the Auto Hold function, because if theelectronic parking brake is automaticallyconnected, it may cause damage.

Cruise control system(CCS)*

Control lamp

It lights up green

The Cruise Control System (GRA) is switched on andactive.

OR: The Adaptive Cruise Control system (CCS) isswitched on and active.

OR: the speed limiter is switched on and active.

Several warning and control lamps light upfor a few seconds when the ignition is switch-ed on, signalling that the function is being

verified. They will switch off after a few sec-onds.


Cruise control operation

Fig. 250 Instrument panel display: CCS statusindications.


The cruise control system (CCS) is able tomaintain the set speed from 20 km/h (15mph).

The CSS only reduces vehicle speed byceasing to accelerate, not by actively brakingthe vehicle ››› .

Displayed on the CCS screenStatus Fig. 250:

CCS temporarily switched off. The setspeed is displayed in small or darkenedfigures.System error. Contact a specialisedworkshop.CCS switched on. The speed memory isempty.The CCS is switched on. The set speed isdisplayed in large figures.

Changing gear in CCS modeThe CCS decelerates as soon as the clutchpedal is pressed, intervening again automati-cally after a gear is engaged.

Travelling down hills with the CCSWhen travelling down hills the CCS cannotmaintain a constant speed. Slow the vehicledown using the brake pedal and reducegears if required.

Automatic offThe cruise control system (CCS) is switchedoff automatically or temporarily: »

A

B

C

D

275

Driving

● If the system detects a fault that could af-fect the working order of the CCS.● If you press and maintain the acceleratorpedal for a certain time, driving faster thanthe stored speed.● If the dynamic driving control systems inter-vene (e.g. ASR or ESC).● If the airbag is triggered.

WARNINGUse of the cruise control could cause acci-dents and severe injuries if it is not possibleto drive at a constant speed maintainingthe safety distance.● Do not use the cruise control in heavytraffic, if the distance from the vehicle infront is insufficient, on steep roads, withseveral bends or in slippery circumstances(snow, ice, rain or loose gravel), or on floo-ded roads.● Never use the CCS when driving off-roador on unpaved roads.● Always adapt your speed and the dis-tance to the vehicles ahead in line with visi-bility, weather conditions, the condition ofthe road and the traffic situation.● To avoid unexpected operation of thecruise control system, turn it off every timeyou finish using it.● It is dangerous to use a set speed which istoo high for the prevailing road, traffic orweather conditions.

● When travelling down hills, the CCS can-not maintain a constant speed. The vehicletends to accelerate under its own weight.Select a lower gear or use the foot brake toslow the vehicle.


Speed limiter

Control lamp

It lights up green

The speed limiter is switched on and active.

Flashes green

The speed set by the speed limiter has been excee-ded.

It lights up

The adaptive cruise control (ACC) and the speedlimiter are active.

Some warning and control lamps will light upbriefly when the ignition is switched on tocheck certain functions. They will switch offafter a few seconds.


Display indications

Fig. 251 On the instrument panel display: indi-cations of the speed limiter status.

The speed limiter helps avoid exceeding aspeed individually programmed upwards ofapproximately 30 km/h (19 mph) driving inforwards gears ›››

Display messages on the speed limiterStatus ››› Fig. 251:

The speed limiter is active. The last speedset is displayed in large figures.The speed limiter is not active. The lastspeed set is displayed in small or dark-ened figures.

A

B

276


The speed limiter is switched off. The totalmileage is displayed.

WARNINGAfter use, always switch off the speed limit-er to prevent the speed being regulatedagainst your wishes.● The speed limiter does not relieve thedriver of their responsibility to drive at theappropriate speed. Do not drive at highspeed if not necessary.● Using the speed limiter under adverseweather conditions is dangerous and can

C cause serious accidents, e.g. aquaplaning,snow, ice, leaves, etc. Only use the speedlimiter when the status of the road and theweather conditions allow it.● When driving downhill, the speed limitercannot limit the vehicle speed. Its speedwill increase due to its own weight. In thiscase, select a lower gear or use the footbrake to slow the vehicle.

Note● Different versions of the instrument panelare available and therefore the versionsand instructions on the display may vary.● If when switching the ignition off, thecruise control system (CCS), the adaptivecruise control (ACC) or the speed limiter

were switched on, then the cruise controlsystem or the adaptive cruise control willautomatically switch themselves on whenthe ignition is back on. However, no speedwill be stored. The last set speed of thespeed limiter will be stored.

277

Driving

Operating the speed limiter

Fig. 252 On the left of the steering column:control and buttons to operate the speed limit-er.

Fig. 253 On the left of the steering column:third lever for operating the speed limiter.

Function Position of the turn signal lever ››› Fig. 252 or the thirdlever ››› Fig. 253 Effect

Switching on the speed limiter Move controller 1 of the turn signal lever to the position and pressbutton 2 or move the third lever forward and press button 2 .

The system switches on. The last set speed of the speedlimiter is stored. It does not take effect yet.

Switching between the speed limiterand cruise control (CCS) or the adap-tive cruise control (ACC) (with thespeed limiter switched on)

Press button 2 on the turn signal lever or button 2 on the third lever It switches between the speed limiter and the CCS or theadaptive cruise control (ACC).

Activating the speed limiter Press the button 3 on the turn signal lever or button 1 on the thirdlever.

The current speed is stored as the maximum speed andthe limiter is switched on.

Temporarily switching off the speedlimiter limitation

Place control 1 of the turn signal lever in position or move thethird lever into position .

The limiter is switched off temporarily. The speed will bestored.

Temporarily switch off the speed limiterlimitation pressing down the accelera-tor (kick-down)

Press down on the accelerator beyond the point of resistance (e.g. toovertake). Surpassing the set speed switches the speed limiter off tem-porarily.

The limiter is switched off temporarily. The speed will bestored. The limiter is reactivated automatically after re-turning to less than the set speed.

278


Function Position of the turn signal lever ››› Fig. 252 or the thirdlever ››› Fig. 253 Effect

Switching the speed limiter on again Press button 3 on the turn signal lever or move the third lever into po-sition .

The speed is limited to the set speed as soon as thespeed you are driving at is lower than the speed set asmaximum.

Increasing the set speed of the limiter

Briefly press button 3 on the turn signal lever in the area ormove the third lever into position to increase the speed in smallincrements of 1 km/h (1 mph) and set it.

The speed is limited to the set valuePress on the third lever to increase the speed in increments of10 km/h (5 mph) and set it.

Hold down the button 3 on the turn signal lever in the area orhold down to increase continuously in increments of 10 km/h(5 mph) and set it.

Reducing the set speed of the limiter

Briefly press button 3 on the turn signal lever in the area orpress 1 on the third lever to reduce the speed in small incrementsof 1 km/h (1 mph) and set it.

The speed is limited to the set valuePress on the third lever to reduce the speed in increments of10 km/h (5 mph) and set it.

Hold down the button 3 on the turn signal lever in the area orhold down to continuously decrease the speed in increments of10 km/h (5 mph), then set it.

Switching off the speed limiter Move control 1 of the turn signal lever into position or the third lev-er into position . The system switches off

The values shown in the table in brackets, inmph, are displayed only in instrument panelswith indications in miles.

Going down slopes with the speed limiterIf the set speed of the speed limiter is excee-ded while driving downhill, soon afterwards

the warning and control lamps ››› page 276 flash and an acoustic warningmay sound. In this case, use the foot brake toslow the vehicle or, if necessary, select a low-er gear.

Switching off temporarilyIf you wish to temporarily switch off the speedlimiter, e.g. to overtake, move control››› Fig. 252 1 of the turn signal lever into po-sition or the third lever into pressurepoint or press button 2 on any lever. »

279

Driving

After overtaking, the speed limiter can beswitched on with the previously set speed bypressing button 3 on the turn signal lever inthe area or by moving the third lever intopressure point .

Switch the speed limiter off temporarily bypressing down the accelerator (kick-down)If the accelerator is pressed right down (kick-down) and the set speed is exceeded be-cause driver wishes to do so, the limiter istemporarily disabled.

To confirm it being switched off an acousticsignal sound once. While the limiter is off, thewarning and control lamp flashes.

When the accelerator is no longer presseddown and the speed is reduced below the setvalue, the limiter switches on again. The con-trol lamp will light up and remain lit.

Automatic offThe speed limiter is automatically switchedoff:

● If the system detects a fault that could neg-atively affect the working order of the limiter.● If the airbag is triggered.

CAUTIONFor automatic switching off due to systemfailures, for security reasons, the limiter is

only completely switched off when thedriver stops pressing the accelerator atsome point or consciously switches off thesystem.

Emergency braking assis-tance system (Front Assist)*

Topic introduction

Fig. 254 On the instrument panel display: ad-vance warning indications.

The objective of the emergency braking as-sistance system is to prevent head-on colli-sions against objects that may be in the vehi-cle’s path or minimise the consequences ofsuch impacts.

Within the limitations imposed by the environ-mental conditions and by the system itself,the function acts in staggered fashion, de-

pending on how critical the situation is. Initial-ly it warns the driver, and if the driver’s reac-tion does not occur or is insufficient, it acti-vates an independent emergency braking.

The function is intended to prevent collisionswith parked vehicles or vehicles in the samelane travelling in the same direction, or withpedestrians crossing the vehicle’s path. Itmay fail to activate in other danger situations.

The Front Assist function is active within arange of speeds between 4 km/h (2.5 mph)and 250 km/h (156 mph). Depending onspeed, traffic conditions and driver behaviour,some of the sub-functions described beloware omitted in order to optimise the system’sgeneral behaviour.

The Front Assist is a driving assistancefunction that can never replace the driv-er’s attention.

Safety distance warningIf the system detects a situation of dangerbecause the vehicle is too close to the vehicleahead, it will warn the driver by means of anindication on the instrument panel display.

The timing of the warning varies dependingon driver behaviour and the traffic situation.

280


Advance warningIf the system detects a possible collision withthe vehicle in front, it may alert the driver bymeans of an audible warning and an indica-tion on the instrument panel display››› Fig. 254.

The warning moment varies depending onthe traffic situation and driver behaviour. Atthe same time, the vehicle will prepare for apossible emergency braking ››› .

Critical warningIf the driver fails to react to the pre-warning(advance warning), the system may activelyintervene in the brakes and generate a briefjolt to warn the driver of the imminent dangerof a collision.

Automatic brakingIf the driver also fails to react to the criticalwarning, the system may initiate independentemergency braking by progressively increas-ing the braking effect in accordance with howcritical the situation is.

Driver emergency braking assistance sys-temFaced with an imminent collision, the systemmay detect that the driver is not braking hardenough to avoid the collision. In this case, itwill automatically increase the braking effect.

Due to certain driving circumstances and thelimitations of its operation, there are somecases in which the system cannot prevent acollision, although it can significantly mini-mise the consequences by reducing thespeed and the force of the impact.


WARNINGThe Front Assist system cannot change thelaws of physics or replace the driver interms of keeping control of the vehicle andreacting to a possible emergency situation.

WARNINGFollowing a Front Assist emergency warn-ing, pay immediate attention to the situa-tion and try to avoid the collision by brak-ing or by dodging the obstacle, as applica-ble.● If the Front Assist does not work as de-scribed in this chapter (e.g. it repeatedlyintervenes unnecessarily), switch it off.● Adapt your speed and safe distance tothe vehicle in front of you at all times to suitvisibility, weather, road and traffic condi-tions.● The Front Assist alone cannot avoid acci-dents and serious injuries.

● In complex driving situations, occasional-ly the Front Assist may issue warnings andintervene in braking unnecessarily, for ex-ample at traffic islands.● If the operation of the Front Assist is im-paired, for example, by dirt or because theradar sensor has lost its settings, the sys-tem may issue unnecessary warnings andintervene inopportunely in the braking.● The Front Assist does not react to animalsor vehicles crossing your path or ap-proaching head-on down the same lane.● The Front Assist does not react to pedes-trians walking in the same direction or ap-proaching head-on down the same lane.● The driver must always be ready to takeover the control of the vehicle.● When the Front Assist causes a braking,the brake pedal is “harder”.● Automatic interventions by the Front As-sist on the brakes may be interrupted bypressing the clutch, accelerator or movingthe wheel.

Note● When the Front Assist is connected, theindications on the instrument panel screenmay be concealed by warnings from otherfunctions, such as an incoming call.● When the Front Assist causes a braking,the brake pedal is “harder”. »

281

Driving

● Automatic interventions by the Front As-sist on the brakes may be interrupted bypressing the clutch, accelerator or movingthe wheel.● The Front Assist may brake the vehicleuntil it stops completely. However, thebrake system does not halt the vehicle per-manently. Use the foot brake!● If the Front Assist does not work as de-scribed in this chapter (e.g. in intervenesseveral times unnecessarily), switch it off.Have the system checked by a specialisedworkshop. SEAT recommends visiting aSEAT dealership.

Radar sensor

Fig. 255 On the front behind the SEAT badge:radar sensor.

On the front behind the SEAT badge, a radarsensor has been installed to capture the traf-fic situation ››› Fig. 255.

The radar sensor's visibility may be impairedby dirt, mud or snow, or by environmental in-fluences such as rain or mist. In this case, theFront Assist does not work. The instrumentpanel displays the following message: FrontAssist: No sensor vision! If necessaryclean the radar sensor ››› .

When the radar sensor begins to operateproperly again, the Front Assist will automati-cally be available again. The message willdisappear from the instrument panel display.

Front Assist operation may be affected by astrong radar reverse reflection. This may oc-cur, for example, in a closed car park or dueto the presence of metallic objects (e.g. railson the road or sheets used in road works).

The area in front of and around the radarsensor should not be covered with adhesives,additional or similar headlights, as this maynegatively affect Front Assist operation.

If the front of the vehicle is not properly re-paired or structural modifications are madeto it, for example if the suspension is lowered,Front Assist operation may be affected. SEATrecommends visiting a SEAT dealership forthis purpose.

CAUTIONIf you have the sensation that the radarsensor is damaged or has lost its settings,disconnect the Front Assist. This will avoidpossible dangerous situations caused by asystem malfunction. If this occurs have itadjusted.● The sensor may become damaged orlose its settings when knocked, for exam-ple, during a parking manoeuvre. This maycompromise the system's efficacy or dis-connect it.● Repairs to the radar sensor require spe-cialist knowledge and special tools. SEATrecommends visiting a SEAT dealership forthis purpose.● Clean away the snow with a brush andthe ice preferably with a solvent-free de-icer spray.

282


Operating the Emergency brakingassistance system (Front Assist)

Fig. 256 On the screen of the instrument panelFront Assist switched off message.

The Front Assist is active whenever the igni-tion is switched on.

When the Front Assist is switched off, so tooare the advance warning function (pre warn-ing) and the distance warning.

SEAT recommends leaving the Front Assist al-ways switched on. Exceptions ››› page 283,Switching the Front Assist off temporarilyin the following situations.

Switching the Front Assist on and offWith the ignition switched on, the Front Assistcan be switched on and off as follows:● Select the corresponding menu option us-ing the button for the driver assistance sys-tems ››› page 124.

● OR: switch the system on and off in EasyConnect using the button SETTINGS >Driver assistance button››› page 36.

When Front Assist is switched off, the instru-ment panel will inform that it has beenswitched off with the following indicator ››› Fig. 256.

Activating or deactivating the pre-warning(advance warning)The pre-warning function (advance warning)can be switched on or off in the Easy Con-nect system with the button > SETTINGSDriver assistance function button››› page 36.

The system will store the setting for the nexttime the ignition is switched on.

SEAT recommends keeping the pre-warningfunction switched on at all times.

Depending on the infotainment system instal-led in the vehicle, the advance warning func-tion may be adjusted as follows:

● Advance● Medium● Delayed● Deactivated

SEAT recommends driving with the function in“Medium” mode.

Switching distance warning on and offIf the safe distance with regard to the vehiclein front is exceeded, the relevant warning willappear on the instrument panel display. In this case, increase the safe distance.

The distance warning can be switched onand off in the Easy Connect system using the button > SETTINGS > Driver assis-tance ››› page 36.

The system will store the setting for the nexttime the ignition is switched on.

SEAT recommends keeping the distancewarning switched on at all times.

Switching the Front Assist off tem-porarily in the following situations

In the following situations the Front Assistshould be deactivated due to the system'slimitations:

● When the vehicle is to be towed.● If the vehicle is on a test bed.● When the radar sensor is damaged.● If the radar sensor takes a heavy knock, forexample in a rear collision.● If it intervenes several times unnecessarily.● If the radar sensor is covered temporarilywith some kind of accessory, such as an ad-ditional headlight or the like. »

283

Driving

● When the vehicle is to be loaded on a lorry,ferry or train.

System limitations

The Front Assist has certain physical limita-tions inherent to the system. Thus, in certaincircumstances, some of the system's reac-tions may be inopportune from the driver'sstandpoint. So pay attention in order to inter-vene if necessary.

The following conditions may cause theFront Assist not to react or to do so toolate:● In the first few instants of driving afterswitching on the ignition, due to the system’sinitial auto-calibration.● On taking tight bends or complex paths.● Pressing the accelerator all the way down.● If the Front Assist is switched off or dam-aged.● If the ASR has been disconnected or theESC activated in Sport mode manually››› page 252.● If the ESC is controlling.● If several brake lights of the vehicle or elec-trically connected trailer are damaged.● If the radar sensor is dirty or covered.

● If there are metal objects, e.g. rails on theroad or sheets used in road works.● If the vehicle is reversing.● If the vehicle over-accelerates.● In case of snow or heavy rain.● In case of narrow vehicles, such as motor-bikes.● Misaligned vehicles.● Vehicles crossing the other's path.● Vehicles approaching in the opposite direc-tion.● Special loads and accessories of other ve-hicles that jut out over the sides, backwardsor over the top.

Adaptive cruise control(ACC)*

Introduction


Fig. 258 Detection area.

The adaptive cruise control (ACC) is an ex-tension of the normal cruise control sys-tem (CCS) ››› .

The ACC function allows the driver to pro-gram a cruise speed of between 30 and210 km/h (18 and 130 mph) and to select thedistance required with regard to the vehicle infront.

The ACC will adapt the vehicle's cruisespeed at all times, maintaining a safe dis-tance with the vehicle in front based on itsspeed.

When driving behind another vehicle, theACC function reduces speed until it is thesame as that of the vehicle ahead and main-tains the set distance between the vehicles. Ifthe vehicle ahead accelerates, the adaptivecruise control also accelerates, going nohigher than the target speed programmed.

284


If the vehicle is equipped with automaticgearbox, the ACC can brake the vehicle untilit stops completely if a vehicle in front of itstops.

The distance programmed should be in-creased when the road surface is wet.

Driver intervention promptDuring driving, the ACC is subject to certainlimitations inherent in the system. In otherwords, in certain circumstances the driver willhave to adjust speed him or herself, as well asthe distance from other vehicles.

In this case, the instrument panel screen willwarn you to intervene by applying the brakeand a warning tone will be heard››› page 285.

WARNINGThe intelligent technology in the ACC can-not overcome the system's inherent limita-tions or change the laws of physics. If usednegligently or involuntarily, it may causeserious accidents and injuries. The systemis not a replacement for driver awareness.● Adapt your speed and safe distance tothe vehicle in front of you at all times to suitvisibility, weather, road and traffic condi-tions.● Do not use the ACC when visibility is bad,on steep roads, with several bends or in

slippery circumstances such as snow, ice,rain or loose gravel, or on flooded roads.● Never use the ACC when driving off-roador on unpaved roads. The ACC has beendesigned for use on paved roads only.● The ACC does not react on approachinga fixed obstacle, such as the tail of a trafficjam, a damaged vehicle or a vehicle stop-ped at the traffic lights.● The ACC only reacts to people if a pe-destrian monitoring system is available. Inaddition, the system does not react to ani-mals or vehicles crossing your path or ap-proaching head-on down the same lane.● If the ACC does not reduce speed suffi-ciently, brake the vehicle immediately byapplying the pedal.● If you are driving using the spare wheel,the ACC system could automaticallyswitch off during the journey. Switch off thesystem when starting off.● If the vehicle continues to move involun-tarily after a driver intervention prompt,brake the vehicle by applying the pedal.● If the dash panel displays a driver inter-vention prompt, adjust the distance your-self.● The driver should be ready to accelerateor brake by him/herself at all times.

CAUTIONIf you have the sensation that the radarsensor is damaged, disconnect the ACC.This will avoid possible damage. If this oc-curs have it adjusted.● Repairs to the radar sensor require spe-cialist knowledge and special tools. SEATrecommends visiting a SEAT dealership forthis purpose.

Note● If the ACC system does not work as de-scribed in this chapter, do not use it until ithas been checked by a specialised work-shop. SEAT recommends visiting a SEATdealership for this purpose.● Maximum speed with the ACC activatedis limited to 210 km/h (130 mph).● When the ACC is switched on, strangenoises may be heard during automaticbraking cause by the braking system.

Symbols on the instrument paneldisplay and control lamps

The speed reduction by the ACCto maintain the distance from thevehicle in front is not sufficient.

Brake! apply the foot brake! Driver interventionprompt. »

285

Driving

The ACC is not currently availa-ble.a)

With the vehicle stationary, switch off the engine andstart it up again. Check the SEAT badge area on thefront ››› Fig. 260 (in case it is dirty or icy or it hasbeen hit). If it is still unavailable, refer to a specialisedworkshop to have the system inspected.

a) The symbol on the instrument panels with colourdisplay is in colour.

The ACC is active.

No vehicle is detected in front. The programmedspeed remains constant.

If the symbol is white: the ACC isactive.

A vehicle in front has been detected. The ACC ad-justs speed and distance from the vehicle in front.

If the symbol is grey: ACC is inac-tive (Standby)

The system is switched on, but is not adjusting.

It lights up green

The ACC is active.



Display indications

Fig. 259 On the instrument panel display: (A)ACC inactive (Standby). (B) ACC active.

Status displayIndications on the display ››› Fig. 259:

Vehicle ahead detected. ACC is not ac-tive and is not regulating your speed.Distance from the vehicle ahead. ACC isnot active and is not regulating your dis-tance.Vehicle ahead detected. ACC is activeand is regulating your speed.Distance level 2 set by the driver.ACC is active and is regulating your dis-tance based on speed.

NoteWhen the ACC is connected, the indica-tions on the instrument panel screen maybe concealed by warnings from other func-tions, such as an incoming call.

Radar sensor

Fig. 260 On the front behind the SEAT badge:radar sensor.

1

2

3

4

5

286


On the front behind the SEAT badge, a radarsensor has been installed to capture the traf-fic situation ››› Fig. 260.

The radar sensor's visibility may be impairedby dirt, mud or snow, or by environmental in-fluences such as rain or mist. In this case theadaptive cruise control (ACC) does not work.The instrument panel displays the followingmessage: ACC: No sensor vision! If nec-essary, clean the SEAT badge area ››› .

When the radar sensor begins to operateproperly again, the ACC will automaticallybe available again. The message on the in-strument panel screen will switch off and theACC will be reactivated again.

ACC operation may be affected by a strongradar reverse reflection. This may occur, forexample, in a closed car park or due to thepresence of metallic objects (e.g. rails on theroad or sheets used in road works).

The area in front of and around the radarsensor should not be covered with adhesives,additional or similar headlights, as this maynegatively affect ACC operation.

If the front of the vehicle is not properly re-paired or structural modifications are madeto it, for example, if the suspension is lowered,ACC operation may be affected. In this sce-nario, SEAT recommends visiting a SEATdealership.

CAUTIONIf you have the sensation that the radarsensor is damaged or has lost its settings,disconnect the ACC. This will avoid possi-ble damage. If this occurs have it adjusted.● The sensor may become damaged orlose its settings when knocked, for exam-ple, during a parking manoeuvre. This maycompromise the system's efficacy or dis-connect it.● Repairs to the radar sensor require spe-cialist knowledge and special tools. SEATrecommends visiting a SEAT dealership forthis purpose.● Clean away the snow with a brush andthe ice preferably with a solvent-free de-icer spray.

Operating the Adaptive CruiseControl ACC

Fig. 261 On the left of the steering column:third lever for operating the Adaptive CruiseControl.

Fig. 262 On the left of the steering column:third lever for operating the Adaptive CruiseControl.

When the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) isconnected, the green control lamp will »

287

Driving

light up on the instrument panel, and the pro-grammed speed and ACC status will be dis-played ››› Fig. 259.

What ACC settings are possible?● Setting your speed ››› page 288.● Setting your distance ››› page 288.● Connecting and activating the ACC››› page 288.● Disconnecting and deactivating the ACC››› page 288.● Adjusting the default distance level at thestart of your journey ››› page 288.● Adjusting the driving profile ››› page 289.● Conditions in which the ACC does not re-act ››› page 289.

Setting speedTo set your speed, move the third lever loca-ted in position 1 upwards or downwards untilthe desired speed is shown on the instrumentpanel display. The speed adjustment is madeat 10 km/h (6 mph) intervals.

Once you are driving, if you wish to set thecurrent speed as the vehicle’s cruise speedand activate the ACC, press the ››› Fig. 262 button. If you wish to increase orreduce speed by intervals of 1 km/h (0.6mph), move the lever to position 2››› Fig. 261 or press the button, respective-ly.

The set speed can be changed when the ve-hicle is stopped or during driving, as you like.Any modification to the programmed speedwill be shown on the bottom left part of theinstrument panel display ››› Fig. 259.

Setting your distance levelTo increase/reduce the distance level, pressthe rocker switch towards the left/right››› Fig. 262 A .

The instrument panel display shows the mod-ification of the distance level. There are 5 dis-tance levels to choose from. SEAT recom-mends level 3. The set distance can bechanged when the vehicle is stopped or dur-ing driving, as you like ››› .

Connecting and activating the ACCTo connect and activate the ACC, the posi-tion of the gearbox selector lever, the vehiclespeed and the position of the third level of theACC must all be taken into account.

● With a manual transmission, the gearboxselector lever must be in any gear exceptfirst, and the speed must be higher than ap-proximately 30 km/h. With an automatictransmission, the gearbox selector lever mustbe in position D or S.● To activate the ACC, with the third lever inposition 1 press the button or move thethird lever of the ACC to position 2››› Fig. 261. At this point, the image of the

ACC on the instrument panel display willswitch to Active mode ››› Fig. 259.

When the ACC function is active, the vehicletravels at a set speed and distance from thevehicle ahead. Both speed and distance canbe changed at any time.

Disconnecting and deactivating the ACCTo disconnect the ACC move the lever to the0 position ››› Fig. 261 (engaged). An ACCdeactivated message appears and thefunction is totally deactivated.

If you do not wish to disconnect the ACC, justto switch it temporarily to inactive mode(Standby), move the third lever to position 3››› Fig. 261 or press the brake pedal.

It will also switch to inactive mode (Standby)if the vehicle is stopped and the driver door isopened.

Adjusting the default distance level at thestart of your journeyIn wet road conditions, you should always seta larger distance with regard to the vehicle infront than when driving in dry conditions.

The following distances can be preselected:

● Very short● Short● Media

288


● Long● Very long

In the Easy Connect system you can adjustthe distance level that will be applied whenthe ACC is connected using the > SET-TINGS > Driver assistance››› page 36.

Changing the driving profileIn vehicles with SEAT Drive Profile, the drivingprofile selected can have an influence on theACC’s acceleration and braking behaviour››› page 304.

In vehicles without SEAT Drive Profile, the be-haviour of the ACC can also be affected byselecting any of the following drive profiles inthe Easy Connect system:

● Normal● Sport● Eco● Convenience

In this case, you should access the ACC set-tings using the > SETTINGS > Driverassistance > ACC ››› page 36.

The following conditions may lead theACC not to react:● If the accelerator is pressed.● If there is no gear engaged.

● If the ESC is controlling.● If the driver is not wearing his/her seat belt.● If several brake lights of the vehicle or elec-trically connected trailer are damaged.● If the vehicle is reversing.● Driving faster than 210 km/h (130 mph).

Driver messages ACC not available

The system can no longer continue to guar-antee safe vehicle detection and will be de-activated. The sensor has lost its setting or isdamaged. Take the vehicle to a specialisedworkshop and have the fault repaired.

ACC and Front Assist: currentlynot available. No sensor vision

This message will be displayed to the driver ifthe radar sensor's vision is impaired due, forexample, to leaves, snow, heavy fog or dirt.Clean the SEAT badge ››› Fig. 260.

ACC: currently not available.Gradient too steep

The maximum road slope has been excee-ded, hence safe ACC operation cannot beguaranteed. The ACC cannot be switchedon.

ACC: only available in D, S orM

Select the D/S or M position on the selectorlever.

ACC: parking brake appliedThe ACC is deactivated if the parking brake isapplied. The ACC is available once again af-ter the parking brake is released.

ACC: currently not available.Intervention of stability control

The message for the driver is displayed whenthe electronic stability control (ESC) inter-venes. In this case, the ACC is automaticallyswitched off.

ACC: Take action!The message for the driver is displayed if,when the vehicle starts up on a hill with a mildslope, the vehicle rolls back even althoughthe ACC is activated. Apply the brake to stopthe vehicle from moving/colliding with anoth-er vehicle.

ACC: speed limitThe message for the driver is displayed if, invehicles with manual gearbox, the currentspeed is too low for the ACC mode.

The speed to be stored must be at least30 km/h (18 mph). The speed limiter switchesoff if the speed falls below 20 km/h (12 mph).

ACC: available as of the 2ndgear »

289

Driving

The ACC is operational as of the 2nd gear(manual gearbox).

ACC: engine speedThe message for the driver is displayed if,when the ACC accelerates or brakes, thedriver does not shift up or down a gear intime, which means exceeding or not reachingthe permissible engine speed. The ACCswitches itself off. A buzzer warning is heard.

ACC: clutch appliedVehicles with manual transmission: pressingthe clutch pedal for longer abandons controlmode.

Door openVehicles with automatic transmission: theACC cannot be activated with the vehiclestationary and the door open.

WARNINGThere is a danger of rear collision when theminimum distance to the vehicle in front isexceeded and the speed difference be-tween both vehicles is so great that aspeed reduction by the ACC will not suf-fice. In this case the brake pedal should beapplied immediately.● The ACC may not be able to detect allsituations properly.● “Stepping” on the accelerator maycause the ACC not to intervene in braking.Driver braking will have priority over inter-

vention by the speed control or adaptivecruise control.● Always be ready to use the brakes!● Observe country-specific provisions gov-erning obligatory minimum distances be-tween vehicles.

Note● The programmed speed is erased oncethe ignition or the ACC are switched off.● When the traction control system (ASR) isdeactivated during acceleration or else theESC is activated in Sport* Mode(››› page 36), the ACC switches off au-tomatically.● In vehicles with the Start-Stop system,the engine switches off automatically dur-ing the ACC stopping phase and restartsautomatically to begin driving.

Function for preventing overtakingin an inside lane

Fig. 263 On the instrument panel display:ACC active, vehicle detected in an outer lane.

The adaptive cruise control (ACC) has afunction that helps avoid overtaking whiledriving in inside lanes at certain speeds.

If another vehicle is detected travelling at aslower speed in an outer lane, it is displayedon the multifunction display ››› Fig. 263.

To avoid overtaking while driving in an insidelane the system will gently brake, and in ac-cordance with the speed will prevent the carfrom overtaking. The driver can override thisfunction at any time by pressing the acceler-ator pedal. At low speeds the function is inac-tive, for greater comfort in a traffic jam or incity traffic.

290


Deactivating the Adaptive CruiseControl ACC temporarily in certainsituations

In the following situations the Adaptive CruiseControl (ACC) should be deactivated due tothe system's limitations ››› :

● When changing lanes, on tight bends androundabouts, in acceleration and decelera-tion lanes on motorways or in sections withroad works to prevent involuntary accelera-tion to reach the programmed speed.● When going through a tunnel, as operationcould be affected.● On roads with several lanes, when other ve-hicles are driving more slowly in the overtak-ing lane. In this case, slower vehicles will beovertaken on the right.● In case of heavy rain, snow or spray, as thevehicle in front might not be detected proper-ly or, in certain circumstances, might not bedetected at all.

WARNINGIf the ACC does not switch off in the situa-tions described, serious accidents and inju-ries may occur.● Always switch off the ACC in critical sit-uations.

NoteIf you do not switch off the ACC in theaforementioned situations, you may com-mit a legal offence.

Special driving situations

Fig. 264 (A) Vehicle on a bend. (B) Motorcy-clist ahead out of range of the radar sensor.

Fig. 265 (C) Vehicle changing lanes. (D) Onevehicle turning and another stationary.

The adaptive cruise control (ACC) has cer-tain physical limitations inherent in the sys-tem. For example, certain reactions of theACC, in certain circumstances, may be unex-pected or come late from the driver's point ofview. So pay attention in order to intervene ifnecessary.

For example, the following traffic situationscall for the utmost attention:

Starting driving after a stopping phase(only vehicles with automatic gearbox)After a stopping phase, the ACC may begindriving automatically when the vehicle infront drives off ››› . »

291

Driving

OvertakingWhen the turn signal lights up before the ve-hicle begins an overtaking manoeuvre, theACC accelerates the vehicle automaticallyand thus reduces the distance from the vehi-cle in front.

When the vehicle enters the overtaking lane,if the ACC does not detect another vehicle infront, it accelerates until it reaches the pro-grammed speed and maintains it.

System acceleration can be interrupted atany time by pressing the brake or moving thethird lever backwards ››› page 287.

Driving through a bendOn entering or exiting bends, the radar sensormay stop detecting the vehicle in front or re-acting to a vehicle in the adjacent lane››› Fig. 264 A In these situations the vehiclemay brake unnecessarily or fail to react tothe vehicle in front. In this case, the driver hasto intervene by accelerating or interruptingthe braking process by applying the brake orpushing the third lever backwards››› page 287.

Driving in tunnelsWhen driving through tunnels the radar sen-sor may be limited. Switch off the ACC in tun-nels.

Narrow or misaligned vehiclesThe radar sensor can only detect narrow ormisaligned vehicles when they are withinrange ››› Fig. 264 B. This applies particularlyto narrow vehicles such as motorbikes. Inthese cases, you should brake as necessary.

Vehicles with special loads and accesso-riesSpecial loads and accessories of other vehi-cles that jut out over the sides, backwards orover the top may be out of the ACC's range.

Switch off the ACC when driving behind vehi-cles with special loads and accessories orwhen overtaking them. In these cases, youshould brake as necessary.

Other vehicles changing lanesVehicles changing lanes a short distanceaway from your own can only be detectedwhen they are within range of the sensors.Consequently, the ACC will take longer to re-act ››› Fig. 265 C. In these cases, you shouldbrake as necessary.

Stationary vehiclesThe ACC does not detect stationary objectswhile driving, such as traffic tails or damagedvehicles.

If a vehicle detected by the ACC turns ormoves over and there is a stationary vehicle

in front of it, the ACC will not react to it››› Fig. 265 D. In these cases, you shouldbrake as necessary.

Vehicles driving in the opposite directionand vehicles crossing your pathThe ACC does not react to vehicles ap-proaching from the opposite direction or ve-hicles crossing your path.

Metal objectsMetal objects, e.g. rails on the road or sheetsused in road works, can confuse the radarsensor and cause the ACC to react wrongly.

Factors that may affect how the radarsensor operatesIf laser sensor operation is impaired, due toheavy rain, spray, snow or mud, the ACC isdeactivated temporarily. The relevant textmessage will appear in the dash panel dis-play. If necessary clean the SEATbadge ››› Fig. 260.

When the radar sensor begins to operateproperly again, the ACC will automaticallybe available again. The message on the in-strument panel screen will switch off and theACC will be reactivated again.

ACC operation may be affected by a strongradar reverse reflection, for example in aclosed car park.

292


Trailer modeWhen driving with trailer the ACC controlsless dynamically.

Overheated brakesIf the brakes overheat, for example afterabrupt braking or in long and steep slopes,the ACC may be deactivated temporarily.The relevant text message will appear in thedash panel display. In this case, adaptivecruise control cannot be activated.

Adaptive Cruise Control can be reactivatedonce brake temperature has cooled suffi-ciently. The message will disappear from theinstrument panel display. If the message ACCnot available remains on for quite a longtime it means that there is a fault. Contact aspecialised workshop. SEAT recommends vis-iting a SEAT dealership.

WARNINGIf you do not heed the Press the brakemessage, the vehicle may initiate an invol-untary movement and could crash into thevehicle ahead. In any event, before drivingoff, check that the road is clear. The radarsensor may not detect obstacles on theroad. This could cause an accident and se-rious injuries. If necessary, apply the brake.

Lane Assist system*

Introduction

Fig. 266 On the windscreen: field of vision ofthe Lane Assist system camera.

Using the camera located in the windscreen,the Lane Assist system detects the possiblelines dividing the lanes. When the vehicle in-voluntarily approaches a dividing line it hasdetected, the system notifies the driver with acorrective steering movement. The purpose isnot only to warn the driver, but also to keepthe vehicle inside the lane. This movementcan be over-regulated at any time.

No warning is produced with the turn signalsactivated, given that the Lane Assist systemunderstands that a lane change is required.

Control lamp

It lights up yellow

Lane Assist active but not available.The system cannot accurately recognise the lane.Please see page 295, Lane Assist system is not avail-able (the control lamp is lit up yellow).

It lights up green

Lane Assist system active and available.



293

Driving

Indications on the instrument paneldisplay

Fig. 267 On the instrument panel display: Indi-cation on the Lane Assist system display (ex-ample 1).

Fig. 268 On the instrument panel display: In-dication on the Lane Assist system display (ex-ample 2).

Status displayThe system is active, but not available,either because the minimum speed hasnot been reached or because the lanelines are not recognised ››› Fig. 267 A.The system is active and available, bothlane lines are recognised. The steeringangle is not being corrected at this mo-ment ››› Fig. 267 B.

–

–

The system is operational, the highligh-ted line A indicates that there was a riskof involuntarily crossing the lane line andthat the steering is being adjusted tocorrect the angle ››› Fig. 268 C.The two highlighted lines A light up si-multaneously when both lane lines arerecognised and the Lane Assist functionis active ››› Fig. 268 D.

Operating mode

Steering wheel vibrationThe following situations can cause vibrationin the steering wheel and require the driver totake active control of driving:

● When the steering angle assist value re-quired to keep the vehicle in the lane is higherthan the system’s maximum operating value.● If the system ceases to display the lanelines while assisting with steering.

Switching the Lane Assist system on or offThrough the Easy Connect system● Press the Easy Connect button ● Press the function button SETTINGS >Driver assistance to open the menu.

Or: Using the Driving Assist button on theturn signal lever* ››› page 124.

–

–

294


Lane Assist with lane centring guideThe Lane Centring Guide function is inten-ded to keep the vehicle in the centre of thelane.

If the driver has a tendency to veer slightly offcentre in the lane, the system adapts to driverpreferences.

The Lane Centring Guide function is acti-vated/deactivated in the Easy Connect sys-tem using the button > SETTINGS functionbutton ››› page 36.

Automatic deactivation: the Lane Assist sys-tem can be automatically deactivated ifthere is a system malfunction. The controllamp disappears.

Hands-Off FunctionIn the absence of steering wheel activity thesystem alerts the driver with acoustic signalsand a text message on the dash panel askingto actively take over the steering.

If the driver does not react to this, the systemalso alerts the driver with a little shaking mo-tion through the brakes and, if the vehicle hasit, activates the Emergency Assist function››› page 297.

In vehicles without Emergency Assist, theadaptive lane guidance function will be disa-bled after the corresponding warnings to thedriver.

The lane assist system is active but it is notavailable (the control lamp is lit up yellow)● When driving at speeds below 65 km/h (38mph).● When the Lane Assist system does not de-tect the dividing lines of the road. For exam-ple, in the event warnings indicating roadworks, and snow, dirt, moisture or reflections.● When the radius of a curve is too small.● When no road markings can be seen.● When the distance to the next marking totoo great.● When the system does not detect any clearand active steering movement during a longperiod of time.● Temporarily, in the event of very dynamicdriving styles.● If a turn signal is activated.● With the stability control system (ESC) inSport mode or switched off.

BSD Plus (Lane Assist with Blind Spot De-tector)*The BSD Plus function is achieved by activat-ing the Lane Assist and BSD functions››› page 299. In this case, the Lane Assistfunction expands its functions in the followingway:

If the driver tries to change lane and there is avehicle in the blind spot:

● The lamp flashes in the correspondingrear-view mirror even though the turn signalhas not been activated.● The steering wheel vibrates to warn thedriver of the risk of collision.● torque is applied to correct the steeringand return the vehicle to its lane.

Switching off the Lane Assist system in thefollowing situationsDue to the limits of the Lane Assist system,switch it off in the following situations:

● When more attention is required of the driv-er● When driving in a sporty style● In unfavourable weather conditions● On roads in poor condition● In areas of road works

WARNINGThe intelligent technology in the Lane As-sist system cannot change the limits im-posed by the laws of physics and by thevery nature of the system. Careless or un-controlled use of the Lane Assist systemmay cause accidents and injury. The sys-tem is not a replacement for driver aware-ness. »

295

Driving

● Always adapt your speed and the dis-tance to the vehicles ahead in line with visi-bility, weather conditions, the condition ofthe road and the traffic situation.● Always keep your hands on the steeringwheel so it can be turned at any time.● The Lane Assist system does not detectall road markings. The road surfaces, roadstructures or objects in poor condition canbe incorrectly detected as road markingsunder certain circumstances by the LaneAssist system. In such situations, switch theLane Assist system off immediately.● Please observe the indications on the in-strument panel and act as is necessary.● Always pay attention to the vehicle's sur-roundings.● When the area of vision of the camerabecomes dirty, covered or is damaged, theLane Assist system function can be affec-ted.

CAUTIONIn order to avoid influencing the operationof the system, the following points must betaken into account:● Regularly clean the area of vision of thecamera and keep it in a clean state, withoutsnow or ice.● Do not cover the area of vision of thecamera.

● Check that the area of vision of the wind-screen camera is not damaged.

Note● The lane departure warning system hasbeen exclusively developed for driving onpaved roads only.● If the Lane Assist system does not work asdescribed in this chapter, do not use it andcontact a specialised workshop.● Before starting a journey, verify that thefield of vision of the camera is not covered››› Fig. 266.● Always keep the field of vision of thecamera clean.● If there is a fault in the system, have itchecked by a specialised workshop.

Traffic Jam Assist



Traffic Jam Assist helps the driver keep thecar within its lane and to move in convoy incase of traffic congestion or slow traffic.

Traffic Jam Assist is an additional function ofLane Assist ››› page 293 and combines LaneAssist functions with Adaptive Cruise Control(ACC) ››› page 284. Therefore, it is essentialthat you read these two chapters carefullyand note the limitations of the systems andthe information about them.

Operation of Traffic Jam AssistAt speeds of below 60 km/h (40 mph), TrafficJam Assist can maintain a (temporary) dis-tance preset by the driver with respect to thevehicle ahead and help stay within the lane››› .

To do this, the system automatically controlsthe accelerator, brakes and steering, andslows the vehicle, stopping it fully if neces-sary, when faced with a vehicle in front thathas stopped. It automatically moves off againwhen the vehicle ahead moves.

Traffic Jam Assist is designed only for use onmotorways and wide roads. Therefore, neveruse it in city traffic.

Technical requirements for using TrafficJam Assist● Lane departure warning must be activated:Infotainment button > SETTINGS >Driver assistance > Lane departure

296


warning (Lane Assist) function button››› page 36.● Adaptive lane guidance must be activated:Infotainment button > SETTINGS >Driver assistance > Lane Assist func-tion button.● Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) must beconnected and active ››› page 287.● The speed must be below 60 km/h(38 mph).

Traffic Jam Assist is not active (the LaneAssist control light turns yellow)● If any of the conditions mentioned onpage 296, Technical requirements for us-ing Traffic Jam Assist are no longer met.● If any of the conditions required for opera-tion of the Lane Assist are not met››› page 293.● If any of the conditions necessary for theadaptive cruise control (ACC) to work are nolonger fulfilled ››› page 284.

Situations in which Traffic Jam Assist mustbe switched offDue to the limitations of the system, TrafficJam Assist must always be switched off in thefollowing situations:

● When more attention is required by thedriver.● When driving in a very sporty style.

● In adverse weather conditions, e.g. in caseof snow or heavy rain.● When driving on roads in poor condition.● In sections with roadworks.● In city journeys.

WARNINGThe smart technology incorporated intoTraffic Jam Assist cannot defy the laws ofphysics; it only works within the limits of thesystem. Accidents and severe injury mayoccur if Traffic Jam Assist is used negli-gently or involuntarily. The system is not areplacement for driver awareness.● Adapt your speed and safe distance tothe vehicle in front of you at all times to suitthe visibility, weather, road and traffic con-ditions.● Do not use Traffic Jam Assist in city jour-neys.● Do not use Traffic Jam Assist if there ispoor visibility, for example, in case of snow,ice, rain or loose gravel, or on steep or slip-pery sections or flooded roads.● Do not use Traffic Jam Assist offroad oron roads where the surface is not firm. Traf-fic Jam Assist has been designed for use onpaved roads only.● Traffic Jam Assist does not react to peo-ple or animals or vehicles crossing yourpath or that approach you head-on downthe same lane.

● If Traffic Jam Assist does not reducespeed sufficiently, brake the vehicle imme-diately by applying the pedal.● If the vehicle continues to move when youwish it to stop after a driver interventionprompt, brake the vehicle by applying thepedal.● If driver intervention is requested on thedash panel display, immediately resumecontrol of the vehicle.● Keep your hands on the wheel at all timesto be ready to intervene in the steering atany time. The driver is always responsiblefor keeping the vehicle in its own lane.● Always be prepared to take charge ofdriving (accelerating or braking) yourself.

Note● If Traffic Jam Assist does not work as de-scribed in this chapter, stop using it andcontact a specialised workshop.● If the system is faulty, take it to a special-ised workshop and have it checked.

Emergency Assist


Emergency Assist detects whether there is in-activity by the driver and can automaticallykeep the car within the lane and stop it »

297

Driving

altogether if necessary. This way the systemcan actively help avoid an accident.

Emergency Assist is an additional function ofLane Assist ››› page 293 and combines LaneAssist functions with Adaptive Cruise Control(ACC) ››› page 284. Therefore, it is essentialthat you read these two chapters carefullyand note the limitations of the systems andthe information about them.

Operation of Emergency AssistEmergency Assist detects when the driverceases to perform any activity and repeated-ly requests that he/she regain active controlof the vehicle, through the use of optical andacoustic warnings and by applying thebrakes.

If the driver continues to do nothing, the sys-tem automatically takes over the accelerator,brakes and steering in order to brake the ve-hicle and keep it in its lane ››› . When theEmergency Assist is actively adjusting, thehazard warning lights come on ››› page 154and the vehicle makes slight zigzag move-ments in the lane in order to warn other driv-ers.

If the remaining braking distance is sufficient,if necessary the system slows down the vehi-cle until it stops completely and automati-cally switches on the electronic parkingbrake ››› page 248.

Switching the Emergency Assist on and offThe Emergency Assist is switched on auto-matically when the Lane Assist is switched on››› page 293.

Technical requirements for using the Emer-gency Assist● The adaptive cruise control (ACC) must beswitched on ››› page 284.● The Lane Assist must be switched on››› page 293.● The selector lever must be in the D/S posi-tion or in the Tiptronic selector gate.● The system must have detected a laneseparation line on both sides of the vehicle››› Fig. 268.

The following conditions may cause theEmergency Assist not to react or to switchoff automatically:● If the driver accelerates, brakes or movesthe steering wheel.● If any of the conditions mentioned in››› page 298, Technical requirements forusing the Emergency Assist are not fulfilled.● If any of the conditions required for opera-tion of the Lane Assist are not met››› page 293.● If any of the conditions necessary for theadaptive cruise control (ACC) to work are nolonger fulfilled ››› page 284.

WARNINGThe smart technology incorporated intothe Emergency Assist cannot overcome thelimits imposed by the laws of physics; it on-ly works within the limits of the system. Thedriver is responsible for driving the vehicle.● Adapt your speed and safe distance tothe vehicle in front of you at all times to suitthe visibility, weather, road and traffic con-ditions.● Keep your hands on the wheel at all timesto be ready to intervene in the steering atany time.● The Emergency Assist alone cannot al-ways avoid accidents or serious injuries.● If the operation of the Emergency Assistis impaired, for example if the radar sensorof the adaptive cruise control (ACC) or theLane Assist camera are covered or havelost their settings, the system may inter-vene inopportunely in braking or in steer-ing.● The Emergency Assist does not react topeople or animal or vehicles crossing yourpath or which approach you head-on in thesame lane.

WARNINGIf the Emergency Assist Intervenes inoppor-tunely, serious accidents and injuries mayoccur.

298


● If the Emergency Assist does not operateproperly, switch off the Lane Assist››› page 293. Doing so will also switch offthe Emergency Assist.● Have the system checked by a special-ised workshop. SEAT recommends visiting aSEAT dealership for this.

Note● Automatic interventions by the Emergen-cy Assist on the brakes may be interruptedby pressing the accelerator or brake or bymoving the wheel.● Hazard warning lights that come on auto-matically can be switched off by pressingthe accelerator or the break, moving thesteering wheel or pressing the hazardwarning light switch.● If this occurs, the Emergency Assist maydecelerate the vehicle until it comes to acomplete stop.● When the Emergency Assist is activated,it is only available again after the ignitionhas been switched off and back on again.

Blind spot detector (BSD)with parking assistance(RCTA)*

Introduction


The blind spot detector (BSD) helps to detectthe traffic situation behind the vehicle.

The integrated parking assistant (RCTA) helpsthe driver when backing out of a parallelparking spot and in manoeuvring.

The blind spot detector has been developedfor driving on paved roads.

WARNINGThe smart technology incorporated intothe blind spot detector (BSD) with parkingassistance (RCTA) included cannot over-come the limits imposed by the laws ofphysics; it only works within the limits of thesystem. Accidents and severe injury mayoccur if the blind spot detection system orthe rear cross traffic alert are used negli-

gently or involuntarily. The system is not areplacement for driver awareness.● Adapt your speed and safe distance tothe vehicle in front of you at all times to suitvisibility, weather, road and traffic condi-tions.● Keep your hands on the wheel at all timesto be ready to intervene in the steering atany time.● Pay attention to the control lamps thatmay come on in the external rear view mir-rors and on the instrument panel, and fol-low any instructions they may give.● The blind spot assistant could react toany special constructions that might bepresent on the sides of the vehicle: e.g. highor irregular dividers. This may cause erro-neous warnings.● Never use the blind spot detector withrear cross traffic alert on unpaved roads.The blind spot detector with rear cross traf-fic alert has been designed for use onpaved roads.● Always pay attention to the vehicle's sur-roundings.● Never use the blind spot detector or theparking assistant if the radar sensors aredirty.● The external rear view mirror controllamps may have limited functionality dueto solar radiation. »

299

Driving

CAUTION● The radar sensors on the rear bumpermay be damaged or shifted in the event ofa collision, for example, when entering orexiting a parking space. This may result inthe system disconnecting itself, or at leastpossibly having its functionality diminished.● In order to ensure that the radar sensorswork properly, keep the rear bumper free ofsnow and ice and do not cover it.● The rear bumper should only be paintedwith paint authorised by SEAT. The blindspot detector's functions may be limited orwork incorrectly if other paints are used.

NoteIf the blind spot detector with parking as-sistant does not work as described in thischapter, do not use it and contact a speci-alised workshop.

Control lamps

Control lamp in external rear view mirrors:

It lights up

It lights up once briefly: the blind spot detector is ac-tivated and ready to operate.

It lights up: blind spot detector has detected a vehi-cle in the blind spot.

Flashes

The blind spot detector has detected a vehicle in theblind spot and the turn signal has been turned on inthe direction of the detected vehicle ››› .

For vehicles that are also equipped with Lane Assist››› page 293, a warning to switch lanes will also ap-pear even though the turn signal has not been en-gaged (blind spot detector “Plus”).


If there are no indications from the controllamp in the external rear view mirror, thismeans that the blind spot detector has notdetected any other vehicles in the area ››› .

If the dipped beam is on, then the controllamps in the external rear view mirrors will bedimmed (night mode).

WARNINGIf the warning lamps and the correspondingmessages are ignored when they light up,the vehicle may stall in traffic and causeaccidents and severe injuries.● Never ignore the warning lamps or mes-sages.● Carry out the necessary operations.


300


Blind spot detector (BSD)

Fig. 271 On external rear-view mirrors: blindspot detector display.

Fig. 272 Rear view of the vehicle: radar sensorareas.

The blind spot detector uses radar sensors tomonitor the areas behind the vehicle››› Fig. 272. The system does this by measur-ing the vehicle's distance from other vehiclesand its speed differential. The blind spot de-tector will not work at speeds of less than ap-prox. 15 km/h (9 mph). The system uses opti-cal signals in the external rear view mirrors tonotify the driver.

Indication in the external rear view mirrorsThe control lamp (expanded view) providesan indication in the corresponding externalmirror ››› Fig. 271 regarding the traffic situa-tion behind the vehicle, if it is deemed to becritical. The control lamp of the left-hand ex-ternal mirror indicates the traffic situation to

the left of the vehicle, and the control lamp ofthe right-hand external mirror indicates thetraffic situation to the right of the vehicle.

In the case of retrofitted tinted windows orwindows with tinted film, the indications of theexternal mirrors may not be seen clearly orcorrectly.

Keep the external mirrors clean and free ofsnow and ice, and do not cover them with ad-hesives or other similar materials.

Radar sensorsThe radar sensors are located on the left andright of the bumper and are not visible fromthe outside ››› Fig. 272. The sensors monitorboth the blind spot and traffic behind the ve-hicle ››› Fig. 273, ››› Fig. 274. The range to thesides of the vehicle is a bit larger than thewidth of a lane.

The lane width is not detected individually,but is rather pre-configured in the system.Thus if you are driving in wide lanes or in be-tween two lanes, the indications may be in-correct. Furthermore, the system can detectvehicles driving in the lane next to you (ifthere are any), and can also detect station-ary objects such as dividers, and thus give anincorrect indication.

301

Driving

Driving situations

Fig. 273 Schematic diagram: Passing situa-tion with traffic behind the vehicle. Indicationfrom the blind spot detector in the left-hand ex-ternal mirror.

Fig. 274 Schematic diagram: Situation ofpassing and then moving into the right-handlane. Indication from the blind spot detectorin the right-hand external mirror.

In the following situations, an indication willbe displayed in the external mirror ››› Fig. 273 (arrow) or ››› Fig. 274 (arrow):

● When being overtaken by another vehicle››› Fig. 273 .● When passing another vehicle ››› Fig. 274 with a speed differential of approx. 10 km/h(6 mph). If the vehicle is passing at a consid-

erably higher speed, no indication will be dis-played.

The faster the vehicle approaches, the soon-er an indication will be displayed in the exter-nal mirror, because the blind spot detectortakes into account the speed differential withother vehicles. Thus even though the distancefrom the other vehicle is identical, the indica-tion will appear sooner in some cases andlater in others.

Physical limitations inherent to the systemIn some situations the blind spot detectormay not interpret the traffic situation correct-ly. E.g. in the following situations:

● on tight bends;● in the case of lanes with different widths;● at the top of slopes;● in adverse weather conditions;

302


● in the case of special constructions to theside of the vehicle, e.g., high or irregular divid-ers.

Parking assistant (RCTA)

Fig. 275 Diagram of the parking assistant: de-tected area around the vehicle that is drivingoff.

The parking assistant uses the radar sensorson the rear bumper ››› Fig. 272 to monitor thetraffic crossing behind the vehicle as it backsout of a parallel parking space or as it is be-ing manoeuvred, for example in very low visi-bility conditions.

If the system detects that someone else onthe road is approaching the rear of the vehi-cle ››› Fig. 275, an acoustic alarm is heard.

In addition to the acoustic alarm, the driver isalso informed by means of a visual signal oninfotainment system display. This signal is dis-played in the form of a red strip at the back ofthe image of the vehicle on the infotainmentsystem screen. This strip displays the side ofthe vehicle towards which traffic is approach-ing.1)

Automatic braking to reduce damagesIf the rear cross traffic alert detects thatsomeone else on the road is approaching therear of the vehicle and the driver does notstep on the brake, the system will engage thebrakes automatically.

The parking system helps the driver by auto-matically engaging the brakes to reduce anydamage. The automatic intervention on thebrakes takes place when driving in reverse atapprox. 1-12 km/h (1-7 mph. After detectingthat the vehicle is stationary, the systemkeeps it that way for around 2 seconds.

After automatically braking to reduce dam-age, the system will not be able to automati-cally brake again for approximately 10 sec-onds.

You can interrupt the automatic braking bystepping hard on the accelerator pedal orthe brake pedal in order to regain control ofthe vehicle.

WARNINGThe smart technology incorporated intothe rear cross traffic alert cannot over-come the limits imposed by the laws ofphysics; it only works within the limits of thesystem. The parking assistant functionshould not tempt you into taking any risks.The system is not a replacement for driverawareness.● The system should never be used in limi-ted visibility conditions or complicatedtraffic, e.g., in high-traffic areas or whencrossing multiple lanes.● Be sure to always be aware of the vehi-cle's surroundings, since the system oftenfails to detect things such as bicycles orpedestrians.● The rear cross traffic alert itself will notbrake the vehicle to a complete stop.

1) It is only displayed if the vehicle is equippedwith a parking system.

303

Driving

Using the blind spot detector (BSD)with parking assistant (RCTA)

Activating and deactivating the blind spotdetector (BSD) with parking assistant(RCTA)The blind spot detector with parking assistantcan be switched on and off by accessing theAssistance systems menu on the dashpanel display using the steering wheel con-trols. If the vehicle is equipped with a multi-function camera, it can also be accessed bymeans of the driver assistance systems keylocated on the main beam headlight lever.

Open the Assistants menu.

● Blind spot● Exit Assist

If the verification box on the control panel ischecked , the functionality will be automat-ically activated at ignition.

When the blind spot detector is ready to op-erate, the indications in the external mirrorswill turn on briefly as confirmation.

When the vehicle is restarted, the last adjust-ment in the system will remain active.

If the blind spot detector was automaticallydeactivated, it will only be possible to restartthe system after turning the vehicle off andrestarting it.

Automatic deactivation of the blind spotdetector (BSD)The radar sensors of the blind spot detectorwith rear cross traffic alert will be automati-cally deactivated when, among other rea-sons, one of the sensors is detected to bepermanently covered. This may be the caseif, for example, there is a layer of snow or icein front of one of the sensors.

The relevant text message will appear in thedash panel display.

Trailer modeThe Blind spot detector and the rear crosstraffic alert will be automatically deactivatedand it will be impossible to activate them ifthe tow hitch is electrically connected to atrailer or other similar object.

As soon as the driver starts to drive with atrailer connected electrically to the vehicle, amessage will appear on the instrument paneldisplay indicating that the blind spot detectorand the rear cross traffic alert are deactiva-ted. Once the trailer has been unhitched fromthe vehicle, if you want to use the blind spotdetector and the rear cross traffic alert, youwill have to reactivate them in the corre-sponding menu.

If the towing hitch is not factory equipped,then the blind spot detector and the rearcross traffic alert will have to be deactivatedmanually when driving with a trailer.

SEAT Drive Profile*

Introduction


The SEAT Drive Profile enables the driver tochoose between four profiles or modes, Eco,Normal, Sport and Individual, that modifythe behaviour of various vehicle functions,providing different driving experiences.

In addition, the 4Drive version features theOffroad and Snow profiles.

The Individual profile can be configuredaccording to personal preferences. The otherprofiles have a fixed configuration.

Description

Depending on the equipment fitted in the ve-hicle, SEAT Drive Profile can operate on thefollowing functions:

304


EngineDepending on the profile selected, the engineresponds more spontaneously or more in har-mony with the movements of the accelerator.Additionally, when the Eco profile is selected,the Start-Stop function is automatically acti-vated.

In vehicles with automatic transmission, thegear change points are modified to positionthem in lower or higher engine speed ranges.Additionally, the Eco profile activates the in-ertia function, enabling consumption to befurther reduced.

In manual gearbox vehicles, the Eco profilecauses the gear change recommendation in-dications that appear on the dash panel tovary, facilitating more efficient driving.

AddressThe power steering varies its driving modesand adapts to the profile selected, thus offer-ing the best behaviour for each situation.

Air conditioningIn vehicles with Climatronic, this can operatein eco mode, especially restricting fuel con-sumption.

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)The acceleration and braking gradient of theadaptive cruise control varies according tothe active driving profile ››› page 284.

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)In the Offroad and Snow driving profiles, theelectronic stability Control (ESC)››› page 250 adjusts to adapt to the terrain.

In addition, hill descent control (HDC) is acti-vated in the Offroad profile ››› page 272.

Adjusting driving profile

Fig. 277 Centre console: Driving Experiencebutton.

Fig. 278 Centre console: Driving Experiencebutton in the Cupra model.

You can select the Eco, Normal, Sport, Indi-vidual, Offroad1) and Snow1).

In the Cupra model, the profiles are Comfort,Sport, Cupra, Individual, Off-road andSnow.

The desired mode can be selected as follows:

● Turn the Driving Experience button until therequired profile lights up on the Easy Connectsystem display as well as on the Driving Ex-perience button ››› Fig. 277.● OR: select the required profile on the touch-screen of the Easy Connect system, in themenu that opens up on turning the DrivingExperience button. »


Driving

The features of each profile can be seen bypressing the Profile information button ofthe Easy Connect system display.

In the Individual profile it is possible to con-figure the characteristics of the vehicle usingthe Profile setup button of the Easy Connectsystem display.

An icon on the Easy Connect system displayprovides information about the active profileif it is different than Normal. The selectoridentifies the profile chosen by means of ared LED light.

Valid for all models except for Cupra

Drivingprofile Characteristics

EcoPlaces the vehicle in a particularlylow state of consumption, facilitat-ing a fuel-saving driving style thatis respectful to the environment.

Normal Offers a balanced driving experi-ence, suitable for everyday use.

SportProvides a complete dynamic per-formance in the vehicle, enablingthe user a more sporty driving style.

IndividualIt allows you to personalise theconfiguration. The functions thatcan be adjusted depend on theequipment fitted in the vehicle.

Offroada)It adjusts the vehicle's parametersin order to maintain optimal off-road driving.


Snowa)

It adjusts the vehicle's behaviour fordriving on slippery road surfaces,optimising grip and manoeuvrabili-ty.

a) Only for 4Drive models.

Applies to the Cupra model


Conven-ience

It permits more relaxed and com-fortable driving, for example forlong motorway journeys. Its maincharacteristic is the soft suspen-sion setting (DCC).

SportIt represents the vehicle's defaultbehaviour, suitable for dynamicdriving.

CupraIt gives the vehicle a decidedlysportier nature, and makes for max-imum performance.

IndividualIt allows you to personalise theconfiguration. The functions thatcan be adjusted depend on theequipment fitted in the vehicle.

OffroadIt adjusts the vehicle's parametersin order to maintain optimal off-road driving.


SnowIt adjusts the vehicle's behaviour fordriving on slippery road surfaces,optimising grip and manoeuvrabili-ty.

WARNINGWhen operating SEAT Drive Profile, pay at-tention to all traffic: doing otherwise couldcause an accident.

Note● When the vehicle is switched off it willstore the driving profile that was selectedwhen the ignition key was removed. Never-theless, when the engine is restarted, theengine and the gear will start by default inthe Normal setting. For engine and gear torevert to the desired position, select thecorresponding drive profile again rotatingthe thumbwheel (Driving ExperienceButton) or on the Easy Connect display.● When the vehicle is restarted after usingthe Offroad or Snow settings, the system isalways activated in the Normal profile.● Your speed and driving style must alwaysbe adjusted to visibility, weather, and traf-fic conditions.● The Eco profile is not recommended whentowing a vehicle.

306


Park Assist*

Introduction


The Park Assist system is an additional func-tion of ParkPilot ››› page 316 and helps thedriver to:

● find a suitable parking space,● select a parking mode,● park driving in reverse in suitable perpen-dicular and parallel spaces,● park driving forwards in suitable perpendic-ular spaces,● exit a parking space driving forwards from aparallel space.

In vehicles with a Park Assist system and fac-tory infotainment system, the front, rear andside areas are represented, and the positionof obstacles is shown relative to the vehicle.

The Park Assist system is subject to certainlimitations inherent to the system and its userequires special attention by the driver ››› .

WARNINGThe technology used in the park assist sys-tem involves a series of limitations inherentin the actual system and in the use of ultra-sonic sensors. The use of Park Assist shouldnever tempt you to take any risk that maycompromise safety. The system is not a re-placement for driver awareness.● Any accidental movement of the vehiclecould result in serious injury.● Adapt your speed and driving style at alltimes to suit visibility, weather, road andtraffic conditions.● Certain surfaces of objects and gar-ments do not reflect the ultrasound sen-sors' signals. The system cannot detect, atleast correctly, these objects or peoplewearing such clothes.● Ultrasound sensor signals may be affec-ted by external sound sources. In certaincircumstances this may prevent them fromdetecting people or objects.● The ultrasound sensors have blind spotsin which obstacles and people are not reg-istered.● Monitor the area around the vehicle at alltimes, since the ultrasound sensors do notdetect small children, animals or certainobjects in all situations.

WARNINGQuick turns of the steering wheel whenparking or exiting a parking space withPark Assist can cause serious injury.● Do not hold the steering wheel duringmanoeuvres to park or exit a parking spaceuntil the system requests it. Doing so disa-bles the system during the manoeuvre, re-sulting in the parking being cancelled.

CAUTION● In certain circumstances, the ultrasonicsensors do not detect objects such as trail-er tongues, bars, fences, posts or thin trees,or an open (or opening) rear lid, whichcould damage the vehicle.● Retrofitting of certain accessories to thevehicle, such as a bicycle rack, may inter-fere with the operation of the Park Assistsystem and cause damage.● The Park Assist system uses as a refer-ence parked vehicles, curbs and other ob-jects. Make sure that the tyres and wheelsare not damaged while parking. If necessa-ry, opportunely interrupt the parking ma-noeuvre to avoid damaging the vehicle.● The ultrasound sensors on the bumpermay be damaged or shifted in the event ofa collision, for example, when entering orexiting a parking space.● If you use high-pressure or vapour equip-ment to clean the ultrasound sensors, do »

307

Driving

not apply it directly unless very briefly andalways from a distance of more than 10 cm.● A registration plate or plate holder on thefront with larger than the space for the reg-istration plate, or a registration plate that iscurved or warped can cause:– false detections,– loss of sensor visibility.– cancellation of the parking manoeuvre

or defective parking.● If one of the ultrasonic sensors is dam-aged, the area corresponding to that groupof sensors (front or rear) is deactivated andcannot be activated until the fault is cor-rected. However, you can still use the sen-sors of the other bumper as per usual. Ifthere is a fault in the system, consult a spe-cialist workshop. SEAT recommends visitinga SEAT dealership for this.

Note● In order to guarantee good system oper-ation, keep the ultrasound sensors of thebumper clean, free of snow or ice, and donot cover them with adhesives or other ob-jects.● Certain sources of noise, such as roughasphalt or paving stones and the noise ofother vehicles can induce the Park Assistsystem or ParkPilot to give erroneous warn-ings.

● In order to become familiar with the sys-tem and its functions, SEAT recommendsthat you practice operating the Park Assistsystem in an area where there is not toomuch traffic or in a car park.

Description of the Park Assist sys-tem

Fig. 280 In the centre console, top section:button to switch on the Park Assist system.

The components of the Park Assist systemare the ultrasonic sensors located in the frontand rear bumpers, the button ››› Fig. 280to switch the system on and off and the mes-sages on the instrument panel display.

Prematurely stopping or automatically in-terrupting the manoeuvres for parking orexiting a parking spacePark Assist interrupts the manoeuvres forparking or exiting a parking space in any ofthe following cases:

● Press the button.● The speed exceeds approximately 7 km/h(4 mph).● The driver takes hold of the steering wheel.● The parking manoeuvre does not end within6 minutes from the activation of automaticsteering.● There is a fault in the system (the system istemporarily unavailable).● ASR is switched off.● ASR or ESC intervene with regulation.● The driver door is opened.

To restart the manoeuvre it is necessary thatnone of these things occur and that the button is pressed again.

Special characteristicsThe Park Assist system is subject to certainlimitations inherent to the system. For exam-ple, it is therefore not possible to enter or exita parking space on sharp bends.

While entering or exiting a parking space, abrief signal sounds to prompt the driver to

308


change between forward and reverse gears(depending on the case). In successive ma-noeuvres, the assistant tells the driver tochange gears, at the latest, when the contin-uous audible signal is given (object present ata distance of ≤30 cm) by Park Pilot.

When the Park Assist system turns the steer-ing wheel with the vehicle stationary, the in-strument panel also displays the symbol .Keep the brake pedal depressed while thesymbol remains on the dash panel display to

turn the wheels with the vehicle stopped. Thisway, the system will require fewer manoeu-vres to complete the parking action.

Trailer modeThe Park Assist system cannot be switchedon if the factory-fitted towing bracket››› page 330 is electrically connected to atrailer.

After changing a wheelIf, after changing a wheel, the vehicle stopsentering and exiting parking spaces correct-

ly, the circumference of the new wheel maybe different and the system may need toadapt to it. The adaptation is automatic andtakes place during driving. Making turns slow-ly and in both directions (20 km/h [12 mph])for a few minutes may contribute to thisadaptation process ››› in Introduction onpage 307.

Selecting a parking mode

Fig. 281 Overview of reduced displays for park-ing modes: Parallel parking in reverse. Per-pendicular parking in reverse. Perpendicularparking forwards. »

309

Driving

Fig. 282 On the instrument panel display: dis-play of the assisted parking system with de-creased visibility.

Selecting a parking mode with Park Assistwith prior step in front of the spaceAfter activating the Park Assist system and af-ter detecting a parking space, the display onthe instrument panel proposes a parkingmode. The Park Assist system selects theparking mode automatically. The selectedmode is shown on the instrument panel dis-play ››› Fig. 282. The reduced display of oth-er possible parking modes is also shown››› Fig. 281. If the mode selected by the sys-tem does not correspond to the desired

mode, you can select another mode bypressing the button ››› Fig. 280.

Action

1. The necessary conditions to park with ParkAssist have to be met ››› page 311.

2.

Press the button.

A control lamp on the button lights up whenthe system is switched on. Additionally, theselected parking mode is shown on the instru-ment panel display and the reduced displayshows another parking mode it can bechanged to.

3.

Turn on the corresponding turn signal towardsthe side of the road where you are parking.The instrument panel displays the side corre-sponding to the road. By default, if the turnsignal is not on, it parks on the right in the di-rection of traffic.

4.

If necessary, press the button again tochange to the next parking mode.

Once you have switched to all possible park-ing modes, if the button is pressed again,the system switches off.

Action

5. Press the button again to switch the systemback on.

6.Follow the instructions displayed on the in-strument panel while paying attention to traf-fic and drive the vehicle past the parkingspace.

Special case of perpendicular parkingspace to park forwards without drivingpast first

Action

1. The necessary conditions to park with ParkAssist have to be met ››› page 311.

2.Drive forward towards the parking space whilepaying attention to traffic and stop the vehi-cle.

3.

Press the button once.

A control lamp on the button lights up whenthe system is switched on. Additionally, theselected parking mode is shown on the instru-ment panel display without reduced display.

4. Release the steering wheel ››› in Introduc-tion on page 307.

310


Park with Park Assist

Fig. 283 On the instrument panel display: per-pendicular parking. Finding a parking space. Parking position. Manoeuvring.

Fig. 284 On the instrument panel display: paral-lel parking. Finding a parking space. Park-ing position. Manoeuvring.

Key to Fig. 283 and Fig. 284:Message to move forwardsYour vehicleParked vehicleParking space detectedMessage to parkMessage to press the brake pedalProgress bar

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Progress barsThe progress bar››› Fig. 283 7 and ››› Fig. 284 7 on thescreen of the instrument panel displays therelative distance to be covered. The greaterthe distance, the fuller the progress bar.When driving forward, the content of the pro-gress bar decreases upwards, and when re-versing, it decreases downwards.

Necessary conditions to park with Park As-sist

For parallel parkingspaces

For perpendicularparking spaces

The traction control system (ASR) must be turned on››› page 252. »

311

Driving

For parallel parkingspaces

For perpendicularparking spaces

Do not exceed approxi-mately 40 km/h

(25 mph) when drivingpast the parking space.

Do not exceed approxi-mately 20 km/h

(12 mph) when drivingpast the parking space.

Keep a distance between 0.5 and 2.0 metres whendriving past the parking space.

Length of the space:length of the vehicle +

0.8 metres

Width of the space:width of the vehicle +

0.8 metres

Do not exceed approximately 7 km/h (4 mph) whenparking.

Parking

Do the following:

1.The necessary conditions have to be met topark with Park Assist ››› page 311 and theparking mode must be selected ››› page 309.

2.

Look at the display on the instrument panel tosee if the space has been detected as “appro-priate” and if the correct position for parkinghas been reached ››› Fig. 283 or ››› Fig. 284.

The space is considered “appropriate” if thedisplay on the instrument panel shows themessage to park 5 .

3. Stop the vehicle and, after a brief pause, en-gage the reverse gear.

Do the following:

4. Release the steering wheel ››› in Introduc-tion on page 307.

5.

Please note the following message: Auto-matic steering enabled. Pay at-tention to your surroundings.While you keep watch around you, carefullystart accelerating up to no more than 7 km/h(4 mph).

During the parking manoeuvre, the system on-ly takes charge of the steering. You, as thedriver, have to accelerate, engage theclutch if necessary, change gears andbrake.

6.

Reverse until the ParkPilot continuous signal isheard.

OR: reverse until the instrument panel displaysthe message to go forwards ››› Fig. 283 or ››› Fig. 284 .

OR: reverse until the instrument panel displaysthe message Park Assist finished.

The progress bar 7 indicates the distance tocover ››› page 311.

7.

Press down the brake pedal until the Park As-sist system has finished turning the steeringwheel.

OR: until the symbol on the instrument pan-el display switches off.

8. Select first gear.

Do the following:

9.

Go forward until the ParkPilot continuous sig-nal is heard.

OR: go forward until the instrument panel dis-play shows the message to reverse.

The Park Assist system steers the vehicle for-ward and back until it centres it in the space››› Fig. 283 or ››› Fig. 284 .

10.

For best results, wait at the end of each ma-noeuvre until the Park Assist system has finish-ed turning the steering wheel.

The parking manoeuvre ends when a corre-sponding message is displayed on the instru-ment panel and, in some cases, an acousticsignal sounds.

NoteIf the manoeuvre is terminated prematurelyduring parking, the result may not be thebest.

312


Exiting a parking space with ParkAssist (only for parallel spaces)

Fig. 285 On the instrument panel display:driving off from perpendicular parking.

Key to the Fig. 285:Parked vehicleYour vehicle in reverse gearProgress bar to indicate the distance leftto coverMessage giving the proposed manoeuvreto exit the parking space

Necessary conditions to exit a parkingspace with Park Assist● Only for parallel parking spaces● The traction control system (ASR) must beturned on ››› page 252.● Length of the space: length of the vehicle+ 0.5 metres

1

2

3

4

● Do not exceed approximately 7 km/h(4 mph) when exiting the parking space.

Exiting a parking spaceDo the following:

For parallel parking spaces

1.The necessary conditions to exit a parkingspace with Park Assist have to be met››› page 313.

2. Switch on the engine ››› page 241.

3.Press the button ››› Fig. 280.

A control lamp on the button lights up whenthe system is switched on.

4.Turn on the corresponding turn signal towardsthe road you will enter when exiting the park-ing space.

5. Engage reverse gear or turn the selector leverto position R.


6.

Release the steering wheel ››› in Introduc-tion on page 307.

Please note the following message: Auto-matic steering enabled. Pay at-tention to your surroundings.While you keep watch around you, carefullystart accelerating up to no more than 7 km/h(4 mph).

When exiting the parking space, the systemonly takes charge of the steering. You, as thedriver, have to accelerate, engage theclutch if necessary, change gears andbrake.

7.

Reverse until the ParkPilot continuous signal isheard.

OR: go backwards until the instrument paneldisplay shows the message to go forward.

The progress bar ››› Fig. 285 3 indicates thedistance to cover ››› page 311.

8.

Press down the brake pedal until the Park As-sist system has finished turning the steeringwheel.

OR: press down the brake pedal until the symbol on the instrument panel displayswitches off. »

313

Driving


9.

Go forward until the ParkPilot continuous sig-nal is heard.

OR: go forward until the instrument panel dis-play shows the message to reverse.

The Park Assist system steers the vehicle for-ward and back until it can exit the space.

10.

The vehicle can exit the space when a corre-sponding message is displayed on the instru-ment panel and, in some cases, an acousticsignal sounds.

Take charge of the steering with the turningangle set by the Park Assist system.

11. Paying attention to the traffic, exit the parkingspace.

Automatic braking intervention byPark Assist

Park Assist helps the driver by automaticallybraking in certain situations.

The driver is always responsible for braking intime ››› .

Automatic braking intervention to avoidexceeding the speed limitTo avoid exceeding the allowed speed of ap-prox. 7 km/h (4 mph) when entering or leavinga parking space, the brakes may activate au-

tomatically. After automatically activatingthe brakes, the manoeuvres to enter or exit aparking space may continue.

The brakes are only automatically activatedonce for each attempt to enter or exit a park-ing space. If the speed of approximately7 km/h (4 mph) is exceeded again, the corre-sponding operation is halted.

Automatic braking to reduce damagesDepending on certain conditions, the ParkAssist system can automatically brake thevehicle when faced with an obstacle, brieflyactioning and holding down the brake ped-al ››› . Following this the driver must pressthe brake pedal.

Automatic braking intervention to reducedamage leads to the parking manoeuvre fin-ishing.

WARNINGThe automatic braking intervention by ParkAssist should never tempt you to take anyrisk that may compromise safety. The sys-tem is not a replacement for driver aware-ness.● The Park Assist system is subject to cer-tain limitations inherent to the system. Incertain situations, the automatic brakingintervention may only work in a limited wayor not work at all.

● Always be ready to use the brakes your-self!● The automatic braking intervention willend after approximately 1.5 seconds. After-wards, brake the vehicle yourself.

Parking aid parking and ma-noeuvring (ParkPilot)

Introduction

Assorted assistance systems – which varydepending on the equipment fitted in the car– will help you when parking or manoeuvring:

– Parking System Plus. It assists the driverby visually and audibly warning them aboutobstacles detected in front and behind thevehicle ››› page 316.

– Rear parking aid. It is an audible and visualassistant that warns about obstacles loca-ted behind the vehicle ››› page 320.

WARNING● Always pay attention, also when lookingstraight ahead, to traffic and the vehiclesurroundings. The assistance systems arenot a replacement for driver awareness.When inserting or removing the vehiclefrom a parking space, or when performing

314


similar manoeuvres the driver always as-sumes the responsibility.● Adapt your speed and driving style at alltimes to suit visibility, weather, road andtraffic conditions.● The ultrasound sensors have blind spotsin which obstacles and people are not reg-istered. Pay special attention to childrenand animals.● Always keep visual control of the sur-roundings: use the mirrors for additionalhelp.

CAUTIONParking Aid functions may be negatively af-fected by different factors that may lead todamage to the vehicle or its immediate sur-rounds:● Under certain circumstances, the systemdoes not detect or display certain objects:– Objects such as chains, trailer draw

bars, fences, posts and thin trees.– Objects that are located above the

sensors, such as protrusions in a wall.– Objects with certain surfaces or struc-

tures, such as wire mesh fences or pow-der snow.

● Certain surfaces of objects and gar-ments do not reflect the ultrasound sen-sors' signals. The system cannot detectthese objects or people wearing suchclothes correctly.

● Ultrasound sensor signals may be affec-ted by external sound sources. In certaincircumstances this may prevent them fromdetecting people or objects.● Please note that low obstacles detectedby the system may no longer be registeredby the sensors as the car moves closer, sothe system will not give any further warn-ing. In certain circumstances, objects suchas high kerbs that could damage the bot-tom of the vehicle are not detected either.● If the first warning from the Parking Aid isignored, the vehicle could suffer considera-ble damage.● The knocks or damage on the radiatorgrille, bumper, wheel arch and vehicle un-derbody can adjust the orientation of thesensors. This can affect the parking aidfunction. In this case, have the functionchecked by a specialised workshop.● A registration plate or plate holder on thefront with larger than the space for the reg-istration plate, or a registration plate that iscurved or warped can cause:– false detections,– loss of sensor visibility.

Note● In certain situations, the system can givea warning even though there is no obstaclein the detected area, e.g:

– with rough or cobbled floors or groundwith long grass;

– with external ultrasound sources, suchas cleaning vehicles or other vehiclesequipped with ultrasound systems;

– in downpours, intense snow, hail ordense exhaust gases,

– if the number plate is not perfectly se-cured to the bumper surface,

– or in locations such as the brow of ahill.

● In order to guarantee good system oper-ation, keep the ultrasound sensors clean,free of snow or ice, and do not cover themwith adhesives or other objects.● If you use high-pressure or vapour equip-ment to clean the ultrasound sensors, ap-ply it directly only very briefly and alwaysfrom a distance of more than 10 cm.● Retrofitting of accessories to the vehicle,such as a bicycle rack, may interfere withthe operation of the Parking Aid.● Fitting certain accessories to the front ofthe vehicle, such as a plate holder with ad-vertising, may interfere with the operationof the Park Assist.● In order to familiarise yourself with thesystem, it is advised that you practice park-ing in an area or car park that is free fromtraffic. There must be good weather andlight conditions. »

315

Driving

● The volume and tone of the warnings canbe modified, in addition to the indications››› page 322.● In vehicles without an infotainment sys-tem, these parameters can be modified in aSEAT Official Service or in a specialisedworkshop.● Please observe information on towing atrailer ››› page 322.● The display on the Easy Connect screenshows a slight time delay.

Parking System Plus*

Description

Fig. 286 Represented area.

During parking, Parking System Plus assiststhe driver by visually and audibly warning

them about obstacles detected in front ofand behind the vehicle.

There are ultrasound sensors integrated inthe front and rear bumpers. When they de-tect an obstacle, you are alerted by audiblewarnings and visually on the Easy Connectsystem.

In case of risk of rear or front collision, an au-dible warning will be emitted. You can tellwhether the risk is in front of or behind the ve-hicle by choosing different sound frequencieson Easy Connect.

Make particularly sure that the sensors arenot covered by adhesives, residues and thelike, as this could affect the system's opera-tion. Cleaning instructions ››› page 372.

The approximate measurement range of thesensors is:

1.20 m1.60 m0.90 m

As you approach the obstacle, the time inter-val between the audible warnings will be re-duced. When you reach around 0.30 m thewarning will be constant: do not continue tomove forward (or backward)!

If you maintain separation from the obstacle,the volume of the warning begins to reduceafter four seconds (does not affect the toneof the constant warning).

A

B

C

In order to view the entire periphery of the ve-hicle, the vehicle must be moved a few me-tres forwards or backwards. Thus, the missingareas are screened and obstacles at thesides of the vehicle are displayed››› Fig. 286 C .

Special features of ParkPilot with AreaViewIn the following situations the screened areaon the side of the vehicle is automatically hid-den:

● When a vehicle door is opened.● When the ASR is switched off.● When there is ASR or ESC regulation.● If the vehicle remains stationary for morethan approximately 3 minutes.

Parking Aid operation

Fig. 287 Centre console: parking aid button(depending on the version).

316


Manual connection of Parking Aid● Press the button once.

Manual disconnection of Parking Aid● Press the button again.

Manual disconnection of Parking Aid dis-play (the audible sounds remain active)● Press a button on the main menu of the fac-tory-assembled infotainment system.● OR press the BACK function button.

Automatic connection of Parking Aid● Engage reverse gear or turn the selectorlever to position R.● OR: If the vehicle approaches an obstaclethat is in its forwards path at a speed below15 km/h (9 mph) ››› page 317. The obstacle isdetected from a distance of approx. 95 cm ifthe automatic connection is activated in theinfotainment system. A reduced display isshown.● OR: if the vehicle moves backwards.

Automatic disconnection of Parking Aid● Move the selector lever to position P.● OR: accelerate to approx. 15 km/h (9 mph)or faster.

Temporary suppression of sound in Park-ing Aid● Press the function button.

Change from reduced view to full view● Engage reverse gear or turn the selectorlever to position R.● OR: press the car icon in reduced view.

If necessary, switch to the rear-assist im-age (Rear View Camera “RVC”)● Engage reverse gear or turn the selectorlever to position R.● OR press the RVC function button.

A short confirmation signal will be heard andthe button symbol will light up yellow whenthe system is switched on.

Automatic activation

Fig. 288 Miniature indication of automatic ac-tivation.

When the Plus Parking Aid connects auto-matically, a miniature of the vehicle and thesegments will appear on the left of the dis-play ››› Fig. 288.

Automatic activation occurs when slowly ap-proaching an obstacle located in front of thevehicle. It only operates every time the speedis reduced below approximately 15 km/h (9mph) for the first time.

If the parking aid is switched off using the button, the following actions must be carriedout in order for it to automatically switch on:

● Switch off the ignition and switch it onagain.● OR: accelerate above 15 km/h (9 mph) be-fore reducing speed below this number again. »

317

Driving

● OR: place the selector lever in position Pand then move it from this position.● OR: switch on and off the automatic activa-tion in the Easy Connect system menu.

The automatic activation with parking aidminiature indication can be switched on andoff from the Easy Connect system menu››› page 36:

● Switch the ignition on.● Select: Infotainment button SETTINGS> Parking and manoeuvring function but-ton.● Select the Automatic activation option.When the function button check box is activa-ted , the function is on.

If the system has been activated automati-cally, an audible sound warning will only begiven when obstacles in front are at a dis-tance of less than 50 cm.

CAUTIONThe automatic connection of the ParkingAid only works when you are driving slowly.If driving style is not adapted to the circum-stances, an accident and serious injury ordamage may be caused.

Segments of the visual indication

Fig. 289 Parking Aid display on the Easy Con-nect system screen.

The distance of separation from the obstaclecan be estimated using the segments aroundthe vehicle.

The optical indication of the segments worksas follows:

they are displayed whenthe obstacle 30 cm away from the vehi-cle or further if it is not within the vehi-cle's trajectory or the direction of travelis in the opposite direction to its location,and also when the electronic parkingbrake is activated.

obstacles located in thevehicle's trajectory and which are morethan 30 cm away from the vehicle aredisplayed in yellow.

White segments:

Yellow segments:

obstacles that are less than30 cm away from the vehicle are dis-played in red.

Moreover, with the Media System Plus, NaviSystem or Navi System Plus systems, a yellowtrail indicates the vehicle's expected trajecto-ry based on the steering angle.

Whenever the obstacle is located in the vehi-cle’s direction of travel, the correspondingaudible warning will sound.

As the vehicle approaches an obstacle, thesegments are displayed closer to the vehicle.When the penultimate segment is displayed,this means that the vehicle has reached thecollision zone. In the collision zone, the obsta-cles are represented in red, including thoseout of the path. Do not continue to move for-ward (or backward) ››› in Introduction onpage 314, ››› in Introduction on page 315!

In the event the car is equipped with the TopView Camera system, Park Assist visual guid-ance will appear in accordance with the viewselected in the Top View Camera system.

Adjusting the display and audiblewarnings

The settings for the display and audiblewarnings are controlled via the Easy Con-nect*.

Red segments:

318


Automatic activation on – activates the Automatic activa-tion option ››› page 317.

off – deactivates the Automatic acti-vation option ››› page 317.

Front volume*Volume in the front and rear area.

Front sound settings/sharpness*Frequency (tone) of the sound in the frontarea.

Rear volume*Volume in the rear area.

Rear sound settings/sharpness*Frequency (tone) of the sound in the reararea.

Adjust volumeWith the parking aid switched on, the activeaudio/video source volume will be reduced tothe intensity of the selected setting.

Error messages

When the Parking Aid is activated or when it isswitched on, if a message reporting a Parking

aid error is displayed on the instrument panel,there is a fault in the system.

If the fault does not disappear before discon-necting the ignition, the next time that theparking aid is engaged in reverse, no audiblesignal of the existence of a fault will be is-sued.

If there is a fault in the parking aid system amessage will appear on the instrument panelindicating the error.

If there is a fault in a sensor, the symbol isdisplayed on the Easy Connect display infront of/behind the vehicle. If a rear sensor isfaulty, only the obstacles in area A are dis-played ››› Fig. 286. If a front sensor is faulty,only the obstacles in area B are displayed.


Driving with a trailer

Fig. 290 Parking assist display on the screenwith trailer attached.

In vehicles equipped with a towing bracketdevice from the factory, when the trailer isconnected electrically, the Parking Aid rearsensors will not be activated when reversegear is engaged, when the selector lever isturned to position R or when the button ispressed.

The distance to possible obstacles at the rearof the vehicle and at its sides will not be dis-played on the screen and will not be indica-ted by means of audible sound signals.

The Easy Connect system screen will onlydisplay objects detected at the front, and thevehicle's trajectory will be hidden.

319

Driving

Braking while manoeuvring func-tion*

3 Only valid with Parking System Plus

The emergency braking function is used tominimise damage in the event of a collision.

Depending on the equipment, if the ParkingAid is active, the braking while manoeuvringfunction activates emergency braking when itdetects an obstacle in the vehicle’s path thatcould cause a collision, driving forwards or inreverse.

The function will not brake if the Parking Aid isactivated automatically. For the system tooperate, manoeuvring speed must be be-tween 2.5 and 10 km/h (between 1.5 and 6mph) for the front area and between 1.5 and10 km/h (between 1 and 6 mph) for the rear.

Following an intervention, the braking whilemanoeuvring function will be inactive in thesame direction of travel for 5 metres. Oncethe gear is changed, or the selector lever’sposition is changed, the function will be ac-tive again. The Parking Aid’s limitations apply.

The braking while manoeuvring function iscontrolled in the Easy Connect system withthe button and the SETTINGS > Parkand manoeuvre function buttons.

● on – permits the use of the braking whilemanoeuvring function.

● off – does not permit the use of thebraking while manoeuvring function.

Temporary suppression of emergencybraking● When the function is deactivated with theBraking while manoeuvring button that appears

on the Parking System screen of the EasyConnect system.● Whenever any of the car doors, rear lid orbonnet are opened.

Rear parking aid*

Description

The rear parking aid is an audible and visualassistant that warns of obstacles located be-hind the vehicle.

There are sensors integrated in the rearbumper. When they detect an obstacle, youare alerted by audible warnings and visuallyon the Easy Connect system.

If the Top View Camera* is installed, the rearparking aid will issue an audible warningabout objects near the rear of the vehicle,and the Top View Camera* image will beavailable on the Easy Connect screen, givinga real image of the objects around the car.

Make particularly sure that the sensors arenot covered by adhesives, residues, dirt andthe like, as this could affect the system's op-eration. Cleaning instructions ››› page 372.

The approximate measurement range of therear sensors is:

0.60 m1.60 m

Automatic disconnection of Parking Aid● Move the selector lever to position P.● OR: accelerate to approx. 15 km/h (9 mph)or faster.

Temporary suppression of sound in Park-ing Aid● Press the function button.

Change from reduced view to full view● Engage reverse gear or turn the selectorlever to position R.● OR: press the car icon in reduced view.

As you approach the obstacle, the time inter-val between the audible warnings will be re-duced. When you reach around 0.30 m thewarning will be constant: Do not continue tomove forward (or backward) ››› in Intro-duction on page 314, ››› in Introductionon page 315!

Side area:Central area:

320


If you maintain separation from the obstacle,the volume of the warning begins to reduceafter four seconds (does not affect the toneof the constant warning).

Parking Aid operation

Parking Aid connection● Engage reverse (for manual gears) or setthe selector lever to R (for automatic gears).

Parking Aid disconnection● Place the selector level in position P, N or D(for automatic gearboxes) or disengage re-verse (for manual gearboxes).

Set the lever to the N or D position to maintainthe system active for approximately 8 sec-onds before switching off. During that time,Parking assist will switch off if:

● The selector lever is moved to position P.● OR: the vehicle accelerates to approx.15 km/h (9 mph) or faster.

If the Top View Camera* is installed, rearparking aid will be automatically deactivatedwhen disengaging reverse gear.

Manual disconnection of Parking Aid dis-play (the audible sounds remain active)● Press a button on the main menu of the fac-tory-assembled infotainment system.● OR press the BACK function button.

Temporary suppression of sound in Park-ing Aid● Press the function button. If you have theTop View Camera* system installed, you can-not use the temporary suppression of soundin Parking Aid.

Switch from reduced to full-screen view ifthe rear assist is fitted (Rear View Camera“RVC”)● Press the car icon in the reduced view.

If necessary, switch to the rear-assist im-age (Rear View Camera “RVC”)● Engage reverse gear or turn the selectorlever to position R.● OR: press the RVC function button.

Segments of the visual indication

Fig. 291 Parking Aid display on the Easy Con-nect system screen.

The distance to the obstacles can be estima-ted with the help of the segments at the rearof the vehicle.

The optical indication of the segments worksas follows:

they are displayed whenthe obstacle 30 cm away from the vehi-cle or further if the direction of travel is inthe opposite direction to its location, andalso when the electronic parking brake isactivated.

obstacles located in thevehicle's trajectory and which are morethan 30 cm away from the vehicle aredisplayed in yellow. »

White segments:

Yellow segments:

321

Driving

obstacles that are less than30 cm away from the vehicle are dis-played in red.

Whenever the obstacle is located in the vehi-cle’s direction of travel, the correspondingaudible warning will sound.

As the vehicle approaches an obstacle, thesegments are displayed closer to the vehicle.When the penultimate segment is displayed,this means that the vehicle has reached thecollision zone. In the collision zone, the obsta-cles are represented in red (including thoseout of the path). Do not continue to reverse››› in Introduction on page 314, ››› in In-troduction on page 315!

If you are equipped with the Top ViewCamera*Segments are not displayed when the vehicleis equipped with Top View Camera*.

The Parking Aid system will issue an audiblewarning for objects that are near the rear ofthe vehicle, and the Top View Camera* im-age will be available on the screen, giving areal image of the objects around the car.

Red segments: Adjusting the display and audiblewarnings

The settings for the display and audiblewarnings are controlled via the Easy Con-nect*.

Rear volume*Volume in the rear area.

Rear sound settings/sharpness*Frequency (tone) of the sound in the reararea.

Adjust volumeWith the parking aid switched on, the activeaudio/video source volume will be reduced tothe intensity of the selected setting.

Error messages

When the Parking Aid is activated or when it isswitched on, if a message reporting a Parkingaid error is displayed on the instrument panel,there is a fault in the system.

If the fault disappears before disconnectingthe ignition, the next time that the parking aidis engaged in reverse, no audible signal of theexistence of a fault will be issued.

If there is a fault in a sensor, the symbol isdisplayed on the Easy Connect display.


Towing bracket

In vehicles equipped with a towing bracketdevice from the factory, when the trailer isconnected electrically, the Parking Aid willnot be activated when reverse gear is engag-ed (manual gears) nor when the selector lev-er is turned to position R (automatic gears).

Top View Camera*

Introduction


Using 4 cameras, the system generates arepresentation that is shown on the infotain-ment system display. The cameras are loca-ted on the radiator grille, the exterior mirrorsand the rear lid.

322


The functions and representations of the AreaView system may vary depending on whetheror not the vehicle has ParkPilot.

WARNINGThe image from the cameras does notmake it possible to calculate the distanceto the obstacles (people, vehicles, etc.)precisely, so using them could cause seri-ous accidents and injury.● The camera lenses augment and distortthe visual field and the objects on thescreen are seen differently and imprecise-ly.● Certain objects may not be shown or maynot be shown very clearly, for example,posts or thin rails, due to the screen resolu-tion or if light conditions are insufficient.● The cameras have blind spots in whichobstacles and people are not registered.● The camera lens must be kept free, with-out snow or ice, and should not be covered.

WARNINGThe smart technology incorporated intothe Top View Camera* system cannot over-come the limits imposed by the laws ofphysics and it only works within the limits ofthe system. The greater convenience provi-ded by the Area View system should nevertempt you to take any risk that may com-promise safety. If used negligently or invol-untarily, it may cause serious accidents

and injuries. The system is not a replace-ment for driver awareness.● Adapt your speed and driving style to suitvisibility, weather, road and traffic condi-tions.● Do not be distracted from the traffic bylooking at the screen.● Monitor the area around the vehicle at alltimes, since the cameras do not capturesmall children, animals and certain objectsin all situations.● The use of a number plate may interferein the views shown on the screen, since thecameras' field of vision may be reduced.● The system will probably be unable torepresent all areas clearly.

CAUTION● The camera images are only two-dimen-sional. Due to a lack of spatial depth, ob-jects that jut out or holes on the road, forexample, are more difficult to detect ormay not be seen at all.● In certain circumstances, the cameradoes not capture objects such as beams,fences, posts or thin trees, which coulddamage the vehicle.● The system displays the auxiliary linesand boxes regardless of the vehicle's envi-ronment, no objects are detected. The driv-er is responsible for determining that thevehicle will fit in the parking space.

CAUTIONIn order to guarantee good system opera-tion, keep the cameras clean, free of snowor ice, and do not cover them with adhe-sives or other objects.● Never use abrasive cleaning products toclean the camera lenses.● Do not use hot or warm water to removeice or snow from the camera lenses. Doingso could damage the lenses.

Area View system

Fig. 293 Display of the Area View system: aer-ial view.

There are four different views to choose from: »

323

Driving

Key to the Fig. 293:

Symbol Meaning

A Front camera area

B Right camera area

C Rear camera area

D Left camera area

Exit the current display.

Three-dimensional views

Depending on the equipment: con-necting and disconnecting the Park-Pilot sound.

Adjust the display: bright, contrastand colour.

The aerial view is generated by combiningthe images from all the cameras ››› Fig. 293. The aerial view can be selectedby pressing the vehicle in the area.

Select the corresponding view by pressingthe different areas ››› Fig. 293 A to D of theaerial view or the reduced aerial view.

Conditions necessary for the use of theArea View system● The doors and the rear lid must be closed.

● The image must be reliable and clear. Forthis reason, for example, the camera lensmust be clean.● The area around the vehicle must be clear-ly and totally visible.● The area for parking or manoeuvringshould be a flat surface.● The vehicle should not be loaded veryheavily at the rear.● The driver must be used to the system.● There should be no damage to the vehiclein the camera area. If the position or installa-tion angle of the cameras have beenchanged, e.g. after a rear-end collision, thesystem should be checked by a specialisedworkshop.

Camera image view● Aerial view (bird's eye view): to obtain apanoramic view of the vehicle , three-di-mensional views, from different camera posi-tions.● Front camera (front view): to observe traf-fic ahead of the vehicle (vehicles crossing), for front parallel parking , when ap-proaching an obstacle and in off-road driving.● Side cameras (side view): to view the areaclose to the sides of the vehicle, both on theleft and on the right , or a combination ofboth sides .

● Rear camera (rear view): To observe traf-fic behind the vehicle (vehicles crossing) ,for reverse perpendicular parking , for re-verse parallel parking and for hitching atrailer to the vehicle .

The selected view is displayed on the rightside of the screen. The reduced aerial viewshown on the right side displays the viewframed in yellow. In addition, the right marginof the screen displays the menu options pos-sible and the views (the so-called “modes”)of the camera in question. The active view(mode) at the time is highlighted.

The reduced aerial view can be hidden bypressing the symbol to thus display the se-lected view full-screen.

Instructions for use

Fig. 294 Centre console: button for activat-ing/deactivating the Area View system manual-ly in combination with the parking aid system() or else with the rear ParkPilot system ().

324


Connecting and disconnecting the AreaView system

Manual con-nection of thedisplay:

Press the button ››› Fig. 294once.

The infotainment system screendisplays the aerial view››› Fig. 293. If you press the but-ton when driving above 15 km/h (9mph), the image will not be dis-played.

Automaticconnection ofthe display:

Engage reverse gear.OR: The vehicle moves backwards.

The view of the image of the vehi-cle's rear camera is shown in paral-lel parking mode with the reducedaerial view.

Manual dis-connection ofthe display:

Press the button ››› Fig. 294again.

OR: press a button on the factory-equipped infotainment system, forexample the RADIO button.

OR: press the function button.

Automatic dis-connection ofthe display:

Drive forwards at over 15 km/h(9 mph) approximately.

OR: switch off the ignition. The AreaView system menu disappears im-mediately.

Special characteristics

Examples of optical illusions caused bythe cameras:

The images on the area view system cameras are on-ly two-dimensional. Due to a lack of spatial depth, itis difficult or impossible to make out on-screen anyholes there may be on the ground, objects jutting outfrom the ground or parts protruding from other vehi-cles.

Situations in which the objects or other vehicles ap-pear to be further away or closer than they reallyare:

– On moving from a horizontal plane to a slope.

– On moving from a slope to a horizontal plane.

– If the vehicle is heavily loaded at the rear.

– If the vehicle approaches protruding objects. Theseobjects may be outside the cameras' angle of visibili-ty.

Trailer modeThe Area View system conceals, in the rearcamera area, all the auxiliary guiding lineswhen the factory-fitted towing bracket isconnected electrically to a trailer››› page 330.

NoteIn order to become familiar with the systemand its functions, SEAT recommends thatyou practice handling the Area View sys-

tem in an area where there is not too muchtraffic or in a car park.

Top View Camera system menus(modes)

Fig. 295 Display on the Area View systemscreen: Front camera: off-road view. Rearcamera: off-road view. »

325

Driving


Symbol Meaning

Depending on the equipment: con-necting and disconnecting the Park-Pilot sound.

Showing the reduced display.

Hiding the reduced display.

Exiting the Area View system screen:

Adjust the display: bright, contrastand colour.

Aerial views (bird's eye view)

View On-screen display of all cam-eras

Mainmode

The vehicle and its immediate vicinityseen from above are shown. Dependingon the equipment, the ParkPilot's pathmay also be displayed.

Three-di-mension-al views

The vehicle and its vicinityseen from above are shown.

The vehicle and its vicinityseen from above are shownobliquely.

The vehicle and its vicinityseen obliquely are shown.

Swipe the infotainment system display withyour finger in the direction of the arrows to

change the angle of vision in the three-di-mensional views of the vehicle and its vicinity.

Front camera views (front view)

View On-screen display of the frontcamera

Cross trafficat the front

Left side of the screen: perpendicularstreet to the left.

Middle of the screen: area directly infront of the vehicle.

Right side of the screen: perpendicu-lar street to the right.

Parallelparking

The area in front of the vehicle isshown. Orientation lines are shown togive guidance.

Off-road

The area directly in front of the vehi-cle seen from above is shown. For ex-ample, on a slope, in order to see thearea directly in front of the vehicle.The red line is shown at a distance ofapprox. 0.4 m away from the vehicle.

Side camera views (side view)

View On-screen display of the sidecameras

Right andleft sides

The areas located directly to the sideof the vehicle seen from above arerepresented in order to navigate pos-sible obstacles more precisely. Theorange auxiliary lines are shown at adistance of approx. 0.4 away fromthe vehicle

Left side

The area directly next to the vehicle,on the driver's or front passenger'sside, is displayed, and the blind spotsall along the vehicle can be seen. Theauxiliary orange line is shown at adistance of approx. 0.4 m away fromthe vehicle.

Right side

Rear camera views (rear view)

View On-screen display of the rearcamera

Parallelparking

The area behind the vehicle is shown.Auxiliary lines are shown to give guid-ance.

Perpendicu-lar parking

The vehicle's initial position on initiat-ing this function will be a decisivefactor in determining the place wherethe manoeuvre executed by the as-sistant will end.

326


View On-screen display of the rearcamera

Off-road orhitching a

trailer func-tion

The vehicle's rear is presented. Thered auxiliary line establishes the safe-ty distance.

Green and red semicircular auxiliarylines are displayed in vehicles with afactory-fitted towing bracket. Theauxiliary lines indicate the distancefrom the towing bracket. The distancebetween the auxiliary (green and red)lines is approximately 0.3 m. The or-ange auxiliary line indicates, de-pending on the turn of the steeringwheel, the pre-calculated directionof the towing bracket.

In vehicles with a factory-fitted tow-ing bracket, the distance from the redauxiliary line to the vehicle is approx.0.4 m. No other lines are shown.

Cross trafficat the rear

Left side of the screen: perpendicularstreet to the left.

Middle of the screen: area directlybehind the vehicle.

Right side of the screen: perpendicu-lar street to the right.

Rear Assist (Rear View Cam-era)*

Operating and safety warnings

WARNING● The Rear Assist does not make it possibleto precisely calculate the distance fromobstacles (people, vehicles, etc.) and norcan it overcome the system's own limits,hence using it may cause serious accidentsand injuries if used negligently or withoutdue care. The driver should be aware ofhis/her surroundings at all times to ensuresafe driving.● The camera lens expands and distortsthe field of vision and displays the objectson the screen in a different, vague manner.The perception of distances is also distor-ted by this effect.● Due to the screen resolution or insuffi-cient light conditions, some items may bedisplayed in an unsatisfactory manner ornot at all. Take special care with thin posts,fences, railings or trees that might not bedisplayed on screen and could damage thevehicle.● The rear assist has blind spots where it isnot possible to represent people or objects(small children, animals and certain ob-jects cannot be detected in its field of vi-sion). Monitor the vehicle's surroundingarea at all times.

● Keep the camera lens clean, free of iceand snow, and do not cover it.● The system is not a replacement for driv-er awareness. Supervise the parking oper-ation at all times, as well as the vehicle'ssurrounding area. Adapt your speed anddriving style at all times to suit visibility,weather, road and traffic conditions.● Do not be distracted from the traffic bylooking at the screen.● The images on the rear assist screen areonly two-dimensional. Due to a lack of spa-tial depth, protruding parts or holes in theroad, for example, are more difficult to de-tect or may not be seen at all.● Vehicle load modifies the representationof the orientation lines displayed. Thewidth represented by the lines diminisheswith vehicle load. Pay special attention tothe vehicle's surroundings when the insideof the vehicle of the luggage compartmentis carrying a heavy load.● In the following situations, the objects orother vehicles shown in the navigation sys-tem display appear to be further away orcloser than they really are: Pay special at-tention:– On moving from a horizontal plane to a

slope.– On moving from a slope to a horizontal

plane.– If the vehicle is heavily loaded at the

rear. »327

Driving

– When the vehicle approaches objectsthat are not on the ground surface orare jutting out from it. These objectsmay also be outside the camera's an-gle of vision when reversing.

Note● It is important to take great care and payspecial attention if you are not yet familiarwith the system.● Rear assist will not be available if the ve-hicle's rear lid is open.

Instructions for use

Fig. 296 On the rear lid handle: location of therear assist camera.

A camera installed in the rear lid handle as-sists the driver in reverse parking or manoeu-vring ››› Fig. 296. The camera image isviewed together with orientation lines projec-

ted by the system on the Easy Connect sys-tem screen. The bottom of the screen dis-plays part of the bumper corresponding tothe number plate area that will be used asreference by the driver.

Rear assist settingsRear assist offers the user the possibility tochange the image's brightness, contrast andcolour settings.

To change these settings:

● Park the vehicle in a safe place.● Apply the parking brake.● Switch the ignition on.● If necessary, switch on the Easy Connectsystem.● Engage reverse gear or turn the selectorlever to position R.● Press the function button displayed onthe right of the image.● Make the desired adjustments on the menuby pressing the –/+ function buttons or bymoving the corresponding scroll button.

Necessary conditions for parking and ma-noeuvring with the rear assistThe system should not be used in the follow-ing cases:

● If the image displayed is not very reliable oris distorted, for example low visibility or dirtylens.● If the area behind the vehicle is not dis-played very clearly or is incomplete.● If the vehicle is heavily loaded at the rear.● If the position and installation angle of thecamera have been changed, e.g. after a rear-end collision. Have the system checked by aspecialised workshop.

Familiarising yourself with the systemTo familiarise yourself with the system, theorientation lines and their function, SEAT rec-ommends practising parking and manoeu-vring with the rear assist in a place withouttoo much traffic or in a car park when thereare good weather and visibility conditions.

Cleaning the camera lensKeep the camera lens clean and clear ofsnow and ice:

● Moisten the lens using a normal alcohol-based glass cleaning product and clean thelens with a dry cloth.● Remove snow using a small brush.● Use de-icing spray to remove any ice.

CAUTION● Never use abrasive cleaning products toclean the camera lens.

328


● Do not use hot or warm water to removeice or snow from the camera lens. Doing socould damage the camera.

Parking and manoeuvring with therear assist

Fig. 297 Display on the Easy Connect systemscreen: guidance lines.

Switching the system on and off● The rear assist will switch on when the igni-tion is on or the engine running, on engagingreverse gear (manual gearbox) or on chang-ing the selector lever to the R position (auto-matic gearbox).

● The system switches off 8 seconds afterdisengaging reverse gear (manual gearbox)or removing the selector lever from the R po-sition (automatic gearbox). The system willalso disconnect immediately after the ignitionis switched off.● The camera will stop transmitting imagesabove the speed of 15 km/h (9 mph) with re-verse engaged.

In combination with the Parking System Plus››› page 316, the camera image will cease tobe transmitted immediately when reversegear is disengaged or when the selector leveris moved from the R position, and the opticalinformation provided by the Parking Aid sys-tem will be displayed.

Also in combination with the system, the rearassist image can also be concealed:

● By pressing one of the Infotainment systembuttons on the display.● OR: by pressing the miniature vehicle thatappears on the left of the screen (whichswitches to the full-screen mode of the Park-ing System Plus's optical system).

If you wish to display the rear assist imageagain:

● Disengage reverse, or change the selectorlever's position, engage reverse again ormove the selector lever to position R.● OR: Press the RVC function button1)

Meaning of the orientation lines››› Fig. 297

Side lines: extension of the vehicle (theapproximate width of the vehicle plus therear view mirrors) on the road surface.End of the side lines: the area marked ingreen ends approximately 2 m behind thevehicle on the road surface.Mid line: indicates a distance of approxi-mately 1 m behind the vehicle on the roadsurface.Horizontal red line: indicates a safe dis-tance of approximately 40 cm at the rearof the vehicle on the road surface.

Parking manoeuvre● Place the vehicle in front of the parkingspace and engage reverse gear (manualgearbox) or move the selector to the R posi-tion (automatic gearbox). »

1

2

3

4

1) WARNING: the RVC function button will only beactivated and available when the reverse gear isengaged or the selector lever is set to position R.

329

Driving

● Reverse slowly, and turn the steering wheelso that the side orientation lines lead towardsthe parking space.● Guide the vehicle into the parking space sothat the side orientation lines run parallel to it.

Towing bracket device*

Trailer mode

Introduction

Take into account country-specific regula-tions about driving with a trailer and the useof a towing bracket.

The vehicle has been developed primarily forcarrying people, although it can also be usedto tow a trailer if fitted with the correspondingtechnical equipment. This additional load hasan effect on the useful life, fuel consumptionand vehicle performance and in some casescan reduce the service intervals.

Driving with a trailer requires more force fromthe vehicle, and thus more concentrationfrom the driver.

In winter, winter tyres should be fitted on boththe vehicle and the trailer.

Maximum vertical load technically per-missible on the couplingThe maximum vertical load technically per-mitted from the trailer draw bar on the towingbracket's tow hitch is 80 kg.

Vehicles with the Start-Stop systemIf the vehicle has a factory-fitted towingbracket or one that is retrofitted by SEAT, the

Start-Stop system operates as normal. Nospecial characteristics need to be taken intoaccount.

If the system does not recognise the trailer orthe trailer bracket has not been retrofitted bySEAT, the Start-Stop system must be discon-nected by pressing the corresponding buttonin the lower part of the centre console beforedriving with the trailer, and it should remainoff for the rest of the journey ››› .

Vehicles with driving profile selectionIf you are going to be towing a trailer, the useof the Eco driving profile is not recommen-ded. You are advised to select another of theavailable driving profiles before beginning todrive with a trailer.

WARNINGNever use the trailer to transport people,since it would put their life in danger and isalso prohibited.

WARNINGUndue use of the towing bracket maycause injury and accidents.● Only use the towing bracket if it is in aperfect state of repair and is properly se-cured.● Never modify or repair the towing bracketin any way.

330


● In order to reduce the danger of injury inthe event of rear-end collisions and toavoid injury to pedestrians and cyclistswhen parking the vehicle, cover or removethe tow hitch when you are not using a trail-er.● Never fit a towing bracket “with weightdistribution” or “load compensation”. Thevehicle has not been designed for this typeof towing bracket. The towing bracketcould fail and the trailer could be releasedfrom the vehicle.

WARNINGDriving with a trailer and transportingheavy or large objects can affect drivingproperties and even cause an accident.● Always secure the load properly usingbelts or straps that are suitable and ingood condition.● Adapt your speed and driving style at alltimes to suit visibility, weather, road andtraffic conditions.● Trailers with a high centre of gravity aremore likely to overturn than those with alow one.● Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres.● Take great care when overtaking.● Reduce speed immediately if you noticethat the trailer is swaying, however slightly.● Never drive at more than 80 km/h(50 mph) when towing a trailer (or at more

than 100 km/h (60 mph) in exceptional cir-cumstances). This also applies in countrieswhere driving at higher speeds is permit-ted. Take into account the speed limit forvehicles with trailers in the correspondingcountry, as it could be less than the speedlimit for vehicles without a trailer.● Never attempt to “straighten” the towingvehicle and trailer while accelerating.

WARNINGIf the towing bracket has been retrofittedby a non-SEAT workshop, the Start-Stopsystem must be disconnected manuallywhenever driving with a trailer. Otherwisethe brake system could be damaged andcould consequently cause a serious acci-dent or injury.● Always disconnect the Start-Stop systemmanually when using a towing bracket thathas not been fitted by a SEAT workshop.

Note● Before hitching or unhitching a trailer, al-ways deactivate the anti-theft alarm››› page 129. Otherwise, the tilt sensorcould cause the alarm to go off.● Do not drive with a trailer for the engine'sfirst 1000 km ››› page 263.● SEAT recommends that, if possible, thetow hitch be disassembled or coveredwhen it is not going to be used. In the event

of a rear-end collision, the damage to thevehicle could be greater if the bracket is fit-ted.● Some retrofitted towing brackets coverthe rear towing eye. In these cases, thetowing eye should not be used for tow-starting or for towing other vehicles. Forthis reason, if the vehicle has been retrofit-ted with a towing bracket, always keep thetow hitch in the vehicle when you disas-semble it.

Control lamp

Lamp on button lights up

The tow hitch is not securely locked in position.Check that the towing bracket is locked ››› page 333.


WARNINGIf the warning lamps and the correspondingmessages are ignored when they light up,the vehicle may stall in traffic and causeaccidents and severe injuries.● Never ignore the warning lamps or mes-sages. »

331

Driving

● Stop the vehicle at the next opportunityand in a safe place.


Technical requirements

Vehicles that are factory-equipped with atowing bracket fulfil all the technical and le-gal requirements for driving with a trailer.

If the vehicle is retrofitted with a towingbracket, only a bracket that is authorised forthe maximum authorised load of the trailerthat is to be towed may be fitted. The towingbracket must be suitable for the vehicle andthe trailer and must be properly secured tothe vehicle's chassis. Only use a towingbracket that has been authorised by SEAT forthis vehicle. Always check and take into ac-count the towing bracket manufacturer's in-structions. Never fit a towing bracket “withweight distribution” or “load compensation”.

Towing bracket fitted on the bumperNever fit a towing bracket to the bumper or tothe area where the bumper is mounted. Thetowing bracket should not impair the bum-per's function. Do not make modifications or

repairs to the exhaust system or the brakesystem. Make regular checks to ensure thatthe towing bracket is secure.

Engine cooling systemDriving with a trailer increases the load on theengine and cooling system. The cooling sys-tem should have sufficient coolant and beprepared for the additional effort involved indriving with a trailer.

Trailer brakesIf the trailer has its own brake system, pleasetake the relevant legal requirements into ac-count. Never connect the trailer's brake sys-tem to the vehicle's brake system.

Tow ropeAlways use a cable between the vehicle andthe trailer ››› page 334.

Trailer rear lightsThe trailer's rear lights should comply withthe statutory safety regulations ››› page 334.

Never connect the trailer's rear lights directlyto the vehicle's electric system. If you are notsure that the trailer's electrical connection iscorrect, have it checked by a specialisedworkshop. SEAT recommends visiting a SEATdealership for this.

Exterior mirrorsIf you cannot see the area behind the trailerwith the exterior mirrors of the towing vehicle,additional mirrors will have to be installed inaccordance with the regulations of the coun-try in question. The exterior mirrors should beadjusted before you start driving and mustprovide a sufficient field of vision at the rear.

Trailer maximum electricity consumption

Consumers Europe, Asia, Af-rica, South

America andCentral Ameri-

ca

Austral-ia

Brake lights (to-tal)

84 Watts 108 Watts

Turn signal (oneach side)

42 Watts 54 Watts

Side lights (oneach side)

50 Watts 100 Watts

Reverse lights(in total)

42 Watts 54 Watts

Rear fog light 42 Watts 54 Watts

Never exceed the values indicated!

WARNINGIf the towing bracket is wrongly fitted or isnot the right one, the trailer could become

332


detached from the vehicle and cause seri-ous injury.

CAUTION● If the rear lights of the trailer are not cor-rectly connected, the vehicle's electronicsystem may be damaged.● If the trailer absorbs excessive electriccurrent, the vehicle's electronic systemmay be damaged.● Never connect the trailer's electric sys-tem directly to the electrical connectionsof the tail lights or any other power sour-ces. Only use the connections intended forproviding electric current to the trailer.

Electrical unlocking tow hitch

Fig. 298 Right side of the boot: button to un-lock the tow hitch.

The tow hitch is located in the bumper. Theelectrical unlocking tow hitch cannot be dis-assembled.

There should be no person, animal or objectin the path of the tow hitch ››› .

Unlock the tow hitch and remove it● Stop the vehicle and connect the electronicparking brake ››› page 246.● Switch off the engine.● Open the rear lid.● Pull the ››› Fig. 298 button briefly. The towhitch unlocks electrically and automaticallyturns outwards. The control lamp in the but-ton will flash ››› Fig. 298.● Remove the tow hitch with your hand untilyou feel and see that it has engaged and thecontrol lamp on the button stays on.● Close the rear lid.

Cover the tow hitch● Stop the vehicle and apply the electronicparking brake.● Switch off the engine.● Unhook the trailer and interrupt the electri-cal connection between it and the vehicle. Ifyou are using an adapter, remove it from thetrailer's power socket.● Open the rear lid.

● Pull the ››› Fig. 298 button briefly. The towhitch unlocks electrically.● Turn the tow hitch under the bumper withyour hand until you feel and see that it en-gages and the control lamp on the››› Fig. 298 button stays on.● Close the rear lid.

Meaning of control lamp● If the warning light of the button ››› Fig. 298is flashing, this means that the tow hitch hasnot been attached properly or is damaged››› ● If the warning lamp stays on with the rearlid open, the tow hitch is correctly in placeboth when engaged and when covered.● The control light of the lamp switches offapproximately 1 minute after closing the readlid.

WARNINGUndue use of the towing bracket maycause injury and accidents.● Only use the tow hitch if it is properly en-gaged.● Always ensure that no person, animal orobject is to be found in the path of the towhitch.● Never use a tool or instrument while thetow hitch is moving. »

333

Driving

● Never press the ››› Fig. 298 button whenthere is a trailer hooked to the vehicle orwhen a carrier system or other accessoriesare mounted on the tow hitch.● If the tow hitch is not attached properly,do not use it. Instead, go to a specialisedworkshop and have the towing bracketchecked.● If you detect any fault in the electricalsystem or in the towing bracket, contact aspecialised workshop and ask them tocheck it.● If the ball has a diameter of less than 49mm at any one point, do not use the towingbracket under any circumstances.

CAUTIONIf you clean the vehicle with high-pressureor steam devices, do not point the jet di-rectly towards the retractable tow hitch orthe trailer power socket, as this may dam-age the joints or remove the grease neces-sary for lubrication.

NoteAt extremely low temperatures, the towhitch may be impossible to use. In this case,place the vehicle in a warmer location (forexample, a garage).

Fitting a bicycle carrier on the re-tractable tow hitch

The maximum allowed weight of the carriersystem, including the load, is 75 kg. The carri-er system should not protrude more than 700mm backwards from the spherical head. On-ly carrier systems on which up to 3 bikes canbe mounted are allowed. Heavier bicyclesmust be mounted as close to the vehicle aspossible (tow hitch).

WARNINGThe incorrect use of the tow hitch with a bi-cycle rack mounted on the tow hitch cancause accidents and injury.● Never exceed the maximum weight or thelimits indicated above.● The bicycle rack may not be mounted tothe neck of the hitch below the ball be-cause, due to the shape of the neck anddepending on the rack model, the rackcould be incorrectly mounted on the vehi-cle.● Always read and take the manufacturerassembly instructions into account.

CAUTIONIf the maximum weight and limits indicatedabove are exceeded, the vehicle may suf-fer considerable damage.● Never exceed the values indicated!

NoteSEAT recommends removing, as far as pos-sible, all removable parts of the bicyclesbefore setting off. These parts include, forexample, baskets and saddlebags, childseats or batteries. This improves aerody-namics and the centre of gravity of the racksystem.

Hooking up and connecting a trail-er

Fig. 299 Diagram: assignment of the pins ofthe trailer's electrical socket.


Pin Meaning

1 Left turn signal

2 Rear fog light

3 Earth for pins 1, 2, 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8334



Pin Meaning

4 Right turn signal

5 Rear light, right

6 Brake lights

7 Rear light, left

8 Reverse lights

9 Permanent live

10 Live charge cable

11 Earth for pin 10

12 Unassigned

13 Earth for pin 9

Trailer power socketThe vehicle is fitted with a 13-pole powersocket for the electrical connection betweenthe trailer and the vehicle. With the enginerunning, electrical devices on the trailer re-ceive power from the electrical connection(pin 9 and pin 10 of the trailer power socket).

If the system detects that a trailer has beenconnected electrically, the electrical equip-ment on the trailer will receive voltagethrough this connection (pins 9 and 10). Pin 9has a permanent live. This powers, for exam-ple, the trailer's interior lighting. Electrical de-vices such as a fridge in a caravan only re-

ceive electrical power if the engine is running(through pin 10).

To avoid overloading the electrical system,you cannot connect the ground wires of pin 3,pin 11 or pin 13.

If the trailer has a 7-contact connector, youwill need to use an adapter cable. In this casethe function corresponding to pin 10 will notbe available.

Tow ropeThe tow rope must always be securely fixedto the towing vehicle and loose enough sothat the vehicle can handle turns smoothly.However, make sure that the cable does notrub on the ground while driving.

Trailer rear lightsAlways check the trailer's rear lights to ensurethey are working correctly and that theycomply with the relevant safety regulations.Make sure that the maximum permissiblepower that can be absorbed by the trailer isnot exceeded ››› page 332.

Connection to the anti-theft systemThe trailer is included in the anti-theft systemif the following conditions are met:

● If the vehicle is factory-equipped with ananti-theft alarm and towing bracket.

● If the trailer is electrically connected to thetowing vehicle through the trailer power sock-et.● If the electrical systems of the vehicle andtrailer are in perfect condition and have nofaults or damage.● If the vehicle is locked with the key and theanti-theft alarm is activated.

When the vehicle is locked, the alarm is trig-gered if the electrical connection with thetrailer is cut off.

Before hitching or unhitching a trailer, alwaysturn off the anti-theft alarm. Otherwise, the tiltsensor could cause the alarm to go off.

Trailers with LED rear lightsFor technical reasons, trailers fitted with LEDrear lights cannot be connected to the anti-theft alarm system.

When the vehicle is locked, the alarm doesnot go off when the electrical connectionwith the trailer is cut if it has rear lights withlight-emitting diodes.

If the Eco driving profile was selected whenhitching the trailer, this will automaticallyswitch to theNormal profile. If the systemcannot detect the attached trailer or if thetowing bracket has been retrofitted by an au-to repair shop other than SEAT, you mustmanually select the Normal profile beforeyou start driving with a trailer attached. To »

335

Driving

reconnect the Eco profile once the trailer hasbeen unhitched, switch the ignition off andback on once.

WARNINGIf the cables are improperly or incorrectlyconnected, it may lead to an excessiveamount of current supplied to the trailer,which can cause abnormalities in the entirevehicle electronic system, as well as acci-dents and serious injuries.● Ensure that any repairs that need to becarried out on the electrical system arecarried out by a specialised workshop.● Never connect the trailer's electric sys-tem directly to the electrical connectionsof the tail lights or any other power sour-ces.

WARNINGContact between the pins of the trailerpower socket can cause short circuits,overloading of the electrical system or fail-ure of the lighting system, and consequent-ly can cause accidents and serious injuries.● Never connect the pins of the trailer pow-er socket to each other.● Make sure any work on bent pins is car-ried out by a specialised workshop.

CAUTIONDo not leave the trailer connected to thevehicle when parked; place it on its supportwheel or its supports. If the vehicle rises orfalls due, for example, to a variation of theload or a burst tyre, increased pressure willbe placed on the towing bracket and thetrailer, and both the vehicle and the trailercan be damaged.

Note● In case of malfunctioning of the electri-cal systems of the vehicle or trailer, as wellas of the anti-theft system, have thesechecked out by a specialised workshop.● If the trailer accessories consume energythrough the power socket to the trailer andthe engine is turned off, the battery will dis-charge.● If the vehicle battery is running low, theelectrical connection with the trailer will beautomatically cut.

Loading a trailer

Technically permissible maximum trailerweight and vertical load on the couplingdeviceThe technically permissible maximum trailerweight is the weight that the vehicle cantow.››› The vertical load on the coupling

load is exerted vertically from above on thetow hitch of the towing bracket.››› page 382

The information on the maximum trailerweight and vertical load on the coupling de-vice contained in the type plate of the towingbracket are experimental values only. Thecorrect figures for your specific model, whichmay be lower than these figures, are given inthe vehicle documentation. The information inthe vehicle documentation takes precedenceat all times.

To promote safety while driving, SEAT recom-mends making the most of the maximum ver-tical load technically permissible on thecoupling device ››› page 330. An insufficientvertical load has a negative influence on thebehaviour of both the vehicle and trailer.

The vertical load increases the weight on therear axle, reducing the vehicle's carrying ca-pacity.

Gross combination weight of the towingvehicle and trailerThe gross combination weight is the actualweight of the loaded vehicle plus the actualweight of the loaded trailer.

In some countries trailers are classified intodistinct categories. SEAT recommends ob-taining information from a specialised work-shop regarding which type of trailer is mostsuitable for your vehicle.

336


Trailer loadingThe weight of the towing vehicle and trailermust be balanced. In order to do this, theload must be as close as possible to the max-imum vertical load technically permissible onthe coupling point, and it must be evenly dis-tributed between the back and front of thetrailer:

● Distribute loads in the trailer so that heavyobjects are as near to the axle as possible orabove it.● Secure the trailer load properly.

Tyre pressureSet the tyre pressure of the trailer tyres in ac-cordance with the trailer manufacturer's rec-ommendations.

When towing a trailer, inflate the tyres of thetowing vehicle with the maximum allowablepressure ››› page 359.

WARNINGIf the maximum permissible axle weight, themaximum load technically permissible onthe coupling point, the maximum author-ised vehicle weight or the gross combina-tion weight of the towing vehicle and trailer

are exceeded, accidents and serious inju-ries may occur.● Never exceed the values indicated!● The actual weight on the front and rearaxles must never exceed the maximum per-missible axle weight. The weight on thefront and rear axles must never exceed themaximum permissible weight.

WARNINGA shift in weight could jeopardize the stabil-ity and security of the towing vehicle andtrailer, which could lead to accidents andserious injuries.● Always load the trailer correctly.● Always secure the load properly usingbelts or straps that are suitable and ingood condition.

Driving with a trailer

Adjusting the headlightsThe front part of the vehicle may be raisedwhen the trailer is connected and the lightmay dazzle the rest of the traffic.

Adapt the height of the headlights using theheadlight range adjuster ››› page 1561).

Special characteristics of driving with atrailer● If your trailer has an overrun brake, brakegently at first and then rapidly. This will pre-vent the jerking that can be caused by thelocking of trailer wheels.● Due to the gross combination weight of thetowing vehicle and trailer, the braking dis-tance increases.● When going down a slope, go into a lowergear (if using a manual gearbox or the tip-tronic automatic gearbox mode) to take ad-vantage of the braking power provided by theengine. Otherwise, the braking system couldoverheat and even fail.● The trailer weight, as well as the gross com-bination weight of the towing vehicle andtrailer, change the centre of gravity and theproperties of the vehicle.● If the towing vehicle is empty and the traileris loaded, then the load distribution is incor-rect. Under these conditions, drive slowly andwith extra caution.

Hill starts with a trailerDepending on the slope of the hill and thecombination weight of the towing vehicle andtrailer, the vehicle might start rolling back-wards slightly when you first start up. »

1) This does not apply for vehicles with Full LEDxenon headlights.

337

Driving

For hill-starting with a trailer, do the following:

● Press and hold the brake pedal.● Press the button to disconnect the elec-tronic parking brake ››› page 246.● If the vehicle is equipped with a manualgearbox, push the clutch pedal all the waydown.● Put the vehicle into first gear or turn the se-lector lever to position D/S ››› page 253.● Pull out the button and hold it in that po-sition to stop the towing vehicle and trailerwith the electronic parking brake.● Release the brake pedal.● Start driving slowly. To do this, in the case ofa manual gearbox, slowly release the clutchpedal.● Do not release the button until the en-gine has sufficient force to start driving.

WARNINGIf a trailer is pulled incorrectly, this maylead to loss of control of the vehicle andserious injury.● Driving with a trailer and transportingheavy or large objects will change the ve-hicle handling and braking distances.● Always drive cautiously and carefully.Brake earlier than usual.● Adapt your speed and driving style at alltimes to suit visibility, weather, road and

traffic conditions. Slow down, especiallywhen driving down hills or slopes.● Accelerate with particular care and cau-tion. Avoid sudden braking and manoeu-vres.● Take great care when overtaking. Reducespeed immediately if you notice that thetrailer is swaying, however slightly.● Never attempt to “straighten” the towingvehicle and trailer while accelerating.● Take into account the speed limit for vehi-cles with a trailer, as it could be lower thanfor vehicles without a trailer.

Stabilisation of the towing vehicleand trailer

The stabilisation of the towing vehicle andtrailer together is an additional function of theelectronic stability control (ESC).

If the system detects that the trailer is sway-ing, it intervenes automatically with the driversteering recommendation to reduce theswaying of the trailer.

Requirements for the stabilisation of thetowing vehicle and trailer● The vehicle is factory-equipped with a tow-ing bracket or has been retro-fitted with acompatible towing bracket.

● The ESC and ASR are active. The controllamp or is not lit up on the instrumentpanel.● The trailer is electrically connected to thetowing vehicle through the trailer power sock-et.● The vehicle is travelling at over 60 km/h(approx. 37 mph).● The maximum vertical load technically per-missible is being utilised on the coupling de-vice.● The trailer has a rigid draw bar.● If the trailer has brakes, it must be equippedwith a mechanical overrun brake.

WARNINGThe enhanced security provided by theelectric stability control of the towing vehi-cle and trailer should not lead you to takeany risks that could compromise your safe-ty.● Adapt your speed and driving style at alltimes to suit visibility, weather, road andtraffic conditions.● Accelerate with caution when the road isslippery.● When adjusting any settings, stop accel-erating.

338


WARNINGThe electric stability control for the towingvehicle and trailer may not correctly de-tect all driving conditions.● When the ESC is switched off, the stabili-sation of the towing vehicle and trailer is al-so switched off.● The stability system does not always de-tect light and unstable trailers, so it maynot stabilise these correctly.● When driving on slippery surfaces withpoor grip, the trailer can even interfere withthe stability system.● Trailers with a high centre of gravity cantip even without having previously swayed.● If a trailer is not attached, but the trailerpower socket is connected (e.g. installationof a bicycle rack with lights), repeated au-tomatic braking may occur in extreme driv-ing conditions.

Retrofitting a towing bracket

Fig. 300 Limits and attachment points for ret-rofitting a towing bracket.

SEAT recommends that towing brackets beretrofitted at a specialised workshop. For ex-ample, it may very well be necessary to ad-just the cooling system or mount thermal pro-

tection plates. SEAT recommends visiting aSEAT dealership for this.

If a towing bracket is retrofitted, the distancespecifications should always be kept in mind.The distance between the centre of thespherical head and the road ››› Fig. 300 Dmust never be less than that indicated. Thisalso applies when the vehicle is fully loaded,including the technically permissible maxi-mum vertical load on the coupling device.

Distance specifications ››› Fig. 300:Attachment points932.5 mm65 mm min.350-420 mm220 mm615.5 mm1,043 mm

WARNINGIf the cables are improperly or incorrectlyconnected, this may lead to malfunctionsin the entire vehicle electronic system, aswell as to accidents and serious injuries.● Never connect the trailer's electric sys-tem to the electrical connections of the taillights or any other unsuitable power sour-ces. Only use suitable connectors to con-nect the trailer. »

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

339

Driving

● The towing bracket should be retrofittedonly at a specialised workshop.

WARNINGIf the towing bracket is badly fitted or un-suitable, the trailer may separate from thevehicle while driving. This could cause seri-ous accidents and fatal injuries.

NoteOnly use towing brackets that have beenapproved by SEAT for the model in ques-tion.

340

Care and maintenance

Practical tips

Care and maintenance

Accessories and modifica-tions to the vehicle

Accessories, replacement partsand repair work

Always ask your dealer or specialist retailerfor advice before purchasing accessoriesand replacement parts.

Your vehicle is designed to offer a high stand-ard of active and passive safety. For this rea-son, we recommend that you ask a SEAT Offi-cial Service for advice before fitting accesso-ries or replacement parts. Your SEAT OfficialService has the latest information from themanufacturer and can recommend accesso-ries and replacement parts which are suita-ble for your requirements. They can also an-swer any questions you might have regardingofficial regulations.

We recommend you to use only SEAT acces-sories and Genuine SEAT parts®. SEAT hastested these parts and accessories for suita-bility, reliability and safety. SEAT OfficialServices have the necessary experience and

facilities to ensure that the parts are installedcorrectly and professionally.

Any retro-fitted equipment which has a di-rect effect on the vehicle and/or the way it isdriven, such as a cruise control system orelectronically-controlled suspension, mustbe approved for use in your vehicle and bearthe e mark (the European Union's authorisa-tion symbol).

If any additional electrical devices are fit-ted which do not serve to control the vehicleitself (for instance a refrigerator box, laptopor ventilator fan, etc.), they must bear the sign (manufacturer conformity declaration inthe European Union).

WARNINGAccessories, for example telephone hold-ers or cup holders, should never be fittedon the covers, or within the working rangeof the airbags. Otherwise, there is a dangerof injury if the airbag is triggered in an acci-dent.

Technical modifications

Modifications must always be carried out ac-cording to our specifications.

Unauthorised modifications to the electroniccomponents, software, wiring or data transferin the vehicle may cause malfunctioning. Due

to the way the electronic components arelinked together in networks, other indirectsystems may be affected by the faults. Thiscan seriously impair safety, lead to excessivewear of components, and also invalidateyour vehicle registration documents.

You will appreciate that your SEAT dealershipcannot be held liable for any damagecaused by modifications and/or work per-formed incorrectly.

We therefore recommend that all work shouldbe performed by a SEAT Official Service us-ing genuine SEAT parts®.

WARNINGIncorrectly performed modifications orother work on your vehicle can lead to mal-functions and cause accidents.

Radio transmitters and officeequipment

Radio transmitters (fixed installation)Any retrofit installations of radio transmittersin the vehicle require prior approval. SEATgenerally authorises in-vehicle installationsof approved types of radio transmitters provi-ded that:

● The aerial is installed correctly. »

341

Practical tips

● The aerial is installed on the exterior of thevehicle (and shielded cables are used to-gether with non-reflective aerial trimming).● The effective transmitting power does notexceed 10 Watts at the aerial base.

A SEAT Official Service and specialised work-shop will be able to inform you about optionsfor installing and operating radio transmitterswith a higher transmitting power.

Mobile radio transmittersCommercial mobile telephones or radioequipment might interfere with the electron-ics of your vehicle and cause malfunctions.This may be due to:

● No external aerial.● External aerial incorrectly installed.● Transmitting power more than 10 W.

You must, therefore, do not operate portablemobile telephones or radio equipment insidethe vehicle without a properly installed exter-nal aerial ››› .

Please note also that the maximum range ofthe equipment can only be achieved with anexternal aerial.

Business equipmentRetrofit installation of business or privateequipment in the vehicle is permitted, provi-ded the equipment cannot interfere with the

driver's immediate control of the vehicle andthat any such equipment carries the mark.Any retrofit equipment that could influencethe driver's control of the vehicle must have atype approval for your vehicle and must carrythe e mark.

WARNINGMobile telephones or radio equipmentwhich is operated inside the vehicle withouta properly installed external aerial cancreate excessive magnetic fields thatcould cause a health hazard.

Note● The posterior fitting of electric and elec-tronic equipment in this vehicle affects itslicence and could lead to the withdrawal ofthe vehicle registration document undercertain circumstances.● Please use the mobile telephone/radiooperating instructions.

Checking and refilling lev-els

Filling the tank

Refuelling


If the automatic filler nozzle is operated cor-rectly, it will switch itself off as soon as thefuel tank is “full”. Do not try to put in more fuelafter the nozzle cuts out, as this will fill the ex-pansion chamber in the fuel tank.

The correct fuel grade for your vehicle is giv-en on a sticker on the inside of the fuel tankflap. Further notes on fuel can be found at››› page 344.

The capacity of your vehicle's fuel tank is giv-en in ››› page 48.

WARNINGFuel is highly flammable and can cause se-rious burns and other injuries.● When refuelling, turn off the engine, theauxiliary heater ››› page 184 and turn offthe ignition for safety reasons.● Do not smoke when filling the fuel tank ora canister. Naked flames are forbidden inthe vicinity due to the risk of explosion.

342

Checking and refilling levels

● Observe legislation governing the use,storage and carrying of a spare fuel canis-ter in the vehicle.● For safety reasons we do not recommendcarrying a spare fuel canister in the vehi-cle. In an accident the canister could bedamaged and could leak.● If, in exceptional circumstances, youhave to carry a spare fuel canister, pleaseobserve the following points:– Never fill fuel into the spare fuel canis-

ter if it is inside or on top of the vehicle.An electrostatic charge could build upduring filling, causing the fuel vapour toignite. Danger of explosion. Alwaysplace the canister on the ground to fillit.

– Insert the filling nozzle as far as possi-ble into the spare fuel canister.

– If the spare fuel canister is made ofmetal, the filling nozzle must be in con-tact with the canister during filling. Thishelps prevent an electrostatic chargebuilding up.

– Never spill fuel in the vehicle or in theluggage compartment. Fuel vapour isexplosive. Risk of fatal accident!

CAUTION● If any fuel is spilt onto the vehicle, itshould be removed immediately. It couldotherwise damage the paintwork.● Never run the tank completely dry. An ir-regular fuel supply could cause misfiring.As a result, unburnt fuel could enter the ex-haust system and damage the catalyticconverter.● When filling the fuel tank after having runit completely dry on a vehicle with a dieselengine, the ignition must be switched on forat least 30 seconds before starting the en-gine. When you then start the engine it maytake longer than normal (up to one minute)to start firing. This is because air needs tobe bled from the fuel system while starting.

For the sake of the environmentDo not overfill the fuel tank, it may causethe fuel to overflow if it becomes warm.

NoteThere is no emergency mechanism for themanual release of the fuel tank flap. If nec-essary, request assistance from special-ised personnel.

NoteDiesel vehicles are fitted with a protectivedevice that prevents the insertion of thewrong fuel hose1). It is only possible to re-fuel with Diesel nozzles.● If the pump nozzle is worn, damaged, or ifit is very small, it is possible that it will notbe able to open the protective device. Be-fore trying to insert the pump nozzle byturning it, try a different pump or requestspecialist help.● If you fill the tank from a reserve fuel can-ister, the protective device will not open.One way to resolve this is to pour the fuel invery slowly.

1) Depending on country343

Practical tips

Fuel

Fuel identification1)

Fig. 301 Sticker on the tank cap (identificationof the fuel)

Fuels are identified with different symbols.Depending on the fuel, the different symbolsare on the pump and the tank lid of your vehi-cle. The identification serves to prevent con-fusion when choosing the fuel.

Petrol with ethanol (“E” stands for Etha-nol). The number indicates the percent-age of ethanol in the petrol. “E5” means,for example, an ethanol ratio of 5% max.Diesel with biodiesel (“B” stands for Bio-diesel). The number indicates the per-

1

2

centage of biodiesel in the diesel. “B7”means, for example, a proportion of bio-diesel of max. 7%.Natural gas: “CNG” means CompressedNatural Gas.

Type of petrol3 Applies to vehicles: with petrol engine

The correct grade of petrol is listed inside thefuel tank flap.

The vehicle is equipped with a catalytic con-verter and must only be run on unleadedpetrol. The petrol must comply with thestandard EN 228 and be sulphur-free. Fuelswith a 10% ethanol ratio can be refuelled(E10)2). The types of petrol are differentiatedby using the octane numbers (RON) or viathe anti-knock index (AKI).

The following pieces of text show the infor-mation included in the corresponding stickerson the tank lid (examples):

3

Super unleaded petrol 95 octane petrol ornormal 91 octane petrol at leastWe recommend refuelling with super 95 oc-tane petrol (91 AKI). If not available: normal 91octane petrol (87 AKI) (with a slight powerloss).

Super unleaded petrol, 95 octanes atleastYou should use super 95 octane petrol (91AKI) at least.

If super is not available, if necessary, use nor-mal 91 octane petrol (87 AKI). In this case onlyuse moderate engine speeds and a lightthrottle. Refuel with super as soon as possi-ble.

Unleaded super plus 98 octane petrol orsuper 95 octane petrol at leastWe recommend refuelling with super plus 98octane petrol (93 AKI). If not available: super95 octane petrol (91 AKI) (with a slight powerloss).

If super is not available, if necessary, use nor-mal 91 octane petrol (87 AKI). In this case onlyuse moderate engine speeds and a light

1) Depending on country2) Follow the regulations of the country you aredriving in.

344


throttle. Refuel with super as soon as possi-ble.

CAUTION● Fuels high percentage of ethanol, e.g.E30 - E100 button must not be used. Thefuel system would be damaged. Exception:vehicles with Totalflex engine ››› page 345,Ethanol fuel.● A single refuelling with leaded fuel orother metal additives entails a permanentdeterioration of the effectiveness of thecatalytic converter.● Only use fuel additives that have beenapproved by SEAT. The products that con-tain substances to increase the octane rat-ing or decrease knocking may contain met-al additives that damage the engine andcatalytic converter. This type of productsmust not be used.● Do not use fuels shown in the pump ascontaining metals. LRP (lead replacementpetrol) fuels contain high concentrations ofmetal additives. Risk of engine damage!● High engine speed and full throttle candamage the engine when using petrol withan octane rating lower than the correctgrade for the engine.

Note● Fuel with an octane rating higher than theone required by the engine can be used.● In countries in which there is no sulphur-free fuel, it is also allowed to use low sul-phur content fuel.

Ethanol fuel3 Applies to vehicles: with Totalflex engine

You can recognise vehicles with Totalflex en-gines1) by label on the fuel tank lid with withthe marking “Petrol/ethanol”.

Vehicles with Totalflex engine can run withunleaded petrol (95 octane / 91 AKI) accord-ing to ANP No. 57 and with fuels with any highpercentage of ethanol. The vehicle is refuel-led in the same way as petrol refuelling.

Also consider that ››› page 344, Type of pet-rol

NoteSEAT recommends filling the tank exclu-sively with petrol every 10,000 km to de-crease impurities that using E100 ethanolfuel might have left in the engine.

Diesel fuel3 Applies to vehicles: with diesel engine

Please note the information on the inside ofthe fuel tank flap.

We recommend you use Diesel according tostandard EN 590.

The diesel can thicken at very low tempera-tures, thus affecting the start or operation ofthe engine. To ensure that you can continueto use your vehicle as usual, the diesel sold ingas stations is provided -depending on thestation- with fluidity when cold. Ask the em-ployee of the petrol station whether their die-sel is suitable for use in winter and if it is suitedfor current and future temperatures.

Water in the fuel filter2)

If your vehicle has a diesel engine and isequipped with a fuel filter with a water sep-arator, the instrument panel may display thefollowing warning: Water in the fuelfilter. If this is the case, take the vehicle toa specialised workshop so that they candrain the fuel filter. »

1) This motor is only available in some markets.2) Depending upon country.

345

Practical tips

CAUTION● Never use of FAME (biodiesel), petrol,heating oil, other fuels or thinning agentsas they can cause severely damage thefuel system and the engine.● If the wrong fuel has been filled, do notstart the engine under any circumstances.Risk of damaging the fuel system and theengine! Obtain technical assistance.

AdBlue®

Information on AdBlue®


The consumption of AdBlue® depends onyour personal driving style, the temperatureof the system and on the outdoor tempera-ture when the vehicle is used.

AdBlue® freezes at temperatures of -11 °C (+13°F). The system has heating elements thatguarantee its operation even at low tempera-tures.

The AdBlue® tank level capacity is approxi-mately 11 litres.

The AdBlue® tank should never be empty.When the distance to empty drops below2400 km, a warning to refill the AdBlue® tankwill appear on the dash panel display››› page 346. If this information is ignored,later on it will not be possible to re-start theengine. If this warning does not appear, it isnot necessary to refill the AdBlue® tank.

AdBlue® is a registered brand of the GermanAssociation of the Automotive Industry (VDA)and is also known as AUS32 or DEF (DieselExhaust Fluid).

CAUTIONFilling the AdBlue® tank excessively cancause damage to the tank.

Refilling AdBlue®

Fig. 303 AdBlue tank cap.

Operations prior to refillingPark the vehicle on a flat surface. If the vehi-cle is not parked on a flat surface, but, for ex-ample, on a slope or on the side of a curb, thelevel indicator may not detect the load prop-erly.

If a warning message about AdBlue® levelsappears on the dash panel display, fill atleast the minimum amount required (ap-prox. 5 litres) Only after adding this amountwill the system detect that AdBlue® has beenadded and you will be able to start the en-gine again. The maximum amount that canbe refilled is 11 litres.

Switch the ignition off. If the ignition is notswitched off during refilling, the warning to re-fill may continue to appear on the instrumentpanel display.

346


Fill with a refill bottleOnly use AdBlue® that complies with ISO22241-1. Only use original containers.

● Open the tank cover ››› Fig. 303.● Unscrew the tank cap by turning it in an an-ti-clockwise direction.● Please observe the manufacturer's instruc-tions, indicated on the refill bottle.● Check the expiry date.● Remove the cap of the refill bottle.● Insert the neck of the bottle in the tank fillerneck vertically and screw the bottle on byhand, by turning it in a clockwise direction.● Press the refill bottle in the direction of thefiller neck and hold it in this position.● Wait until the contents of the refill bottlehave been poured into the AdBlue® tank. Donot compress or break the bottle!● Turn the bottle in a counter-clockwise di-rection and gently pull it upwards ››› .● The AdBlue® tank is full when no more liquidcomes out of the bottle.● Screw on the tank cap in a clockwise direc-tion until it is tightly closed.● Close the fuel tank flap.

Operations before driving● After refilling the tank, only switch on the ig-nition.

● Leave the ignition on for at least 30 sec-onds for the system to detect the fluid load.● Make sure you wait for at least 30 secondsbefore starting the engine!

Refilling the dispenser with AdBlueValid for vehicles with selective catalytic re-duction.

● Open the tank cap.● Turn the SCR tank cap anti-clockwise››› Fig. 303.● Add AdBlue until the nozzle stops for thefirst time.● Close the SCR tube by turning it clockwiseuntil you hear a click.

WARNINGAdBlue® should only be stored in the origi-nal container, which should be tightlyclosed and kept in a safe place.● Never keep AdBlue® in empty food con-tainers, bottles or other similar containers.Other people may confuse it for otherproducts.● Keep AdBlue® out of the reach of chil-dren.

CAUTION● When refilling, the nozzle grip should bealigned downward. Otherwise the nozzlewill not connect automatically.● Do not try to add any more additive afterthe nozzle has stopped for the first time.The AdBlue tank could overflow and AdBluecould spill out.● Only use AdBlue® that complies with ISO22241-1. Only use original containers.● Never mix AdBlue® with water, fuel or ad-ditives. Any type of damage caused bysuch a mixture will not be covered by thewarranty.● Never pour AdBlue® into the fuel tank.This could result in engine damage.● Do not carry the refill bottle inside thevehicle. If there is a leak (due to tempera-ture changes or damage to the bottle), theAdBlue® may damage the vehicle.

For the sake of the environmentDispose of the refill bottle in an environ-ment-friendly manner.

NoteYou can buy refill bottles that are adequatefor AdBlue® use at SEAT dealerships.

347

Practical tips

Engine compartment

Working in the engine compart-ment


Always be aware of the danger of injuryand scalding as well as the risk of acci-dent or fire when working in the enginecompartment (e.g. when checking and re-filling fluids). Always observe the warningslisted below and follow all general safetyprecautions. The engine compartment ofthe vehicle is a potentially hazardous area››› .

WARNING● Switch the engine off, remove the keyfrom the ignition and apply the hand brake.If the vehicle has a manual gearbox, placethe lever in neutral; if it has an automaticgearbox, place the selector lever in posi-tion P. Wait for the engine to cool down.● Keep children away from the enginecompartment.● Never spill liquids used for vehicle opera-tion on the engine compartment, as thesemay catch fire (e.g. the antifreeze in cool-ant).

● Take care not to cause short circuits inthe electrical system, especially whenworking on the battery.● If working inside the engine compart-ment, remember that, even when the igni-tion is switched off, the radiator fan maystart up automatically, and therefore thereis a risk of injury.● Never cover the engine with additional in-sulating materials such as a blanket. Risk offire!● Do not unscrew the cap on the coolantexpansion tank when the engine is hot. Thecooling system is under pressure.● Protect face, hands and arms by cover-ing the cap with a large, thick rag to protectagainst escaping coolant and steam.● If it is necessary to work in the enginecompartment while the engine is running,the rotating components (for example,poly-V belt, alternator, radiator fan) andthe high voltage ignition system are an ad-ditional hazard.● Observe the following additional warn-ings if work on the fuel system or the elec-trical system is necessary:– Always disconnect the battery from the

on-board network.– Do not smoke.– Never work near naked flames.– Always keep an approved fire extin-

guisher immediately available.

CAUTIONWhen topping up fluids make sure the cor-rect fluid is put into the correct filler open-ing, otherwise this can cause serious mal-functions or engine damage.

For the sake of the environmentInspect the ground underneath your vehi-cle regularly so that any leaks are detec-ted at an early stage. If you find spots of oilor other fluids in the area where it wasparked, have your vehicle inspected at theworkshop.

NoteIn right-hand drive vehicles* some brakefluid reservoirs are on the other side of theengine compartment ››› Fig. 304.

Opening and closing the bonnet


WARNING● Never open the bonnet if you see steamor drips of coolant being released from theengine compartment. Failure to complycould result in burns. Wait until no steam orcoolant can be seen before opening thebonnet.

348


● For safety reasons the bonnet must al-ways be completely closed when the vehi-cle is moving. Therefore, after closing thebonnet, always check that the locking ele-ment is properly engaged. This is the caseif the bonnet is flush with the adjacentbody panels.● Should you notice that the bonnet is notsafely secured when the vehicle is moving,stop the vehicle immediately and close thebonnet. Failure to follow this instructioncould result in an accident.

CAUTIONTo avoid damage to the bonnet and to thewindscreen wiper arms, only open it whenthe windscreen wipers are in place againstthe windscreen.

349

Practical tips

Checking levels

Fig. 304 Diagram for the location of the variouselements.

From time to time, the levels of the differentfluids in the vehicle must be checked. Neverfill with incorrect fluids, otherwise seriousdamage to the engine may be caused.

Coolant expansion tankEngine oil dipstickEngine oil filler capBrake fluid reservoirVehicle battery (underneath the cover)Windscreen washer reservoir

The checking and refilling of service fluids arecarried out on the components mentioned

1

2

3

4

5

6

above. These operations are described in››› page 348.

OverviewYou will find further explanations, instructionsand restrictions on the technical specifica-tions as of ››› page 381.

Engine oil

General notes

The engine comes with a special, multi-gradeoil that can be used all year round.

Because the use of high-quality oil is essen-tial for the correct operation of the engineand its long useful life, when topping up orchanging oil, use only those oils that complywith VW standards.

The specifications (VW standards) set out inthe following page should appear on thecontainer of the service oil; when the contain-er displays the specific standards for petroland diesel engines together, it means that theoil can be used for both types of engines.

We recommend that the oil change indicatedin the Maintenance Programme, be per-formed by a technical service or specialisedworkshop.

350


The correct oil specifications for your engineare listed in the ››› page 49, Engine oilspecifications.

Service intervalsService intervals can be flexible (LongLifeservice) or fixed (dependent on time/distancetravelled).

Flexible service intervals (LongLife serviceintervals*)Special oils and processes have been devel-oped which, depending on the characteris-tics and individual driving profiles, enable theextension of the oil change service (LongLifeservice intervals).

Because this oil is essential for extending theservice intervals, it must only be used ob-serving the following indications:

● Avoid mixing it with oil for fixed service inter-vals.● Only in exceptional circumstances, if theengine oil level is too low ››› page 351,Checking engine oil level and LongLife oil isnot available, it is permitted to top up (once)with oil for fixed service intervals››› page 49 (up to a maximum of 0.5 li-tres).

Fixed service intervals*If your vehicle does not have the “LongLifeservice interval” or it has been disabled (byrequest), you may use oils for fixed serviceintervals, which also appear in››› page 49, Engine oil specifications. Inthis case, your vehicle must be serviced aftera fixed interval of 1 year/15,000 km (10,000miles)(whatever comes first) ››› page 368.

Vehicles with diesel particulate filter*Only VW 507 00 engine oil, with reduced ashformation, may be used in diesel enginesequipped with particulate filter. Using othertypes of oil will cause a higher soot concen-tration and reduce the life of the DPF. There-fore:

● Avoid mixing this oil with other engine oils.● ››› page 49

Warning lamp

It lights up red

Do not continue driving!Engine oil pressure too low.

It lights up yellow

Check the engine oil level as soon as possible.Top up the oil at the next opportunity ››› page 352.

It flashes yellow

Fault in the oil level sensor.Take the vehicle to a specialised workshop to havethe system inspected. Until then it is advisable tocheck the oil level every time you refuel.

If this warning symbol starts to flash, andis accompanied by three audible warnings,switch off the engine and check the oil level. Ifnecessary, add more oil ››› page 352.

If the warning lamp flashes although theoil level is correct, stop driving. Do not evenrun the engine at idle speed! Obtain technicalassistance.

Checking engine oil level

Fig. 305 Engine oil dipstick.

Read the additional information carefully››› page 48 »

351

Practical tips

The engine oil dipstick indicates the level ofthe oil.

Checking oil level– Park the vehicle in a horizontal position.

– Briefly run the engine at idle speed until theoperating temperature is reached and thenstop.

– Wait for about two minutes.

– Pull out the dipstick. Wipe the dipstick witha clean cloth and insert it again, pushing itin as far as it will go.

– Then pull it out once more and check the oillevel ››› Fig. 305. Top up with engine oil ifnecessary.

Depending on how you drive and the condi-tions in which the vehicle is used, oil con-sumption can be up to 0.5 l/1000 km. Oilconsumption is likely to be higher for the first5,000 km. For this reason the engine oil levelmust be checked at regular intervals, prefera-bly when filling the tank and before a journey.

WARNINGAny work carried out in the engine com-partment or on the engine must be carriedout cautiously.● When working in the engine compart-ment, always observe the safety warnings››› page 348.

CAUTIONIf the oil level is above area A , do not startthe engine. This could result in damage tothe engine and catalytic converter. Con-tact a Technical Service.

Topping up engine oil

Fig. 306 In the engine compartment: Engineoil filler cap.


Before opening the bonnet, read and observethe warnings ››› in Working in the enginecompartment on page 348.

The position of the oil filler opening is shownin the corresponding engine compartment il-lustration ››› page 350.

Engine oil specification ››› page 49.

WARNINGOil is highly inflammable! Ensure that no oilcomes into contact with hot engine compo-nents when topping up.

CAUTIONIf the oil level is above area ››› Fig. 305 A ,do not start the engine. This could result indamage to the engine and catalytic con-verter. Contact a specialised workshop.

For the sake of the environmentThe oil level must never be above zone››› Fig. 305 A . Otherwise oil can be drawnin through the crankcase breather and leakinto the atmosphere via the exhaust sys-tem.

NoteBefore a long trip, we recommend findingan engine oil that conforms to the corre-sponding VW specifications and recom-mend keeping it in the vehicle. This way, thecorrect engine oil will always be availablefor a top-up if needed.

Changing engine oil


352


The engine oil must be changed at the inter-vals given in the service schedule.

We recommend that you have the engine oilchanged by a Technical Service.

The oil change intervals are shown in theMaintenance Programme.

WARNINGOnly change the engine oil yourself if youhave the specialist knowledge required!● Before opening the bonnet, read and ob-serve the warnings ››› page 348.● Wait for the engine to cool down. Hot oilmay cause burn injuries.● Wear eye protection to avoid injuries,such as acid burns, caused by splashes ofoil.● When removing the oil drain plug withyour fingers, keep your arm horizontal tohelp prevent oil from running down yourarm.● Wash your skin thoroughly if it comes intocontact with engine oil.● Engine oil is poisonous! Used oil must bestored in a safe place out of the reach ofchildren.

CAUTIONNo additives should be used with engine oil.This could result in engine damage. Anydamage caused by the use of such addi-

tives would not be covered by the factorywarranty.

For the sake of the environment● Because of disposal problems and thespecial tools and specialist knowledge re-quired, we recommend that you have theengine oil and filter changed by a Techni-cal Service.● Never pour oil down drains or into theground.● Use a suitable container when drainingthe used oil. It must be large enough to holdall the engine oil.

Cooling system

Topping up coolant


Top up coolant when the level is below theMIN (minimum) mark.

Checking coolant level– Park the vehicle in a horizontal position.

– Switch the ignition off.

– Read off the coolant level on coolant ex-pansion tank. When the engine is cold, the

coolant level should be between the marks.When the engine is hot, it may be slightlyabove the upper mark.

Topping up coolant– Wait for the engine to cool down.

– Cover the coolant expansion tank cap witha cloth and carefully unscrew it to the left››› .

– Top up the coolant only if there is still cool-ant in the expansion tank, otherwise youcould damage the engine. If there is nocoolant in the expansion tank, do not con-tinue driving. You should obtain professionalassistance ››› .

– If there is still some coolant in the expansiontank, top up to the upper mark.

– Top up with coolant until the level becomesstable.

– Screw the cap back on correctly.

Any loss of coolant fluid normally indicates aleak in the cooling system. Take the vehiclestraight to a specialised workshop to havethe cooling system examined. If there are noleaks in the engine cooling system, a loss ofcoolant can only occur if the coolant boilsand is forced out of the system as a result ofoverheating. »

353

Practical tips

WARNING● The cooling system is under pressure. Donot unscrew the cap on the coolant expan-sion tank when the engine is hot: risk ofburns!● The antifreeze and coolant fluid can be ahealth hazard. Therefore, the antifreezeshould be stored in the original container ina safe place out of reach of children. Fail-ure to comply could result in poisoning.● If working inside the engine compart-ment, remember that, even when the igni-tion is switched off, the radiator fan maystart up automatically, and therefore thereis a risk of injury.

WARNINGIf there is not enough anti-freeze in thecoolant system, the engine may fail lead-ing to serious damage.● Please make sure that the percentage ofadditive is correct with respect to the low-est expected ambient temperature in thezone in which the vehicle is to be used.● When the outside temperature is verylow, the coolant could freeze and the vehi-cle would be immobilised. In this case, theheating would not work either and inade-quately dressed passengers could die ofcold.

CAUTIONDo not top up the expansion tank with cool-ant fluid if it is empty! Air could enter thecooling system. In this case, stop driving.Seek specialist assistance. Otherwise,there is a risk of engine damage.

CAUTIONThe original additives should never bemixed with coolants which are not ap-proved by SEAT. Otherwise, you run the riskof causing severe damage to the engineand the engine cooling system.● If the fluid in the expansion tank is notpurple but is, for example, brown, this indi-cates that the G13 additive has been mixedwith an inadequate coolant. The coolantmust be changed as soon as possible if thisis the case! This could result in seriousfaults and engine damage.

For the sake of the environmentCoolants and additives can contaminatethe environment. If any fluids are spilled,they should be collected and correctly dis-posed of, with respect to the environment.

Brake fluid

Top up brake fluid


Checking the brake fluid levelThe brake fluid level must be between theMIN and MAX markings.

However, if the brake fluid level goes downnoticeably in a short time, or drops below theMIN mark, there may be a leak in the brakesystem. Seek specialist assistance. A warninglight on the instrument panel display monitorsthe brake fluid level ››› page 40.

In right-hand drive vehicles the brake fluidreservoir is on the other side of the enginecompartment.

Changing brake fluidThe regular intervals at which the brake fluidshould be replaced are listed in the Mainte-nance Programme. We recommend you haveit replaced at a SEAT Official Service, duringan Inspection Service.

WARNING● Brake fluid should be stored in the closedoriginal container in a safe place out ofreach of children. Risk of poisoning!

354


● If the brake fluid is left in the system fortoo long and the brakes are subjected toheavy use, vapour bubbles may form in thebrake system. This would seriously affectthe efficiency of the brakes and the safetyof the vehicle. This may cause an accident.

CAUTIONBrake fluid should not come into contactwith the vehicle paintwork, as it is abrasive.

Windscreen washer reservoir

Checking and topping up the wind-screen washer reservoir


Check the water level in the windscreenwasher reservoir regularly and top up as re-quired.

The container for the windscreen washercontains the cleaning fluid for the wind-screen, the rear window and the headlightwasher system*.

● Open the bonnet ››› page 348.● The windscreen washer reservoir is markedwith the symbol on the cap.

● Check there is enough windscreen water inthe reservoir.

Recommended windscreen wipers● For the hottest seasons we recommendsummer G 052 184 A1 for clear glass. Propor-tions of the mixture in the washer fluid tank:1:100 (1 part concentrate per 100 parts wa-ter).● All year round, G 052 164 A2 for clear glass.Approximate proportion of the winter mixture,up to -18°C (0°F): 1:2 (1 part concentrate per 2parts water); otherwise, a 1:4 proportion ofmixture in the washer fluid tank.

CapacityThe reservoir holds approximately 3 litres inversions without headlight washer and 5 litresin versions with headlight washer.

WARNINGIf the water from the windscreen washerdoes not contain enough anti-freeze, it mayfreeze on the windscreen and rear window,reducing forward and rear visibility.● In winter, ensure the windscreen washercontains enough anti-freeze.● In cold conditions, you should not use thewindscreen wiper system unless you havewarmed the windscreen with the ventila-tion system. The antifreeze could freeze onthe windscreen and reduce visibility.

WARNINGNever mix an unsuitable antifreeze or othersimilar additives with the windscreen wash-er water. A greasy layer may be formed onthe windscreen which will impair visibility.● Use clean water with a window cleanerrecommended by SEAT.● If necessary, add a suitable antifreeze tothe water in the reservoir.

CAUTION● Do not mix cleaning products recommen-ded by SEAT with other products. Thiscould lead to flocculation and may blockthe windscreen washer jets.● When topping up service fluids, make ab-solutely certain that you fill the fluids intothe correct reservoirs. Using the wrong flu-ids could cause serious malfunctions andengine damage!● Not having windscreen wiper fluid re-duces visibility through the windscreen,and leads to loss of visibility in headlightsin models with headlight washer.

Battery

General information

Read the additional information carefully››› page 51. »

355

Practical tips

The battery is located in the engine compart-ment and is almost maintenance-free. It ischecked as part of the Inspection Service.Nevertheless, check the terminals are cleanand have the correct tightening torque, espe-cially in summer and winter.

Disconnecting the batteryThe battery should only be disconnected inexceptional cases. When the battery is dis-connected, some of the vehicle's functionsare “lost” (››› table on page 356). Thesefunctions will require resetting after the bat-tery is reconnected.

Deactivate the anti-theft alarm* before youdisconnect the battery Otherwise the alarmwill be triggered.

Function Reprogramming

One-touch function ofthe electric windows

››› page 145, One-touchopening and closing.

Remote control keyIf the vehicle does not re-spond to the key, theyshould be synchronised››› page 138.

Digital clock ››› page 118.

ESC warning lampAfter driving for a few me-tres, the warning lampgoes out again.

If the vehicle is not used for long periodsThe vehicle has a system for monitoring thecurrent consumption when the engine is leftunused for long periods of time ››› page 265.Some functions, such as the interior lights, orthe remote door opening, may be temporarilydisabled to prevent the battery from runningflat. These functions will come back on assoon as the ignition is switched on and theengine started.

Winter conditionsDuring the winter, the starting power may bereduced, and if necessary, the battery shouldbe charged ››› in Important safety warn-ings for handling a vehicle battery onpage 356

Warning lamp

It lights up

Alternator fault.

The control lamp lights up when the ignition isswitched on. It should go out when the enginehas started running.

If the control lamp lights up while driving,the alternator is no longer charging the bat-tery. You should immediately drive to thenearest specialised workshop.

You should avoid using electrical equipmentthat is not absolutely necessary because thiswill drain the battery.

Important safety warnings for han-dling a vehicle battery

All work on batteries requires specialistknowledge. Please refer to a SEAT OfficialService or a workshop specialising in batter-ies: risk of burns or exploding battery!

The battery must not be opened. Never tryto change the fluid level of the battery. Oth-erwise explosive gas is released from the bat-tery that could cause an explosion.

Wear eye protection.

Battery acid is very corrosive and caustic.Wear protective gloves and eye protection. Inthe event of electrolyte splashes, rinse off withplenty of water.

Fires, sparks, open flames and smoking areprohibited.

The battery should only be charged in a well-ventilated zone. Risk of explosion!

Keep children away from acid and batteries!

WARNING● When repairing or working on the electri-cal system, proceed as follows:

356


– 1. Remove the key from the ignition. Thenegative cable on the battery must bedisconnected.

– 2. When the repair is finished, recon-nect the negative pole of the battery.

● Switch off all electrical devices beforereconnecting the battery. Reconnect firstthe positive cable and then the negativecable. Never reverse the polarity of theconnections. This could cause an electricalfire.● Ensure that the vent hose is always con-nected to the battery.● Never use damaged batteries. This couldcause an explosion! Replace a damagedbattery immediately.

CAUTION● Never disconnect the battery if the igni-tion is switched on or if the engine is run-ning. This could damage the electrical sys-tem or electronic components.

Charging the battery

Terminals for charging the battery are fitted inthe engine compartment.

– Note the warnings ››› in Important safe-ty warnings for handling a vehicle bat-tery on page 356 and ››› .

– Switch off all electrical devices. Removethe ignition key.

– Raise the bonnet ››› page 19.

– Open the battery cover.

– Connect the charger clamps as describedto the positive pole of the battery (+) andexclusively to an earth on the bodywork(–).

– Only use a charger which is compatible foruse with 12 V nominal voltage batteries. Thecharge must not exceed a voltage of 15 V.

– Now connect the battery charger to thepower socket and switch on.

– At the end of the charging process: switchoff the battery charger and disconnect thepower socket cable.

– Finally disconnect the charger cables fromthe battery.

– Replace the battery cover correctly.

– Close the bonnet ››› page 19.

Important: Before you charge the batterymake sure you read the manufacturer's in-structions for using the battery charger.

WARNINGNever charge a battery that has frozen: re-place it! Failure to do so may lead to an ex-plosion.

NoteUse only the terminals in the engine com-partment to charge the battery.

Replacing the battery

The new battery should have the same speci-fications (amperage, load and voltage) asthe used battery.

Your vehicle is equipped with an intelligentpower management system to control thedistribution of electrical energy ››› page 265.The power management function ensuresthat the battery is charged much more effi-ciently than on vehicles without a powermanagement system. To maintain this func-tion after replacing the battery, we recom-mend that the replacement battery used is ofthe same make and type as the original fittedbattery. To make proper use of the powermanagement function after the battery hasbeen changed, have the battery coded to thepower management mode at a specialisedworkshop.

CAUTION● Some vehicles, for example those withthe Start-Stop system* are fitted with aspecial battery (AGM-type or EFB-typebattery). If any other type of battery is fit-ted, the Start-Stop function may be »

357

Practical tips

considerably reduced and the vehicle maynot stop on repeated occasions.● Make sure that the vent hose is alwaysattached to the original opening on theside of the battery. Gases or battery acidcan otherwise escape and possibly causedamage.● The battery holder and clamps must al-ways be correctly secured.● Before starting any work on the battery,always observe the warnings listed under››› page 356, Important safety warnings forhandling a vehicle battery.● Do not forget to replace the battery cov-erings, where applicable. It is a protectionfor high temperatures. This in turn extendsthe vehicle service life.

For the sake of the environment Batteries contain toxic substances in-cluding sulphuric acid and lead. They mustbe disposed of appropriately and must notbe disposed of with ordinary householdwaste. Make sure disconnected batteriescannot tip over. Sulphuric acid could bespilt!

Wheels

Wheels and tyres

General notes

– When driving with new tyres, be especiallycareful during the first 500 km (300 miles).

– If you have to drive over a kerb or similarobstacle, drive very slowly and as near aspossible at a right angle to the obstacle.

– Check from time to time if the tyres aredamaged (punctures, cuts, cracks ordents). Remove any foreign objects em-bedded in the treads.

– Damaged wheels and tyres must be re-placed immediately.

– Keep grease, oil and fuel off the tyres.

– Replace any missing valve caps as soon aspossible.

– Mark the wheels before taking them off sothat they rotate in the same direction whenput back.

– When removed, the wheels or tyres shouldbe stored in a cool, dry and preferably darkplace.

New tyresNew tyres do not give maximum grip straightaway and should therefore be “run in” bydriving carefully and at moderate speeds forabout the first 500 km (300 miles). This willalso increase the useful life of the tyres.

The tread depth of new tyres may vary, ac-cording to the type and make of tyre and thetread pattern.

Low profile tyresLow profile tyres, compared to other rim andtyre combinations, offer a broader tread anda greater rim diameter along with a lowerheight of the tyre sidewall. This results in amore agile driving behaviour. However, onroads that are in poor condition, this might af-fect comfort and cause more noise.

Low profile tyres may deteriorate more quick-ly than standard tyres, for instance due tostrong knocks, potholes, manhole covers andkerbs. Therefore, maintaining the correct tyrepressure is particularly important››› page 359.

To avoid damage to tyres and wheels, drivewith special care when driving on roads inpoor condition.

Visually inspect your tyres every 3,000 km re-garding damage, e.g. flattening/cracks onthe tyre sidewall or deformations/cracks onthe rims.

358

Wheels

If the rims and tyres have received a heavyimpact or have been damaged, have themchecked and, if required, replaced at a speci-alised workshop.

Low profile tyres may deteriorate more quick-ly than standard tyres.

Concealed damageDamage to tyres and rims is often not readilyvisible. If you notice unusual vibration or thecar pulling to one side, this may indicatethat one of the tyres is damaged. Reducespeed immediately if there is any reason tosuspect that damage may have occurred. In-spect the tyres for damage. If no externaldamage is visible, drive slowly and carefullyto the nearest specialised workshop andhave the car inspected.

Tyres with directional tread patternAn arrow on the tyre sidewall indicates the di-rection of rotation on single drive tyres. Al-ways note the direction of rotation indicatedwhen mounting the wheel. This guaranteesoptimum grip and helps to avoid aquaplan-ing, excessive noise and wear.

Retrofitting accessoriesIf you wish to change or fit wheels, rims orwheel trims, we recommend that you consultwith a SEAT Official Service centre for adviceregarding current techniques.

Service life of tyres

Fig. 307 Location of the tyre pressure sticker.

Correct inflation pressures and sensible driv-ing habits will increase the useful life of yourtyres.

● Check tyre pressure at least once a month,and also prior to any long trip.● The tyre pressure should only be checkedwhen the tyres are cold. Do not reduce thepressure of warm tyres.● Adjust tyre pressure to the load being car-ried by the vehicle.

● In vehicles with a tyre pressure indicator,save the modified pressure of tyres››› page 362, ››› page 359.● Avoid fast cornering and hard acceleration.● Inspect the tyres for irregular wear fromtime to time.

The useful life of your tyres depends on thefollowing factors:

Tyre pressureThe tyre inflation pressures are listed on asticker on the rear of the front left door frame››› Fig. 307.

Insufficient or excessive pressure greatly re-duces the useful life of the tyres and adverse-ly affects vehicle performance and ride. Cor-rect inflation pressures are very important,especially at high speeds.

Depending on the vehicle, tyre pressure canbe adjusted to medium load to improve driv-ing comfort (tyre pressure ). When drivingwith comfort tyre pressure fuel consumptionmay increase slightly.

The tyre pressure must be adjusted accord-ing to the load the vehicle is carrying. If thevehicle is going to carry the maximum load,the tyre pressure should be increased to themaximum value indicated on the sticker››› Fig. 307. »

359

Practical tips

Do not forget the spare wheel when checkingthe tyre pressures: Keep this spare wheel in-flated to the highest pressure required for theroad wheels.

In the case of a minimised temporary sparewheel (125/70 R18) inflate to a pressure of 4.2bar as indicated on the tyre pressure label››› Fig. 307.

Driving styleFast cornering, heavy acceleration and hardbraking (squealing tyres) all increase tyrewear.

Wheel balanceThe wheels on new vehicles are balanced.However, certain circumstances may lead toimbalance (run-out), which is detected as vi-brations in the steering wheel.

Unbalanced wheels should be rebalanced,as they otherwise cause excessive wear onsteering, suspension and tyres. A wheel mustalso be rebalanced when a new tyre is fittedor if a tyre is repaired.

Incorrect wheel alignmentIncorrect running gear alignment causes ex-cessive tyre wear, impairing the safety of thevehicle. If you notice excessive tyre wear, youshould check wheel alignment at a SEAT Of-ficial Service.

WARNING● Always adapt the tyre pressure accord-ingly when the vehicle load changes.● A tyre with low air pressure has to flex alot more when the vehicle is heavily loadedor at high speeds, therefore causing over-heating to occur. Under these conditions,the tyre bead may be released or the tyremay burst. Risk of accident!

For the sake of the environmentUnder-inflated tyres will increase fuel con-sumption.

Wear indicators

Fig. 308 Tyre profile: tread wear indicators.

Tread wear indicators indicate if a tyre isworn.

The original tyres on your vehicle have1.6 mm high “tread wear indicators” runningacross the tread. Depending on the manu-facturer, there will be 6 to 8 of them spacedat equal distances around the tyre. Markingson the tyre sidewall (for instance the letters“TWI” or a triangle) indicate the positions ofthe tread wear indicators.

The minimum tread depth required by law is1.6 mm (measured in the tread grooves nextto the tread wear indicators). (Different fig-ures may apply in other countries.)

WARNINGThe tyres must be replaced at the latestwhen the tread is worn down to the treadwear indicators. Failure to follow this in-struction could result in an accident.● Especially in difficult driving conditionssuch as wet or icy roads. It is important thatthe tyre tread be as deep as possible andbe approximately the same on the tyres ofboth the front and the rear axles.● The scant driving safety due to insuffi-cient tread depth is particularly evident invehicle handling, when there is a risk of“aquaplaning” in deep puddles of waterand when driving through corners, andbraking is also adversely affected.● The speed has to be adapted according-ly, otherwise there is a risk of losing controlover the vehicle.

360

Wheels

Interchanging tyres

Fig. 309 Interchanging tyres.

To ensure that the wear is equal on all tyresthe wheels should be changed round fromtime to time according to the system››› Fig. 309. The useful life of all the tyres willthen be about the same time.

New tyres or new wheels

– All four wheels must be fitted with tyres ofthe same type, size (rolling circumference)and preferably the same tread pattern.

– Tyres should be replaced at least in pairsand not individually (i.e. both front tyres orboth rear tyres together).

– Do not use tyres whose effective size ex-ceeds the dimensions of the factory-ap-proved makes of tyre.

– If you wish to fit the vehicle with rims ortyres different to those installed in manu-facture, it is advisable to consult a SEAT Of-ficial Service before purchasing them.

The tyres and wheel rims are an essentialpart of the vehicle's design. The tyres andrims approved by SEAT are specially match-ed to the characteristics of the vehicle andmake a major contribution to good roadhold-ing and safe handling ››› .

The sizes of the rims and tyres approved foryour vehicle are listed in the vehicle docu-mentation (e.g. EC Certificate of Conformityor COC document1)). The vehicle documen-tation varies depending on the country of res-idence.

A knowledge of tyre designations makes iteasier to choose the correct tyres. The fol-lowing wording can be read on the sides ofthe tyre:

215/60 R16 95VThis contains the following information:

215 Tyre width in mm

60 Height/width ratio in %

R Tyre construction: Radial

16 Rim diameter in inches

95 Load rating code

V Speed index

The manufacturing date is also indicated onthe tyre sidewall (possibly only on the outerpart):

DOT... 2216...it means, for example, that the tyre was man-ufactured in the 22nd week of 2016.

But note that with some types of tyre, theactual tyre size can differ from the nomi-nal size marked on the tyre (for instance215/60 R16 95 V), and there may be signif-icant differences in the contours of thetyres, even though the tyres are markedwith the same nominal size. When replac-ing the tyres, it is therefore important tomake sure that the actual size of the newtyres does not exceed the dimensions ofthe factory-approved makes of tyre.

Failure to observe this requirement can af-fect the clearance needed for the tyres. Ifthe tyres rub against the bodywork, in cer-tain circumstances the tyres, running gearor bodywork and pipes may be damaged, »

1) COC = certificate of conformity.361

Practical tips

and vehicle safety could be severely im-paired ››› .

If you use tyres that are approved by SEATyou can be sure that the actual tyre di-mensions will be correct for your vehicle. Ifyou decide to fit a different type of tyre,you must obtain the appropriate manufac-turer's certificate from the tyre retailer toconfirm that the tyres are suitable for yourvehicle. Keep this certificate in a safeplace.

Your SEAT Official Service will be able toadvise you on which tyres may be fitted toyour vehicle.

It is best to have all servicing of wheels andtyres performed by a specialised workshop.They are familiar with the procedure andhave the necessary special tools and spareparts as well as the proper facilities for dis-posing of the old tyres respecting the envi-ronment.

WARNING● It is very important to ensure that thetyres you have chosen have adequateclearance. When selecting replacementtyres, do not rely entirely on the nominaltyre size marked on the tyre, since the ef-fective tyre size can differ significantly de-pending on the manufacturer. Inadequatetyre clearance can result in damage to thetyres or the vehicle, causing a serious safe-ty risk. Risk of accident! It may also invalid-

ate the vehicle's registration for use onpublic roads.● Avoid running the vehicle on tyres thatare more than 6 years old. If you have noalternative, you should drive slowly andwith extra care at all times.● If wheel trims are fitted after the car ispurchased, ensure that there is an ade-quate flow of air for cooling the brake sys-tem.

For the sake of the environmentOld tyres must be disposed of according tothe laws in the country concerned.

Note● A SEAT Service Centre should be consul-ted to find out whether wheels or tyres ofdifferent sizes to those originally fitted bySEAT can be fitted, and to find out aboutthe combinations allowed between thefront axle (axle 1) and the rear axle (axle 2).● Never mount used tyres if you are notsure of their “previous history”.● For technical reasons, it is not generallypossible to use the wheels from other vehi-cles. In some cases, this may also be truefor the same model of wheel.

Wheel bolts

The wheel bolts are matched to the rims.When installing different wheels (for instancealloy wheels or wheels with winter tyres) it isimportant to use the correct wheel bolts withthe right length and correctly shaped boltheads. This ensures that wheels are fitted se-curely and that the brake system functionscorrectly.

The wheel bolts must be clean and turn easi-ly.

A special adapter is required to turn the anti-theft wheel bolts* ››› page 56.

Tyre monitoring system

Introduction

WARNINGUnsuitable handling of the wheels andtyres may lead to sudden tyre pressure los-ses, to tread separation or even to a blow-out.● Check tyre pressures regularly and en-sure they are maintained at the pressuresindicated. Tyre pressure that is too lowcould cause overheating, resulting in treaddetachment or even burst tyres.

362

Wheels

● Tyre pressure should be that indicated onthe label when the tyres are cold at alltimes ››› page 382.● Regularly check the cold inflation pres-sure of the tyres. If necessary, change thetyre pressure of the vehicle tyres while theyare cold.● Regularly check your tyres for damageand wear.● Never exceed the maximum permittedspeed or loads specified for the type oftyre fitted on your vehicle.

For the sake of the environmentUnder-inflated tyres lead to increased fuelconsumption and tyre wear.

Note● Driving for the first time with new tyres ata high speed can cause them to slightly ex-pand, which could then produce an airpressure warning.● Only replace used tyres with those au-thorised by SEAT for the correspondingtype vehicle.● Do not only rely on the tyre monitoringsystem. Regularly check your tyres to en-sure that the tyre pressure is correct andthat the tyres are not damaged due topuncture, cuts, tears and impacts/dents.Remove objects from the tyres only whenthey have not pierced the tyres.

Tyre control lamp

It lights up

The tyre pressure in one or more wheels has clearlygone down from the tyre pressure set by the driver orthe tyre has structural damage.Additionally, an audible warning can be heard and atext message is displayed on the instrument paneldisplay.Stop the vehicle! Reduce speed immediately!Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible. Avoidsudden manoeuvres and braking! Check all tyresand pressures. Replace any damaged tyres.

Flashes

Fault in the system.The control lamp flashes for approximately one mi-nute and then lights up permanently.If tyre pressure is correct, switch the ignition off andon again. If the control lamp remains lit up, the tyremonitoring indicator can be calibrated. Have the sys-tem checked by a specialised workshop.

Several control and warning lamps light upfor a few seconds when the ignition is switch-ed on while the function is verified. They willswitch off after a few seconds.

WARNINGWhen the tyres are inflated at differentpressures or at a pressure that is too lowthen a tyre may be damaged resulting in aloss of control of the vehicle and a seriousor fatal accident.

● If the warning lamp lights up, stop im-mediately and check the tyres.● If the tyres are inflated at different pres-sures or if a tyre pressure is too low, this willincrease tyre wear, negatively affecting ve-hicle stability and increasing braking dis-tances.● If tyres are inflated at different pressuresor a tyre pressure is too low, a tyre may bedamaged and burst resulting in a loss ofcontrol of the vehicle.● The driver is responsible for ensuring thatall of the vehicle tyres are correctly infla-ted to the right pressure. The recommen-ded tyre pressure is indicated on the label››› page 382.● The tyre monitoring system can only op-erate correctly if all of the tyres are infla-ted to the correct pressure when cold.● Driving with tyres at the wrong pressurecan damage them and result in an acci-dent. Ensure that the tyre pressures of allthe tyres correspond to the vehicle load.● Before starting a journey, always inflatetyres to the correct pressure.● Tyres with insufficient pressure are sub-jected to more flexing. Due to this, the tyrecould become excessively hot, causingtread separation and also tyre blow-out.● With an overloaded vehicle at highspeed, the tyres can overheat and burst re-sulting in a loss of vehicle control. »

363

Practical tips

● Tyre pressures which are too high or toolow reduce the useful life of the tyre, affect-ing vehicle performance.● If a tyre has not been punctured and itdoes not have to be changed immediately,drive to the nearest specialised workshopat a moderate speed and have the tyrechecked and inflated to the correct pres-sure.


Note● If excessively low tyre pressure is detec-ted with the ignition on, an audible warningwill sound. In the event that there is a faultin the system, an audible warning willsound.● Driving on dirt tracks for a long period oftime or driving in a sporty style can tempo-rarily deactivate the TPMS. The controllamp shows a fault, but disappears whenroad conditions or the driving style change.

Tyre monitoring indicator

Fig. 310 Instrument panel: warning of loss oftyre pressure.

The tyre monitor indicator compares wheelrevolutions and, with this information, thetread of each wheel using the ABS sensors. Ifthe rolling circumference of one or morewheels has changed, the tyre monitoring indi-cator will indicate this on the instrument pan-el through a warning lamp and a warning tothe driver ››› Fig. 310. When only one specifictyre is affected, its position within the vehiclewill be indicated.

Loss of pressure: Check lefttyre pressure!

Wheel tread changeThe wheel tread changes when:

● Tyre pressure is manually changed● Tyre pressure is insufficient

● Tyre structure is damaged● The vehicle is unbalanced because of aload● The wheels on an axle are subject to aheavier load (e.g. with a heavy load).● The vehicle is fitted with snow chains● The temporary spare wheel is fitted● The wheel on one axle is changed

There may be a delay in the reaction of thetyre monitoring indicator or it may not indi-cate anything under certain circumstances(e.g. sporty driving, snow-covered or un-paved roads, or when driving with snowchains).

Calibrating the tyre monitoring in-dicator

After changing the tyre pressure or replacingone or more wheels, the tyre monitoring indi-cator must be recalibrated. Do the same, forexample, when the front and rear wheels areswapped.

● Switch the ignition on.

364

Wheels

● Store the new tyre pressure in the EasyConnect1) system with the > SETTINGSfunction button ››› page 36.● In vehicles without a radio: press and holddown the button , with the ignition on,until an acoustic signal is heard.

When driving, the system self-calibrates thetyre pressure provided by the driver and thewheels fitted. After a long journey with variedspeeds the programmed values are collectedand monitored.

With the wheels under very heavy loads, thetyre pressure must be increased to the totalrecommended tyre pressure before the cali-bration ››› page 382.

Note● The tyre monitoring indicator does notfunction when there is a fault in the ESC orABS ››› page 250.● An erroneous indication may be givenwhen snow chains are in use because theyincrease the tread of the wheel.

Temporary spare wheel

General information

Fig. 311 Spare wheel: floor panel raised.

The temporary spare wheel has been de-signed to be used for short periods of time.Have the tyres checked and replaced assoon as possible at a SEAT Official Service orat a specialised workshop.

Please note the following restrictions whenusing the compact temporary spare wheel.The compact temporary spare wheel is de-signed specifically for this model. For this rea-

son, do not use a temporary spare wheelfrom a different type of vehicle.

Removing the temporary spare wheel– Lift and hold up the floor panel to remove

the temporary spare wheel.

– Turn the thumb wheel anti-clockwise››› Fig. 311.

– Take out the temporary spare wheel.

ChainsFor technical reasons, snow chains must notbe used on the temporary spare wheel.

If you have a puncture on one of the frontwheels when using snow chains, fit the tem-porary spare wheel in place of one of the rearwheels. Fit the snow chains on the rear wheelthat you have removed and replace thepunctured front wheel with this wheel.

WARNING● After fitting the temporary spare wheel,check the tyre pressures as soon as possi-ble. Failure to do so may cause an acci-dent. The tyre pressure is listed on the backof the left front door frame ››› Fig. 307. »

1) In vehicles that are not equipped with the EasyConnect system, the switch for adjusting tyrepressure is located in the centre console next tothe hazard warning lights.

365

Practical tips

● Do not drive at over 80 km/h (50 mph)when the temporary spare wheel is fittedon the vehicle: risk of accident!● Never travel more than 200 km using atemporary spare wheel.● Avoid heavy acceleration, hard brakingand fast cornering: risk of accident!● Never use more than one temporaryspare wheel at the same time, risk of acci-dent.● No other type of tyre (normal summer orwinter tyre) may be fitted on the compacttemporary spare wheel rim.● If you are driving using the spare wheel,the ACC system could automaticallyswitch off during the journey. Switch off thesystem when starting off.

Getting the spare wheel out of ve-hicles with BEATS Audio 10 speak-ers (with subwoofer)*

Fig. 312 In the boot: remove the subwoofer.

To remove the spare wheel, you must first re-move the subwoofer.

● Lift and secure the luggage compartmentfloor as described in ››› page 175.● Disconnect the subwoofer ››› Fig. 312 1speaker cable.● Turn the securing wheel in an anti-clock-wise direction ››› Fig. 312 2 .● Remove the subwoofer speaker and thespare wheel.

● When re-mounting the spare tyre, place thesubwoofer on the base of the wheel rim withcare. When doing so, the tip of the “FRONT”arrow on the subwoofer should point forward.● Reconnect the speaker cable and firmly ro-tate the securing wheel clockwise so that thesubwoofer system and wheel are firmly inplace.

Winter service

Winter tyres

– Winter tyres must be fitted on all fourwheels.

– Only use winter tyres that are approved foryour vehicle.

– Please note that the maximum permissiblespeed for winter tyres may be lower thanfor summer tyres.

– Also note that winter tyres are no longer ef-fective when the tread is worn down.

– After fitting the wheels you must alwayscheck the tyre pressures. When doing so,take into account the correct tyre pressureslisted on the rear of the front left door frame››› page 359.

In winter road conditions winter tyres will con-siderably improve vehicle handling. The

366

Wheels

design of summer tyres (width, rubber com-pound, tread pattern) gives less grip on iceand snow. This applies particularly to vehiclesequipped with wide section tyres or withhigh speed tyres (code letters H, V or Y onthe sidewall).

Only use winter tyres of the correct type ap-proved for your vehicle. The sizes of thesetyres are specified in the vehicle's documents(e.g. EC Certificate of Conformity or COC1)).The vehicle documentation varies dependingon the country of residence. See also››› page 361.

Winter tyres lose a great deal of their proper-ties when the tread is worn down to a depthof 4 mm.

The performance of winter tyres is also se-verely impaired by ageing, even if the tread isstill much deeper than 4 mm.

Winter tyres are subject to the following max-imum speed limits according to speed ratingcode letter: ›››

Speed ratingcode letter››› page 361

Maximum speed limit

Q 160 km/h (100 mph)

S 180 km/h (112 mph)

Speed ratingcode letter››› page 361

Maximum speed limit

T 190 km/h (118 mph)

H 210 km/h (130 mph)

V 240 km/h (149 mph) (pleasenote relevant restrictions)

W 270 km/h (168 mph)

Y 300 km/h (186 mph)

Vehicles capable of exceeding these speedsmust have an appropriate sticker attachedso that it is visible to the driver. Suitable stick-ers are available from the SEAT Official Serv-ice and specialised workshop. Please notethe regulations to this effect in your country.

“All-weather” tyres can also be used insteadof winter tyres.

Using winter tyres with V-rating

Please note that the generally applicable240 km/h (149 mph) speed for winter tyreswith the letter V is subject to technical re-strictions; the maximum permissible speedfor your vehicle may be significantly lower.The maximum speed limit for these tyres de-pends directly on the maximum axle weights

for your car and on the listed weight rating ofthe tyres being used.

It is best to contact a SEAT Official Service tocheck the maximum speed which is permissi-ble for the V-rated tyres fitted on your car onthe basis of this information.

WARNINGExceeding the maximum speed permittedfor the winter tyres fitted on your car cancause tyre failure, resulting in a loss of con-trol of the vehicle – risk of accident.

For the sake of the environmentSummer tyres should be fitted again assoon as possible after the winter period;they give better handling on roads whichare free of snow and ice. Summer tyres per-form with less rolling noise, tyre wear and –most important – reduce fuel consumption.

1) COC = certificate of conformity.367

Maintenance

Maintenance

SEAT Maintenance Pro-gramme

Service intervals

Service work and digital mainte-nance plan

Log of services performed (“Digital Main-tenance Plan”)The SEAT dealership or a specialised work-shop records Service receipts in a centralsystem. Thanks to this comprehensive docu-mentation of the service history, it is possibleto reproduce the services performed anytime. SEAT recommends requesting a Servicereceipt after every service carried out con-taining all the services carried out on the sys-tem.

Whenever there is a new service the receipt isreplaced with a current one.

The Digital Maintenance Plan is not avail-able in some markets. In this case, yourSEAT dealer will inform you about the cur-rent documentation of the work.

Service worksIn the Digital Maintenance Plan, your SEATauthorised service or specialised workshopdocuments the following information:

● When each one of the services was carriedout.● Whether a specific repair has been sugges-ted, e.g. changing the brake pads in the nearfuture.● If you have expressed a special request forthe maintenance. Your Service Advisor willwrite the work order.● The components or fluids that werechanged.● The date of the next service.

The Long Life Mobility Warranty is valid untilthe next inspection. This information is docu-mented in all checks performed.

The type and the volume of the service mayvary from one vehicle to another. A special-ised workshop will be able to provide specificinformation on the jobs for your vehicle.

WARNINGIf the services are insufficient or not per-formed and if the service intervals are notobserved, the vehicle may be immobilisedin traffic cause an accident and severe in-juries.

● Make sure that any repairs are carriedout by a SEAT authorised service or speci-alised workshop.

CAUTIONSEAT cannot be held liable for any damageto the vehicle due to insufficient work or oflack of availability of spare parts.

NoteRegular services on the vehicle not onlymaintain its value, but also its correct oper-ation and road safety. For this reason, con-duct the services in accordance with SEATguidelines.

Fixed service or Flexible service

Services are classified as oil change serviceand inspection. The service interval displayon the instrument panel display serves as areminder of the next service.

Depending on the features, the engine andthe conditions of use of the car, either theFixed service or the Flexible service will beapplied for an oil change service..

How to know which type of service needsto his vehicle● Check the tables below:

368

SEAT Maintenance Programme

Oil change servicea)

PR No. Type ofservice Service interval

QI1

Fixed

Every 5000 km or after1 yearb)

QI2 Every 7500 km or after1 yearb)



QI6 Flexible According to the service in-terval display

a) The data are based on normal conditions of use.b) Whatever happens first.

Inspection Servicea)

According to the service interval display

a) The data are based on normal conditions of use.

Bear in mind the information about the speci-fications of the engine oil according to theVW standard ››› page 48.

Particular characteristics of the FlexibleServiceRegarding the Flexible Service, the oilchange service only has to be performedwhen the vehicle needs it. To calculate when

you have to carry out this service, take intoaccount the individual conditions of use andpersonal driving style. A major component ofthe flexible service the use of LongLife oil in-stead of conventional engine oil.

Bear in mind the information about the speci-fications of the engine oil according to theVW standard ››› page 48.

If you do not want to the flexible serviceyou can select the fixed service However,a fixed service may affect service costsThe Service Advisor will gladly advise you.

Service intervals displayAt SEAT, the dates of the services are indica-ted by the service interval display on the in-strument panel ››› page 121 or in the Vehiclesettings menu of the infotainment system››› page 36. The service interval displaygives information for service dates that in-volve an engine oil change or an inspection.When the time for the corresponding servicecomes, additional work required, such as thechange of brake fluid and the spark plugs,can be carried out.

Information on the conditions ofuse

The service intervals and groups are usuallybased on normal conditions of use.

If, on the other hand, the vehicle is under ad-verse conditions of use, some of the workmust be carried out before the next serviceperiod or even between service intervals.

Conditions of use adverse include:

● The use of fuel with a high sulphur content.● Frequent short trips.● Letting the engine idle for a long period oftime, as in the case of taxis.● Using the vehicle in areas with thick dust.● Frequent driving with a trailer (dependingon equipment).● Using the vehicle mostly in situations with alot of traffic and stops (e.g. in a city).● Using the vehicle mostly in winter.

This applies especially for the followingparts (depending on equipment):

● Dust and pollen filter● Air Care allergen filter● Air filter● Toothed chain● Particulate filter● Engine oil

The Service Advisor of your specialisedworkshop will gladly inform you about theneed of performing service work between »

369

Maintenance

normal service intervals, always consideringthe conditions of use of your vehicle.

WARNINGIf the services are insufficient or not per-formed and if the service intervals are notobserved, the vehicle may be immobilisedin traffic and cause accidents and severeinjuries.● Have the services conducted at author-ised SEAT services or specialised work-shops.

CAUTIONSEAT cannot be held liable for any damageto the vehicle due to insufficient work or oflack of availability of spare parts.

Sets of services

Sets of services include all the maintenanceworks needed to ensure the safety and thesmooth running of the vehicle (depending onthe conditions of use and the features ofthe vehicle, such as the engine, gearbox, oroperating fluids). Maintenance services aredivided into inspection and review services.Consult the details of the jobs required foryour vehicle at:

● Your SEAT authorised service● Your specialised workshop

Due to technical reasons (continuous devel-opment of components) the sets of servicesmay vary. Your SEAT authorised service orspecialised workshop is always receiving up-dates in time.

Additional service offers

Approved spare parts

Original SEAT Spare Parts have been con-ceived for their vehicles and approved bySEAT, with a special emphasis on safety.These parts correspond exactly to the manu-facturer's requirements in terms of design,accuracy of the measurements and materi-als. The original SEAT Spare Parts have beenconceived exclusively for your vehicle. For thisreason, we always recommend the use ofOriginal SEAT Spare Parts. SEAT cannot beheld liable for the safety and suitability ofparts from other manufacturers.

Approved spare parts

Approved spare parts, following the manu-facturer's requirements, are an additionalservice to you, offering the possibility of re-placing complete sets, such as: light engine,gearboxes, heads, control units, electricalcomponents, etc.

These parts are, approved parts, and are thesame as the factory parts, which are also ap-proved spare parts.

Original accessories

We recommend you only use SEAT OriginalAccessories and SEAT approved accessoriesfor your vehicle. The reliability, safety andsuitability of these accessories have been in-spected specifically for this type of vehicle.SEAT cannot be held liable for the safety andsuitability of parts from other manufacturers.

SEAT Service Mobility (SEATService Mobility)

Since the moment you purchase your SEATvehicle you will be able to enjoy the benefitsand coverage of the SEAT Mobility Service.

For the first two years after the purchase,your new SEAT vehicle is automatically cov-ered by the SEAT Mobility Service without ad-ditional costs.

If you wish to enjoy this service after this peri-od, you can extend SEAT Mobility as long asyou carry out the recommended Inspectionand Maintenance Services at a SEAT Author-ised Service.

370

Vehicle maintenance

When to extend the Mobility Service, is docu-mented in the inspection and maintenanceplan the right to the service.

If your SEAT vehicle is immobilised due to afault or an accident, our assistance serviceswill help you keep moving.

Take into account that the SEAT MobilityService differs depending on the country inwhich the vehicle was purchased. For furtherinformation ask your SEAT dealership or theSEAT website in your country.

Warranty

Fault-free operation warranty

SEAT Authorised Services ensure the perfectcondition of new vehicles. Check the pur-chase agreement or complementary addi-tional documentation provided by your Tech-nical Service to see the conditions and theterms of the warranty. Consult further infor-mation in this regard in your SEAT OfficialService.

Vehicle maintenance

Maintenance and cleaning

Basic considerations

Regular and careful care helps to maintainthe value of your vehicle. In addition, it maybecome a prerequisite to demand the war-ranty in the event of corrosion damage anddeficiencies in the paint coat of the body-work.

Specialised workshops have the necessarycare products. Please follow the instructionsfor application on the packaging.

WARNING● Cleaning products and other materialsused for car care can be damaging to yourhealth if misused.● Always keep care products in a safeplace, out of the reach of children. Dangerof poisoning!

For the sake of the environment● When purchasing car care products,chose products that are compatible withthe environment.● The waste from car-care products shouldnot be disposed of with ordinary householdwaste.

Washing the vehicle

The longer you take to clean the tanks, e.g.remains of insects, bird excrements, tree resinor anti frost salt adhered to your vehicle, themore damage it can cause to the surface.High temperatures, for instance strong sun-light, further intensify the damage.

Before washing the car, soften the dirt usingplenty of water.

To remove encrusted dirt such as insects, birddroppings or tree resin, use a lot of water anda microfibre cloth.

Have the underside of the vehicle washed af-ter the end of the anti frost salts in winter.

High pressure cleanersWhen washing the vehicle with a high-pres-sure cleaner, always follow the operating in-structions for the equipment. This appliesparticularly to the operating pressure and thedistance between the spraying water. Do notaim the jet directly to the side window gas-kets, doors, covers or the panoramic sun-roof*; the same applies to tyres, rubber ho-ses, soundproofing material, sensors* orcamera lenses*. Keep a distance of at least40 cm.

Do not remove snow and ice with a high-pressure cleaner. »

371

Maintenance

Do not use a nozzle that sprays the water outin a direct stream or one that has a rotatingjet for forcing off dirt.

The water temperature must not exceed60°C.

Automatic car wash tunnelsSpray the vehicle before starting the carwash.

Make sure that the windows and the panor-amic sunroof* are closed and the windscreenwipers are deactivated. Bear in mind the in-structions of the car wash tunnel operator,especially if your vehicle has detachableparts.

Use of car washes without brushes if possible.

Washing by handClean your vehicle from top to bottom with asoft sponge or with a brush. Only use clean-ing products that do not contain solvents.

Washing vehicles with a matte paint byhandTo prevent damage to the vehicle whenwashing it, first remove the thicker dust anddirt. To remove traces of insects, grease andfingerprints, it is best to use a special cleanerfor matte paint.

Apply the product with a microfibre cloth. Toavoid damaging the surface of the paint, donot apply too much pressure.

Rinse with plenty of water. Then clean it witha neutral cleaning product and a soft microfi-bre cloth.

Rinse the vehicle again with plenty of waterand then leave it to dry. Remove traces ofwater with a leather cloth.

WARNING● Only wash the vehicle with the ignitionswitched off or according to the specifica-tions of the car wash tunnel operator. Riskof accident!● When cleaning the underbody or the in-side of the wheel arches, protect yourselffrom sharp or pointy metal parts. Risk ofcut!● After cleaning the brakes could act moreslowly due to moisture or, in winter, the iceon the brake discs and pads. Risk of acci-dent! In this case the brakes should bedried by pressing the brake pedal severaltimes.

CAUTION● Before washing the vehicle in an auto-matic car wash, please make sure to re-tract the exterior mirrors to prevent themfrom being damaged. Electric exterior rear-

view mirrors must always be folded/de-ployed electrically!● Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight.Risk of damaging the paint job!● Do not use sponges, abrasive householdsponges or similar to clean insect remains.Risk of damaging the surface!● Vehicle parts with matte paint:– Do not use polish or hard wax. Risk of

damaging the surface!– Never select washing programs that in-

clude the use of wax. This could dam-age the appearance of matte paint.

– Do not put stickers or magnets on partswith matte paint, as removing themmay damage the paint.

For the sake of the environmentThe car should only be washed in specialwash bays. These places are prepared toprevent oily water from getting into thepublic drains.

Cleaning and maintenance instruc-tions

The cleaning and maintenance of individualcomponents of the vehicle can be checked inthe following tables. The contents should beunderstood merely as a recommendation. Goto your specialised workshop if you have

372

Vehicle maintenance

special questions or parts that are not listed.Take he general considerations into account››› in Take special care with... onpage 376.

Exterior cleaning

Windscreen wipers

Problem Solution

Dirt Soft cloth with wipers

Headlights / Tail lights

Problem Solution

Dirt Soft sponge with neutral soapsolutiona)

a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in1 litre of water

Sensors / Camera lenses

Problem Solution

Dirt

Sensors: soft cloth with clean-ing product which does notcontain solventsCamera lenses - soft cloth withcleaning product with no alco-hol content

Snow/ice Hand brush/Anti frost spraywith no solvents

Wheels

Problem Solution

Anti frost salt Water

Brake abrasiondust

Acid-free special cleaningproduct

End exhausts

Problem Solution

Anti frost salt Water, if a steel cleaning prod-uct is required

Covers / Trims

Problem Solution

Dirt Neutral soap solutiona), if asteel cleaning product is re-quired


Paint

Problem Solution

Flaws in the paintCheck the paint's colour codein an authorised service and re-store with a touch-up pencil

Spilled fuel Immediately rinse with water

Environmental rusttank

Apply rust remover and thenapply hard wax. Go you yourspecialised workshop if youhave any queries

Problem Solution

Corrosion Have your specialised work-shop take care of this

The water doesnot create drop-lets on the cleanpaint

Maintain with hard wax (atleast 2 times a year)

No shine de-spite sober main-tenance/paint

Treat with suitable wax and ap-ply paint preservative after-wards if the wax used does notcontain preservative ingredi-ents

Tanks, e.g. insectremains, birddroppings, treesap, road salt

Immediately soften with waterand remove with a microfibrecloth

Fat-based dirt,e.g. cosmeticproducts orsunscreen

Delete immediately with a neu-tral soap solutiona) and a softcloth


Carbon fibre parts

Problem Solution

Dirt Clean the same way as pain-ted parts ››› page 371 »

373

Maintenance

Decoration slides

Problem Solution

Dirt Soft sponge with neutral soapsolutiona)


Interior cleaning

Windows

Problem Solution

Dirt Apply windscreen cleaner andthen dry with a cloth

Covers / Trims

Problem Solution

Dirt Neutral soap solutiona)


Plastic parts

Problem Solution

Dirt Damp cloth

Encrusted dirt Neutral soap solutiona), if pos-sible solvent-free plastic clean-er


Displays/instrument panel

Problem Solution

Dirt Soft cloth with a liquid crystaldisplay cleaner

Control panels

Problem Solution

Dirt Soft brush, then soft cloth withneutral soap solutiona)


Seat belts

Problem Solution

Dirt Neutral soap solutiona), al-lowed to dry before retracting


Fabrics, artificial, Alcantara leather

Problem Solution

Superficial dirtparticles

Vacuum cleaner

Water-based dirt,e.g. coffee, tea,blood etc.

Absorbent cloth and neutralsoap solutiona)

Problem Solution

Grease-baseddirt, e.g. oil, make-up, etc.

Apply a neutral soap solutiona).Absorb the dissolved greaseand paint particles drying withan absorbent cloth, in case youmust treat it with water after-wards

Special dirt, e.g.pens, nail polish,dispersion paint,shoe cream etc.

Special stain remove: dry withan absorbent cloth, if applica-ble, apply neutral soap solutionafterwardsa)


Natural leather

Problem Solution

Recent dirt Cotton cloth with neutral soapsolutiona)

Water-based dirt,e.g. coffee, tea,blood etc.

Recent stains: absorbent clothDry stains: leather cleaner

Grease-baseddirt, e.g. oil, make-up, etc.

Recent stains: absorbent clothand leather cleanerDry stains: grease dissolvingspray

Special dirt, e.g.pens, nail polish,dispersion paint,shoe cream etc.

Stain remover suitable forleather

374

Vehicle maintenance

Problem Solution

Care Apply preservative cream regu-larly to protect from sunlight.Use a colour preservative if re-quired


Carbon fibre parts

Problem Solution

Dirt Clean like plastic parts

Take special care with...

Headlights/tail lights● Do not clean the headlights/tail lights witha dry cloth or sponge.● Do not use cleaning products that containalcohol. Risk of cracks!

Wheels● Do not use for paint wax or other abrasiveproducts.● If the protective coating on the paint of therim has been damaged due to stone impacts,scratches, etc., the damage should be re-paired immediately.

Camera lenses● Do not use hot or warm water to remove iceor snow from the camera lenses. Risk ofcracking the lens!● To clean the camera lens, never use abra-sive cleaning products or products with alco-hol. Risk of scratches and cracks!

Windows● Remove snow and ice from windows andexterior mirrors with a plastic scraper only. Toavoid scratches, the scraper should only bepushed in one direction and not moved toand fro.● Never remove snow or ice from windowsand rearview mirrors with warm or hot water.Risk of cracks on the windows!● To prevent damage to the heating of therear window, do not put stickers over theheating elements.

Covers/trims● Do not use cleaning products or chromebased cleaning agents.

Paint● The vehicle must be free from dirt and dustbefore applying wax or care products. Risk ofscratches!● Do not apply wax or care products if thevehicle is exposed to direct sunlight. Risk ofdamaging the paint job!

● The ambient rust deposits must not be re-moved through friction. Risk of damaging thepaint job!● Remove cosmetic products and sunlightimmediately. Risk of damaging the paint job!

Displays/instrument panel● The screens, the instrument panel and thetrim around it must not be cleaned dry. Risk ofscratches!● Make sure that the instrument panel isswitched off and cooled down before clean-ing.● Make sure that no liquid leaks between theinstrument panel and the trim. Risk of dam-age!

Control panels● Make sure that no liquid leaks into the con-trol panels. Risk of damage!

Seat belts● Do not remove the seat belts to clean them.● Seat belts and their components must nev-er be cleaned with chemical products, norshould they be allowed to come into contactwith corrosive liquids, solvents or sharp ob-jects. Risk of damaging the fabric!● If you find any damage to the belt webbing,belt fittings, the belt retractor or the buckle,ask your specialised workshop to replace thebelt in question. »

375

Maintenance

Fabrics/artificial leather/Alcantara leath-er● Do not treat artificial leather/Alcantaraleather with leather cleaning products, sol-vents, wax polish, shoe cream, stain removersor similar products.● If the stain is very hard to remove, take thevehicle to a specialised workshop to have itremoved there. This will prevent damage.● Do not use steam cleaners, brushes, hardsponges, etc. to clean.● Do not turn on seat heating* to dry theseats.● Sharp objects on clothing, such as zips, riv-ets or belts can damage the surface.● Open Velcro, e.g. on clothes can damagethe seat upholstery. Make sure that Velcrofasteners are closed.

Natural leather● Never use solvents, wax polish, shoe cream,spot removers or similar products on leather.● Sharp objects on clothing, such as zips, riv-ets or belts can damage the surface.● Do not use steam cleaners, brushes, hardsponges, etc. to clean.● Do not turn on seat heating* to dry theseats.● Avoid exposing leather to direct sunlight forlong periods, otherwise it may tend to losesome of its colour. If the car is left for a pro-

longed period in the bright sun, it is best tocover the leather.

WARNINGDo not use water-repellent coatings on thewindscreen. In bad visibility conditionssuch as humid weather, darkness or whenthe sun is in its lowest point, visibility maybe impacted. Risk of accident! Such coat-ings can also cause the windscreen wiperblades to make noise.

Note● Remains of insects can be removed muchmore easily with previously treated paint.● Regular car care treatments can preventdeposits of ambient rust.

Remove the vehicle from traffic

If you want to leave your vehicle stationaryfor a long period of time, contact a qualifiedworkshop. They will gladly inform you aboutthe necessary measures, such as anti-corro-sion protection, Service and storage.

Also take into account instructions regardingthe vehicle's battery ››› page 355.

376

Event Data Recorder

Information for the user

Event Data RecorderDescription and operation

Your vehicle has an event data recorder(EDR).

The EDR’s function is to record data in theevent of a mild or serious accident. These da-ta are used to support the analysis of how dif-ferent vehicle systems behaved.

The EDR records, over a reduced time range(normally 10 seconds or less), dynamic driv-ing data and data from the restraint systems,such as:

● How different vehicle systems worked.● Whether the driver and the occupants werewearing their seat belts.● How hard the acceleration or brake pedalwas pressed.● Vehicle speed.

These data will provide a better understand-ing of the circumstances of the accident.

Data from the driving assist systems are alsorecorded. This includes data such as whetherthe systems were inactive or active and ifsuch action had an impact on the vehicle’sdynamic behaviour, changing its path in the

aforementioned situations, accelerating ordecelerating the vehicle.

Depending on vehicle equipment, this in-cludes data from systems such as:

● Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)● Emergency braking assistance system(Front Assist).● Park Pilot system● Parking aid system (Park Assist).● Lane Assist

The EDR data are only recorded in specificaccident situations. No data are recorded innormal driving conditions.

No audio or video data inside or around thevehicle are recorded. Under no circumstan-ces are personal data such as name, age, orgender recorded. Nevertheless, third parties(such as criminal proceedings authorities)may relate the contents of the EDR data toother data sources and create a personalreference in the context of an accident inves-tigation.

In order to read the EDR data it is necessaryto access (if legally permitted to do so) thevehicle's ODB (“On-Board-Diagnose”) inter-face while the vehicle is switched on.

SEAT will not have access to EDR data unlessthe owner (or, in “Leasing” cases, the lesseeor hirer) gives their consent. There may be ex-

ceptions to this, depending on legal or con-tractual provisions.

Due to legal requirements in safety-relatedproducts, SEAT may use the EDR data forfield research and in order to improve vehiclesystem quality. Any data used for the purpo-ses of research will be treated anonymously(in other words, no reference will be made tothe vehicle, their owner or the lessee/hirer).

377


Information about the EUDirective 2014/53/EU

Simplified EU compliance declara-tion

Your vehicle has different radioelectrical devi-ces. The manufacturers of these devices de-clare that they comply with Directive2014/53/EU when legally required.

The full text of the EU compliance declarationis available online at the following address:

www.seat.com/generalinfo

Table of correspondences

The table of correspondences will help you toassociate the name of the device in the dec-laration of compliance with the features ofthe vehicle and the terminology used in theon-board documentation.

Features of thevehicle

Name of the deviceaccording to the dec-laration of compli-ance

Radiofrequency re-mote control (vehicle)

FS09, FS12A, FS12P, FS1477,FS94



Radio frequency re-mote control (auxili-ary heater)

Sender STH SEAT -50000914

Telestart

Auxiliary heating 50000864 / D208L VW

Telestart

Bluetooth MIB2 Entry

MIB Standard 2

MIB2 Main-Unit

A580 / A270

Wireless hotspot MIB2 Main-Unit

A580 / A270

Keyless Access Sys-tem

MQB-B B

Radar sensors for as-sistance systems

ARS4-B

MRRevo14F

BSD3.0

Central control unit 5WK50254

5WK50474



Infotainment system MIB2 Entry

MIB Standard 2

MIB2 Main-Unit

A580 / A270

Wireless charging WCH-183

WCH-185

5G0.980.611

Connection to the ex-ternal antenna of thecar

UMTS/GSM-MMC

UMTS/GSM-MMC-AG2

Instrument panel eNSF

Immobilizer integrated indashboard moduleinstrument cluster

Antenna FM/AM Antenna Base

Antennas MQB27 Small/Bigfamily

Antennas KSA Small Fam III

5Q0.035.507 Roof Antenna

GNSS Antenna VAG720166002

8S7.035.503.B378

Information about the EU Directive 2014/53/EU



Antenna amplifiers 6F0.035.2256F9.035.2253V5.035.577.A7N0.035.552.J7N0.035.552.K7N0.035.552.Q5F4.035.2255F4.035.225.A5F4.035.225.B5F9.035.2255F9.035.225.A5F9.035.225.B575.035.225575.035.225.A575.035.225.B

Addresses of the manufacturers

According to the Directive 2014/53/EU, allrelevant components must include the ad-dress of the manufacturer.

The address of the manufacturers of compo-nents that, due to their size or nature, cannotinclude a sticker are listed below, as long as itis legally required:

Radioelectricalequipment fittedin the vehicle

Addresses of themanufacturers

Radiofrequency remotecontrol key

Hella KGaA Hueck & Co.Rixbecker Straße 7559552 Lippstadt,GERMANY

Radioelectricalequipment fittedin the vehicle

Addresses of themanufacturers

Radio frequency re-mote control (auxiliaryheater)

Digades gmbHÄußere Weberstraße 2002763 Zittau, GERMANY

Webasto Thermo &Comfort SEFriedrichshafener Str. 982205 Gilching, GERMANY

Radar sensors for as-sistance systems

ADC Automotive DistanceControl Systems GmbHPeter-Dornier-Straße 1088131 Lindau, GERMANY

Robert Bosch GmbHPostfach 16 6171226 Leonberg,GERMANY

Frequency bands, station power

Radioelectrical equipmenta) Frequency band Max. station power Valid for models

Radiofrequency remote control (vehicle)

433.05-434.78 MHz 10 mW (ERP)

All SEAT models433.05-434.79 MHz 10 mW

868.0-868.6 MHz 25 mW

434.42 MHz 32 µW

Radio frequency remote control (auxiliary heater)868.7-869.2 MHz (869.0 MHz) 0.24 mW, / –6.3 dBm e.r.p. Ateca

868.0-868.6 MHz (868.3 MHz) 3.1 mW, / 4.8 dBm e.r.p. Alhambra »379


Radioelectrical equipmenta) Frequency band Max. station power Valid for models

Auxiliary heating868.0-868.6 MHz (868.3 MHz) 23.5 mW, / 13.7 dBm e.r.p. Alhambra

868.7-869.2 MHz (869.0 MHz) 23.5 mW, / 13.7 dBm e.r.p. Ateca

Bluethooth2402-2480 MHz 6 dBm

All SEAT models2400-2483.5 MHz 10 dBm

Wireless hotspot 2400-2483.5 MHz 10 dBm Leon and Ateca

Connection to the external antenna of the car

GSM 900: 880-915 MHz 33 dBm

Ibiza, Arona, Leon, Ateca and AlhambraGSM 1800: 1710-1785 MHz 30 dBm

WCDMA FDD I: 1920-1980 MHz 24 dBm

WCDMA FDD lll: 1710-1785 MHz 24 dBm

Keyless Access 434.42 MHz 32 µW Ibiza, Toledo, Arona, Leon and Ateca

Radar sensors for assistance systems76 GHz-77 GHz

28.2 dBm Toledo, Leon and Alhambra

35.0 dBm Ibiza, Arona and Ateca

24050-24250 MHz 20 dBm Arona, Ateca and Alhambra

Wireless charging 110-120 kHz 10 W Ibiza, Arona, Leon and Ateca

Instrument panel 125 kHz 40 dBµA/m All SEAT models

a) The commissioning or authorisation of radioelectrical technology may be restricted in some European countries, forbidden or only allowed with additional requirements.

380

Technical specifications

Technical data

Technical specificationsImportant

The information in the vehicle documentationalways takes precedence over the informa-tion in this Instruction Manual.

All technical specifications provided in thisdocumentation are valid for the standardmodel in Spain.

The figures may be different dependingwhether additional equipment is fitted, for dif-ferent models, for special vehicles and forother countries.

Abbreviations used in the Technical Speci-fications section

kW Kilowatt, engine power measurement.

PS Pferdestärke (horsepower), formerlyused to denote engine power.

rpm, 1/min Revolutions per minute - engine speed.

Nm Newton metres, unit of engine torque.

CZ Cetane number, indication of the die-sel combustion power.

RON Research octane number, indication ofthe knock resistance of petrol.


Fig. 313 Chassis number.

VIN in the Easy Connect● Select: button > SETTINGS > Service> Chassis number.

Chassis numberThe VIN is located in the Easy Connect andunder the windscreen, on the driver side››› Fig. 313. Also the VIN is located in the en-gine compartment, on the left-hand side inthe direction of travel. The number is en-graved on the top side rail, and is partiallycovered.

Type plateThe type plate is located on the right sidedoor pillar. Vehicles for certain export coun-tries do not have a type plate.

Identifying lettersThe identifying letters of the engine can beviewed on the instrument panel when the en-gine is switched off and the ignition is on.

● Hold down the button on the dashpanel for more than 15 seconds.

Information on fuel con-sumption

Fuel consumption

Approved consumption values are derivedfrom measurements performed or supervisedby certified EU laboratories, according to thelegislation in force at the time (for more infor-mation, see the Publications Office of the Eu-ropean Union on the EUR-Lex website: © Eu-ropean Union, http://eur-lex.europa.eu/) andapply to the specified vehicle characteristics.

The values relating to fuel consumption andCO2 emissions can be found in the documen-tation provided to the purchaser of the vehi-cle at the time of purchase.

Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions de-pend on the equipment/features of each indi-vidual vehicle, as well as on the driving style,road conditions, traffic conditions, environ-mental conditions, load or number of passen-gers. »

381

Technical data

NoteIn practice, and considering all the factorsmentioned here, consumption values candiffer from those calculated in the currentEuropean regulations.

Weights

Kerb weight refers to the basic model with afuel tank filled to 90% capacity and withoutoptional extras. The figure quoted includes 75kg to allow for the weight of the driver.

Special versions, optional equipment fittingsor retro-fitting accessories will increase theweight of the vehicle ››› .

WARNING● Please note that the centre of gravitymay shift when transporting heavy objects;this may affect vehicle handling and leadto an accident. Always adjust your speedand driving style to suit road conditionsand requirements.● Never exceed the gross axle weight rat-ing or the gross vehicle weight rating. If thepermissible axle load or the permissible to-tal weight is exceeded, the driving charac-teristics of the vehicle may change, whichcould lead to accidents, injuries and dam-age to the vehicle.

Trailer mode

Trailer weights

Trailer weightThe trailer weights and drawbar loads ap-proved are selected in intensive trials accord-ing to precisely defined criteria. The ap-proved trailer weights are valid for vehicles inthe EU for maximum speeds of 80 km/h (50mph) (in certain circumstances up to100 km/h (62 mph)). The figures may be dif-ferent in other countries. All data in the officialvehicle documentation takes precedenceover these data at all times ››› .

Drawbar loadsThe maximum permitted drawbar load on theball coupling of the towing bracket must notexceed 88 kg.

In the interest of road safety, we recommendthat you always tow approaching the maxi-mum drawbar load. The response of the trail-er on the road will be poor, if the drawbarload is too small.

If the maximum permissible drawbar loadcannot be met (e.g. with small, empty andlight-weight single axle trailers or tandemaxle trailers with a wheelbase of less than 1metre), a minimum of 4% of the actual trailerweight is legally required for the drawbarload.

WARNING● For safety reasons, you should not driveat speeds above 80 km/h (50 mph) whentowing a trailer. This also applies in coun-tries where higher speeds are permitted.● Never exceed the maximum trailerweights or the drawbar load. If the permis-sible axle load or the permissible totalweight is exceeded, the driving character-istics of the vehicle may change, leading toaccidents, injuries and damage to the vehi-cle.

Wheels

Tyre pressure, snow chains andwheel bolts

Tyre pressureThe sticker with the tyre pressure values canbe found on the back of the left front doorframe. The tyre pressure values given thereare for cold tyres. The slightly raised pres-sures of warm tyres must not be reduced.››› The pressure for winter tyresis 0.2 bar(2.9 psi / 20 kPa) higher than that of summertyres.

382


Snow chainsSnow chains may be fitted only to the frontwheels, and only for the following tyres:




Other dimensions do not allow chains

Wheel boltsAfter the wheels have been changed, thetightening torque of the wheel bolts should

be checked as soon as possible with a torquewrench ››› . The tightening torque for steeland alloy wheels is 140 Nm.

WARNING● Check the tyre pressure at least once permonth. Checking the tyre pressure is veryimportant. If the tyre pressure is too high ortoo low, there is an increased danger of ac-cidents - particularly at high speeds.● If the tightening torque of the wheel boltsis too low, they could loosen while the vehi-cle is in motion. Risk of accident! If thetightening torque is too high, the wheelbolts and threads can be damaged.

NoteWe recommend that you ask your Techni-cal Service for information about appropri-ate wheel, tyre and snow chain size.

383

Technical data

Engine data

Petrol engines

1.0 TSI Start-Stop 1.4 EcoTSI Start-Stop

Power output in kW (PS) at rpm 85 (115)/5,000-5,500 110 (150)/5,000-6,000

Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) 200/2,000-3,500 250/1,500-3,500

No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) 3/999 4/1,395

Fuel Sper 95 RON / Normal 91 (with a slight power loss) RON

Gearbox manual manual DSG manual 4Drive DSG 4Drive

Top speed (km/h) 183 (5) 201 (5) 198 (6) 192 (5) 189 (5)

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 7.2 5.9 6.0 6.0 5.9

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 11.0 8.5 8.6 9.0 8.9

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,830 1,900 1,920 2,000 2,010

Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,280 1,359 1,375 1,460 1,476

Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 940 970 990 1,000 1,010

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 940 980 980 1,050 1,050

Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 640 670 680 730 730

Weight of trailer with brakes on gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,500 1,850 1,800 1,950 1,950

Weight of trailer with brakes on gradients up to 12%(kg) 1,300 1,800 1,600 1,900 1,900

384


Petrol engines

1.5 TSI Start-Stop 2.0 TSI Start-Stop

Power output in kW (PS) at rpm a) 140 (190)/4,200-6,000

Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) a) 320/1,500-4,100

No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) a) 4/1,984

Fuel Sper 95 RON / Normal 91 (with a slight power loss) RON

Gearbox a) DSG 4Drive

Top speed (km/h) a) 212(5)

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) a) 5.2

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) a) 7.9

Maximum authorised weight (kg) a) 2,080

Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) a) 1,536

Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) a) 1,070

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) a) 1,060

Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) a) 750

Weight of trailer with brakes on gradients up to 8% (kg) a) 2,000

Weight of trailer with brakes on gradients up to 12% (kg) a) 1,900

a) Data not available as this edition goes to print.

385

Technical data

Diesel engines

1.6 TDI CR 2.0 TDI



No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) 4/1,598 4/1,968

Fuel Diesel according to standard EN 590, min. 51 CN

Gearbox manual DSG

Top speed (km/h) 184 (6) 192 (5)

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 8.2 6.4

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 11.5 9.2

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,910 1,970

Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,375 1,435

Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 1,030 1,080

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 930 940

Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 680 710

Weight of trailer with brakes on gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,700 1,900

Weight of trailer with brakes on gradients up to 12% (kg) 1,500 1,800

386


Diesel engines

2.0 TDI CR Start-Stop



No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) 4/1,968 4/1,968

Fuel Diesel according to standard EN 590, min. 51 CN

Gearbox manual manual 4Drive DSG DSG 4Drive

Top speed (km/h) 201 (6) 196 (6) 200 (6) 212 (6)

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 6.2 6.0 5.9 4.7

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 8.8 9.0 8.7 7.5

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,990 2,100 2,010 2,130

Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,453 1,548 1,483 1,589

Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 1,060 1,080 1,090 1,120

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 940 1,070 930 1,060

Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 700 750 720 750

Weight of trailer with brakes on gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,900 2,000 1,900 2,100

Weight of trailer with brakes on gradients up to 12% (kg) 1,900 2,000 1,900 2,100

387

Technical data

Dimensions

Fig. 314 Dimensions.

Fig. 315 Angles and ground clearance

388


››› Fig. 314, ››› Fig. 315 Ateca Ateca 4Drive

A Front projection (mm) 868 868

B Rear projection (mm) 857 865

C Wheelbase (mm) 2,638 2,630

D Length (mm) 4,363

E Fronta) track (mm) 1,576 1,572

F Backa) track (mm) 1,541 1,544

G Width (mm) 1,841

H Height at kerb weight (mm) 1,601b)

1,615c)1,611b)

1,625c)

I Ground clearance between the axles (mm) 176 189

J Front projection angle limited by the bumper maximum 19.4° maximum 20.6°

K Rear projection angle limited by the bumper maximum 27.9° maximum 25.5°

Turning radius (m) 10.8

a) This data will change depending on the type of wheel rim.b) Distance to the roof.c) Dimension to the roof bars.

389

Index

IndexNumbers and Symbols4Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

AABS

see Anti-lock brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250ACC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

radar sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169, 341Active cylinder management (ACT)

status indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110Adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

display indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286Adaptive Cruise Control

control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285deactivating temporarily . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291function for preventing overtaking in an in-

side lane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287radar sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286special driving situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291

AdBlueinformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346maximum filling capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346refilling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346tank capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346

AdjustVehicle menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Adjustingfront head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156rear head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Adjusting the head restraintsfront head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Adjustmentfront head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162rear head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Airbag covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22, 75

activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80deactivation of front airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23, 77functioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77head-protection airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25knee airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Air conditioningauxiliary heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43, 178heated windscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182manual air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46user instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

Air outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181Air recirculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181Alcantara suede: clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374Alternator

warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356AM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

Ambient lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157Android Auto™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200, 202Anti-freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49Anti-lock brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250Anti-puncture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 86Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 86

check after 10 minutes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88Anti-puncture set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86Anti-slip regulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250Anti-theft alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129, 139

trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335vehicle interior monitoring and anti-tow

protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141Anti-theft security system . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 129, 137Anti-theft system

trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335Anti-tow protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141Anti-trap function

sun blind (sunroof) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

AppSEAT Media Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

Apple CarPlay™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200, 202Area view system (Top View Camera)

special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325Aspects to note before setting off . . . . . . . . . . . . 64Assistance systems

ACC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284Adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284Auto Hold function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273blind spot detector (BSD) with parking as-

sistance (RCTA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299cruise control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124Emergency Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

391

Index

emergency braking assistance (Front As-sist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124fatigue detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114Hill Descent Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272Park Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307parking assistant (RCTA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299parking system Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316rear parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276Top View Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322traffic jam assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296traffic sign detection system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115tyre monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363tyre monitoring indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364tyre monitoring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362

Assisted starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60Audible warning signal

control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149unfastened safety belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Auto Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273Auto Hold function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273Auto Lock (central locking) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129Automatic

transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42Automatic car washes

switching the Auto Hold function off . . . . . . . 275Automatic car wash tunnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372Automatic dipped beam control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

downhill speed control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257emergency program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261kick-down feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

launch control program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259manual release of the selector lever . . . . . . . . 43safety interlock for ignition key . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241selector lever lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255selector lever positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254steering wheel with gear shift paddles . . . . 257tiptronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254, 257towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Automatic transmissioncontrol lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

AUX-IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239external audio source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

Auxiliary heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184activating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186electric consumers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187operating instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185remote control range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186special features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184things to note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

Average consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

BBattery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

replacement in the remote control (auxili-ary heater) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Before setting off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64Belt tensioners

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80Belt tightening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74Bench seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Bicycle rackfitting on the retractable tow hitch . . . . . . . . 334maximum load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334

Biodiesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345Blind spot detector (BSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299, 300

control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300driving situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302indication in the external rear view mirror . . 301malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304

Bluetooth®connect audio source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

Bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348, 350opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19, 348

Boot shelfstore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171store the shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354brake servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246electronic parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248emergency braking function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249new brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

Brake systemwarning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

Brakingfront assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

BSDsee Blind spot detector (BSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

BSD Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

392

Index

CCamera

cleanliness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118Lane Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293

Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48AdBlue tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346windscreen washer water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355

CCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41CD-ROM player (navigation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132anti-theft alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139central locking switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145emergency locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133Panoramic sliding/tilting sunroof . . . . . . . . . . 145remote control key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131selective unlocking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Central wheel trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56Centre console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14Cetane number (diesel fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

subsequent work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58Changing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

dipped beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99main beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98number plate light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101rear bulb in the side panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100rear light in the rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101turn signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Changing gearengaging gears (manual gearbox) . . . . . . . . 253

Changing the blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88Changing the wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62Charging the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357Checking levels

engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350Child-proof locking

electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144Child seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26, 83Child seats

categorisation into groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26, 82securing with seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27Top Tether system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28, 31, 32

Cleanwindscreen brushes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373

CleaningAlcantara suede . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374carbon fibre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373, 375cloth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374control panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374decorative sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374exhaust tail pipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373headlights / tail lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373high pressure cleaners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374paint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373plastic parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374sensors/camera lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373special care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375the radio screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374trims/covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373, 374

washing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374

Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44Clocks

analogue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118digital . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118set time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Closesunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19, 348rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141sun blind (sunroof) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Cloth: clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374Clutch (warning lamp) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261Coming Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153Coming Home function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153Communication between the Infotainment

system and mobile devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Full Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197SEAT Media Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204WLAN point of access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Connectivity Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239Control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40, 124

ABS anti-blocking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356applying the brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285ASR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250, 252

393

Index

audible warning signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124blind spot detector (BSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300brake systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247cruise control system (CCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275depress the brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280diesel preheating system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267EDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250electromechanical steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262emission control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267engine management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250, 252gear change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261handbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247Hill Descent Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40Lane Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149parking assistant (RCTA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342remote control (auxiliary heater) . . . . . . . . . . 185seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270steering column locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262tow hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254tyre monitoring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363

Control lampsengine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120Fuel reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119refuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Controls and displaysgeneral instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Controls for the windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19, 144Controls on the steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125Coolant

checking level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353Cooling system

checking coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353topping up coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353

Copyright . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209Correct position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65Correct sitting position

driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65front passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66rear seat passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41, 275control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

Cruise control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275Cylinder deactivation

see Active cylinder management (ACT) . . . 110

DDAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207Dangers in not using the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . 72Dashboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106Dash panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40Data label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381Data transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197Deactivating the front passenger front airbag . 24Deactivation of front airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79Defective bulbs

changing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Dieselengine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267preheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345

Diesel fuelparticulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

Digital instrumentpanel (SEAT Digital Cockpit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Digital SEAT Cockpitnavigation map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388Direction of rotation

tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107Display indications

adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286compass indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111driving recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276status of active cylinder management

(ACT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Display of traffic signs on the instrumentpanelactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Disposalbelt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Distance controlsee Adaptive Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

Door cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16Door handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16Door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

394

Index

Door release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105Doors

childproof locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Downhill speed control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260Downhill speed control function . . . . . . . . . . . . 260Drawer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166Drink holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167Driver

see Correct sitting position . . . . . . . . . 65, 66, 67Driver-side general instrument panel

left-hand drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10right-hand drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Drivingdriving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156driving through water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268economical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264safe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Driving abroadheadlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

Driving data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112Driving in winter

trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330Driving mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305Driving on flooded roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268Driving profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305DSG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254Duplicate keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130Dust and pollen filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178DVD

DVD video mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217Dynamic lights range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

EE10

see Ethanol (fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345Easy Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36Easy Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

things to note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136EDL

see Electronic differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . 250Electrical accessories

see Power socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19, 144

convenience opening and closing . . . . . . . . . 145Electromechanical steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262Electronic differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250Electronic immobiliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16Electronic self-locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . 250Electronic torque management (XDS) . . . . . . . 251Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86automatic gearbox emergency program . . 261bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55emergency towing of the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 59fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60manual unlocking and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88puncture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54replacing a blown fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53replacing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357vehicle tool kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Emergency Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297see Emergency Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298

Emergency braking assistance systemindications on the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283radar sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282switching off temporarily . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

Emergency braking function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249Emergency braking warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155Emergency operation

front passenger door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17selector lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Emission control systemcontrol lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

Engineassisted starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60noises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245preheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241running in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241starting up (driver messages with the me-

chanical contact) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241switching off (key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

Engine and ignitionautomatic ignition switch-off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243My Beat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246preheating the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244starting the engine with Press & Drive . . . . . 244stopping the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

395

Index

Engine breakdownControl lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348, 350battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51, 355brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50, 354coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49, 353engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48, 352opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19, 348safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348windscreen washer reservoir . . . . . . . . . . 50, 355

Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120G 12 plus-plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49G 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50temperature display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Engine data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384Engine management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48, 350

changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350, 352checking oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351inspection service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350maintenance intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49, 350topping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352

Engine oil pressurecontrol lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351

Environmentecological driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264environmental compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

Environmental tipsfilling the tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342

Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169, 341ESC

electronic stability control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . 250Multi-collision Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251Sport Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

Ethanol (fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377Exhaust purification system for vehicles with

diesel engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346Exiting a parking space with Park Assist . . . . . . 313Exterior lighting

changing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97Exterior mirrors

adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22driving with a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332

Exterior rear-view mirrorsadjusting the exterior rear-view mirrors . . . . . 161exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Exterior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8, 9External aerial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341

FFastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172Fatigue detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114Filling the tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69Fluid level control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48FM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207Fog

lights with cornering light function . . . . . . . . . 153Fog light bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Fog lights with cornering light function . . . . . . . 153Folding table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167Four-wheel drive

snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90winter tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

Frequency bandAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207DAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207FM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23, 77Front armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164Front Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

indications on the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280Front passenger front airbag

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80deactivation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Front seatsmanual adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48, 344consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

Fuel consumptionengine cut-off due to inertia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264Why does fuel consumption increase? . . . . 267

Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Fuel identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344396

Index

Fuel tank capopening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Fuel tank flapopening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Full-LED Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97Full Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

pairing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

Function buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193Function Leaving Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52, 93

fuse box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94, 95identifying blown fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53identifying by colours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52preparation before replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

GGear-change indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261Gearbox DSG

see Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254Gearbox lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42Gear change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253manual gear change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Gear engaged . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42Gear recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261Gear shift paddles (automatic gearbox) . . . . . 257General

instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108General instrument panel

control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40controls and displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350

Glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

HHandbrake

lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247see Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34, 154HDC

see Hill Descent Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272Head-on collisions and their laws of physics . . 72Head-protection airbags

description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Headlightschanging bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156headlight washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162Front head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68rear head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Headrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Heated rear window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45, 47Heated windscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182Heating and fresh air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46Hill Descent Control

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105How to jump start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

IIdentifying letters on the engine

show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32, 241Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32, 241

see Starter button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243Incorrect position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67Indications on the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

ACT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264ECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111Emergency braking assistance system

(Front Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280identifying letters of the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110SEAT Drive Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304selector lever positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254service intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121traffic signs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116tyre monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364warning and information messages . . . . . . . . 113

Indications on the screendoors, bonnet and rear lid open . . . . . . . . . . . 110Outside temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110positions of the selector lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110speed warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Inertia mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260Information profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108Infotainment knobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192Infotainment system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36, 188

CD player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212function buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193general instructions for use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191general panel of the device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190input mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195Jukebox (SSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214memory card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212on-screen keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

397

Index

text input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195update navigation data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

Infotainment SystemAUX-IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213Bluetooth® audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213changing the volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217general panel of the device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191Images main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218infotainment knobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192initial configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196Internet access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206memory buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208mute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219Radio mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207rotary knobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192scroll knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194scroll (display) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194search in lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194sharing a WLAN connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205standby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192station logos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208switch on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192Telephone mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213Vehicle menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231verification boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193WLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205WLAN audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350, 368Inspection service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350

Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107, 108control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107, 108display indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109instructions shown on the screen . . . . . . . . . . . 111instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107, 108service interval indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121structure of the menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111use with the multifunction steering wheel . . 123use with the windscreen wiper lever . . . . . . . 122

Instrument panel display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108, 109Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108Interference from a mobile telephone . . . . . . . . 192Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34Interior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15ISOFIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28, 30ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

JJack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55, 86

mounting points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57Journey data display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112Jukebox (SSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214Jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

KKey-operated switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79Keyless-Entry

see Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133Keyless-Exit

see Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133Keyless Access

Easy Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133Keyless-Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

Keyless-Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133Press & Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244unlocking and locking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . 133

Keyless Access locking and ignition systemsee Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

Keysassign key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130car key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130driver messages (mechanical contact) . . . . 241remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130replacing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137spare key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130synchronising . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138unlocking and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 131

Kick-downautomatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

Knee airbagsafety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

LLane Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293

Control and warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293Lane Assist system

see Lane Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293Launch control (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . . 259Leaving Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154Lifting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57Light Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151Lighting of the instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33, 149

audible signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149AUTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151changing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

398

Index

coming home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149cornering light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153daytime running lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150dipped beam headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157leaving home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154light control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149lighting of instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157lighting of the controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157lights range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156main beam lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150main beam lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149main beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34motorway light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155parking lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155reading lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157side lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33turn signal lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150welcome light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

Lights range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156Load compartment in the luggage compart-

mentsee Loading the luggage compartment . . . 170

Loading the luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . 170Loading the vehicle

fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177tailboard for transporting long items . . . . . . . 172trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336

Locking and unlockingin the door cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Locking the front passenger door manually . . . 17Luggage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

automatic locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143electric opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141luggage compartment lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . 157luggage compartment variable floor . . . . . . 174manual release mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18net bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171special characteristics of the electric rear

lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142see also Loading the luggage compart-

ment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170Luggage compartment floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174Luggage compartment variable floor . . . . . . . . 174Luggage net

luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173Lumbar support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

MMain beam assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151Main beam lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150Main panel

turn signal and main beam lever . . . . . . . . . . 150Maintenance

see Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368Maintenance intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350Malfunction

adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261emergency braking assistance system

(Front Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336

Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Manual release mechanismrear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Manual unlocking and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88Maximum trailer weight

loading the trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336Media

changing the Media source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209messages and symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210playback sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211playing modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

MEDIAcopyright . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Memory card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160MirrorLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201Mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341Mobile Signal Amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239Mobile telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341Motor

Start-Stop system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270Multi-collision Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251Multifunction display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112Multifunction steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125Multimedia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239My Beat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

NNavigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

change view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225entering the destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

399

Index

importing vCards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221messages and symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221my destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223Navigation with images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229Offroad navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229points of interest (POI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225predictive navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223select the destination on the map . . . . . . . . . 222split screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226traffic reports (TRAFFIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227updating and installing navigation data . . . 220

Navigation systemCD-ROM player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Net bagluggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Noisesadaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285auxiliary heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58, 359

Number of seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

OOctane rating (petrol) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

total . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107, 108trip recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107, 108

Offroad Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229Oil change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352Oil properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

One-touch opening and closingelectric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19, 348fuel tank flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141sun blind (sunroof) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 129bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19, 348by remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131fuel tank flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342in the door cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17rear lid with electric opening and closing . . 141sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144with the central locking switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Operating malfunctionPark Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Original SEAT Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370Outside temperature

display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110Overview

of the structure of the menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

PPanoramic sliding sunroof

convenience opening and closing . . . . . . . . . 145see also Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Park Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307automatic braking intervention . . . . . . . . . . . . 314automatic interruption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308

conditions for exiting a parking space . . . . . 313exiting a parking space (only for parallel

spaces) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313operating malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307parallel parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311parking conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311perpendicular parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311see Park Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307stopping prematurely . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308

Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249, 258with Park Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

Parking aidadjusting the display and audible warn-

ings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318, 322automatic activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317braking while manoeuvring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320driving with a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319, 322rear parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320sensors and camera: clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322visual indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318, 321

Parking aid systemsee Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314, 316, 320

Parking assistanceparking system plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316see Park Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307surroundings warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

Parking assistant (RCTA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299, 303control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300

Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248automatic activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248automatic release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

400

Index

emergency braking function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

Parking distance warning systemsee Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314, 316, 320

Parking (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257ParkPilot

see Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314, 316, 320Particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341Passenger

see Correct sitting position . . . . . . . . . 65, 66, 67Passenger-side instrument panel

left-hand drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12right-hand drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69Petrol

Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344Positioning seat belts

during pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169Power management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265Power socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335Power steering

see Electromechanical steering . . . . . . . . . . . 262Preheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241Preheating system

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267Preheating the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244Press & Drive

starter button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Products for vehicle maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . 371

Punctureaction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

RRacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168Radar sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282, 286Radio

changing frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207memorise station logos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208memory buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

RADIOinformation and icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

Radio-operated remote controlsee Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Radio DISPLAY: clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374Radio transmitters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341Rain sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

control of the function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160Raising the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57RCTA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303

see Parking assistant (RCTA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299Rear

headrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69Rear-view mirror

anti-dazzle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160interior anti-dazzle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Rear Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328

Rear Assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327Rear bulbs in the side panel

disassemble the rear light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100Rear fog light

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 18see also Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Rear lights in the rear liddisassemble the bulb holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Rear parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320Rear seat backrest

folding down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165folding down and lifting the backrest . . . . . . 165lifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Rear seat passengerssee Correct sitting position . . . . . . . . . 65, 66, 67

Rear View Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327Refuel

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

refuellingPetrol additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344

Refuellingopening fuel tank flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342

Remote control keyunlocking and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Remote control (auxiliary heater) . . . . . . . . . . . . 185replacing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Removing and attaching head restraints . . . . . 162Repair work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341Replacement

parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341Replacement parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341Replacing the battery

of the vehicle key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137Retaining hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173Retrofitting

towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

401

Index

Reverse Assistinstructions for use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328

Reverse gear (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . . . . 254Revolution counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107, 108, 118Rims

changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55Roll-back function

windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145Roof carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175Roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175Roof load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177Roof luggage rack

attach the cross bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175Rotary knobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192Running in

new brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246new engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263new tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358

SSafe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64Safelock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

see also Anti-theft security system . . . . . . . . 129Safety

child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81deactivating the front passenger airbag . . . 24safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Safety equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64Safety information

knee airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Safety instructionsbelt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75head-protection airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78use of seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71using child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26, 82

Safety interlock for ignition key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241Saving fuel

inertia mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260Seat belt position

for pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21, 73control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70protective function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70, 75safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71unfastened . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22, 74SEAT Digital Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

information profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108SEAT Drive Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304Seat heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163SEAT Media Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

data transmission and control functions . . 205Seats

adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162electric seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163rear seat backrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

SEAT Service Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370Selective catalytic reduction

see Exhaust purification system (diesel) . . . 346Selective unlocking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Selector lever lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255Selector lever (automatic gearbox)

malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255manual release mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

Serviceconditions of use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369Digital maintenance plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368fixed service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368flexible service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368oil change service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368Service receipt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368service work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368sets of services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370

Service interval indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112Service intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121Service intervals display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369Service Menu

identifying letters on the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 112restart oil service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112restart Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112service interval indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Service warning: check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121Set

time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118Side airbags

description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Signal lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34Sliding panoramic sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58, 383

four-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269402

Index

Spanner symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121Special characteristics

area view system (Top View Camera) . . . . . 325high-pressure cleaning devices . . . . . . . . . . . 334tow-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89, 90towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89trailer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337

Special featuresLowering the volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

Speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276display indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276operate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

Speed warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113Sport Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252SSD

see Jukebox (SSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214Stabilisation of the towing vehicle and trailer . 338Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270Start-Stop system

operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270switching off and on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272switch the engine off and on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Start-Stop Systemdriver instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270the engine does not switch off . . . . . . . . . . . . 270the engine starts by itself . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Starter button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241Starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32Steering

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262electromechanical steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262engaging the steering lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

Steering wheeladjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22, 66gear shift paddles (automatic gearbox) . . . 257

Storage areafront seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

Storage compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166, 168folding table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168glove compartment lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Storing objectstrailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330

Sun blindsanti-trap function (sunroof) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Sun protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

anti-trap function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147operating malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146sun blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158Switch

hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154Switch-off delay (Infotainment system) . . . . . . 192Switching off the engine

with the key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242Switching off the lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149Switching on the lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149Switching the ignition on and off . . . . . . . . . 32, 241

TTailboard for transporting long items . . . . . . . . . 172Tail lights

changing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Technical datacapacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355roof load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177vertical load on the coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330

Technical modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341Technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381Telephone

Bluetooth® profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234call lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238display and symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237enter telephone number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237general information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236pairing a mobile phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234places with special regulations . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Temperature displayof the engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Things to notetowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Tightening torque of wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . 383Time

adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Tiptronic (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . . . . 254, 257Top Tether . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28, 31, 32Top Tether system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28, 31, 32Top View Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322

see Top View Camera system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322Top View Camera system

Instructions for use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324

Total traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268Tow-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

403

Index

Tow-starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Tow hitchcontrol lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333electrical unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333

Towingblind spot detector (BSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304

Towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333also see Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331electrical unlocking tow hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333fitting a bicycle rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336retrofitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

Towing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59, 89, 90automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93four-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90front towing eye . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90rear towing eye . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89things to note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91tow bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90towing not allowed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90with towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Towline anchorages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59, 86Tow rope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332, 335Traffic Jam Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

malfunctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297situations in which Traffic Jam Assist must

be switched off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

Traffic sign detection system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116indication on the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116limited operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115speed warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117windscreen damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Traffic signsindication on the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330adjusting the headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337anti-theft alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335anti-theft system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332hooking up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336maximum trailer weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337, 382parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319, 322power socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335rear LED lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332, 335rear lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332, 335retrofitting a towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339stabilisation of the towing vehicle and trail-

er . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338technical requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332tow rope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332, 335trailer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337unlocking the electrical unlocking tow

hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333vertical load on the coupling . . . . . . . . 330, 336

Trailer modealso see towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330see Driving with a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330

Trailer weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382Transporting children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81Transporting items

fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172roof carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Transporting objectsloading the trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336net bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173retaining hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177tailboard for transporting long items . . . . . . . 172trailer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337

Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112Turn signal convenience function . . . . . . . . . . . . 150Turn signal lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150Tyre Mobility Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87inflating a tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87sealing a tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Tyre Mobility Systemsee Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Tyre monitoring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362tyre monitoring indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364

Tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359, 382Tyre profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360Tyre repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86Tyre repair kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

see also Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358

accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

404

Index

dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361interchanging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361new tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361repair kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86service life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359wear indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360with compulsory direction of rotation . . . . . . . 58with directional tread pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359

Tyre tread depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360Tyre wear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360

UUnfastening your seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73Unfasten the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21Unlocking and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

by remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131with Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133with the central locking switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239connecting an external data storage de-

vice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213USB/AUX-IN Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

VVanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158Vehicle

data label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381identification data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381identification number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381raising . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57unlocking and locking the vehicle with Key-

less Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133vehicle identification number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381

Vehicle battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51, 355assisted starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60charge level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357connecting and disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . 355disconnect and connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122power management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357winter conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355

Vehicle carewindscreen wipers service position . . . . . . . . . 62

Vehicle interior monitoring and anti-tow sys-tem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Vehicle maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371Vehicle paint

maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373Vehicle seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70Vehicle tool kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55, 86Ventilation slits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170Vertical load on the coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330Vertical load on the trailer coupling

loading the trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336

WWarning lamps

engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120Warning symbols

see Control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . 124Warning triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371Washing the vehicle

external vehicle maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371high pressure cleaners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371

sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307things to note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382Welcome light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154What negatively affects driving safety? . . . . . . 64Wheel balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359Wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383

anti-theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56caps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56loosening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57tightening torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362

Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358, 382central wheel trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55, 58new wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58temporary spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365

Wheel spanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86Wheel trim

removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56Windows

electric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19, 144Window wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158Window wiper blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35Windscreen

heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182windscreen and rear window wiper blades

changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Windscreen and rear window wiper blades . . . 88Windscreen washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50, 158Windscreen washer brushes

clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373

405

Index

Windscreen washer watercapacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355topping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355

Windscreen wiper and rear window wipersystemsservice position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35, 158functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159headlight washer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159heated windscreen washer jets . . . . . . . . . . . 159lifting the wiper blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62rain sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159replacing the wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62service position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158window wiper lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

Winter conditionsbattery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366

Winter drivingsunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Winter operationheadlight washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159heated windscreen washer jets . . . . . . . . . . . 159salt on the roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Winter tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366four-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

Wireless Charger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239WLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

connecting an external audio source . . . . . . 216

XXDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

406

SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to understand, that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason no right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook.All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error or omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print.Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form.SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the “Copyright” Act.All rights on changes are reserved.

❀ This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose.

© SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.07.18


Model:

Vehicle Registration:

Vehicle identification number:

Date of vehicle registration or vehicle delivery:

SEAT Official Service:

Service advisor:

Telephone:

Confirmation of receipt of documentation and vehicle keys

The following items were delivered with the vehicle: YES NO

On-board documentation

First key

Second key

Correct working order of all keys was checked

Location: Date:

Signature of owner:

Owner’s manualSEAT Ateca

575012720BG

Ingl

és 5

7501

2720

BG (

07.18

)

SEA

T A

teca

Ing

lés

(07.

18)

owner’s manual ateca seat ateca seat · 2018-07-13 · introduction thank you for your trust...

Documents